Loading...
HomeMy WebLinkAboutB14-0048 project manual APPROVED PROJECT MANUAL Mountain Haus Boiler Replacement 100% DD/Permit Project No: 3544.20 Vail's Mountain Haus at The Covered Bridge 292 East Meadow Dr. Vail, CO 81657 PREPARED FOR: Vail's Mountain Haus March 18, 2014 TABLE OF CONTENTS 354420ML01SMW – Boiler Efficiency Letter DIVISION 22 - PLUMBING SECTION 22 0010 - PLUMBING GENERAL PROVISIONS SECTION 22 1116 - DOMESTIC WATER PIPING SECTION 22 1119 - DOMESTIC WATER PIPING SPECIALTIES SECTION 22 1123 - DOMESTIC WATER PUMPS SECTION 22 1223 - FACILITY INDOOR POTABLE-WATER STORAGE TANKS DIVISION 23 - HEATING, VENTILATING, AND AIR-CONDITIONING(HVAC) SECTION 23 0010 - MECHANICAL GENERAL PROVISIONS SECTION 23 0050 - BASIC MATERIALS AND METHODS FOR HVAC SECTION 23 0517 - SLEEVES AND SLEEVE SEALS FOR HVAC PIPING SECTION 23 0519 - METERS AND GAGES FOR HVAC PIPING SECTION 23 0521 - THERMOMETERS AND PRESSURE GAUGES SECTION 23 0523 - GENERAL-DUTY VALVES FOR HVAC PIPING SECTION 23 0529 - HANGERS AND SUPPORTS FOR HVAC PIPING AND EQUIPMENT SECTION 23 0553 - IDENTIFICATION FOR HVAC PIPING AND EQUIPMENT SECTION 23 0593 - TESTING, ADJUSTING, AND BALANCING FOR HVAC SECTION 23 0711 - MECHANICAL INSULATION SECTION 23 0900 - INSTRUMENTATION AND CONTROL FOR HVAC SECTION 23 0923 - VARIABLE-FREQUENCY DRIVES SECTION 23 2113 - HYDRONIC PIPING SECTION 23 2123 - HYDRONIC PUMPS SECTION 23 2516 - HVAC WATER TREATMENT FOR CLOSED LOOP SYSTEMS SECTION 23 5100 - BREECHINGS, CHIMNEYS, AND STACKS SECTION 23 5223 - CAST-IRON BOILERS DIVISION 26 - ELECTRICAL SECTION 26 0010 - ELECTRICAL GENERAL PROVISIONS SECTION 26 0519 - LOW-VOLTAGE ELECTRICAL POWER CONDUCTORS AND CABLES SECTION 26 0526 - GROUNDING AND BONDING FOR ELECTRICAL SYSTEMS SECTION 26 0529 - HANGERS AND SUPPORTS FOR ELECTRICAL SYSTEMS SECTION 26 0533 - RACEWAYS AND BOXES FOR ELECTRICAL SYSTEMS SECTION 26 0553 - IDENTIFICATION FOR ELECTRICAL SYSTEMS SECTION 26 2200 - LOW-VOLTAGE TRANSFORMERS SECTION 26 2413 - SWITCHBOARDS SECTION 26 2416 - PANELBOARDS SECTION 26 2726 - WIRING DEVICES SECTION 26 2816 - ENCLOSED SWITCHES AND CIRCUIT BREAKERS 110 E. Beaver Creek Boulevard, Suite 202, P.O. Box 9650, Avon, CO 81620 • p. 970.949.6108 • f. 970.949.6159 VAIL 1626 Cole Boulevard, Suite 300, Building 7, Lakewood, CO 80401 • p. 303.278.3820 • f. 303.278.3843 DENVER 251 Linden Street, Suite 200, Fort Collins, CO 80524 • p. 970.221.5691 • f. 970.221.5697 FORT COLLINS 7007 Wyoming NE, Suite F-2, Albuquerque, NM 87109 • p. 505.323.9070 • f. 505.323.9075 ALBUQUERQUE ALBUQUERQUE DENVER FORT COLLINS VAIL www.bgce.com March 18th, 2014 Mr. Martin Haeberle Chief Building Official Town of Vail 75 S. Frontage Road Vail CO, 81657 RE: Mountain Haus Boiler Replacement– Project #3544.20 Dear Martin: This letter is in regard to the proposed replacement of the Mountain Haus central plant boilers A, and B. Section 403.6 in the adopted Town of Vail Ordinance No. 18 requires all boilers installed in the Town “shall have a minimum efficiency of ninety-two percent (92%) AFUE”. We understand the intent of the code is to achieve reduced energy consumption and increased energy efficiency. Although the three (3) proposed replacement boilers are non-condensing and consequently fall short of the stated efficiency requirement, we feel the proposed replacement boiler solution is in alignment with the intent of the code. The existing Sellers Engineering Corp cast iron boilers have listed efficiencies of 80%. These boilers have been in service for several decades and have reached the end of their service life. Based on the age of the boilers, their current efficiency is estimated to be considerably less than the original listing. The proposed boiler replacement consists of three (3) forced draft Peerless TCII-11 boilers rated at 83.5% efficiency. To meet the capacity expectations as well as provide redundancy, three boilers would be used. Proposed staging control combined with boiler modulation and the higher boiler efficiency is anticipated to result in a notable reduction in energy consumption compared to the existing installation. Boiler efficiencies above 86% are achievable using condensing boiler technology employed in a low temperature heating water system, wherein the boiler incoming water temperature (boiler return) is below 140°F (typical condensing point). As the boiler incoming temperature decreases below 140°F, boiler efficiency gradually increases. Although the efficiency curve for each boiler is slightly different, 92% efficiency is generally associated with a return water temperature of approximately 110°F. The existing heating water system serves all space heat loads, spa and pool loads, domestic hot water loads, and restaurant domestic hot water loads throughout the facility. The coils, heating water distribution piping, domestic hot water heat exchangers, and baseboard heaters throughout the facility have been designed for a high temperature heating water system with boiler return www.bgce.com temperatures around 160°F, well above the return temperatures required to increase efficiencies in condensing boilers. Based on years of operational experience to achieve desired heating performance, the system is operated at a supply boiler water temperature of 180°F (resulting in a return water temperature of about 160°F). These supply and return temperatures have been proven necessary to meet the building demand, and cannot be altered without an extensive system overhaul. Additionally, spatial constraints within the mechanical room do not allow for the required domestic water heat exchanger capacities needed for a low temperature heating water system. Since high efficiency condensing boilers would not yield efficiencies of 92% AFUE in this conventional high temperature application, we feel the proposed boiler solution aligns with the intent of the code since it both increases boiler efficiency and provides redundancy to the facility’s heating and domestic hot water system. If you have any questions or comments, or if you need additional information, please call. Sincerely, Dan Koelliker, PE Principal Encl: Peerless TCII-11 Product Data Peerless®Boilers Series TCII™ Large Commercial Boilers All commercial cast iron boilers include a full one-year warranty. A limited, ten-year warranty is provided on the cast iron sections for all commercial hot water and steam boilers. Visit PeerlessBoilers.com for complete details. Standard Equipment >High Efficiency Power Burners* >Burner Mounting Plate with Insulation Block >Front and Rear Observation Port >Graphite Port Connectors >Insulated Enameled Steel Jacket >Cast Iron Flue Collector with Integral Damper >Manual Reset, Limit Control >Tankless Coils—For Domestic Hot Water *Choice of Beckett, Carlin, Power Flame or Riello Series TCII™Boiler Features ■Redesigned for Higher Efficiencies! ■Equipped with Balanced Return Temperature (Water Boilers) ■Constructed of Rugged, Cast Iron, Wet-Base Sections ■Oil, Gas or Combination Gas/Oil-fired for Hot Water or Steam Systems ■15 Sizes, 4–18 Sections—Ideal for Large Commercial Applications ■Forced Draft Firing for the Highest Possible Efficiencies Balanced Return Temperature Technology (For Hot Water Boilers) ■Simplest, Most Effective Method to Reduce or Eliminate Stress Failures in Cast Iron Boilers ■Installation Requires No Additional Controls, Pumps or Piping! ■Easy to Install; Fits into Upper Flow Port ■Completely Self-adjusting and Sized for a Specific TCII™Boiler Model Boiler Piping (Steam) Boiler Model Number Number of 5" NPT Risers Header Size (NPT) Equalizer Size (NPT) TCII-04 & TCII-05 1 5"2-1/2" TCII-06 & TCII-07 2 5"2-1/2" TCII-08 to TCII-10 2 6"4" TCII-11 to TCII-18 3 8"4" Boiler Piping (Water) Boiler Model Number Supply & Return Size TCII-04 & TCII-05 3" TCII-06 to TCII-09 4" TCII-10 to TCII-18 5" Te c h n i c a l I n f o r m a t i o n Steam Piping Water Piping Note: Low-High-Low or Modulation Firing consult the factory. Your representative should be consulted before selecting boilers for installation having unusual piping and pick-up requirements, such as intermittent system operation, extensive piping systems, etc. For forced hot water heating systems where the boiler and all the piping are within the area to be heated, the boiler may be selected on the basis of its Gross Output. Burner Specifications Boiler Model Number Burners – Light Oil Burners – Gas Burners – Gas/Oil Beckett Carlin Power Flame Riello Beckett Power Flame Riello Power Flame Riello Model No.H.P. Model No.H.P. Model No.H.P. Model No.H.P. Model No.H.P. Model No.H.P. Model No.H.P. Model No.H.P. Model No.H.P. TCII-04 CF1400 1/2 702CRD 1/2 C1 1/2 RL28/2 1/2 CG15 1/2 J50A 1/3 RS28 1/2 C1 1/2 RLS28 1/2 TCII-05 CF2300 3/4 702CRD 1/2 C1 1/2 RL38/2 1/2 CG25 3/4 J50A 1/2 RS38 1/2 C1 1/2 RLS38 1/2 TCII-06 CF2300 3/4 801CRD 3/4 C2 1 RL50/2 3/4 CG25 3/4 J50A 1/2 RS50 3/4 C2 1 RLS50 3/4 TCII-07 CF2300 3/4 801CRD 3/4 C2 1 RL50/2 3/4 CG25 3/4 J50A 1/2 RS50 3/4 C2 1 RLS50 3/4 TCII-08 CF2500 3/4 801CRD 3/4 C2 1 RL70/2 1-1/2 CG25 3/4 C2 3/4 RS70 1-1/2 C2 1 RLS70 1-1/2 TCII-09 CF2500 3/4 1050FFD 1 C2 1-1/2 RL70/2 1-1/2 CG50 2 C2 1 RS70 1-1/2 C2 1-1/2 RLS70 1-1/2 TCII-10 CF2500 2 1050FFD 1 C2 1-1/2 RL100/M 2-1/2 CG50 2 C2 1 RS100/M 2-1/2 C2 1-1/2 RLS100 2-1/2 TCII-11 CF3500 2 1150FFD 1-1/2 C3 2 RL100/M 2-1/2 CG50 2 C3 1-1/2 RS100/M 2-1/2 C3 2 RLS100 2-1/2 TCII-12 CF3500 2 1150FFD 1-1/2 C3 2 RL100/M 2-1/2 CG50 2 C3 1-1/2 RS100/M 2-1/2 C3 2 RLS100 2-1/2 TCII-13 CF3500 2 1150FFD 1-1/2 C3 2 RL100/M 2-1/2 CG50 2 C3 1-1/2 RS100/M 2-1/2 C3 2 RLS100 2-1/2 TCII-14 ————C3 2 RL100/M 2-1/2 ——C3 1-1/2 RS100/M 2-1/2 C3 2 RLS100 2-1/2 TCII-15 ————C3 3 RL130/M 3 ——C3 3 RS130/M 3 C3 3 RLS130 3 TCII-16 ————C3 3 RL130/M 3 ——C3 3 RS130/M 3 C3 3 RLS130 3 TCII-17 ————C4 3 RL130/M 3 ——C4 3 RS130/M 3 C4 3 RLS130 3 TCII-18 ————C4 5 RL190/M 5-1/2 ——C4 3 RS190/M 5 C4 5 —— 1Add 2 3/4" (70 mm) to TCII-17 & TCII-18 for flue outlet adapter. Te c h n i c a l I n f o r m a t i o n SIDE VIEW REAR VIEW Note Y: 1-1/2" Inspection tappings when ordered. Note Z: Tankless heater sections when ordered. Boiler Dimensions Boiler Model Number Overall Length – “A”¹ (inch) Optional Packaged Base Dimension "K" (inch) Firebox Length "B" (inch) Boiler Length "C" (inch) Riser Tapping Locations Dia. Vent Conn. "G" (inch) Height Vent Conn. "H" (inch) Base Height "J" (inch)Beckett Carlin Power Flame “D” (inch) “E” (inch) “F” (inch) TCII-04 64-1/4 62-1/4 71-3/4 91-1/4 23-5/16 33 12.5 ——10 57.625 6 TCII-05 72-1/4 70-1/4 83-1/4 104-1/4 31-5/16 41 20.5 ——10 57.625 6 TCII-06 80-1/4 80-1/4 91-1/4 112-1/4 39-5/16 49 12.5 16 —10 57.625 6 TCII-07 88-3/4 88-1/4 99-1/4 120-1/2 47-5/16 57 12.5 24 —12 56.625 6 TCII-08 96-3/4 96-1/4 107-1/4 128-1/2 55-5/16 65 12.5 32 —12 56.625 6 TCII-09 104-3/4 108-3/4 115-1/4 136-1/2 63-5/16 73 12.5 40 —14 55.625 6 TCII-10 116-1/2 116-3/4 128-1/4 144-3/4 71-5/16 81 20.5 40 —14 55.625 6 TCII-11 124-1/2 125-1/4 137-1/4 157-3/4 79-5/16 89 20.5 24 24 14 55.625 6 TCII-12 132-1/2 133-1/4 145-1/4 166-1/4 87-5/16 97 20.5 24 32 14 55.625 6 TCII-13 N/A 141-1/4 153-1/4 173-3/4 95-5/16 105 20.5 32 32 14 55.625 6 TCII-14 N/A 149-1/4 161-1/4 181-3/4 103-5/16 113 20.5 32 40 16 54.625 6 TCII-15 N/A N/A 169-1/4 189-7/8 111-5/16 121 20.5 40 40 16 54.625 8 TCII-16 N/A N/A 177-1/4 198-1/4 119-5/16 129 20.5 48 40 16 54.625 8 TCII-17 N/A N/A 191-1/4 211-1/4 127-5/16 137 20.5 48 48 18 54.625 8 TCII-18 N/A N/A 199-1/4 219-1/4 135-5/16 145 20.5 56 48 18 54.625 8 PeerlessBoilers.comPrinted on Recycled Paper Technical Information CUT-TCII R1 (9/12-3M) Printed in U.S.A. ©2012 PB Heat, LLC. All rights reserved. R Note: Consult factory before selecting a boiler for installations having unusual piping and pickup requirements, such as intermittent system operation, extensive piping systems, etc. 1Light oil having a heat content of 140,000 BTU/Gal. 2Gas having a heat content of 1,000 BTU/Cu. Ft., 0.60 specific gravity. 3Combustion and thermal efficiency determined in accordance with BTS 2000 Testing Standard for Heating Boilers. 4Net water ratings are based on an allowance of 1.15. Net steam ratings are based on piping and pick-up factors as follows: 4-5 section = 1.333; 6-7 sections = 1.305; 8-18 sections = 1.288. CONTROL LOCATIONS (Water Boiler) CONTROL LOCATIONS (Steam Boiler) INTERMEDIATE SECTION Boiler Ratings Series TCII™ Boiler Model Number Oil Input¹Gas Input², MBH Gross Output MBH NET4 Oil Gas Steam Water, MBH Combustion Efficiency4, % Thermal Efficiency4, % Combustion Efficiency4, % Thermal Efficiency4, %GPH MBH sqft MBH TCII-04 TCII-05 TCII-06 7.9 10.2 12.2 1,106 1,428 1,708 1,143 1,458 1,773 931 1,194 1,458 2,908 3,733 4,625 698 896 1,110 810 1,038 1,268 86.2 86.2 86.1 83.9 84.4 84.8 83.6 83.6 83.5 81.4 81.9 82.2 TCII-07 TCII-08 TCII-09 14.4 16.6 18.8 2,016 2,324 2,632 2,088 2,403 2,718 1,722 1,985 2,249 5,542 6,421 7,275 1,330 1,541 1,745 1,497 1,726 1,956 86.1 86.1 86.1 85.0 85.2 85.3 83.5 83.5 83.5 82.5 82.6 82.7 TCII-10 TCII-11 TCII-12 21.0 23.0 25.5 2,940 3,220 3,570 3,033 3,348 3,663 2,513 2,776 3,040 8,129 8,979 9,833 1,951 2,155 2,360 2,185 2,414 2,643 86.1 86.0 86.0 85.4 85.5 85.6 83.5 83.5 83.5 82.8 82.9 83.0 TCII-13 TCII-14 TCII-15 27.5 29.5 32.0 3,850 4,130 4,480 3,978 4,293 4,608 3,304 3,567 3,831 10,688 11,538 12,392 2,565 2,769 2,974 2,873 3,102 3,331 86.0 86.0 86.0 85.6 85.7 85.7 83.5 83.5 83.4 83.0 83.1 83.1 TCII-16 TCII-17 TCII-18 34.0 36.5 38.5 4,760 5,110 5,390 4,923 5,238 5,553 4,095 4,358 4,622 13,246 14,100 14,954 3,179 3,384 3,589 3,561 3,790 4,019 86.0 86.0 86.0 85.7 85.8 85.8 83.4 83.4 83.4 83.2 83.2 83.2 Boiler H.P. Water Content, gal Furnace Volume, cuft Water Working Weight, lbs. Heating Surface, sqftWaterSteam 28 36 44 123.4 150.3 177.2 103.8 125.8 147.8 12.04 16.14 20.24 4,215 5,038 5,861 81.2 105.3 129.4 51 59 67 204.1 231.0 257.9 169.8 191.8 213.8 24.34 28.44 32.54 6,684 7,507 8,331 153.5 177.6 201.7 75 83 91 284.8 311.7 338.6 235.8 257.8 279.8 36.64 40.74 44.84 9,169 9,992 10,815 225.8 249.9 274.0 99 107 114 365.5 392.4 419.3 301.8 323.8 345.8 48.94 53.04 57.14 11,649 12,467 13,511 289.1 322.2 346.3 122 130 138 446.2 473.1 500.0 367.8 389.8 411.8 61.24 65.34 69.44 14,375 15,239 16,103 370.4 394.5 418.6 Note X: Flue cleanout opening. Allow 36" clear work space for using flue brush. Note Y: 1-1/2" Inspection tappings when ordered. FRONT VIEW (Steam Boiler) Mountain Haus Boiler Replacement 03/18/2014 100% CD's/Permit PLUMBING GENERAL PROVISIONS 22 0010 - 1 SECTION 22 0010 - PLUMBING GENERAL PROVISIONS PART 1 GENERAL 1.01 RELATED DOCUMENTS A. Refer to specification section 23 0010 “Mechanical General Provisions” for this division. B. Refer to specification section 23 0050 “Basic Materials and Methods for HVAC" for requirements of Basic Materials and Methods for Plumbing. C. Refer to specification section 23 0517 "Sleeves and Sleeve Seals for HVAC Piping” for requirements of Sleeves and Sleeve Seals for Plumbing piping. D. Refer to specification section 23 051 "Escutcheons for HVAC Piping” for requirements of Escutcheons for Plumbing piping. E. Refer to specification section 23 0521 "Meters and Gauges” for requirements of Meters and Gauges for Plumbing piping. F. Refer to specification section 23 0523 "General Duty Valves for HVAC piping” for requirements of General Duty Valves for Plumbing piping. G. Refer to specification section 23 0529 "Hangers and Supports for HVAC piping and equipment” for requirements of Hangers and Supports for Plumbing piping and equipment. H. Refer to specification section 23 0553 "Identification for HVAC piping and equipment” for requirements of Identification for Plumbing piping and equipment. I. Refer to specification section 23 0711 "Mechanical Insulations” for requirements of Plumbing equipment insulation. J. Refer to specification section 23 0711 "Mechanical Insulations” for requirements of Plumbing piping insulation. END OF SECTION 22 0010 Mountain Haus Boiler Replacement 03/18/2014 100% CD's/Permit DOMESTIC WATER PIPING 22 1116 - 1 SECTION 22 1116 - DOMESTIC WATER PIPING PART 1 GENERAL 1.01 RELATED DOCUMENTS A. Drawings and general provisions of the Contract, including General and Supplementary Conditions and Division 01 Specification Sections, apply to this Section. 1.02 SUMMARY A. Section Includes: 1. Under-building-slab and aboveground domestic water pipes, tubes, and fittings inside buildings. 2. Encasement for piping. 1.03 ACTION SUBMITTALS A. Product Data: For transition fittings and dielectric fittings. 1.04 INFORMATIONAL SUBMITTALS A. System purging and disinfecting activities report. PART 2 PRODUCTS 2.01 PIPING MATERIALS A. Comply with requirements in "Piping Schedule" Article for applications of pipe, tube, fitting materials, and joining methods for specific services, service locations, and pipe sizes. B. Potable-water piping and components shall comply with NSF 14 and NSF 61. Plastic piping components shall be marked with "NSF-pw." 2.02 COPPER TUBE AND FITTINGS A. Hard Copper Tube: ASTM B 88, Type L water tube, drawn temper. B. Wrought-Copper, Solder-Joint Fittings: ASME B16.22, wrought-copper pressure fittings. C. Bronze Flanges: ASME B16.24, Class 150, with solder-joint ends. D. Copper Unions: 1. MSS SP-123. 2. Ball-and-socket, metal-to-metal seating surfaces. 3. Solder-joint or threaded ends. E. Copper-Tube, Extruded-Tee Connections: 1. Manufacturers: Subject to compliance with requirements, provide products by the following: a. T-Drill Industries Inc. 2. Description: Tee formed in copper tube according to ASTM F 2014. a. Shurjoint Piping Products. b. Star Pipe Products. c. Victaulic Company. Mountain Haus Boiler Replacement 03/18/2014 100% CD's/Permit DOMESTIC WATER PIPING 22 1116 - 2 2.03 PIPING JOINING MATERIALS A. Pipe-Flange Gasket Materials: 1. AWWA C110/A21.10, rubber, flat face, 1/8 inch thick or ASME B16.21, nonmetallic and asbestos free unless otherwise indicated. 2. Full-face or ring type unless otherwise indicated. B. Metal, Pipe-Flange Bolts and Nuts: ASME B18.2.1, carbon steel unless otherwise indicated. C. Solder Filler Metals: ASTM B 32, lead-free alloys. D. Flux: ASTM B 813, water flushable. E. Brazing Filler Metals: AWS A5.8/A5.8M, BCuP Series, copper-phosphorus alloys for general-duty brazing unless otherwise indicated. 2.04 DIELECTRIC FITTINGS A. General Requirements: Assembly of copper alloy and ferrous materials with separating nonconductive insulating material. Include end connections compatible with pipes to be joined. B. Dielectric Flanges: 1. Manufacturers: Subject to compliance with requirements, provide products by one of the following: a. Matco-Norca. b. Watts; a division of Watts Water Technologies, Inc. c. Wilkins; a Zurn company. 2. Standard: ASSE 1079. 3. Factory-fabricated, bolted, companion-flange assembly. 4. Pressure Rating: 125 psig minimum at 180 deg F. 5. End Connections: Solder-joint copper alloy and threaded ferrous; threaded solder-joint copper alloy and threaded ferrous. C. Dielectric-Flange Insulating Kits: 1. Manufacturers: Subject to compliance with requirements, provide products by one of the following: a. Advance Products & Systems, Inc. b. Calpico, Inc. c. Central Plastics Company. d. Pipeline Seal and Insulator, Inc. e. . 2. Nonconducting materials for field assembly of companion flanges. 3. Pressure Rating: 150 psig. 4. Gasket: Neoprene or phenolic. 5. Bolt Sleeves: Phenolic or polyethylene. 6. Washers: Phenolic with steel backing washers. D. Dielectric Nipples: 1. Manufacturers: Subject to compliance with requirements, provide products by one of the following: a. Matco-Norca. b. Precision Plumbing Products, Inc. c. Victaulic Company. 2. Standard: IAPMO PS 66. 3. Electroplated steel nipple complying with ASTM F 1545. 4. Pressure Rating and Temperature: 300 psig at 225 deg F. 5. End Connections: Male threaded or grooved. 6. Lining: Inert and noncorrosive, propylene. Mountain Haus Boiler Replacement 03/18/2014 100% CD's/Permit DOMESTIC WATER PIPING 22 1116 - 3 PART 3 EXECUTION 3.01 PIPING INSTALLATION A. Drawing plans, schematics, and diagrams indicate general location and arrangement of domestic water piping. Indicated locations and arrangements are used to size pipe and calculate friction loss, expansion, and other design considerations. Install piping as indicated unless deviations to layout are approved on coordination drawings. B. Install copper tubing under building slab according to CDA's "Copper Tube Handbook." C. Install shutoff valve, hose-end drain valve, strainer, pressure gage, and test tee with valve inside the building at each domestic water-service entrance. Comply with requirements for pressure gages in Section 220519 "Meters and Gages for Plumbing Piping" and with requirements for drain valves and strainers in Section 221119 "Domestic Water Piping Specialties." D. Install shutoff valve immediately upstream of each dielectric fitting. E. Install water-pressure-reducing valves downstream from shutoff valves. Comply with requirements for pressure-reducing valves in Section 221119 "Domestic Water Piping Specialties." F. Install domestic water piping level with 0.25 percent slope downward toward drain and plumb. G. Install piping concealed from view and protected from physical contact by building occupants unless otherwise indicated and except in equipment rooms and service areas. H. Install piping indicated to be exposed and piping in equipment rooms and service areas at right angles or parallel to building walls. Diagonal runs are prohibited unless specifically indicated otherwise. I. Install piping above accessible ceilings to allow sufficient space for ceiling panel removal, and coordinate with other services occupying that space. J. Install piping to permit valve servicing. K. Install nipples, unions, special fittings, and valves with pressure ratings the same as or higher than the system pressure rating used in applications below unless otherwise indicated. L. Install piping free of sags and bends. M. Install fittings for changes in direction and branch connections. N. Install unions in copper tubing at final connection to each piece of equipment, machine, and specialty. O. Install pressure gages on suction and discharge piping for each plumbing pump and packaged booster pump. Comply with requirements for pressure gages in Section 220519 "Meters and Gages for Plumbing Piping." P. Install thermostats in hot-water circulation piping. Comply with requirements for thermostats in Section 221123 "Domestic Water Pumps." Q. Install thermometers on outlet piping from each water heater. Comply with requirements for thermometers in Section 220519 "Meters and Gages for Plumbing Piping." R. Install sleeves for piping penetrations of walls, ceilings, and floors. Comply with requirements for sleeves specified in Section 220517 "Sleeves and Sleeve Seals for Plumbing Piping." S. Install sleeve seals for piping penetrations of concrete walls and slabs. Comply with requirements for sleeve seals specified in Section 220517 "Sleeves and Sleeve Seals for Plumbing Piping." Mountain Haus Boiler Replacement 03/18/2014 100% CD's/Permit DOMESTIC WATER PIPING 22 1116 - 4 T. Install escutcheons for piping penetrations of walls, ceilings, and floors. Comply with requirements for escutcheons specified in Section 220518 "Escutcheons for Plumbing Piping." 3.02 JOINT CONSTRUCTION A. Ream ends of pipes and tubes and remove burrs. Bevel plain ends of steel pipe. B. Remove scale, slag, dirt, and debris from inside and outside of pipes, tubes, and fittings before assembly. C. Brazed Joints for Copper Tubing: Comply with CDA's "Copper Tube Handbook," "Brazed Joints" chapter. D. Soldered Joints for Copper Tubing: Apply ASTM B 813, water-flushable flux to end of tube. Join copper tube and fittings according to ASTM B 828 or CDA's "Copper Tube Handbook." E. Extruded-Tee Connections: Form tee in copper tube according to ASTM F 2014. Use tool designed for copper tube; drill pilot hole, form collar for outlet, dimple tube to form seating stop, and braze branch tube into collar. F. Flanged Joints: Select appropriate asbestos-free, nonmetallic gasket material in size, type, and thickness suitable for domestic water service. Join flanges with gasket and bolts according to ASME B31.9. G. Joints for Dissimilar-Material Piping: Make joints using adapters compatible with materials of both piping systems. 3.03 DIELECTRIC FITTING INSTALLATION A. Install dielectric fittings in piping at connections of dissimilar metal piping and tubing. B. Dielectric Fittings for NPS 2 and Smaller: Use dielectric nipples. C. Dielectric Fittings for NPS 2-1/2 to NPS 4: Use dielectric flanges. 3.04 HANGER AND SUPPORT INSTALLATION A. Comply with requirements for seismic-restraint devices in Section 220548 "Vibration and Seismic Controls for Plumbing Piping and Equipment." B. Comply with requirements for pipe hanger, support products, and installation in Section 220529 "Hangers and Supports for Plumbing Piping and Equipment." 1. Vertical Piping: MSS Type 8 or 42, clamps. 2. Individual, Straight, Horizontal Piping Runs: a. 100 Feet and Less: MSS Type 1, adjustable, steel clevis hangers. b. Longer Than 100 Feet: MSS Type 43, adjustable roller hangers. c. Longer Than 100 Feet if Indicated: MSS Type 49, spring cushion rolls. 3. Multiple, Straight, Horizontal Piping Runs 100 Feet or Longer: MSS Type 44, pipe rolls. Support pipe rolls on trapeze. 4. Base of Vertical Piping: MSS Type 52, spring hangers. C. Support vertical piping and tubing at base and at each floor. D. Rod diameter may be reduced one size for double-rod hangers, to a minimum of 3/8 inch. E. Install hangers for copper tubing with the following maximum horizontal spacing and minimum rod diameters: 1. NPS 3/4 and Smaller: 60 inches with 3/8-inch rod. 2. NPS 1 and NPS 1-1/4: 72 inches with 3/8-inch rod. 3. NPS 1-1/2 and NPS 2: 96 inches with 3/8-inch rod. 4. NPS 2-1/2: 108 inches with 1/2-inch rod. Mountain Haus Boiler Replacement 03/18/2014 100% CD's/Permit DOMESTIC WATER PIPING 22 1116 - 5 5. NPS 3 to NPS 5: 10 feet with 1/2-inch rod. 6. NPS 6: 10 feet with 5/8-inch rod. 7. NPS 8: 10 feet with 3/4-inch rod. F. Install supports for vertical copper tubing every 10 feet. G. Install hangers for steel piping with the following maximum horizontal spacing and minimum rod diameters: 1. NPS 1-1/4 and Smaller: 84 inches with 3/8-inch rod. 2. NPS 1-1/2: 108 inches with 3/8-inch rod. 3. NPS 2: 10 feet with 3/8-inch rod. 4. NPS 2-1/2: 11 feet with 1/2-inch rod. 5. NPS 3 and NPS 3-1/2: 12 feet with 1/2-inch rod. 6. NPS 4 and NPS 5: 12 feet with 5/8-inch rod. 7. NPS 6: 12 feet with 3/4-inch rod. 8. NPS 8 to NPS 12: 12 feet with 7/8-inch rod. H. Install supports for vertical steel piping every 15 feet. I. Install hangers for stainless-steel piping with the following maximum horizontal spacing and minimum rod diameters: 1. NPS 1-1/4 and Smaller: 84 inches with 3/8-inch rod. 2. NPS 1-1/2: 108 inches with 3/8-inch rod. 3. NPS 2: 10 feet with 3/8-inch rod. 4. NPS 2-1/2: 11 feet with 1/2-inch rod. 5. NPS 3 and NPS 3-1/2: 12 feet with 1/2-inch rod. 6. NPS 4 and NPS 5: 12 feet with 5/8-inch rod. 7. NPS 6: 12 feet with 3/4-inch rod. 8. NPS 8 to NPS 12: 12 feet with 7/8-inch rod. J. Install supports for vertical stainless-steel piping every 15 feet. K. Install vinyl-coated hangers for CPVC piping with the following maximum horizontal spacing and minimum rod diameters: 1. NPS 1 and Smaller: 36 inches with 3/8-inch rod. 2. NPS 1-1/4 to NPS 2: 48 inches with 3/8-inch rod. 3. NPS 2-1/2 to NPS 3-1/2: 48 inches with 1/2-inch rod. 4. NPS 4 and NPS 5: 48 inches with 5/8-inch rod. 5. NPS 6: 48 inches with 3/4-inch rod. 6. NPS 8: 48 inches with 7/8-inch rod. L. Install supports for vertical CPVC piping every 60 inches for NPS 1 and smaller, and every 72 inches for NPS 1-1/4 and larger. M. Install vinyl-coated hangers for PEX piping with the following maximum horizontal spacing and minimum rod diameters: 1. NPS 1 and Smaller: 32 inches with 3/8-inch rod. N. Install hangers for vertical PEX piping every 48 inches. O. Install vinyl-coated hangers for PVC piping with the following maximum horizontal spacing and minimum rod diameters: 1. NPS 2 and Smaller: 48 inches with 3/8-inch rod. 2. NPS 2-1/2 to NPS 3-1/2: 48 inches with 1/2-inch rod. 3. NPS 4 and NPS 5: 48 inches with 5/8-inch rod. 4. NPS 6: 48 inches with 3/4-inch rod. 5. NPS 8: 48 inches with 7/8-inch rod. Mountain Haus Boiler Replacement 03/18/2014 100% CD's/Permit DOMESTIC WATER PIPING 22 1116 - 6 P. Install supports for vertical PVC piping every 48 inches. Q. Install vinyl-coated hangers for PP piping with the following maximum horizontal spacing and minimum rod diameters: 1. NPS 1 and Smaller: 36 inches with 3/8-inch rod. 2. NPS 1-1/4 to NPS 2: 48 inches with 3/8-inch rod. 3. NPS 2-1/2 to NPS 3-1/2: 48 inches with 1/2-inch rod. 4. NPS 4 and NPS 5: 48 inches with 5/8-inch rod. 5. NPS 6: 48 inches with 3/4-inch rod. 6. NPS 8: 48 inches with 7/8-inch rod. R. Install supports for vertical PP piping every 60 inches for NPS 1 and smaller, and every 72 inches for NPS 1-1/4 and larger. S. Support piping and tubing not listed in this article according to MSS SP-69 and manufacturer's written instructions. 3.05 CONNECTIONS A. Drawings indicate general arrangement of piping, fittings, and specialties. B. When installing piping adjacent to equipment, machines and fixtures, allow space for service and maintenance. C. Connect domestic cold- and hot-water-supply piping to fixtures in sizes as indicated in the plumbing fixture connection schedule, but not smaller than the fixture connection sizes or that required by plumbing code. D. Connect domestic cold- and hot-water-supply piping to plumbing equipment as indicated, but not smaller than equipment connection sizes. Provide shutoff valve and union for each connection. Use flanges instead of unions for NPS 2-1/2 and larger. 3.06 IDENTIFICATION A. Identify system components. Comply with requirements for identification materials and installation in Section 220553 "Identification for Plumbing Piping and Equipment." B. Label pressure piping with system operating pressure. 3.07 FIELD QUALITY CONTROL A. Perform the following tests and inspections: 1. Piping Inspections: a. Do not enclose, cover, or put piping into operation until it has been inspected and approved by authorities having jurisdiction. b. During installation, notify authorities having jurisdiction at least one day before inspection must be made. Perform tests specified below in presence of authorities having jurisdiction: 1) Roughing-in Inspection: Arrange for inspection of piping before concealing or closing in after roughing in and before setting fixtures. 2) Final Inspection: Arrange for authorities having jurisdiction to observe tests specified in "Piping Tests" Subparagraph below and to ensure compliance with requirements. c. Reinspection: If authorities having jurisdiction find that piping will not pass tests or inspections, make required corrections and arrange for reinspection. d. Reports: Prepare inspection reports and have them signed by authorities having jurisdiction. 2. Piping Tests: a. Fill domestic water piping. Check components to determine that they are not air bound and that piping is full of water. Mountain Haus Boiler Replacement 03/18/2014 100% CD's/Permit DOMESTIC WATER PIPING 22 1116 - 7 b. Test for leaks and defects in new piping and parts of existing piping that have been altered, extended, or repaired. If testing is performed in segments, submit a separate report for each test, complete with diagram of portion of piping tested. c. Leave new, altered, extended, or replaced domestic water piping uncovered and unconcealed until it has been tested and approved. Expose work that was covered or concealed before it was tested. d. Cap and subject piping to static water pressure of 50 psig above operating pressure, without exceeding pressure rating of piping system materials. Isolate test source and allow it to stand for four hours. Leaks and loss in test pressure constitute defects that must be repaired. e. Repair leaks and defects with new materials, and retest piping or portion thereof until satisfactory results are obtained. f. Prepare reports for tests and for corrective action required. B. Domestic water piping will be considered defective if it does not pass tests and inspections. C. Prepare test and inspection reports. 3.08 ADJUSTING A. Perform the following adjustments before operation: 1. Close drain valves, hydrants, and hose bibbs. 2. Open shutoff valves to fully open position. 3. Open throttling valves to proper setting. 4. Adjust balancing valves in hot-water-circulation return piping to provide adequate flow. a. Manually adjust ball-type balancing valves in hot-water-circulation return piping to provide hot-water flow in each branch. b. Adjust calibrated balancing valves to flows indicated. 5. Remove plugs used during testing of piping and for temporary sealing of piping during installation. 6. Remove and clean strainer screens. Close drain valves and replace drain plugs. 7. Remove filter cartridges from housings and verify that cartridges are as specified for application where used and are clean and ready for use. 8. Check plumbing specialties and verify proper settings, adjustments, and operation. 3.09 CLEANING A. Clean and disinfect potable domestic water piping as follows: 1. Purge new piping and parts of existing piping that have been altered, extended, or repaired before using. 2. Use purging and disinfecting procedures prescribed by authorities having jurisdiction; if methods are not prescribed, use procedures described in either AWWA C651 or AWWA C652 or follow procedures described below: a. Flush piping system with clean, potable water until dirty water does not appear at outlets. b. Fill and isolate system according to either of the following: 1) Fill system or part thereof with water/chlorine solution with at least 50 ppm of chlorine. Isolate with valves and allow to stand for 24 hours. 2) Fill system or part thereof with water/chlorine solution with at least 200 ppm of chlorine. Isolate and allow to stand for three hours. c. Flush system with clean, potable water until no chlorine is in water coming from system after the standing time. d. Repeat procedures if biological examination shows contamination. e. Submit water samples in sterile bottles to authorities having jurisdiction. B. Prepare and submit reports of purging and disinfecting activities. Include copies of water-sample approvals from authorities having jurisdiction. C. Clean interior of domestic water piping system. Remove dirt and debris as work progresses. Mountain Haus Boiler Replacement 03/18/2014 100% CD's/Permit DOMESTIC WATER PIPING 22 1116 - 8 3.10 PIPING SCHEDULE A. Transition and special fittings with pressure ratings at least equal to piping rating may be used in applications below unless otherwise indicated. B. Flanges and unions may be used for aboveground piping joints unless otherwise indicated. C. Fitting Option: Extruded-tee connections and brazed joints may be used on aboveground copper tubing. D. Aboveground domestic water piping, NPS 2 and smaller, shall be one of the following: 1. Hard copper tube, ASTM B 88, Type L ; wrought-copper, solder-joint fittings; and soldered joints. 2. Hard copper tube, ASTM B 88, Type L; copper pressure-seal-joint fittings; and pressure-sealed joints. E. Aboveground domestic water piping, NPS 2-1/2 to NPS 4, shall be one of the following: 1. Hard copper tube, ; wrought-copper, solder-joint fittings; and brazed joints. 2. Hard copper tube, ASTM B 88, Type L; copper pressure-seal-joint fittings; and pressure-sealed joints. 3. Hard copper tube, [ASTM B 88, Type L] [or] [ASTM B 88, Type M]; grooved-joint, copper-tube appurtenances; and grooved joints. 4. Galvanized-steel pipe and nipples; galvanized, gray-iron threaded fittings; and threaded joints. 3.11 VALVE SCHEDULE A. Drawings indicate valve types to be used. Where specific valve types are not indicated, the following requirements apply: 1. Shutoff Duty: Use ball or gate valves for piping NPS 2 and smaller. Use butterfly valves with flanged ends for piping NPS 2-1/2 and larger. 2. Throttling Duty: Use ball or globe valves for piping NPS 2 and smaller. Use butterfly or ball valves with flanged ends for piping NPS 2-1/2 and larger. 3. Hot-Water Circulation Piping, Balancing Duty: Calibrated balancing valves. 4. Drain Duty: Hose-end drain valves. B. Use check valves to maintain correct direction of domestic water flow to and from equipment. END OF SECTION 221116 Mountain Haus Boiler Replacement 03/18/2014 100% CD's/Permit DOMESTIC WATER PIPING SPECIALTIES 22 1119 - 1 SECTION 22 1119 - DOMESTIC WATER PIPING SPECIALTIES PART 1 GENERAL 1.01 RELATED DOCUMENTS A. Drawings and general provisions of the Contract, including General and Supplementary Conditions and Division 01 Specification Sections, apply to this Section. 1.02 SUMMARY A. Section Includes: 1. Vacuum breakers. 2. Backflow preventers. 3. Water pressure-reducing valves. 4. Balancing valves. 5. Temperature-actuated, water mixing valves. 6. Strainers. 7. Outlet boxes. 8. Hose bibbs. 9. Wall hydrants. 10. Drain valves. 11. Water-hammer arresters. 12. Air vents. 13. Trap-seal primer valves. 14. Flexible connectors. B. Related Requirements: 1. Section 221116 "Domestic Water Piping" for water meters. 2. Section 223200 "Domestic Water Filtration Equipment" for water filters in domestic water piping. 1.03 ACTION SUBMITTALS A. Product Data: For each type of product. 1.04 CLOSEOUT SUBMITTALS A. Operation and Maintenance Data: For domestic water piping specialties to include in emergency, operation, and maintenance manuals. PART 2 PRODUCTS 2.01 GENERAL REQUIREMENTS FOR PIPING SPECIALTIES A. Potable-water piping and components shall comply with NSF 61. 2.02 PERFORMANCE REQUIREMENTS A. Minimum Working Pressure for Domestic Water Piping Specialties: 125 psig unless otherwise indicated. 2.03 VACUUM BREAKERS A. Hose-Connection Vacuum Breakers : 1. Manufacturers: Subject to compliance with requirements, provide products by one of the following: Mountain Haus Boiler Replacement 03/18/2014 100% CD's/Permit DOMESTIC WATER PIPING SPECIALTIES 22 1119 - 2 a. MIFAB, Inc. b. Watts; a division of Watts Water Technologies, Inc.; Watts Regulator Company. c. Zurn Industries, LLC; Plumbing Products Group; Light Commercial Products. 2. Standard: ASSE 1011. 3. Body: Bronze, nonremovable, with manual drain. 4. Outlet Connection: Garden-hose threaded complying with ASME B1.20.7. 5. Finish: Chrome or nickel plated. B. Pressure Vacuum Breakers : 1. Manufacturers: Subject to compliance with requirements, provide products by one of the following: a. Conbraco Industries, Inc. b. Watts; a division of Watts Water Technologies, Inc.; Watts Regulator Company. c. Zurn Industries, LLC; Plumbing Products Group; Wilkins Water Control Products. 2. Standard: ASSE 1020. 3. Operation: Continuous-pressure applications. 4. Pressure Loss: 5 psig maximum, through middle third of flow range. 5. Accessories: a. Valves: Ball type, on inlet and outlet. 2.04 BACKFLOW PREVENTERS A. Intermediate Atmospheric-Vent Backflow Preventers : 1. Manufacturers: Subject to compliance with requirements, provide products by one of the following: a. Conbraco Industries, Inc. b. Honeywell International Inc. c. Watts; a division of Watts Water Technologies, Inc.; Watts Regulator Company. d. Zurn Industries, LLC; Plumbing Products Group; Wilkins Water Control Products. 2. Standard: ASSE 1012. 3. Operation: Continuous-pressure applications. 4. Body: Bronze. 5. End Connections: Union, solder joint. 6. Finish: Chrome plated. B. Reduced-Pressure-Principle Backflow Preventers: 1. Manufacturers: Subject to compliance with requirements, provide products by one of the following: a. Conbraco Industries, Inc. b. Watts; a division of Watts Water Technologies, Inc.; Watts Regulator Company. c. Zurn Industries, LLC; Plumbing Products Group; Wilkins Water Control Products. 2. Standard: ASSE 1013. 3. Operation: Continuous-pressure applications. 4. Pressure Loss: 12 psig maximum, through middle third of flow range. 5. Body: Bronze for NPS 2 and smaller; stainless steel for NPS 2-1/2 and larger. 6. End Connections: Threaded for NPS 2 and smaller; flanged for NPS 2-1/2 and larger. 7. Configuration: Designed for horizontal, straight-through flow. 8. Accessories: a. Valves NPS 2 and Smaller: Ball type with threaded ends on inlet and outlet. b. Valves NPS 2-1/2 and Larger: Outside-screw and yoke-gate type with flanged ends on inlet and outlet. c. Air-Gap Fitting: ASME A112.1.2, matching backflow-preventer connection. C. Double-Check, Backflow-Prevention Assemblies : 1. Manufacturers: Subject to compliance with requirements, provide products by one of the following: a. Conbraco Industries, Inc. b. Watts; a division of Watts Water Technologies, Inc.; Watts Regulator Company. c. Zurn Industries, LLC; Plumbing Products Group; Wilkins Water Control Products. 2. Standard: ASSE 1015. 3. Operation: Continuous-pressure applications unless otherwise indicated. Mountain Haus Boiler Replacement 03/18/2014 100% CD's/Permit DOMESTIC WATER PIPING SPECIALTIES 22 1119 - 3 4. Pressure Loss: 5 psig maximum, through middle third of flow range. 5. Body: Bronze for NPS 2 and smaller; stainless steel for NPS 2-1/2 and larger. 6. End Connections: Threaded for NPS 2 and smaller; flanged for NPS 2-1/2 and larger. 7. Configuration: Designed for horizontal, straight-through flow. 8. Accessories: a. ValvesNPS 2 and Smaller: Ball type with threaded ends on inlet and outlet. b. ValvesNPS 2-1/2 and Larger: Outside-screw and yoke-gate type with flanged ends on inlet and outlet. D. Beverage-Dispensing-Equipment Backflow Preventers : 1. Manufacturers: Subject to compliance with requirements, provide products by one of the following: a. Conbraco Industries, Inc. b. Watts; a division of Watts Water Technologies, Inc.; Watts Regulator Company. c. Zurn Industries, LLC; Plumbing Products Group; Wilkins Water Control Products. 2. Standard: ASSE 1022. 3. Operation: Continuous-pressure applications. 4. Size: NPS 1/4 or NPS 3/8. 5. Body: Stainless steel. 6. End Connections: Threaded. 2.05 WATER PRESSURE-REDUCING VALVES A. Water-Control Valves : 1. Manufacturers: Subject to compliance with requirements, provide products by one of the following: a. Flomatic Corporation. b. Watts; a division of Watts Water Technologies, Inc.; Control Valves (Watts ACV). c. Zurn Industries, LLC; Plumbing Products Group; Wilkins Water Control Products. 2. Description: Pilot-operated, diaphragm-type, single-seated, main water-control valve. 3. Pressure Rating: Initial working pressure of 150 psig minimum with AWWA C550 or FDA-approved, interior epoxy coating. Include small pilot-control valve, restrictor device, specialty fittings, and sensor piping. 4. Main Valve Body: Cast- or ductile-iron body with AWWA C550 or FDA-approved, interior epoxy coating; or stainless-steel body. a. Pattern: Globe-valve design. b. Trim: Stainless steel. 5. End Connections: Threaded for NPS 2 and smaller; flanged for NPS 2-1/2 and larger. 2.06 BALANCING VALVES A. Accessories: Meter hoses, fittings, valves, differential pressure meter, and carrying case. B. Memory-Stop Balancing Valves : 2. Manufacturers: Subject to compliance with requirements, provide products by one of the following: a. Crane Co.; Crane Valve Group; Crane Valves. b. Hammond Valve. c. Milwaukee Valve Company. 3. Standard: MSS SP-110 for two-piece, copper-alloy ball valves. 4. Pressure Rating: 400-psig minimum CWP. 5. Size: NPS 2 or smaller. 6. Body: Copper alloy. 7. Port: Standard or full port. 8. Ball: Chrome-plated brass. 9. Seats and Seals: Replaceable. 10. End Connections: Solder joint or threaded. 11. Handle: Vinyl-covered steel with memory-setting device. Mountain Haus Boiler Replacement 03/18/2014 100% CD's/Permit DOMESTIC WATER PIPING SPECIALTIES 22 1119 - 4 2.07 TEMPERATURE-ACTUATED, WATER MIXING VALVES A. Water-Temperature Limiting Devices: 1. Manufacturers: Subject to compliance with requirements, provide products by one of the following: a. Conbraco Industries, Inc. b. Honeywell International Inc. c. Leonard Valve Company. d. Watts; a division of Watts Water Technologies, Inc.; Watts Regulator Company. e. Zurn Industries, LLC; Plumbing Products Group; Wilkins Water Control Products. 2. Standard: ASSE 1017. 3. Pressure Rating: 125 psig. 4. Type: Thermostatically controlled, water mixing valve. 5. Material: Bronze body with corrosion-resistant interior components. 6. Connections: Threaded union inlets and outlet. 7. Accessories: Check stops on hot- and cold-water supplies, and adjustable, temperature-control handle. 8. Valve Finish: Chrome plated. B. Primary, Thermostatic, Water Mixing Valves : 1. Manufacturers: Subject to compliance with requirements, provide products by one of the following: a. Armstrong International, Inc. b. Leonard Valve Company. c. Powers; a division of Watts Water Technologies, Inc. 2. Standard: ASSE 1017. 3. Pressure Rating: 125 psigminimum unless otherwise indicated. 4. Type: Exposed-mounted, thermostatically controlled, water mixing valve. 5. Material: Bronze body with corrosion-resistant interior components. 6. Connections: Threaded union inlets and outlet. 7. Accessories: Manual temperature control, check stops on hot- and cold-water supplies, and adjustable, temperature-control handle. 8. Selected Valve Flow Rate at 45-psig Pressure Drop: <Insert gpm>. 9. Valve Finish: Chrome plated. 10. Piping Finish: Copper. 2.08 STRAINERS FOR DOMESTIC WATER PIPING A. Y-Pattern Strainers: 1. Pressure Rating: 125 psig minimum unless otherwise indicated. 2. Body: Bronze for NPS 2 and smaller; cast iron with interior lining that complies with AWWA C550 or that is FDA approved, epoxy coated and for NPS 2-1/2 and larger. 3. End Connections: Threaded for NPS 2 and smaller; flanged for NPS 2-1/2 and larger. 4. Screen: Stainless steel with round perforations unless otherwise indicated. 5. Perforation Size: a. Strainers NPS 2 and Smaller: 0.020 inch. b. Strainers NPS 2-1/2 to NPS 4: 0.045 inch. c. Strainers NPS 5 and Larger: 0.10 inch. 6. Drain: Field or Factory-installed, hose-end drain valve. 2.09 OUTLET BOXES A. Clothes Washer Outlet Boxes : 1. Manufacturers: Subject to compliance with requirements, provide products by one of the following: a. Guy Gray Manufacturing Co., Inc. b. Oatey. c. Watts; a division of Watts Water Technologies, Inc.; Watts Regulator Company. d. Zurn Industries, LLC; Plumbing Products Group; Light Commercial Products. 2. Mounting: Recessed. 3. Material and Finish: Enameled-steel or epoxy-painted-steel box and faceplate. Mountain Haus Boiler Replacement 03/18/2014 100% CD's/Permit DOMESTIC WATER PIPING SPECIALTIES 22 1119 - 5 4. Faucet: Combination valved fitting or separate hot- and cold-water valved fittings complying with ASME A112.18.1. Include garden-hose thread complying with ASME B1.20.7 on outlets. 5. Supply Shutoff Fittings: NPS 1/2 ball valves and NPS 1/2 copper, water tubing. 6. Drain: NPS 2 standpipe and P-trap for direct waste connection to drainage piping. B. Icemaker Outlet Boxes : 1. Manufacturers: Subject to compliance with requirements, provide products by one of the following: a. Oatey. b. Guy Gray Manufacturing Co., Inc.. 2. Mounting: Recessed. 3. Material and Finish: Enameled-steel or epoxy-painted-steel box and faceplate. 4. Faucet: Valved fitting complying with ASME A112.18.1. Include NPS 1/2 or smaller copper tube outlet. 5. Supply Shutoff Fitting: NPS 1/2 ball valve and NPS 1/2 copper, water tubing. 2.10 HOSE BIBBS A. Hose Bibbs : 1. Standard: ASME A112.18.1 for sediment faucets. 2. Body Material: Bronze. 3. Seat: Bronze, replaceable. 4. Supply Connections: NPS 1/2 or NPS 3/4 threaded or solder-joint inlet. 5. Outlet Connection: Garden-hose thread complying with ASME B1.20.7. 6. Pressure Rating: 125 psig. 7. Vacuum Breaker: Integral or field-installation, nonremovable, drainable, hose-connection vacuum breaker complying with ASSE 1011. 8. Finish for Equipment Rooms: Rough bronze, or chrome or nickel plated. 9. Finish for Service Areas: Chrome or nickel plated. 10. Finish for Finished Rooms: Chrome or nickel plated. 11. Operation for Equipment Rooms: Wheel handle or operating key. 12. Operation for Service Areas: Wheel handle or Operating key. 13. Operation for Finished Rooms: Operating key. 14. Include operating key with each operating-key hose bibb. 15. Include integral wall flange with each chrome- or nickel-plated hose bibb. 2.11 WALL HYDRANTS A. Nonfreeze Wall Hydrants : 1. Manufacturers: Subject to compliance with requirements, provide products by one of the following: a. Josam Company. b. Smith, Jay R. Mfg. Co.; Division of Smith Industries, Inc. c. Tyler Pipe; Wade Div. d. Watts Drainage Products. e. Woodford Manufacturing Company; a division of WCM Industries, Inc. f. Zurn Industries, LLC; Plumbing Products Group; Light Commercial Products. 2. Standard: ASME A112.21.3M for concealed -outlet, self-draining wall hydrants. 3. Pressure Rating: 125 psig. 4. Operation: Loose key. 5. Casing and Operating Rod: Of length required to match wall thickness. Include wall clamp. 6. Inlet: NPS 3/4 or NPS 1. 7. Outlet: Concealed, with integral vacuum breaker and garden-hose thread complying with ASME B1.20.7. 8. Box: Deep, flush mounted with cover. 9. Box and Cover Finish: Chrome plated. 10. Operating Keys(s): One with each wall hydrant. Mountain Haus Boiler Replacement 03/18/2014 100% CD's/Permit DOMESTIC WATER PIPING SPECIALTIES 22 1119 - 6 2.12 DRAIN VALVES A. Ball-Valve-Type, Hose-End Drain Valves : 1. Standard: MSS SP-110 for standard-port, two-piece ball valves. 2. Pressure Rating: 400-psig minimum CWP. 3. Size: NPS 3/4. 4. Body: Copper alloy. 5. Ball: Chrome-plated brass. 6. Seats and Seals: Replaceable. 7. Handle: Vinyl-covered steel. 8. Inlet: Threaded or solder joint. 9. Outlet: Threaded, short nipple with garden-hose thread complying with ASME B1.20.7 and cap with brass chain. 2.13 WATER-HAMMER ARRESTERS A. Water-Hammer Arresters : 1. Manufacturers: Subject to compliance with requirements, provide products by one of the following: a. AMTROL, Inc. b. Sioux Chief Manufacturing Company, Inc. c. Watts Drainage Products. d. Zurn Industries, LLC; Plumbing Products Group; Specification Drainage Products. 2. Standard: ASSE 1010 or PDI-WH 201. 3. Type: Copper tube with piston. 4. Size: ASSE 1010, Sizes AA and A through F, or PDI-WH 201, Sizes A through F. 2.14 AIR VENTS A. Welded-Construction Automatic Air Vents : 1. Body: Stainless steel. 2. Pressure Rating: 150-psig minimum pressure rating. 3. Float: Replaceable, corrosion-resistant metal. 4. Mechanism and Seat: Stainless steel. 5. Size: NPS 3/8 minimum inlet. 6. Inlet and Vent Outlet End Connections: Threaded. 2.15 TRAP-SEAL PRIMER DEVICE A. Supply-Type, Trap-Seal Primer Device : 1. Manufacturers: Subject to compliance with requirements, provide products by one of the following: a. Sioux Chief Manufacturing Company, Inc. b. Smith, Jay R. Mfg. Co.; Division of Smith Industries, Inc. c. Watts; a division of Watts Water Technologies, Inc.; Watts Regulator Company. 2. Standard: ASSE 1018. 3. Pressure Rating: 125 psig minimum. 4. Body: Bronze. 5. Inlet and Outlet Connections: NPS 1/2 threaded, union, or solder joint. 6. Gravity Drain Outlet Connection: NPS 1/2 threaded or solder joint. 7. Finish: Chrome plated, or rough bronze for units used with pipe or tube that is not chrome finished. B. Drainage-Type, Trap-Seal Primer Device : 1. Manufacturers: Subject to compliance with requirements, provide products by one of the following: a. Smith, Jay R. Mfg. Co.; Division of Smith Industries, Inc. 2. Standard: ASSE 1044, lavatory P-trap with NPS 3/8 minimum, trap makeup connection. 3. Size: NPS 1-1/4 minimum. 4. Material: Chrome-plated, cast brass. Mountain Haus Boiler Replacement 03/18/2014 100% CD's/Permit DOMESTIC WATER PIPING SPECIALTIES 22 1119 - 7 2.16 FLEXIBLE CONNECTORS A. Manufacturers: Subject to compliance with requirements, provide products by one of the following: 1. Flexicraft Industries. 2. Hyspan Precision Products, Inc. 3. Metraflex, Inc. B. Stainless-Steel-Hose Flexible Connectors: Corrugated-stainless-steel tubing with stainless-steel wire-braid covering and ends welded to inner tubing. 1. Working-Pressure Rating: Minimum 200 psig. 2. End Connections NPS 2 and Smaller: Threaded steel-pipe nipple. 3. End Connections NPS 2-1/2 and Larger: Flanged steel nipple. 2.17 WATER METERS A. Displacement-Type Water Meters: 1. Manufacturers: Subject to compliance with requirements, provide products by one of the following: a. AALIANT; a Venture Measurement product line.ABB.Badger Meter, Inc. b. Mueller Co. Ltd.; a subsidiary of Mueller Water Products Inc. c. Schlumberger Limited; Water Services. d. Sensus. 2. Description: a. Standard: AWWA C700. b. Pressure Rating: 150-psig working pressure. c. Body Design: Nutating disc; totalization meter. d. Registration: In gallons or cubic feet as required by utility company. e. Case: Bronze. f. End Connections: Threaded. B. Turbine-Type Water Meters: 1. Manufacturers: Subject to compliance with requirements, provide products by one of the following: a. ABB. b. Mueller Co. Ltd.; a subsidiary of Mueller Water Products Inc. c. Schlumberger Limited; Water Services. d. Sensus. 2. Description: a. Standard: AWWA C701. b. Pressure Rating: 150-psig working pressure. c. Body Design: Turbine; totalization meter. d. Registration: In gallons or cubic feet as required by utility company. e. Case: Bronze. f. End Connections for Meters NPS 2 and Smaller: Threaded. g. End Connections for Meters NPS 2-1/2 and Larger: Flanged. PART 3 EXECUTION 3.01 INSTALLATION A. Install backflow preventers in each water supply to mechanical equipment and systems and to other equipment and water systems that may be sources of contamination. Comply with authorities having jurisdiction. 1. Locate backflow preventers in same room as connected equipment or system. 2. Install drain for backflow preventers with atmospheric-vent drain connection with air-gap fitting, fixed air-gap fitting, or equivalent positive pipe separation of at least two pipe diameters in drain piping and pipe-to-floor drain. Locate air-gap device attached to or under backflow preventer. Simple air breaks are unacceptable for this application. 3. Do not install bypass piping around backflow preventers. Mountain Haus Boiler Replacement 03/18/2014 100% CD's/Permit DOMESTIC WATER PIPING SPECIALTIES 22 1119 - 8 B. Install water regulators with inlet and outlet shutoff valves and bypass with memory-stop balancing valve. Install pressure gages on inlet and outlet. C. Install water-control valves with inlet and outlet shutoff valves and bypass with globe valve. Install pressure gages on inlet and outlet. D. Install balancing valves in locations where they can easily be adjusted. E. Install temperature-actuated, water mixing valves with check stops or shutoff valves on inlets and with shutoff valve on outlet. 1. Install cabinet-type units recessed in or surface mounted on wall as specified. F. Install Y-pattern strainers for water on supply side of each control valve water pressure-reducing valve . G. Install outlet boxes recessed in wall or surface mounted on wall. Install 2-by-4-inch fire-retardant-treated-wood blocking, wall reinforcement between studs. Comply with requirements for fire-retardant-treated-wood blocking in Section 061000 "Rough Carpentry." H. Install water-hammer arresters in water piping according to PDI-WH 201. I. Install air vents at high points of water piping. Install drain piping and discharge onto floor drain. J. Install supply-type, trap-seal primer valves with outlet piping pitched down toward drain trap a minimum of 1 percent, and connect to floor-drain body, trap, or inlet fitting. Adjust valve for proper flow. K. Install drainage-type, trap-seal primer valves as lavatory trap with outlet piping pitched down toward drain trap a minimum of 1 percent, and connect to floor-drain body, trap, or inlet fitting. 3.02 LABELING AND IDENTIFYING A. Equipment Nameplates and Signs: Install engraved plastic-laminate equipment nameplate or sign on or near each of the following: 1. Pressure vacuum breakers. 2. Intermediate atmospheric-vent backflow preventers. 3. Reduced-pressure-principle backflow preventers. 4. Double-check, backflow-prevention assemblies. 5. Water pressure-reducing valves. 6. Primary, thermostatic, water mixing valves. 7. Outlet boxes. 8. Supply-type, trap-seal primer valves. B. Distinguish among multiple units, inform operator of operational requirements, indicate safety and emergency precautions, and warn of hazards and improper operations, in addition to identifying unit. Nameplates and signs are specified in Section 220553 "Identification for Plumbing Piping and Equipment." 3.03 FIELD QUALITY CONTROL A. Perform the following tests and inspections: 1. Test each pressure vacuum breaker reduced-pressure-principle backflow preventer double-check, backflow-prevention assembly according to authorities having jurisdiction and the device's reference standard. B. Domestic water piping specialties will be considered defective if they do not pass tests and inspections. C. Prepare test and inspection reports. Mountain Haus Boiler Replacement 03/18/2014 100% CD's/Permit DOMESTIC WATER PIPING SPECIALTIES 22 1119 - 9 3.04 ADJUSTING A. Set field-adjustable pressure set points of water pressure-reducing valves. B. Set field-adjustable flow set points of balancing valves. C. Set field-adjustable temperature set points of temperature-actuated, water mixing valves. END OF SECTION 221119 Mountain Haus Boiler Replacement 03/18/2014 100% CD's/Permit DOMESTIC WATER PUMPS 22 1123 - 1 SECTION 22 1123 - DOMESTIC WATER PUMPS PART 1 GENERAL 1.01 RELATED DOCUMENTS A. Drawings and general provisions of the Contract, including General and Supplementary Conditions and Division 01 Specification Sections, apply to this Section. 1.02 SUMMARY A. Section Includes: 1. In-line, sealless centrifugal pumps. 1.03 ACTION SUBMITTALS A. Product Data: For each type of product indicated. Include materials of construction, rated capacities, certified performance curves with operating points plotted on curves, operating characteristics, electrical characteristics, and furnished specialties and accessories. 1.04 CLOSEOUT SUBMITTALS A. Operation and Maintenance Data: For domestic water pumps to include in operation and maintenance manuals. 1.05 QUALITY ASSURANCE A. Electrical Components, Devices, and Accessories: Listed and labeled as defined in NFPA 70, by a qualified testing agency, and marked for intended location and application. B. UL Compliance: Comply with UL 778 for motor-operated water pumps. 1.06 DELIVERY, STORAGE, AND HANDLING A. Retain shipping flange protective covers and protective coatings during storage. B. Protect bearings and couplings against damage. C. Comply with pump manufacturer's written rigging instructions for handling. 1.07 COORDINATION A. Coordinate sizes and locations of concrete bases with actual equipment provided. PART 2 PRODUCTS 2.01 IN-LINE, SEALLESS CENTRIFUGAL PUMPS A. Manufacturers: Subject to compliance with requirements, provide products by one of the following: 1. Armstrong Pumps Inc. 2. Bell & Gossett Domestic Pump; ITT Corporation. 3. Grundfos Pumps Corp. 4. TACO Incorporated. Mountain Haus Boiler Replacement 03/18/2014 100% CD's/Permit DOMESTIC WATER PUMPS 22 1123 - 2 5. WILO USA LLC - WILO Canada Inc. B. Description: Factory-assembled and -tested, in-line, close-coupled, canned-motor, sealless, overhung-impeller centrifugal pumps. C. Pump Construction: 1. Pump and Motor Assembly: Hermetically sealed, replaceable-cartridge type with motor and impeller on common shaft and designed for installation with pump and motor shaft horizontal. 2. Casing: Bronze, with threaded or companion-flange connections. 3. Impeller: Plastic. 4. Motor: Single speed, unless otherwise indicated. 2.02 MOTORS A. Comply with NEMA designation, temperature rating, service factor, enclosure type, and efficiency requirements for motors specified in Section 220513 "Common Motor Requirements for Plumbing Equipment." 1. Motor Sizes: Minimum size as indicated. If not indicated, large enough so driven load will not require motor to operate in service factor range above 1.0. 2.03 CONTROLS A. Thermostats: Electric; adjustable for control of hot-water circulation pump. 1. Type: Water-immersion temperature sensor, for installation in piping. 2. Enclosure: NEMA 250, Type 1 . PART 3 EXECUTION 3.01 EXAMINATION A. Examine roughing-in of domestic-water-piping system to verify actual locations of connections before pump installation. 3.02 PUMP INSTALLATION A. Comply with HI 1.4. B. Install in-line, sealless centrifugal pumps with shaft horizontal unless otherwise indicated. C. Install continuous-thread hanger rods and spring hangers of size required to support pump weight. 1. Comply with requirements for vibration isolation devices specified in Section 220548 "Vibration and Seismic Controls for Plumbing Piping and Equipment." Fabricate brackets or supports as required. 2. Comply with requirements for hangers and supports specified in Section 220529 "Hangers and Supports for Plumbing Piping and Equipment." D. Install thermostats in hot-water return piping. 3.03 CONNECTIONS A. Comply with requirements for piping specified in Section 221116 "Domestic Water Piping." Drawings indicate general arrangement of piping, fittings, and specialties. B. Install piping adjacent to pumps to allow service and maintenance. C. Connect domestic water piping to pumps. Install suction and discharge piping equal to or greater than size of pump nozzles. 1. Install flexible connectors adjacent to pumps in suction and discharge piping of the following pumps: Mountain Haus Boiler Replacement 03/18/2014 100% CD's/Permit DOMESTIC WATER PUMPS 22 1123 - 3 a. Comply with requirements for flexible connectors specified in Section 221116 "Domestic Water Piping." 2. Install shutoff valve and strainer on suction side of each pump, and check, shutoff, and throttling valves on discharge side of each pump. Install valves same size as connected piping. Comply with requirements for valves specified in Section 220523 "General-Duty Valves for Plumbing Piping" and comply with requirements for strainers specified in Section 221119 "Domestic Water Piping Specialties." D. Connect thermostats, to pumps that they control. 3.04 IDENTIFICATION A. Comply with requirements for identification specified in Section 220553 "Identification for Plumbing Piping and Equipment" for identification of pumps. 3.05 ADJUSTING A. Adjust domestic water pumps to function smoothly, and lubricate as recommended by manufacturer. B. Adjust initial temperature set points. C. Set field-adjustable switches and circuit-breaker trip ranges as indicated. END OF SECTION 221123 Mountain Haus Boiler Replacement 03/18/2014 100% CD's/Permit FACILITY INDOOR POTABLE-WATER STORAGE TANKS 22 1223 - 1 SECTION 22 1223 - FACILITY INDOOR POTABLE-WATER STORAGE TANKS PART 1 GENERAL 1.01 RELATED DOCUMENTS A. Drawings and general provisions of the Contract, including General and Supplementary Conditions and Division 01 Specification Sections, apply to this Section. 1.02 SUMMARY A. Section Includes: 1. Steel, nonpressure, potable-water storage tanks. 1.03 ACTION SUBMITTALS A. Product Data: For each type of product indicated. 1. Include construction details, material descriptions, dimensions of individual components and profiles, and finishes for water storage tanks. 2. Include rated capacities, operating characteristics, and furnished specialties and accessories. 1.04 INFORMATIONAL SUBMITTALS A. Purging and disinfecting reports. 1.05 QUALITY ASSURANCE A. ASME Compliance for Steel Tanks: Fabricate and label steel, ASME-code, potable-water storage tanks to comply with ASME Boiler and Pressure Vessel Code: Section VIII, "Pressure Vessels," Division 1. B. Comply with NSF 61, "Drinking Water System Components - Health Effects," for potable-water storage tanks. Include appropriate NSF marking. 1.06 COORDINATION A. Coordinate sizes and locations of concrete bases with actual equipment provided. PART 2 PRODUCTS 2.01 STEEL, PRESSURE, POTABLE-WATER STORAGE TANKS A. Fabricate supports and attachments to tank with reinforcement strong enough to resist tank movement during seismic event when tank supports are anchored to building structure. 2.02 STEEL, NONPRESSURE, POTABLE-WATER STORAGE TANKS A. Manufacturers: Subject to compliance with requirements, provide products by one of the following: 1. RECO USA. 2. Wood, John Co. 3. Lochnivar. 4. A.O. Smith Water Products. 5. Rheem. Mountain Haus Boiler Replacement 03/18/2014 100% CD's/Permit FACILITY INDOOR POTABLE-WATER STORAGE TANKS 22 1223 - 2 B. Description: Steel, horizontal , nonpressure-rated tank with cylindrical sidewalls. C. Fabricate supports and attachments to tank with reinforcement strong enough to resist tank movement during seismic event when tank supports are anchored to building structure. D. Construction: Steel, constructed with nontoxic welded joints. E. Manhole: Watertight, for tank more than 36 inches in diameter. F. Cover for Open Tank: Steel, with lining same as or similar to tank lining and with shape that encloses top of tank. G. Tappings: Factory-fabricated stainless steel, welded to tank. 1. NPS 2 and Smaller: ASME B1.20.1, with female thread. 2. NPS 2-1/2 and Larger: ASME B16.5, flanged. H. Specialties and Accessories: Include tappings in the tank and the following: 1. Vacuum relief valve. 2. Free air vent with insect screen. 3. Thermometer. I. Horizontal Tank Supports: Factory-fabricated steel saddles, welded to tank before testing and labeling. J. Tank Interior Finish: Materials and thicknesses complying with NSF 61 barrier materials for potable-water tank linings. Extend finish into and through tank fittings and outlets. 1. Coating: Glass . K. Exterior Coating: Manufacturer's standard enamel paint. 2.03 SOURCE QUALITY CONTROL A. Test and inspect potable-water storage tanks according to the following tests and inspections and prepare test reports: 1. Pressure Testing for ASME-Code, Potable-Water Storage Tanks: Hydrostatically test to ensure structural integrity and freedom from leaks. Fill tanks with water, vent air, pressurize to 1-1/2 times tank pressure rating, disconnect test equipment, hold pressure for 30 minutes with no drop in pressure, and check for leaks. PART 3 EXECUTION 3.01 INSTALLATION A. Install water storage tanks on concrete bases, level and plumb, firmly anchored. Arrange so devices needing servicing are accessible. 1. Install horizontal tanks on fabricated steel supports and saddles. B. Anchor tank supports and tanks to substrate. C. Install tank seismic restraints. D. Install thermometers and pressure gages on water storage tanks and piping if indicated. Thermometers and pressure gages are specified in Section 22 0519 "Meters and Gages for Plumbing Piping." E. Install the following devices on tanks where indicated: 1. Temperature and pressure relief valves. Mountain Haus Boiler Replacement 03/18/2014 100% CD's/Permit FACILITY INDOOR POTABLE-WATER STORAGE TANKS 22 1223 - 3 2. Vacuum relief valves. 3. Tank vents on nonpressure tanks. 4. Connections to accessories. 3.02 CONNECTIONS A. Piping installation requirements are specified in Section 22 1116 "Domestic Water Piping." Drawings indicate general arrangement of piping, fittings, and specialties. B. Install piping adjacent to potable-water storage tanks to allow service and maintenance. C. Connect water piping to water storage tanks with unions or flanges and with shutoff valves. Connect tank drains with shutoff valves and discharge over closest floor drains. 1. General-duty valves are specified in Section 22 0523 "General-Duty Valves for Plumbing Piping." a. Valves NPS 2 and Smaller: Gate or ball. b. Valves NPS 2-1/2 and Larger: Gate or butterfly. c. Drain Valves: NPS 3/4 gate or ball valve. Include outlet with, or nipple in outlet with, ASME B1.20.7, 3/4-11.5NH thread for garden-hose service, threaded cap, and chain. 2. Water Piping Connections: Make connections to dissimilar metals with dielectric fittings. Dielectric fittings are specified in Section 22 1116 "Domestic Water Piping." 3. Connect air piping to hydropneumatic tanks with unions or flanges and gate or ball valves. Make connections to dissimilar metals with dielectric fittings, which are specified in Section 22 1513 "General-Service Compressed-Air Piping." 3.03 IDENTIFICATION A. Identify system components. Comply with requirements for identification specified in Section 22 0553 "Identification for Plumbing Piping and Equipment." 3.04 FIELD QUALITY CONTROL A. Perform the following final checks before filling: 1. Verify that air precharge in precharged tanks is correct. 2. Test operation of tank accessories and devices. 3. Verify that vacuum relief valves are correct size. a. Manually operate vacuum relief valves. b. Adjust vacuum settings. B. Filling Procedures: Follow manufacturer's written procedures. Fill tanks with water to operating level. 3.05 CLEANING A. Clean and disinfect potable-water storage tanks. B. Use purging and disinfecting procedure prescribed by authorities having jurisdiction or, if method is not prescribed, use procedure described in AWWA C652 or as described below: 1. Purge water storage tanks with potable water. 2. Disinfect tanks by one of the following methods: a. Fill tanks with water-chlorine solution containing at least 50 ppm of chlorine. Isolate tanks and allow to stand for 24 hours. b. Fill tanks with water-chlorine solution containing at least 200 ppm of chlorine. Isolate tanks and allow to stand for three hours. 3. Flush tanks, after required standing time, with clean, potable water until chlorine is not present in water coming from tank. Mountain Haus Boiler Replacement 03/18/2014 100% CD's/Permit FACILITY INDOOR POTABLE-WATER STORAGE TANKS 22 1223 - 4 4. Submit water samples in sterile bottles to authorities having jurisdiction. Repeat procedure if biological examination made by authorities having jurisdiction shows evidence of contamination. C. Prepare written reports for purging and disinfecting activities. END OF SECTION 22 1223 Mountain Haus Boiler Replacement 03/18/2014 100% CD's/Permit MECHANICAL GENERAL PROVISIONS 23 0010 - 1 SECTION 23 0010 - MECHANICAL GENERAL PROVISIONS PART 1 GENERAL 1.01 RELATED DOCUMENTS A. The General Conditions, Special Conditions and Division 01 are part of these specifications. Consult them further instructions and be governed by the requirements thereunder. 1.02 DESCRIPTION A. Work Included 1. Furnish all labor and materials and perform all operations necessary for the installation of complete and operating mechanical systems subject to the conditions of the contract. The work also includes the completion of such mechanical and electrical details not mentioned or shown which are necessary for the successful operation of all systems; this includes the furnishing of all materials for filling systems to make them operable, including water, refrigerant, oil, grease, antifreeze and brine. Prove satisfactory operation of all equipment and controls to the MECHANICAL ENGINEER on request. B. Work Not Included 1. Certain labor and materials may be furnished and/or installed under other divisions of these specifications. Coordinate with other trades and arrange the work to make the parts fit together. The following items are to be accomplished under other divisions of these specifications. a. Temporary Heat: See Paragraph 1.7, this Section and Division 1. b. Concrete: See paragraph 3.10, this Section. c. Electrical Equipment and Wiring: See paragraph 3.11, this section. d. Temporary Water and Toilet: See Division 1. 1.03 |PROVISIONS A. Work performed under this division of the specifications shall conform to the requirements of Division 1, and the mechanical drawings and all items hereinafter specified. 1. Prior to any work being performed under this division, examine architectural, structural, food service, civil, electrical, specialty systems, and interior design drawings and specifications. If any discrepancies occur between them and the mechanical drawings and specifications, report discrepancies to the Architect in writing and obtain written instructions for the work. 2. Mechanical drawings are diagrammatic, but shall be followed as closely as actual construction of the building will permit. All changes from drawings necessary to make the mechanical work conform to the building as constructed shall be made without additional cost to the Owner. 3. Coordinate the mechanical work with the General Contractor and be responsible to him for satisfactory progress of the work. Coordinate mechanical work with all other trades on the project without additional cost to the Owner. 4. All work and materials covered by drawings and specifications shall be subject to review at any time by representatives of the Architect and Owner. If the Architect or Owner’s agent finds any materials or installation that does not conform to these drawings and specifications, Contractor shall remove the material from the premises and correct the installation to the satisfaction of the agent. 5. In acceptance or rejection of installed mechanical systems, no allowance will be made for lack of skill on the part of the installers. 1.04 EXAMINATION OF PREMISES/SITE A. Visit the premises site before submitting bid as no extras will be allowed for lack of knowledge of existing conditions. Mountain Haus Boiler Replacement 03/18/2014 100% CD's/Permit MECHANICAL GENERAL PROVISIONS 23 0010 - 2 1.05 CODES AND STANDARDS A. Conform to applicable sections of NFPA 13, and 24. B. Conform to the National Electrical Code, 2011 Edition. C. Conform to all applicable State and Local Codes. D. In case of difference between these specifications, codes, laws, industry standards, and/or utility company regulations the most stringent shall govern. E. Americans with Disabilities Acts (ADA) and American National Standards Institute (ANSI) 117. 1.06 PERMITS, FEES AND NOTICES A. Apply for and pay for all permits, fees, licenses and inspections for this Division of work. 1. Do not include the cost of any "Plant Investment Fee" or "System Development Charge" for sewer and/or water charged by the City. This will be arranged for and paid for by the Owner. 2. Do not include the cost of any "Gas Application Fee" charged by the Utility Company. This will be arranged and paid for by the Owner. B. Notify proper authorities when work is ready for inspections required by applicable codes, rules and regulations, allowing sufficient time for inspections to be made without hindering progress of the work. Furnish to the Owner copies of inspection certificates of acceptance. 1.07 TEMPORARY HEAT A. Temporary heat will be furnished by the Contractor. Use of the permanent heating system will not be allowed without written authorization from the MECHANICAL ENGINEER. In case the permanent heating system is used for temporary heat, the General Contractor shall pay all costs until acceptance by the Owner. 1.08 DRAWINGS A. Mechanical drawings are diagrammatic and are not to be scaled for dimensions. Take all dimensions from Architectural drawings, certified equipment drawings, and from the structure itself before fabricating any work. Verify all space requirements, coordinating with other trades, and install the systems in the space provided without extra charges to the Owner. B. Conceal all piping in finished areas of the building except where otherwise noted on the drawings. C. Install all equipment in accordance with manufacturer's recommendations, unless approval is given in writing by the MECHANICAL ENGINEER for deviation. 1.09 EXAMINATION OF BIDDING DOCUMENTS A. Each bidder shall examine the bidding documents carefully, and not later than seven days prior to the date of receipt of bids, shall make written request to the Architect for interpretation or correction of any discrepancies, ambiguity, inconsistency, or error therein which he may discover. Any interpretation or correction will be issued as an addendum by the Architect. Only a written interpretation or correction by addendum shall be binding. No bidder shall rely upon interpretations or corrections given by any other method. If discrepancies, ambiguity, inconsistency, or error are not covered by addendum or written directive, Contractor shall include in his bid, labor materials and methods of construction resulting in higher cost. After award of contract, no allowance or extra compensation will be made on behalf of the Contractor due to his failure to make the written requests as described above. B. The person submitting the request will be responsible for its prompt delivery. Failure to so request clarification of any inadequacy, omission, or conflict will not relieve the Contractor of responsibility. The signing of the Mountain Haus Boiler Replacement 03/18/2014 100% CD's/Permit MECHANICAL GENERAL PROVISIONS 23 0010 - 3 Contract will be considered as implicitly denoting that the Contractor has a thorough comprehension of full intent and scope of the working drawings and specifications. 1.10 ROUGH-IN A. Verify final locations for rough-ins with field measurements and with the requirements of the actual equipment. B. Refer to equipment specifications in other Divisions for additional rough-in requirements. C. Refer to kitchen equipment drawings and equipment cut sheets provided by the Owner for kitchen equipment. 1.11 ACCESS DOORS A. Furnish access doors of type suitable to Architect and provide to General Contractor to construct into the building. Access doors should be provided in all locations where access is required. 1.12 COORDINATION DRAWINGS A. Prepare and submit a set of coordination drawings showing major elements, components, and systems of mechanical equipment and materials in relationship with other building components. Prepare drawings to an accurate scale of ¼”=1”-0” or larger. Indicate the locations of all equipment and materials, including clearances for servicing and maintaining equipment. Indicate movement and positioning of large equipment into the building during construction. B. Prepare floor plans, reflected ceiling plans, elevations, sections, and details to conclusively coordinate where space is limited, and where sequencing and coordination of installations are of importance to the efficient flow of the Work, including (but not necessary limited) to the following: 1. Ductwork 2. Hydronic Piping 3. Plumbing Piping 4. Fire sprinkler piping 5. Electrical conduit mains 1.13 MECHANICAL INSTALLATIONS A. Coordinate mechanical equipment and materials installation with other building components. B. Verify all dimensions by field measurements. C. Arrange for chases, slots, and openings in other building components to allow for mechanical installations. D. Coordinate the installation of required supporting devices and sleeves to be set in poured in place concrete and other structural components, as they are constructed. E. Sequence, coordinate, and integrate installations of mechanical materials and equipment for efficient flow of the Work. Give particular attention to large equipment requiring positioning prior to closing-in the building. F. Coordinate the cutting and patching of building components to accommodate the installation of mechanical equipment and materials. G. Where mounting heights are not detailed or dimensioned, install mechanical services and overhead equipment to provide the maximum headroom possible, and in accordance with minimum required clearances as specified in codes and regulations. H. The word “concealed” as used in this specification refers to such spaces as pipe and duct chases, pipe and duct trenches, above plastered ceilings, in walls and buried where pipe and/or duct is inaccessible when building is Mountain Haus Boiler Replacement 03/18/2014 100% CD's/Permit MECHANICAL GENERAL PROVISIONS 23 0010 - 4 complete. “Exposed” is intended to be within equipment rooms, unfinished areas, above “push up” ceilings, accessible pipe and duct tunnels. I. The term “furnish” means supply and deliver to Project, unless otherwise defined in greater detail. The term “install” is used to describe operations at Project, from inspecting and unloading, to completion in place, ready for intended use. The term “provide” means furnish and install, complete and ready for intended use, unless otherwise defined in greater detail. 1.14 SUBMITTALS A. Submit under provisions of Division 1. 1.15 SHOP DRAWINGS A. Submit shop drawings on all equipment, Temperature Controls and Fire Protection. Provide shop drawings to the Architect and Engineer showing locations of all access panels. B. Shop drawings required for this project are as follows: 1. Insulation 2. Boilers 3. Pumps 4. Fire Protection 5. Piping 6. Motor Starters 7. Water Treatment 8. Temperature controls C. Provide, with shop drawing submittal, 1/4" scale layout drawings of rooms with boilers, chillers, and HVAC equipment. Layouts shall show locations of, and shall be coordinated with electrical equipment, and equipment shall be drawn to scale. D. Place orders for all equipment in time to prevent any delay in construction schedule or completion of project. If any materials or equipment are not ordered in time, additional charges made by equipment manufacturers to complete their equipment in time to meet construction schedule, together with any special handling charges, shall be borne by the Contractor. E. Contractor agrees that shop drawing submittals processed by the engineer are not change orders. The purpose of shop drawing submittals by the Contractor is to demonstrate to the engineer that the Contractor understands the design concept, that he demonstrates his understanding by indicating which equipment and material he intends to furnish and install and by detailing the fabrication and installation methods he intends to use. Contractor further agrees that if deviations, discrepancies, or conflicts between shop drawing submittals and contract documents in the form of design drawings and specifications are discovered either prior to or after shop drawings and specifications shall control and shall be followed. F. Contractor to provide manufacturers’ recommended installation manuals for equipment. G. Review of shop drawings does not relieve this Contractor from the responsibility of furnishing equipment and materials of proper dimension, size, quantity, quality and all performance characteristics to efficiently perform the requirements and intent of the contract documents. Review does not relieve this Contractor from responsibility for errors on the shop drawings. If the shop drawings deviate from the contract documents, advise the MECHANICAL ENGINEER of the deviations in writing accompanying the shop drawings, including the reasons for the deviations. Coordinate all required changes with the other trades affected. If the changes are occasioned by the Contractor, he shall pay any costs involved. 1.16 PROJECT/SITE CONDITIONS A. Install Work in locations shown on Drawings, unless prevented by Project conditions. Mountain Haus Boiler Replacement 03/18/2014 100% CD's/Permit MECHANICAL GENERAL PROVISIONS 23 0010 - 5 B. Prepare drawings showing proposed rearrangement of Work to meet Project conditions, including changes to Work specified in other sections. Obtain permission of Architect before proceeding. 1.17 WARRANTY A. All materials and equipment shall be new unless otherwise specified. B. Guarantee all workmanship, materials and equipment and replace any found defective without cost to the Owner, for one year after final acceptance, as defined in General Conditions. C. Each warranty for longer than the one year described above (that comes with equipment used on the job) shall be passed on to the owner with dates of start and end of the warranty. 1.18 ENGINEERING BY CONTRACTOR A. The construction of this building requires the contractor to design several systems or subsystems. All such design shall be the completed responsibility of the contractor. B. Systems or subsystems which require engineering responsibility by the contractor include, but are not limited to: 1. Fire sprinkler. 2. Equipment supports, not fully detailed in the drawings. 3. Pipe hangers and anchors not specified in these documents, or catalogued by the manufacturer. 4. Temperature controls. 5. Water treatment. 6. Refrigeration systems. 7. Seismic restraints. PART 2 PRODUCTS 2.01 EQUIPMENT MANUFACTURER A. Equipment in the following categories shall be of one manufacturer or available through one manufacturer for each category to facilitate ease of maintenance for the Owner. 1. Motors (open drip-proof squirrel cage) 2. Starters 3. Variable Frequency Drives 4. Single Suction Pumps 5. Temperature Controls 6. Thermometers 7. Pressure Gauges 8. Balancing Valves PART 3 EXECUTION 3.01 STORAGE A. Provide for proper storage of all materials and equipment and assume responsibility for losses due to any cause. All storage shall be within the contact limit lines of the building site. Cover and store all equipment and materials out of elements; any rusted or weather damaged item shall not be used. 3.02 PRODUCT INSTALLATION A. Manufacturer’s Instructions 1. Except where more stringent requirements are indicated, comply with the product manufacturer’s instructions and recommendations. Mountain Haus Boiler Replacement 03/18/2014 100% CD's/Permit MECHANICAL GENERAL PROVISIONS 23 0010 - 6 2. Consult with manufacturer’s technical representatives, who are recognized as technical experts, for specific instructions on special project conditions. 3. If a conflict exists, notify the Architect/Engineer in writing and obtain his instruction before proceeding with the work in question. B. Movement of Equipment 1. Wherever possible, arrange for the movement and positioning of equipment so that enclosing partitions, walls and roofs will not be delayed or need to be removed. 2. Otherwise, advise Contractor of opening requirements to be maintained for the subsequent entry of equipment. C. Heavy Equipment 1. Coordinate the movement of heavy items with shoring and bracing so that the building structure will not be overloaded during the movement and installation. 2. Where mechanical products to be installed on the existing roof are too heavy to be hand-carried, do not transport across the existing roof deck; position by crane or other device so as to avoid overloading the roof deck. D. Return Air Path: Coordinate mechanical work in return air plenum to avoid obstructing return air path. 1. Do not make changes in layout which will reduce return air path cross-sectional areas. Minimum cross-sectional area will provide a maximum of 500 fpm velocity through return air plenum at specified supply air quantity unless otherwise noted. 2. Report any obstructions by work of other Divisions to Architect/Engineer. E. Clearances 1. Install piping and ductwork: a. Straight and true. b. Aligned with other work. c. Close to walls and overhead structure (allowing for insulation). d. Concealed, where possible, in occupied spaces. e. Out-of-the-way with maximum passageway and headroom remaining in each space. 2. Except as otherwise indicated, arrange mechanical services and overhead equipment with a minimum of: a. 7’0” headroom in storage spaces. b. 8’6” headroom in other spaces. 3. Do not obstruct windows, doors or other openings. 4. Give the right-of way to piping systems required to slope for drainage (over other service lines and ductwork). 5. Offsets, transitions and changes in direction in pipes and ducts shall be made as required to maintain proper head room and pitch of sloping pipes whether or not indicated on the drawings. Furnish and install all traps, air vents, sanitary vents, etc., as required to affect these offsets, transitions and changes in direction. F. Access 1. Install all work to permit removal (without damage to other parts) of coils, heat exchanger bundles, boiler tubes, fan shafts and wheels, filters, belt guards, sheaves and drives, and all other parts which might require periodic replacement or maintenance. Arrange pipes, ducts, and equipment to permit ready access to valves, traps, starters, motors, control components and to clear the openings of doors and of access panels. Furnish access panels for all mechanical equipment and valves requiring access in concealed locations for installation by contractor. 3.03 PROTECTION OF WORK AND PROPERTY A. Where there are existing facilities, be responsible for the protection thereof, whether or not such facility is to be removed or relocated. Moving or removing any facility must be done so as not to cause interruption of the work of Owner's operation. Mountain Haus Boiler Replacement 03/18/2014 100% CD's/Permit MECHANICAL GENERAL PROVISIONS 23 0010 - 7 B. Close all pipe and duct openings with caps or plugs during installation. Cover all fixtures and equipment and protect against injury. At the final completion, clean all work and deliver in an unblemished condition, or refinish and repaint at the discretion of the Architect. C. Do not allow any fans in the HVAC system to operate before the area served by the fan has been cleaned and vacuumed of all debris and dust which might enter the system. D. Any equipment, duct or piping systems found to have been damaged or contaminated above “MILL” or “SHOP” conditions shall be replaced or cleaned to the Engineer’s satisfaction. E. Initial fill of traps 1. Provide initial water seal fill for all waste p-traps, condensate traps, or similar traps. 3.04 PROTECTION OF POTABLE WATER SYSTEMS A. All temporary water connections shall be made with an approved back flow preventer. B. All hose bibbs shall have, as a minimum, a vacuum breaker to prevent back flow. C. Direct connections to hydronic systems shall only be made through a reduced pressure back flow preventer. 3.05 PROTECTION OF SYSTEMS SERVING OCCUPIED SPACES A. Where work is being performed in occupied spaces, or occupancy is to be phased in with ongoing construction contractor shall prevent contamination of all systems serving the occupants including but not limited to: 1. Supply or return air a. Systems shall be capped or provided with adequate particulate and gas phase filtration to prevent dust, chemical, or biological contamination. Particulate filters shall be as a minimum equivalent to those specified for the completed system. 2. Domestic Water a. Isolate sterilized portions from non-sterilized portions. 3. Medical Gases a. Isolate certified portions from non-certified 3.06 DEMONSTRATION A. Refer to Division 1 sections of the specifications regarding requirements of Record Drawings and Operation and maintenance Manual submittal and systems demonstration. 1. Demonstrate that each system operates properly. 2. Explain the operation of each system to the Owner’s Representative. Explain use of O&M manual in operating and maintaining systems. B. Date and time of demonstration will be determined by the Owner. 3.07 CONCRETE A. All poured in place concrete shall be furnished under the Architectural Divisions of these Specifications. B. This Contractor shall coordinate all requirements for concrete surrounding buried duct. Ducts shall be tied down to concrete deadman and completely surrounded with 3" of concrete. 3.08 ELECTRICAL EQUIPMENT AND WIRING FOR MECHANICAL DIVISION A. Unless otherwise indicated, all motors and controls shall be furnished, set in place and wired in accordance with the following schedule. (MD is Mechanical Division - ED is Electrical Division). ITEM FURNISHED SET IN WIRED AND Mountain Haus Boiler Replacement 03/18/2014 100% CD's/Permit MECHANICAL GENERAL PROVISIONS 23 0010 - 8 UNDER PLACE OR MOUNTED UNDER CONNECTED UNDER 1. Equipment Motors and Thermal overloads, resistance heaters (c). MD MD ED 2. Motor Controllers; magnetic starters, reduced voltage starters and overload relays. MD ED(a) ED 3. Disconnect switches, fused or unfused, H.P. rated switches, thermal overload switches and fuses, manual operating switches. ED(a) ED(a) ED 4. Push-button stations, pilot lights, multi-speed switches, float switches, thermostats, control relays, time clocks, control transformers, control panels, motor valves, damper motors, solenoid valves, EP and PE switches and interlocks. MD MD(b) MD(b) 5. Contactors, 120V control circuit outlets for control panels and for boiler controls and for fire protection controls and smoke detectors. ED ED ED 6. Duct Detectors, fire/smoke dampers, elevator vent dampers. MD MD ED(c) a. If furnished as part of factory wired equipment, wiring and connections only by ED. b. If float switches, line thermostats, P.E. switches, time switches, etc., carry the FULL LOAD CURRENT to any motor, they shall be furnished by the Mechanical Division, but shall be set in place and connected under the Electrical Division, except that where such items are no integral part of the mechanical equipment, or directly attached to ducts, piping, etc., they shall be set in place under the Mechanical Division and connected by the Electrical Division. If they do not carry the FULL LOAD CURRENT to any motor they shall be furnished, set in place and wired under the Mechanical Division. Control devices carrying full load current furnished by Mechanical and wired by Electrical shall be located at the device being controlled, unless shown on drawings or mutual agreement is made between the contractors with no change in the contract price. 1) Wiring from alarm contacts to alarm system by ED; all control function wiring by MD. c. The above list does not attempt to include all components. All items necessary for a complete system shall be included in the base contract. B. Connections to all controls directly attached to ducts, piping and mechanical equipment shall be made with flexible connectors. 3.09 IDENTIFICATION A. Piping 1. All exposed piping, except piping in finished spaces, shall be identified in conformance with "Scheme for the Identification of Piping Systems", ANSI A13. All markers must be in compliance with respect to (1) proper letter color, (2) proper letter size, (3) correct background color, and (4) proper marker length. 2. Directional flow arrows shall be applied adjacent to each pipe mark. 3. For pipes under 3/4" O.D. color coded (as described above) identification tags shall be securely fastened at all required locations. Tags shall be 1-1/2 inches in diameter. 4. All piping shall be marked at the following locations: (1) next to each valve and fitting, (2) at each branch and riser take-off, (3) at each wall, ceiling or floor penetration, (4) on pipes that lead to and from underground areas, and (5) every 30 feet on horizontal and vertical pipe runs. Identification of all piping systems shall conform to the designations in the mechanical legend on the drawings. B. Valves Mountain Haus Boiler Replacement 03/18/2014 100% CD's/Permit MECHANICAL GENERAL PROVISIONS 23 0010 - 9 1. All valves shall be identified by color coded (to match piping system identification) tags which indicate both service and number. Tags shall be 1-1/2 inch in diameter and have 1/4 inch high letters to indicate service and 7/16 inch high numbers. Tags shall be securely fastened to all valves. Service designations shall match abbreviations for piping systems given in mechanical legend on the drawings. Valve charts shall be provided and shall include (1) valve identification number, (2) service, (3) location, and (4) purpose. Valve charts shall be mounted in metal frame with glass enclosure. One valve chart shall be secured on a wall in the boiler room. A second valve chart shall be delivered to the Owner's authorized representative. Also a copy of the valve chart shall be included in the Operations and Maintenance Instructions. C. All fire dampers and their access doors shall be identified by printed stencil secured to the access door or a location approved by the Architect. D. All pneumatic and electric controls, starters, air handling units, pumps, and all other equipment and controls shall be identified by stencil or permanent labeling. E. Care shall be taken not to paint over nameplates. 3.10 FLUSHING, CLEANING & STERILIZING A. Intent: It is the intent of this specification to require that all work, including the inside of equipment, be left in a clean condition with all dust, grease, and construction debris removed. 1. Piping and connection equipment to be left free of sediments, core sand, grease, etc. 2. Clean all exposed surfaces of piping, ducts and hangers, etc., sufficiently to receive paint. Vacuum ducts as required for debris removal. 3. Air systems shall not be operated without filters. Replace the filters or clean permanent type filters just prior to substantial completion. All air systems shall be furnished with one additional set of filters for owner replacement. 4. Remove and clean all screens, interceptors, strainers, etc., in piping systems just prior to substantial completion. 5. Clean and wipe dry all plumbing fixtures, exposed valves, faucets, and piping, etc. that are exposed just prior to substantial completion. Clean all equipment and fixtures per manufacturer’s specifications to avoid scratching finished surfaces. Leave all plumbing fixtures ready to use. 6. Clean interior and exterior of all air handling equipment of all construction debris. Clean exterior of all exposed ductwork just prior to substantial completion. 7. Thoroughly clean all equipment room floors after completion of equipment, pipe and duct cleaning. A condition of final acceptance will be the cleanliness of all exposed systems, equipment, and equipment rooms. B. Before final connections are made in the piping systems, blow out all piping with air and then wash out with cleaning compounds. Then flush the system to remove of all foreign materials. Furnish all temporary connections, valves, etc, required for this purpose. Clean the boiler and chiller by the same procedure. C. Clean the boiler by the same procedure. D. After flushing, sterilize the domestic water system in accordance with Section 22 1116. 3.11 TESTING A. Test all drain and waste lines with standing water test of twelve feet of head, held long enough to visually inspect each joint. B. Test all low pressure steam, condensate, heating water, snowmelt, reduced pressure domestic water piping, condenser water, and chilled water piping at 150 psig hydrostatic pressure before connecting to unit. C. Test all high pressure steam and condensate, domestic water service lines to PRV, fire lines, radiant panel (embedded in concrete) and anti-freeze piping at 200 psig hydro static pressure. Mountain Haus Boiler Replacement 03/18/2014 100% CD's/Permit MECHANICAL GENERAL PROVISIONS 23 0010 - 10 D. Test all air, oil and gas piping under 60 psig air pressure. E. Test all refrigeration piping under 150 psig pressure using oil pumped, dry nitrogen and tapping of joints if there is any loss of pressure, soap each joint to find leaks. Charge with 10 psig refrigerant and test with halide torch or electronic leak detector. Evacuate using vacuum pump to 500 microns and purge twice with oil pumped, dry nitrogen. F. Test all high velocity ductwork from supply fan to boxes before ducts are concealed and before boxes are connected. All openings shall be capped off and partial sections of the duct to be tested using a fan capable of building 8" S.P. Use U-gauge manometer to test S.P. Repair all audible and visible leaks using smoke in ducts. G. All tests must be done to the satisfaction of the local authorities having jurisdiction, before covering. H. All hydrostatic tests to be held for a minimum of six hours without loss of pressure. Air tests to be held for a minimum of two hours without loss of pressure. I. Furnish all instruments required for testing. 3.12 PLACING IN OPERATION A. Clean all ducts, pipes, equipment, controls etc., of plaster and other foreign debris. B. Before final acceptance, clean or replace all strainers, oil or grease all bearings and clean out all drains. Clean and recoat all permanent filters, replace throwaway type filters with new filters. C. The systems shall be put into operation. 1. The Contractor shall verify that all controls are set to meet operating conditions specified. a. Example: Boiler operating and limit controls set where specified. 2. The contractor shall verify that all pieces of equipment are operable and that all sequences of control are being met. 3. The contractor to adjust settings through 1st year as required by MECHANICAL ENGINEER. 3.13 BALANCING A. The balancing of the system shall be part of this contract. Include in bid the cost of balancing and adjusting. B. At the completion of the installation, the mechanical systems shall be adjusted and balanced by an independent balancing firm specializing in this work. The firm must have a Registered Professional Engineer in charge of the work, must have a local office with resident personnel in the Jackson area or within 100 miles of the project. The firm must have experience and qualifications satisfactory to the MECHANICAL ENGINEER and must be accepted by him prior to bidding. All work must be done under the direct supervision of the Registered Professional Engineer. The firm shall submit a booklet showing procedure and data forms to be used in balancing when asking for acceptance. C. Before commencing work, verify that systems are complete and operable. Ensure the following: 1. Equipment is operable and in a safe and normal condition. 2. Temperature control systems are installed complete and operable. 3. Proper thermal overload protection is in place for electrical equipment. 4. Fire and volume dampers are in place and open. 5. Coil fins have been cleaned and combed. 6. Access doors are closed and duct end caps are in place. 7. Hydronic systems have been flushed, filled, and vented. 8. Correct pump rotation. 9. Proper strainer baskets are clean and in place. 10. Service and balance valves are open. 11. Report any defects or deficiencies noted during performance of services to Architect/Engineer. 12. Promptly report abnormal conditions in mechanical systems or conditions which prevent system balance. Mountain Haus Boiler Replacement 03/18/2014 100% CD's/Permit MECHANICAL GENERAL PROVISIONS 23 0010 - 11 13. If, for design reasons, system cannot be properly balanced, report as soon as observed. 14. Beginning of work means acceptance of existing conditions. D. The Mechanical Contractor is to furnish and install such items as thermometer wells, pressure test cocks, access doors, etc, as required to allow tests and adjustments to be made as described in this section. E. Adjust and balance all air and water systems. Check, adjust and balance all systems to meet the design conditions and tabulate all information on acceptable forms. All systems shall be checked for proper performance during design conditions, both heating and cooling. Balancing and adjusting shall include but not be limited to the following: 1. Adjust all valves and/or fittings on each piece of radiation or water coil to provide specified air temperature rise or drop, heating or cooling capacity and gpm flow, all with control valves open. a. Adjust water systems to provide required or design quantities. b. Where flow metering devices are not installed, base flow balance on temperature difference across various heat transfer elements in the system. c. Adjust systems to provide specified pressure drops and flows through heat transfer elements prior to thermal testing. Perform balancing by measurement of temperature differential in conjunction with air balancing. d. Effect adjustment of water distribution systems by means of balancing cocks, valves, and fittings. Do not use service or shut-off valves for balancing unless indexed for balance point. e. Where available pump capacity is less than total flow requirements or individual system parts, full flow in one part may be simulated by temporary restriction of flow to other parts. 2. After all balancing is done, tabulate the following and include in a written report to the MECHANICAL ENGINEER. a. RPM, amperage and voltage input to each motor (include all motors). b. Nameplate data and overload heater capacity installed for motor. c. Entrance and exit air pressure at each fan, filter, coil and louver. d. CFM capacity of each fan system, and at each grille, register, diffuser, return intake and exhaust louver. e. Total static pressure across each fan system. f. Air temperature of each heated or air-conditioned space and at the entrance and exit of each automatic damper and coil. g. Entrance and discharge pressure at each pump. h. Water temperature and pressure at entrance and exit of each chiller, condenser, boiler, heat exchanger, heating coil and cooling coil. i. GPM flow of each pump. j. Gas flow and pressure to each appliance and gas pressure at meter under flow. F. Make special note of any discrepancy between tabulated conditions and specified conditions and call to the MECHANICAL ENGINEER'S attention. Rebalance and retabulate information as required by the MECHANICAL ENGINEER to meet design conditions. G. Incorporate in the report, reduced size copies of the mechanical drawings. Where the point of measurement cannot be described adequately, provide a cross reference number in the report tabulations and at the point of measurement on the drawings. H. Permanently mark settings of valves, dampers, and other adjustment devices allowing settings to be restored. Set and lock memory stops. I. After adjustment, take measurements to verify balance has not been disrupted or that such disruption has been rectified. J. At final inspection, recheck random selections of data recorded in report. Recheck points or areas as selected and witnessed by the Owner. K. Check and adjust systems approximately six months after final acceptance and submit report. Mountain Haus Boiler Replacement 03/18/2014 100% CD's/Permit MECHANICAL GENERAL PROVISIONS 23 0010 - 12 3.14 OPERATION AND MAINTENANCE INSTRUCTIONS A. Books of Operating and Maintenance Instructions shall be personally delivered to the Owner's authorized representative and the Owner instructed as to their use and the equipment involved. (Provide two books for each building). Also, instruct the Owner's personnel on each valve and the valve chart previously specified. B. The book shall contain, but not be limited to, the following general items: 1. Spare parts lists for each piece of equipment. 2. Operating manuals for each piece of equipment and control. 3. Lubrication charts showing type of lubricant and application methods and frequencies. 4. Filter cleaning or replacement schedule. (On Contractor's letterhead stationary). 5. Preventive maintenance schedule for checking all items such as belt drive, safety controls and oil and refrigerant charges. Cleaning schedule of all strainers, traps, coils, tubes, tower pans, sprays, etc. (On Contractor's letterhead stationary). 6. Water treatment recommendations for boiler, tower, etc. 7. Normal operating instructions including a sequence of operation for each system. (On Contractor's letterhead stationary). 8. Instructions as to procedure to be followed for any emergency situation, such as alarms or safety items being tripped. (On Contractor's letterhead stationary). 9. Instructions on who to call for service during guarantee period. (On Contractor's letterhead stationary). 10. Record of equipment installed (copy of each shop drawing as set forth under "Shop Drawing" Paragraph). 11. All warranties provided by Manufacturers on their equipment that run longer than the one year guarantee by the Contractor. C. Books shall be arranged in sequence to match the equipment schedules included in the specifications. D. Approval will not be given for final payment until the tests, balancing and operating instruction portions have been completed. 3.15 EQUIPMENT START-UP A. All refrigeration, boilers, and packaged equipment shall be started by the manufacturer or under the manufacturer's supervision. Start-up data shall be recorded in logs. Copies of start-up logs shall be forwarded to Mechanical Engineer and included in Operation and Maintenance manuals. END OF SECTION 23 0010 Mountain Haus Boiler Replacement 03/18/2014 100% CD's/Permit BASIC MATERIALS AND METHODS FOR HVAC 23 0050 - 1 SECTION 23 0050—BASIC MATERIALS AND METHODS FOR HVAC PART 1 GENERAL 1.01 RELATED DOCUMENTS A. The General Conditions, Special Conditions and Contract Documents are a part of these specifications. Consult them for further instructions and be governed by the requirements thereunder. 1.02 STANDARDS FOR MATERIALS A. All materials shall conform to current applicable industry standards. Workmanship and neat appearance shall be as important as the electrical and mechanical operation. Defective or damaged materials shall be replaced or repaired, prior to final acceptance, in a manner acceptable to the Architect or Owner at no additional cost to the Owner. B. All equipment shall have housings suitable for the location installed. C. Provide products and materials that are new, clean, free of defects, and free of damage and corrosion, unless specifically directed to reuse any existing materials. PART 2 PRODUCTS 2.01 MOTORS A. Furnish ball bearing, squirrel cage, open dripproof, normal starting torque motor of the horsepower and current characteristics specified with thermal overload protection and dustproof and leak proof bearing rings and constructed for use at the altitude where the work is to be located. Motors guaranteed to operate continuously at full load with temperature rise in any part not to exceed NEMA Standards. Motors shall be commercially, dynamically balanced and tested at the factory before shipment and selected for quiet operation. Provide motors for V-belt drives with a cast iron and steel base, with slide rail and adjustable screw device and belt guard. Line up motors and drives and place motors and equipment on foundations ready for operation. B. Motors rated 1 horsepower or greater shall be Department of Energy (DOE) approved Óenergy efficient , meeting the requirements of EP Act 92, and shall meet NEMA 12-6C full load efficiencies. Where not commercially available, power factors shall be capacitor corrected by equipment manufacturer to at least 90 percent under rated load conditions. 2.02 STARTERS A. Provide starters of current and capacity ratings to serve the motor intended. All three phase starters to have over current protection on all three legs. On three phase starters furnish a Phase Monitor Control Relay, Time Mark B258B, or A258B, three-phase monitor control relay to open on phase reversal, phase failure or phase under voltage. Phase monitor control relay shall be mounted and wired in the starter enclosure by this contractor. Furnish switches and green running pilot light in starter cover. If pilot lights are specified on control panel, individual starter lights will not be required. B. Provide integral transformer and 120-volt control circuit on all starters, which are furnished with control circuits. C. Size thermal overload relays for approximately 115% of full load motor current. Switch and fuse units will not be acceptable unless specifically indicated. D. All motors 25 horsepower or greater shall be equipped with reduced voltage starters. Mountain Haus Boiler Replacement 03/18/2014 100% CD's/Permit BASIC MATERIALS AND METHODS FOR HVAC 23 0050 - 2 2.03 BELT DRIVES A. Provide belt drives with cast iron sheaves, either companion driven sheaves (except for two groove) or fixed pitch sheaves. If fixed pitch sheaves are used, the MECHANICAL ENGINEER reserves the right to direct speed changes be made, if in his opinion, these are warranted after final balancing. Fixed pitch sheaves shall be bushed type. Provide two groove adjustable drive sheaves with a key for holding pitch adjustment. Use standard FHP, A, B, C and D Sections. FHP belt drives may be used for motors less than three horsepower. Select belt sections for drives for three horsepower and over from the following chart: MOTOR SPEEDS MOTOR SPEEDS HP 1750 1160 HP 1750 1160 a. 3 A A ?.? C C b. 5 A A ?.? C C c. 7.5 B B ?.? B or C C d. 10 B B ?.? C C e. 15 B C ?.? C D f. 25 C C ?.? C D B. Provide matched belts sized for 150% of motor schedule horsepower. When A-B sheaves are used, use B Section belts only. 2.04 ACCESS DOORS A. Provide painted, steel access doors with key lock suitable for the surface in which they are installed and satisfactory to the Architect. Recessed style to accept plaster finish, recessed type to accept acoustical tile, flush panel for drywall or flanged flushed panel for remodeling. In installed in fire rated surface, access door to carry proper rating. 2.05 ALTITUDE RATINGS A. Except as otherwise noted, all equipment capacities, air qualities, etc., are adjusted ratings for the elevation of this project as noted on drawings. Manufacturer¢s ratings shall be adjusted to provide net ratings shown. 2.06 FLEXIBLE PIPE CONNECTIONS A. For steel piping, construct with stainless steel inner hose and braided exterior sleeve. B. For copper piping, construct with bronze inner hose and braided exterior sleeve. C. Use connectors suitable for minimum 125 psi WSP and 450º and 200 psi WOG and 250ºF. D. Construct spool pieces to exact size for insertion of flexible connection. 2.07 FIRE STOPPING MATERIAL A. General: 1. Products to be used shall have been tested in accordance with ASTM E 814-88 and be listed in the UL Fire Resistance Directory. B. Bare Piping: Mountain Haus Boiler Replacement 03/18/2014 100% CD's/Permit BASIC MATERIALS AND METHODS FOR HVAC 23 0050 - 3 1. Model FD 150 or CP-25. C. Insulated Piping: 1. Model: CP-25 or FS-195, Intumescent. 2. "No-sag "or "self-leveling " as required. D. Plastic Piping: 1. Model: CP-25 or FS-195 Intumescent. 2. "No-Sag " or "Self-leveling" as required. E. Accessories: 1. Provide Fasteners, Restricting collars, backing materials, and protective coatings as required to comply with the UL system listing. F. Manufacturers: 1. 3M or G.E. 2.08 HEAT TRACE A. Manufacturers: 1. Raychem Model: XL-Trace for freeze protection applied between pipe and insulation. 2. Raychem Model: Ice stop for freeze protection applied inside storm drain leaders and down spouts. 3. Other acceptable manufacturers: a. Thermon. b. Hevi-Duty/Nelson. c. Bylin Engineered Systems. B. Features: 1. Self regulating at all points along its length. 2. 90% power reduction from 40°F pipe temperature to 150°F pipe temperature. 3. No overheating if crossed. 4. Provide outer jacket and braided copper shield for use inside roof drain leaders or on piping without a ground path. C. Accessories: 1. Provide tee, splice, and end seal kits as required by the manufacturer. 2. Provide ambient sensing thermostat in a NEMA 4x enclosure with three (3) contacts rated at 22 amps each. PART 3 EXECUTION 3.01 FREEZE PROTECTION A. Proximity of any equipment component or fluid piping to potential damage from freezing sources shall be avoided wherever possible. Drawings are diagrammatic. Make location adjustments, add insulation and/or control devices and/or heat sources as necessary to prevent or minimize freeze damage potential. The Architect/Engineer will neither guarantee nor be responsible for any consequences of freezing. 3.02 VIBRATION ISOLATION A. Equipment 1. Erect all floor mounted equipment on 4" high concrete pads over the complete floor area of the equipment. Mountain Haus Boiler Replacement 03/18/2014 100% CD's/Permit BASIC MATERIALS AND METHODS FOR HVAC 23 0050 - 4 2. Where inertia bases are indicated, pour these bases within structural channel frames having mountings attached to the inside perimeter and furnished with supplementary spring units. Furnish bases with an 18 gauge sheet metal bottom welded in place to retain the concrete. Anchor bolts and reinforcing bars are to be set in the field, #5 reinforcing bars top and bottom, 12" o.c. both ways. Provide one #5 bar at corners, top and bottom, 2' x 2' long. The mounting housing shall have concrete anchors and form enclosures for the spring elements. No damping material shall be used between the inner and outer housing on mountings and mountings shall have a combination lifting and leveling adjustment and 1/4" thick neoprene acoustical friction pads bonded to the steel base. 3. Mount base mounted pumps and compressors (including temperature control compressors) on inertia base with a weight equal to not less than 1-1/2 times the combined weight of the pump and motor. Each inertia base for horizontally split case pumps shall include supports for base elbows at the suction and discharge connections. Where the concrete is "T" shaped, or other than rectangular, mounting shall be self contained concrete inserts with flush openings on the side of the foundation for spring adjustment or removal. 4. Mount supply and return centrifugal fans, cabinet fans and air handling units (where called for on plans) on inertia base with a weight equal to not less than 1-1/2 times the combined weight of the fan and motor. Where centrifugal fan is used, mount fan and motor on common steel base. 5. Support each air or refrigeration compressor, (including temperature control compressor) base mounted pump, factory assembled air handing unit and fan by Mason Industries or equivalent spring type vibration isolators, as follows: EQUIPMENT GROUND SUPPORTED SLAB OR BASEMENT MASON Engr. Spec Min Static Defl. (in.) Engr. Spec. Min Static Defl. (in.) a. Refrigeration Machines (Note 2) 1) 2) Centrifugal Chillers or Heat Pumps a) Cooler condenser Mounted Hermetic-Compressor s A-K 0.35 C-K 0.75 b) Cooler condenser alongside Hermetic-compressor s A-K 0.35 C-K 0.75 c) Open Type Compressors (Note 4)A-G-K 0.35 C-G-K 0.75 3) Refrigeration Reciprocating Compressors a) 500 RPM to 750 RPMB 0.75 B 1.5 b) 751 RMP and over B 0.75 B 0.75 4) a) b) b. Pumps (Note 2) 1) Close Coupled a) Thru 5 HP A-J-K 0.35 B-J-K 0.75 b) 7½ HP and larger B-J-K 0.75 B-J-K 0.75 2) Base mounted (Note 3) a) Up to 60 HP B-J-K 0.75 B-J-K 0.75 Mountain Haus Boiler Replacement 03/18/2014 100% CD's/Permit BASIC MATERIALS AND METHODS FOR HVAC 23 0050 - 5 b) 75 HP and larger B-J-K 0.75 BJK 1.5 c. Factory Assembled H & V Units 1) Curb Mounted Rooftop Units Y 1.0 Y 1.0 2) Suspended Units a) Thru 5 HP D 1.0 D 1.0 b) 7-1/2 HP and larger – 275 RPM TO 400 RPM D 1.5 D 1.5 c) 7-1/2 HP and larger – 401 RPM and over D 1.0 D 1.0 3) Floor Mounted Units a) Thru 5 HP A 0.35 B-H 0.75 b) 7-1/2 HP and larger – 275 to 401 RPM A 0.35 B 1.5. c) 7-1/2 HP to 40 HP – 401 RPM and over A 0.35 B 0.75 d) 50 HP and larger – 401 and over A 0.35 B 0.75 d. Air Compressors (Note2) 1) Tank Type B-J-L 0.75 B-J-L 0.75 2) Horiz, Vert, 1 or 2 Cylinder (Note 5) a) 275 RPM to 499 RPMB-J-L 2.5 B-J-L 2.5 b) 500 RPM to 800 RPMB-J-L 1.5 B-J-L 1.5 e. Blowers 1) Utilities Sets a) Floor Mounted (Note 8) A 0.35 B 0.75 b) Roof Mounted B-J C 0.75 c) Suspended Unit (Note 8) -- -- D 2.5 2) Centrifugal Blowers (Note 9) A-J .035 B-J 3) Tubular Centrifugal and Axial Fans (Note 7) a) Suspended Units D Refer to Guide. b) Floor Mounted w/Motor on/in Fan Casing A 0.35 B-J c) Floor Mounted Arrangement 1 or any Separately Mounted Motor A-J 0.35 B 0.75 f. Cooling Towers and Condensing Units A 0.35 C 6. All mountings used out of doors shall be hot dipped galvanized. 7. Equipment with operating weight different than the installed weight, such as chillers and cooling towers and equipment exposed to wind, such as roof fans, cooling towers, etc., shall be mounted on spring mountings as directed in Mason Engineering Spec. B, but a housing shall be provided that includes vertical limit stops to prevent spring extension when weight is removed. Limit stops shall be out of contract during normal operation. Mountain Haus Boiler Replacement 03/18/2014 100% CD's/Permit BASIC MATERIALS AND METHODS FOR HVAC 23 0050 - 6 B. Piping 1. Chillers, Condensers, Towers and Compressors a. Isolate all refrigerant piping from the structure throughout by double deflection spring and neoprene hangers with 1" deflection. Hang piping so that it does not touch any part of the structure. Connect pipes to compressor or condensing unit with convoluted bellows braided metallic flexible pipe connectors. b. Isolate all condenser water piping, connected to condenser on any packaged chiller with a reciprocating compressor, from the structure throughout the equipment room by double deflection spring and neoprene hangers with 1" deflection. Hang piping so that it does not touch any part of the structure. Connect pipes to condenser and to cooling tower with Teflon flexible equipment connectors. c. Isolate all chilled water piping, connected to evaporator on packaged chiller with reciprocating compressor, from the structure throughout the equipment room by double deflection spring and neoprene hangers with 1" deflection. Hang piping so that it does not touch any part of the structure. Connect pipes to evaporator with Teflon flexible equipment connectors. 2. Base Mounted Pumps and Air Compressors (including temperature control compressors). Connect piping to air compressors with convoluted bellows, braided metal flexible pipe connectors. Isolate air piping from the structure for the first six hangers by double deflection spring and neoprene hangers with 1" deflection. Hang piping so that it does not touch any part of the structure. Connect piping to base mounted pumps with Teflon flexible equipment connectors. 3. Domestic Hot and Cold Water, Heating Water and Waste Piping a. Domestic hot and cold water piping one inch diameter and smaller shall be isolated with the Acousto-Plumb System of orange and blue pipe isolators, holders, and guide, as manufactured by LSP/Specialty Products Company, Tel (800) 854-3215. b. Isolate waste piping and domestic hot and cold water piping larger than one inch in diameter with Trisolator system of pipe isolators as manufactured by Elmdor/Stoneman, Tel. (818) 968-8699. c. Do not allow the piping, pipe connectors, pipe hangers or valve to directly touch the structure, studs, gypsum board, or other pipes. d. Copper waste piping must be completely wrapped with Lowry’s acoustical pipe wrap. The wrap is manufactured by Harry A. Lowry, Tel. (818) 768-4661. C. Flexible Connections 1. Where ductwork or piping is connected to fans, air handling units, pumps, or other equipment that may transmit vibration along the piping or ductwork, connect by means of a flexible connection constructed of fire resistant canvas, flex piping, or other approved method. Connections shall be suitable for pressures developed at the point of installation. Flexible material shall be waterproof for weather exposed ductwork, shall show no visible strain during operating conditions, and shall comply with code requirements. Flex connections for range exhaust systems shall be fire rated. 3.03 PIPE HANGERS A. General 1. Provide pipe supports for vertical lines at each floor. Provide pipe hangers to support the systems without sagging, including hangers at each offset or change in direction, at ends of branches over five feet in length and at the following maximum spacing: Pipe Size Hanger Spacing Hanger Rod Diameter(Minimum) a. 3/4" and smaller 6 ft. 3/8" b. 1" 8 ft. 3/8" c. 1-1/4" through 2" 10 ft. 3/8" d. 2-1/2" through 3" 10 ft. 1/2" e. 4" through 5" 10 ft. 1/2" Mountain Haus Boiler Replacement 03/18/2014 100% CD's/Permit BASIC MATERIALS AND METHODS FOR HVAC 23 0050 - 7 f. 6" through 10" 2 ft 5/8" g. 12" and larger 12 ft. 7/8" h. Cast iron no hub 5 ft. and at joints B. Individual Hangers 1. Individual hangers for non-insulated copper piping and insulated copper heating piping and insulated domestic hot water and circulating water piping shall be copper plated, adjustable swivel ring hangers similar to Auto Grip 500, Kin-Line felt lined 440-F or Michigan Hanger Company Series 102 with polyvinyl coating, with insulation over hangers. 2. Individual hangers for insulated cold piping (steel or copper) shall be zinc plated, adjustable swivel ring hangers similar to Auto Grip Figure 800, Kin Line 400 Series, Michigan Series 103. Hangers shall support pipe with hangers over the insulation. The system shall be complete with Auto Grip or Michigan Zinc plated steel shield, Pipe Shields or Kin-Line 460 zinc plated steel shield. Provide insulation insert of high density polyethylene foam, calcium silicate, high density glass fiber or expanded perlite divided in longitudinal half sections and covered with fire resistant vapor barrier jacket. High density inserts are not required in plumbing walls behind plumbing fixtures. 3. Individual hangers for all insulated or non-insulated steel piping (except steam and high temperature hot water) shall be zinc plated, adjustable swivel ring hangers similar to Auto Grip Figure 400, Kin-Line 400 Series, Michigan Series 100. Hangers shall support pipe with insulation over hangers. 4. Individual hangers for steam and high temperature water piping (250oF and above) shall be adjustable swivel pipe rolls, similar to Grinnel No. 171, 181 or 174 with pipe covering protection saddle, similar to Grinnel No. 185-186 or 360o zinc plated steel shield for insulation thickness specified. C. Trapeze Hangers 1. Parallel runs of piping may be supported on trapeze hangers. Trapeze shall be Unistrut P-1000-3 or Kin Line 211, 371 or 372 equivalent by Elcen or Kindorff. System shall be selected to support five times the weight of thrust applied without failure. 2. All non-insulated steel pipe and insulated steel heating water pipe shall have standard pipe straps at each support. 3. All non-insulated copper pipe, insulated copper domestic hot and re-circulating water piping and insulated copper heating piping shall rest on neoprene sleeves and have standard pipe straps at each support. 4. All cold insulated pipe (steel or copper) shall rest on Fee and Mason Figure 81 or equivalent by unistrut, or Kin-Line, galvanized steel insulation shield or 360o galvanized steel shield. Provide insulation insert of high density polyethylene foam, calcium silicate, high density fiber glass or expanded perlite divided in longitudinal half sections and covered with fire resistant vapor barrier jacket. Provide pipe strap over insulation at each support. High density inserts are not required in plumbing walls behind plumbing fixtures. 5. All steam and high temperature hot water pipe shall have pipe covering protection saddle and shall be supported on Unistrut P-2474-3, pipe rollers or equivalent at each support. 6. See this Section, 3.02, Vibration Isolation for special hangers. 3.04 CONTROL VALVE PIPING A. If the control valve size is smaller than the pipe size marked on the drawing, the reduction in size pertains to the valve only. Gate valves, globe valves, and strainers on either side of the automatic valve shall be a minimum of the pipe size marked on the drawings. 3.05 PUMP CONNECTIONS A. Where the suction or discharge of any pump unit is smaller than the pipe size noted on the drawings, all strainers, valves, flexible connections, expansion joints, etc., shall be a minimum of the pipe size noted on the drawings. 3.06 ACCESS DOORS A. Furnish an access door for each pipe chase for each floor. This includes both toilet plumbing chases and pipe riser chases. Access doors assembly to be minimum size of 16" x 16". Mountain Haus Boiler Replacement 03/18/2014 100% CD's/Permit BASIC MATERIALS AND METHODS FOR HVAC 23 0050 - 8 B. Also, furnish access doors in all non-removable ceilings and in partitions and walls where necessary to maintain access to plumbing cleanouts, shock absorbers, fire dampers, manual dampers, valves and other mechanical devices requiring access. Size these as required for access. C. Provide all access doors to the General Contractor for him to construct into the building. D. Submit shop drawing indicating the locations of all access doors. 3.07 WELDING A. Provide all welding in accordance with the welding procedures of the National Certified Pipe Welding Bureau or other approved procedure conforming to the requirements of the ASME Boiler and Pressure Vessel Code, or the ASA Code for Pressure Piping. Only welders who have been fully qualified under the specified procedure shall be employed. 3.08 PIPE DEPTHS A. Interior pipe below slabs shall be a minimum of 4 inches below slab and shall not be in contact with concrete at any point. Minimum exterior cover over water piping, unless otherwise shown or required by code, shall be 8 feet above the top of the pipe. Area drains shall have maximum cover possible consistent with finished landscape and acceptable flow lines. Gas piping shall have minimum of 3 foot cover with warning tape 12" above pipe. Sanitary waste and storm drain lines shall have 3 foot cover minimum. 3.09 PIPE AND PIPE FITTINGS A. Full-length pipe in longest lengths possible shall be used. All threads shall be right hand, pipe standard, clean cut, full depth and tapering. Install piping so as to permit complete draining. Provide drains at all low points. All interior soil, waste and condensate lines shall have uniform pitch in the direction of flow of not less than 1/4 inch per foot unless otherwise noted. Ream out all pipe ends, turn on ends and rattle before installing. 3.10 DUCTS A. Construct straight and smooth with neatly finished joints, airtight and free from vibration. Internal ends of slip joints shall be made in the direction of flow. Changes in duct dimensions and shape shall be gradual and uniform. Curved elbows, unless otherwise noted, to have centerline radius of at least 1-1/2 times the duct width. Air turns shall be installed in all abrupt elbows and shall be arranged to permit air to make turns without appreciable turbulence and to remain quiet when the system is in operation. Construction of ducts shall be per the details and recommendations of the latest edition of the ASHRAE handbook and U.M.C. The most stringent requirement governs in conflicts. "Duct mate" joint method may be utilized provided all portions of seam/joint materials are provided by "duct mate" and installed in strict compliance with manufacturer's standards. 3.11 FIRE DAMPERS AND FIRE/SMOKE DAMPERS A. Install as required by NFPA pamphlet No. 90A, the Uniform Building Code, Uniform Mechanical Code and as required by local codes. Provide a duct access door to each fire damper and service access when architecture is restrictive. Furnish UL 555S labeled fire and fire/smoke dampers. Refer to architectural drawings for fire resistive ratings of walls, floors, ceilings, etc. 3.12 FLEXIBLE CONNECTIONS A. Where ductwork or piping is connected to fans, air handling units, pumps, or other equipment that may transmit vibration along the piping or ductwork, connect by means of a flexible connection constructed of fire resistant canvas, flex piping, or other approved method. Connections shall be suitable for pressures developed at the point of installation. Flexible material shall be waterproof for weather exposed ductwork, shall show no visible strain during operating conditions, and shall comply with code requirements. Flex connections for range exhaust systems shall be fire rated. Mountain Haus Boiler Replacement 03/18/2014 100% CD's/Permit BASIC MATERIALS AND METHODS FOR HVAC 23 0050 - 9 3.13 CLEANING A. Intent: It is the intent of this specification to require that all work, including the inside of equipment, be left in a clean condition with all dust, grease, and construction debris removed. Refer also to Division 01 specifications. B. Piping and connected equipment to be left free of sediments, core sand, grease, etc. C. Clean all exposed surfaces of piping, ducts and hangers, etc., sufficiently to receive paint. Vacuum ducts as required for debris removal. D. Air systems shall not be operated without filters. Replace the filters or clean permanent type filters just prior to substantial completion. All air systems with disposable filters shall be furnished with one additional set of boxed filters for owner replacement. E. Remove and clean all screens, interceptors, strainers, etc., in piping systems just prior to substantial completion. F. Clean and wipe dry all plumbing fixtures, exposed valves, faucets, and piping, etc. that are exposed just prior to substantial completion. Clean all equipment and fixtures per manufacturer's specifications to avoid scratching finished surfaces. Leave all plumbing fixtures ready to use. G. Clean interior and exterior of all air handling equipment of all construction debris. Clean exterior of all exposed ductwork just prior to substantial completion. H. Thoroughly clean all equipment room floors after completion of equipment, pipe and duct cleaning. A condition of final acceptance will be the cleanliness of all exposed systems, equipment, and equipment rooms. 3.14 EXPANSION COMPENSATION AND SEISMIC PROTECTION A. Examine piping layout and provide anchors or expansion joints required to adequately protect system. B. Install flexible pipe connectors on pipes connected to equipment supported by vibration isolation. C. Accomplish structural work and provide equipment required to control expansion and contraction of piping, loops, pipe offsets, and swing joints, and provide corrugated bellows type expansion joints where required. D. Provide seismic bracing as required by code for all ducts, piping and equipment. 3.15 SLEEVES, CUTTING, PATCHING A. Major openings in the structure for mechanical work may be shown on the structural drawings; these will be done under the Architectural Division of these Specifications. It is the Contractor's responsibility to set necessary sleeves and boxes for pipe and ducts (not shown on the structural drawings) before erection of structure. This Contractor is responsible for the correct size and location of all openings including coordination with the other trades. All sleeves shall be large enough to allow for continuous insulation to pass through the sleeve. B. In mechanical equipment room floors, all pipe sleeves to the Schedule 40 pipe and shall extend 1" above finished floor. In mechanical equipment room floors, all ducts shall have a 4" high concrete curb around duct. C. Caulk all pipes and ducts leaving equipment rooms between sleeve and duct or pipe, 1" deep on each side of wall, floor, or roof. Caulk bare pipes and ducts with lead wool. Caulk insulated pipes with 1- or 2-part polysulphide caulking compound. D. In the same manner as described in Paragraph C above, caulk all other pipes and ducts throughout the building which penetrate walls and floors and roofs this includes pipe and ducts to rooftop units. Mountain Haus Boiler Replacement 03/18/2014 100% CD's/Permit BASIC MATERIALS AND METHODS FOR HVAC 23 0050 - 10 E. All pipes which may be in view shall be finished with chrome floor, wall and ceiling plates, except in equipment rooms. 3.16 EXCAVATION AND BACKFILL A. Excavation, trenching, bedding of pipe, placement and cover, backfilling, etc., in conjunction with work under this Division, shall be per requirements of Division 2 and the additional requirements specified herein. B. Trenches: Slope bottoms uniformly to drain. Trench bottoms to be firm, free from large rocks or boulders, or shall have concrete cradles placed to support piping. Cradles to bear on undisturbed soil. C. Cast iron: Place on firm trench bottom shaped to accept hubs. Both hubs and pipe shall have uniform firm bearing. Place a minimum of 12 inches of loose rock-free material over pipe. D. Other piping, conduits, culverts: Place on firm trench bottom and backfill per Division 2, 22, and 23 or embed per manufacturer's recommendations. E. Expansion: Place pipe fittings and thrust blocks per manufacturer's recommendations and/or project specifications. F. Excavation: Provide all excavating and backfilling required by the work in this division, all as required by the rules of the State Department of Labor and Equipment. All pipe must be laid on solid earth with bellholes provided for hubs. After pipe is laid in trench, it shall be tested, insulated if specified, and backfilled. G. Compaction 1. Backfill by hand around the pipe and the first 12" over the top of the pipe. Moisten, backfill, and tamp in 8" layers (maximum) with air motor or gasoline driven tamper to consolidate to 90% of the maximum density obtainable at optimum moisture content. (Puddling will not be allowed). 2. Trenches under road surfacing shall have the upper 6" layer, forming the subgrade for pavement compacted to at least 95% of the maximum density obtainable at optimum moisture content for rigid pavements. 3. Density of backfill shall be determined by the requirements of the A.A.S.H.O. in Pamphlet 57. Standard Method T-99-57. 4. Where requirements of the general conditions are more stringent than the above, the general condition requirements shall be met. H. Pavement 1. Accomplish cutting of flexible pavement so that the remaining exposed edge of the pavement conforms vertically and horizontally to a straight line. The width of the section of pavement removed shall be of necessary width for the proper laying of pipe, but shall not exceed 36". Waste material resulting from the above operations will be disposed of in suitable waste areas. Repair pavement to satisfaction of the authorities having jurisdiction. I. Shoring 1. Provide all shoring required to perform the excavation and to protect the project, employees, and public. J. Surveying 1. Establish all lines, grades and elevations. Stake out the work and furnish all lines, stakes (1" x 2" x 10"), and all hubs or hardwood pegs (1" x 1" x 6") to stake out the lines and structures to line and grade. K. Maintaining and Protecting Traffic 1. Maintain sufficient barricades, warning signals and lights to protect pedestrian and vehicular traffic. Provide and maintain such detours as may be necessary to keep traffic moving during construction. L. Surface Drainage and Ground Water 1. Surface drainage shall be diverted away from open excavation and trenching before commencement of work at the location. Surface water on ground water seepage, which enters or accumulates in the Mountain Haus Boiler Replacement 03/18/2014 100% CD's/Permit BASIC MATERIALS AND METHODS FOR HVAC 23 0050 - 11 trenches, shall be removed by pumping or subdraining, and the subgrade or pipe bed restored to original bearing value and conditions. M. Any settling of backfilled trenches which may occur during the warranty period shall be repaired without expense to the Owner, including the complete restoration of all damaged property. 3.17 FOUNDATIONS AND SUPPORTS A. Furnish and install as indicated on the plans and/or as may be necessary for the proper installation of all equipment furnished under this Division, all foundations, bases and supports. Contractor shall be responsible for their correct location and sizes to fit all equipment. Shim and grout between the equipment and its base to align and level. Bolt equipment inertia bases, vibration isolators, and supports to prevent relative movement. B. Furnish all hangers, anchors, sway bracing, guides, etc., for the various piping and duct systems as required for their proper installation. 3.18 FIRE STOPPING A. Install firestopping materials in accordance with their UL and ASTM tested methods. B. Coordinate required annular space with size of pipe and sleeve. C. Requirements for specific systems: 1. Cold piping: Includes chilled water, domestic water, storm water and refrigerant: Insulation and vapor barrier shall be continued through wall and firestopping for “insulated piping” shall be provided. 2. Hot piping to 250°F includes domestic hot water, steam to 15 psig and heating hot water: The Contractor has the option of continuing the insulation through the penetration and providing firestopping for “insulated piping”, or stopping the insulation on either side of the penetration and using firestopping for uninsulated piping”. 3. High temperature piping, over 250°F or over 15 psig steam: Contractor shall stop insulation and provide firestopping for “high temperature piping”. 3.19 HEAT TRACE A. Heat trace cable shall be installed by a licensed electrician. B. Apply the heat trace cable on the pipe after pressure testing. 1. Do not spiral wrap on pipe. 2. Make one wrap at valves. 3. Secure to pipe with methods approved by manufacturer. C. Apply “Electrically Traced” signs on resistance 20 mega ohms. D. Test with a 1000 VDC megger minimum resistance 20 mega ohms. E. Heat trace shall be sized as follows, based on -20°F ambient, to maintain 40°F pipe temperature: DESIGNER NOTE: Verify design temperature and heat trace output.. PIPE SIZE 1" INSULATION 2" INSULATION Less than 2" 3 w/ft 3 w/ft 2", 2-1/2", 3" 5 w/ft 3 w/ft 4", 5", 6" 8 w/ft 5 w/ft 8", 10", 12 " 8 w/ft ea. (2 cable circuits) 8 w/ft Mountain Haus Boiler Replacement 03/18/2014 100% CD's/Permit BASIC MATERIALS AND METHODS FOR HVAC 23 0050 - 12 END OF SECTION 23 0050 Mountain Haus Boiler Replacement 03/18/2014 100% CD's/Permit SLEEVES AND SLEEVE SEALS FOR HVAC PIPING23 0517 - 1 SECTION 23 0517 - SLEEVES AND SLEEVE SEALS FOR HVAC PIPING PART 1 GENERAL 1.01 RELATED DOCUMENTS A. Drawings and general provisions of the Contract, including General and Supplementary Conditions and Division 01 Specification Sections, apply to this Section. 1.02 SUMMARY A. Section Includes: 1. Sleeves. 2. Stack-sleeve fittings. 3. Sleeve-seal systems. 4. Sleeve-seal fittings. 5. Grout. 1.03 ACTION SUBMITTALS A. Product Data: For each type of product indicated. PART 2 PRODUCTS 2.01 SLEEVES 2.02 STACK-SLEEVE FITTINGS A. Manufacturers: Subject to compliance with requirements, provide products by one of the following: 1. Smith, Jay R. Mfg. Co. 2. Zurn Specification Drainage Operation; Zurn Plumbing Products Group. B. Description: Manufactured, cast-iron sleeve with integral clamping flange. Include clamping ring, bolts, and nuts for membrane flashing. 1. Underdeck Clamp: Clamping ring with setscrews. 2.03 SLEEVE-SEAL SYSTEMS A. Manufacturers: Subject to compliance with requirements, provide products by one of the following: 1. Advance Products & Systems, Inc. 2. CALPICO, Inc. 3. Metraflex Company (The). 4. Pipeline Seal and Insulator, Inc. B. Description: Modular sealing-element unit, designed for field assembly, for filling annular space between piping and sleeve. 1. Sealing Elements: EPDM-rubber interlocking links shaped to fit surface of pipe. Include type and number required for pipe material and size of pipe. 2. Pressure Plates: Stainless steel. 3. Connecting Bolts and Nuts: Stainless steel of length required to secure pressure plates to sealing elements. Mountain Haus Boiler Replacement 03/18/2014 100% CD's/Permit SLEEVES AND SLEEVE SEALS FOR HVAC PIPING23 0517 - 2 2.04 SLEEVE-SEAL FITTINGS A. Manufacturers: Subject to compliance with requirements, provide products the following: 1. Presealed Systems. B. Description: Manufactured plastic, sleeve-type, waterstop assembly made for imbedding in concrete slab or wall. Unit has plastic or rubber waterstop collar with center opening to match piping OD. 2.05 GROUT A. Standard: ASTM C 1107/C 1107M, Grade B, post-hardening and volume-adjusting, dry, hydraulic-cement grout. B. Characteristics: Nonshrink; recommended for interior and exterior applications. C. Design Mix: 5000-psi, 28-day compressive strength. D. Packaging: Premixed and factory packaged. PART 3 EXECUTION 3.01 SLEEVE INSTALLATION A. Install sleeves for piping passing through penetrations in floors, partitions, roofs, and walls. B. For sleeves that will have sleeve-seal system installed, select sleeves of size large enough to provide 1-inch annular clear space between piping and concrete slabs and walls. 1. Sleeves are not required for core-drilled holes. C. Fire-Barrier Penetrations: Maintain indicated fire rating of walls, partitions, ceilings, and floors at pipe penetrations. Seal pipe penetrations with firestop materials. Comply with requirements for firestopping specified in Section 078413 "Penetration Firestopping." 3.02 STACK-SLEEVE-FITTING INSTALLATION A. Install stack-sleeve fittings in new slabs as slabs are constructed. 1. Install fittings that are large enough to provide 1/4-inch annular clear space between sleeve and pipe or pipe insulation. 2. Secure flashing between clamping flanges for pipes penetrating floors with membrane waterproofing. Comply with requirements for flashing specified in Section 076200 "Sheet Metal Flashing and Trim." 3. Install section of cast-iron soil pipe to extend sleeve to 2 inches above finished floor level. 4. Extend cast-iron sleeve fittings below floor slab as required to secure clamping ring if ring is specified. 5. Using grout, seal the space around outside of stack-sleeve fittings. B. Fire-Barrier Penetrations: Maintain indicated fire rating of floors at pipe penetrations. Seal pipe penetrations with firestop materials. Comply with requirements for firestopping specified in Section 078413 "Penetration Firestopping." 3.03 SLEEVE-SEAL-SYSTEM INSTALLATION A. Install sleeve-seal systems in sleeves in exterior concrete walls and slabs-on-grade at service piping entries into building. B. Select type, size, and number of sealing elements required for piping material and size and for sleeve ID or hole size. Position piping in center of sleeve. Center piping in penetration, assemble sleeve-seal system Mountain Haus Boiler Replacement 03/18/2014 100% CD's/Permit SLEEVES AND SLEEVE SEALS FOR HVAC PIPING23 0517 - 3 components, and install in annular space between piping and sleeve. Tighten bolts against pressure plates that cause sealing elements to expand and make a watertight seal. 3.04 SLEEVE-SEAL-FITTING INSTALLATION A. Install sleeve-seal fittings in new walls and slabs as they are constructed. B. Assemble fitting components of length to be flush with both surfaces of concrete slabs and walls. Position waterstop flange to be centered in concrete slab or wall. C. Secure nailing flanges to concrete forms. D. Using grout, seal the space around outside of sleeve-seal fittings. 3.05 SLEEVE AND SLEEVE-SEAL SCHEDULE A. Use sleeves and sleeve seals for the following piping-penetration applications: 1. Exterior Concrete Walls above Grade: a. Piping Smaller Than NPS 6: Galvanized-steel wall sleeves. b. Piping NPS 6 and Larger: Galvanized-steel wall sleeves. 2. Exterior Concrete Walls below Grade: a. Piping Smaller Than NPS 6: Galvanized-steel wall sleeves with sleeve-seal system. 1) Select sleeve size to allow for 1-inch annular clear space between piping and sleeve for installing sleeve-seal system. b. Piping NPS 6 and Larger: Galvanized-steel wall sleeves with sleeve-seal system. 1) Select sleeve size to allow for 1-inch annular clear space between piping and sleeve for installing sleeve-seal system. 3. Interior Partitions: a. Piping Smaller Than NPS 6: Galvanized-steel-pipe sleeves. b. Piping NPS 6 and Larger: Galvanized-steel-sheet sleeves. END OF SECTION 230517 Mountain Haus Boiler Replacement 03/18/2014 100% CD's/Permit METERS AND GAGES FOR HVAC PIPING 23 0519 - 1 SECTION 23 0519 - FLOW METERS AND THERMAL ENERGY METERS PART 1 GENERAL 1.01 RELATED DOCUMENTS A. Drawings and general provisions of the Contract, including General and Supplementary Conditions and Division 01 Specification Sections, apply to this Section. 1.02 SUMMARY A. Section Includes: 1. Orifice flowmeters. 2. Turbine flowmeters. 3. Venturi flowmeters. 4. Impeller-turbine, thermal-energy meters. B. Related Sections: 1. Section 23 2216 "Steam and Condensate Piping Specialties" for steam and condensate meters. PART 2 PRODUCTS 2.01 FLOWMETERS A. Orifice Flowmeters: 1. Manufacturers: Subject to compliance with requirements, provide products by one of the following: a. ABB; Instrumentation and Analytical. b. Bell & Gossett; ITT Industries. c. S. A. Armstrong Limited; Armstrong Pumps Inc. 2. Description: Flowmeter with sensor, hoses or tubing, fittings, valves, indicator, and conversion chart. 3. Flow Range: Sensor and indicator shall cover operating range of equipment or system served. 4. Sensor: Wafer-orifice-type, calibrated, flow-measuring element; for installation between pipe flanges. a. Design: Differential-pressure-type measurement for water. b. Construction: Cast-iron body, brass valves with integral check valves and caps, and calibrated nameplate. c. Minimum Pressure Rating: 300 psig (2070 kPa). d. Minimum Temperature Rating: 250 deg F (121 deg C). 5. Permanent Indicators: Meter suitable for wall or bracket mounting, calibrated for connected sensor and having 6-inch- (152-mm-) diameter, or equivalent, dial with fittings and copper tubing for connecting to sensor. a. Scale: Gallons per minute (Liters per second). b. Accuracy: Plus or minus 1 percent between 20 and 80 percent of scale range. 6. Portable Indicators: Hand-held, differential-pressure type, calibrated for connected sensor and having two 12-foot (3.7-m) hoses, with carrying case. a. Scale: Gallons per minute (Liters per second). b. Accuracy: Plus or minus 2 percent between 20 and 80 percent of scale range. 7. Display: Shows rate of flow, with register to indicate total volume in gallons (liters). 8. Conversion Chart: Flow rate data compatible with sensor and indicator. 9. Operating Instructions: Include complete instructions with each flowmeter. B. Turbine Flowmeters: 1. Manufacturers: Subject to compliance with requirements, provide products by one of the following: a. ABB; Instrumentation and Analytical. b. Data Industrial Corp. Mountain Haus Boiler Replacement 03/18/2014 100% CD's/Permit METERS AND GAGES FOR HVAC PIPING 23 0519 - 2 c. Hoffer Flow Controls, Inc. d. ONICON Incorporated. 2. Description: Flowmeter with sensor and indicator. 3. Flow Range: Sensor and indicator shall cover operating range of equipment or system served. 4. Sensor: Impeller turbine; for inserting into pipe fitting or for installing in piping and measuring flow directly in gallons per minute (liters per second). a. Design: Device or pipe fitting with inline turbine and integral direct-reading scale for water. b. Construction: Bronze or stainless-steel body, with plastic turbine or impeller. c. Minimum Pressure Rating: 150 psig (1035 kPa). d. Minimum Temperature Rating: 180 deg F (82 deg C). 5. Indicator: Hand-held meter; either an integral part of sensor or a separate meter. 6. Accuracy: Plus or minus 1-1/2 percent. 7. Display: Shows rate of flow, with register to indicate total volume in gallons (liters). 8. Operating Instructions: Include complete instructions with each flowmeter. C. Venturi Flowmeters: 1. Manufacturers: Subject to compliance with requirements, provide products by one of the following: a. ABB; Instrumentation and Analytical. b. Hyspan Precision Products, Inc. c. S. A. Armstrong Limited; Armstrong Pumps Inc. 2. Description: Flowmeter with calibrated flow-measuring element, hoses or tubing, fittings, valves, indicator, and conversion chart. 3. Flow Range: Sensor and indicator shall cover operating range of equipment or system served. 4. Sensor: Venturi-type, calibrated, flow-measuring element; for installation in piping. a. Design: Differential-pressure-type measurement for water. b. Construction: Bronze, brass, or factory-primed steel, with brass fittings and attached tag with flow conversion data. c. Minimum Pressure Rating: 250 psig (1725 kPa). d. Minimum Temperature Rating: 250 deg F (121 deg C). e. End Connections for NPS 2 (DN 50) and Smaller: Threaded. f. End Connections for NPS 2-1/2 (DN 65) and Larger: Flanged or welded. g. Flow Range: Flow-measuring element and flowmeter shall cover operating range of equipment or system served. 5. Permanent Indicators: Meter suitable for wall or bracket mounting, calibrated for connected flowmeter element, and having 6-inch- (152-mm-) diameter, or equivalent, dial with fittings and copper tubing for connecting to flowmeter element. a. Scale: Gallons per minute (Liters per second). b. Accuracy: Plus or minus 1 percent between 20 and 80 percent of scale range. 6. Portable Indicators: Hand-held, differential-pressure type, calibrated for connected flowmeter element and having two 12-foot (3.7-m) hoses, with carrying case. a. Scale: Gallons per minute (Liters per second). b. Accuracy: Plus or minus 2 percent between 20 and 80 percent of scale range. 7. Display: Shows rate of flow, with register to indicate total volume in gallons (liters). 8. Conversion Chart: Flow rate data compatible with sensor. 9. Operating Instructions: Include complete instructions with each flowmeter. 2.02 THERMAL-ENERGY METERS A. Impeller-Turbine, Thermal-Energy Meters: 1. Manufacturers: Subject to compliance with requirements, provide products by one of the following: a. Data Industrial Corp. b. Hoffer Flow Controls, Inc. c. ONICON Incorporated. 2. Description: System with strainer, flow sensor, temperature sensors, transmitter, indicator, and connecting wiring. 3. Flow Sensor: Impeller turbine with corrosion-resistant-metal body and transmitter; for installing in piping. a. Design: Total thermal-energy measurement. Mountain Haus Boiler Replacement 03/18/2014 100% CD's/Permit METERS AND GAGES FOR HVAC PIPING 23 0519 - 3 b. Minimum Pressure Rating: 150 psig (1035 kPa). c. Minimum Temperature Range: 40 to 250 deg F (5 to 121 deg C). 4. Temperature Sensors: Insertion-type transducer. 5. Indicator: Solid-state, integrating-type meter with integral battery pack; for wall mounting. a. Data Output: Six-digit electromechanical counter with readout in kilowatts per hour or British thermal units (joules). b. Battery Pack: Five-year lithium battery. 6. Accuracy: Plus or minus 1 percent. 7. Display: Visually indicates total fluid volume in gallons (liters) and thermal-energy flow in kilowatts per hour or British thermal units (joules). 8. Strainer: Full size of main line piping. 9. Operating Instructions: Include complete instructions with each thermal-energy meter system. PART 3 EXECUTION 3.01 INSTALLATION A. Install remote-mounted thermometer bulbs in thermowells and install cases on panels; connect cases with tubing and support tubing to prevent kinks. Use minimum tubing length. B. Install remote-mounted pressure gages on panel. C. Install flow indicators in piping systems in accessible positions for easy viewing. D. Assemble and install connections, tubing, and accessories between flow-measuring elements and flowmeters according to manufacturer's written instructions. E. Install flowmeter elements in accessible positions in piping systems. F. Install wafer-orifice flowmeter elements between pipe flanges. G. Install differential-pressure-type flowmeter elements, with at least minimum straight lengths of pipe, upstream and downstream from element according to manufacturer's written instructions. H. Install permanent indicators on walls or brackets in accessible and readable positions. I. Install connection fittings in accessible locations for attachment to portable indicators. J. Mount thermal-energy meters on wall if accessible; if not, provide brackets to support meters. 3.02 CONNECTIONS A. Install meters and gages adjacent to machines and equipment to allow service and maintenance of meters, gages, machines, and equipment. B. Connect flowmeter-system elements to meters. C. Connect flowmeter transmitters to meters. D. Connect thermal-energy meter transmitters to meters. 3.03 ADJUSTING A. After installation, calibrate meters according to manufacturer's written instructions. Mountain Haus Boiler Replacement 03/18/2014 100% CD's/Permit METERS AND GAGES FOR HVAC PIPING 23 0519 - 4 END OF SECTION 23 0519 Mountain Haus Boiler Replacement 03/18/2014 100% CD's/Permit THERMOMETERS AND PRESSURE GAUGES 23 0521 - 1 SECTION 23 0519 - METERS AND GAUGES PART 1 GENERAL 1.01 RELATED DOCUMENTS A. Drawings and general provisions of the Contract, including General and Supplementary Conditions and Division 01 Specification Sections, apply to this Section. 1.02 SUMMARY A. Section Includes: 1. Liquid-in-glass thermometers. 2. Thermowells. 3. Dial-type pressure gauges. 4. Gauge attachments. 5. Test plugs. 1.03 ACTION SUBMITTALS A. Product Data: For each type of product indicated. 1.04 CLOSEOUT SUBMITTALS A. Operation and Maintenance Data: For meters and gauges to include in operation and maintenance manuals. PART 2 PRODUCTS 2.01 METERS AND GAUGES MATERIALS A. Comply with requirements in “Schedules” Article for applications of meters and gauges for specific services. B. Meters and gauges and their appurtenances applied to potable-water systems shall comply with NSF 14 and NSF 61. 2.02 LIQUID-IN-GLASS THERMOMETERS A. Metal-Case, Industrial-Style, Liquid-in-Glass Thermometers: 1. Manufacturers: Subject to compliance with requirements, provide products by one of the following: a. Flo Fab Inc. b. Miljoco Corporation. c. Trerice, H. O. Co. d. Weiss Instruments, Inc. 2. Standard: ASME B40.200. 3. Case: Precision die cast aluminum; 9-inch (229-mm) nominal size. 4. Case Form: Adjustable angle. 5. Tube: Glass with magnifying lens front, filled with non-toxic, blue organic liquid. Red color not permitted due to similarity with red reflecting mercury. 6. Tube Background: Nonreflective aluminum with white finish and permanently etched scale markings graduated in deg F (deg C), V-shaped backing for optimum readability. 7. Lens: Acrylic to 300 deg F, glass above 300 deg F. 8. Stem: Aluminum, tapered to fit standard industrial thermowells and of length to suit installation. a. Design for Air-Duct Installation: With ventilated shroud. b. Design for Thermowell Installation: Bare stem. Mountain Haus Boiler Replacement 03/18/2014 100% CD's/Permit THERMOMETERS AND PRESSURE GAUGES 23 0521 - 2 9. Connection: 1-1/4 inches (32 mm), with ASME B1.1 screw threads. 10. Accuracy: Plus or minus 1 percent of scale range or one scale division, to a maximum of 1.5 percent of scale range. 2.03 THERMOWELLS A. Thermowells: 1. Standard: ASME B40.200. 2. Description: Pressure-tight, socket-type fitting made for insertion into piping tee fitting. 3. Material for Use with Copper Tubing: CNR or CUNI. 4. Material for Use with Steel Piping: CRES or CSA. 5. Type: Stepped shank unless straight or tapered shank is indicated. 6. External Threads: NPS 3/4, (DN 15, DN 20, or NPS 25,) ASME B1.20.1 pipe threads. 7. Internal Threads: ASME B1.1 screw threads, 1-1/4 thread to mate with the 1-1/4 male thread for liquid-in-glass and light-activated type thermometers. 8. Bore: Diameter required to match thermometer bulb or stem. 9. Insertion Length: Length required to match thermometer bulb or stem. 10. Lagging Extension: Include on thermowells for insulated piping and tubing. B. Heat-Transfer Medium: Mixture of graphite and glycerin. 2.04 PRESSURE GAUGES A. Direct-Mounted, Metal-Case, Dial-Type Pressure Gauges: 1. Manufacturers: Subject to compliance with requirements, provide products by one of the following: a. Ashcroft Inc. b. Flo Fab Inc. c. Miljoco Corporation. d. Trerice, H. O. Co. e. Watts Regulator Co.; a div. of Watts Water Technologies, Inc. f. Weiss Instruments, Inc. 2. Standard: ASME B40.100. 3. Case: Stainless steel, sealed open-front; 4-1/2 inch nominal diameter. 4. Pressure-Element Assembly: Phosphor bronze bourdon tube, brass socket. 5. Pressure Connection: Brass, with NPS 1/4 (DN 8) (DN 15), ASME B1.20.1 pipe threads and bottom-outlet type unless back-outlet type is indicated. 6. Movement: Mechanical, with link to pressure element and connection to pointer. 7. Dial: Nonreflective aluminum white finished with permanently etched black scale markings graduated in psi (kPa). 8. Pointer: Aluminum, black, adjustable 9. Lens: Acrylic. 10. Ring: Stainless steel. 11. Accuracy: Grade A, plus or minus 1 percent of full scale. 2.05 TEST PLUGS A. Manufacturers: Subject to compliance with requirements, provide products by one the following: 1. Flow Design, Inc. 2. Miljoco Corporation. 3. National Meter, Inc. 4. Peterson Equipment Co., Inc. 5. Sisco Manufacturing Company, Inc. 6. Trerice, H. O. Co. 7. Watts Regulator Co.; a div. of Watts Water Technologies, Inc. B. Description: Test-station fitting made for insertion into piping tee fitting. Mountain Haus Boiler Replacement 03/18/2014 100% CD's/Permit THERMOMETERS AND PRESSURE GAUGES 23 0521 - 3 C. Body: Brass or stainless steel with core inserts and gasketed and threaded cap. Include extended stem on units to be installed in insulated piping. D. Thread Size: NPS 1/4 or NPS 1/2, ASME B1.20.1 pipe thread. E. Minimum Pressure and Temperature Rating: 500 psig at 200 deg F. F. Core Inserts: Chlorosulfonated polyethylene synthetic and EPDM self-sealing rubber. PART 3 EXECUTION 3.01 INSTALLATION A. Install thermowells with socket extending a minimum of 2 inches into fluid or to center of pipe, whichever is smaller, and in vertical position in piping tees. Account for thickness of insulation when determining thermowell and associated thermometer lengths. B. Install thermowells of sizes required to match thermometer connectors. Include bushings if required to match sizes. C. Install thermowells with extension on insulated piping. D. Fill thermowells with heat-transfer medium. E. Install direct-mounted thermometers in thermowells and adjust vertical and tilted positions. F. Install duct-thermometer mounting brackets in walls of ducts. Attach to duct with screws. G. Install direct-mounted pressure gauges in piping tees with pressure gauge located on pipe at the most readable position. H. Install valve and snubber in piping for each pressure gauge for fluids (except steam). I. Install valve and syphon fitting in piping for each pressure gauge for steam. J. Install test plugs in piping tees. K. Install permanent indicators on walls or brackets in accessible and readable positions. L. Install connection fittings in accessible locations for attachment to portable indicators. M. Install pressure gauges in locations indicated on drawings. N. Install thermometers at locations indicated on drawings. 3.02 CONNECTIONS A. Install meters and gauges adjacent to machines and equipment to allow service and maintenance of meters, gauges, machines, and equipment. 3.03 ADJUSTING A. After installation, calibrate meters according to manufacturer's written instructions. B. Adjust faces of meters and gauges to proper angle for best visibility. Mountain Haus Boiler Replacement 03/18/2014 100% CD's/Permit THERMOMETERS AND PRESSURE GAUGES 23 0521 - 4 3.04 THERMOMETER TYPE AND SCALE-RANGE SCHEDULE A. Provide liquid-in-glass thermometer of scale range based on system type as follows. Contractor option to provide light-activated thermometer for all systems except steam and condensate: 1. Chilled-Water Piping: 0 to 120 deg F (Minus 20 to plus 50 deg C). 2. Heating, Hot-Water Piping: 30 to 240 deg F (0 to 150 deg C). 3. Heating, Snowmelt-Water Piping: 0 to 160 deg F 4. Domestic Cold Water: 0 to 120 deg F. 5. Domestic Hot and Recirculation Water: 0 to 160 deg F. 6. Outside Air: - 40 to 110 deg F. 7. Return, Supply and Mixed Air: 0 to 120 deg F. 3.05 PRESSURE-GAUGE SCALE-RANGE SCHEDULE A. Chilled-Water Piping: 0 to 200 psi.]. B. Heating, Hot-Water Piping: 0 to 200 psi. (0 to 240 kPa)]. C. Heating, Snowmelt-Water Piping: 0 to 200 psi. (0 to 240 kPa)]. D. Domestic Cold Water, upstream of service water pressure reducing valve station: 0 to 200 psi. E. Domestic Hot, Cold and Recirculation, downstream of pressure reducing valve station: 0 to 160 psi. F. Natural Gas inside building (less than 15 psig): 0 to 15 psi. END OF SECTION 23 0519 Mountain Haus Boiler Replacement 03/18/2014 100% CD's/Permit GENERAL-DUTY VALVES FOR HVAC PIPING 23 0523 - 1 SECTION 23 0523 - GENERAL-DUTY VALVES FOR HVAC PIPING PART 1 GENERAL 1.01 RELATED DOCUMENTS A. Drawings and general provisions of the Contract, including General and Supplementary Conditions and Division 01 Specification Sections, apply to this Section. 1.02 SUMMARY A. Section Includes: 1. Brass ball valves. 2. Iron, single-flange butterfly valves. 3. Iron, grooved-end butterfly valves. 4. High-performance butterfly valves. 5. Bronze lift check valves. 6. Bronze swing check valves. 7. Iron swing check valves. 8. Iron swing check valves with closure control. 9. Iron, grooved-end swing-check valves. 10. Bronze globe valves. 11. Iron globe valves. 12. Eccentric plug valves. 13. Chainwheels. B. Related Sections: 1. Section 23 0553 "Identification for HVAC Piping and Equipment" for valve tags and schedules. 1.03 DEFINITIONS A. CWP: Cold working pressure. B. EPDM: Ethylene propylene copolymer rubber. C. NBR: Acrylonitrile-butadiene, Buna-N, or nitrile rubber. D. NRS: Nonrising stem. E. OS&Y: Outside screw and yoke. F. RS: Rising stem. G. SWP: Steam working pressure. 1.04 ACTION SUBMITTALS A. Product Data: For each type of valve indicated. 1.05 QUALITY ASSURANCE A. Source Limitations for Valves: Obtain each type of valve from single source from single manufacturer. B. ASME Compliance: Mountain Haus Boiler Replacement 03/18/2014 100% CD's/Permit GENERAL-DUTY VALVES FOR HVAC PIPING 23 0523 - 2 1. ASME B16.10 and ASME B16.34 for ferrous valve dimensions and design criteria. 2. ASME B31.1 for power piping valves. 3. ASME B31.9 for building services piping valves. C. NSF Compliance: NSF 61 for valve materials for potable-water service. 1.06 DELIVERY, STORAGE, AND HANDLING A. Prepare valves for shipping as follows: 1. Protect internal parts against rust and corrosion. 2. Protect threads, flange faces, grooves, and weld ends. 3. Set angle, gate, and globe valves closed to prevent rattling. 4. Set ball and plug valves open to minimize exposure of functional surfaces. 5. Set butterfly valves closed or slightly open. 6. Block check valves in either closed or open position. B. Use the following precautions during storage: 1. Maintain valve end protection. 2. Store valves indoors and maintain at higher than ambient dew point temperature. If outdoor storage is necessary, store valves off the ground in watertight enclosures. C. Use sling to handle large valves; rig sling to avoid damage to exposed parts. Do not use handwheels or stems as lifting or rigging points. PART 2 PRODUCTS 2.01 GENERAL REQUIREMENTS FOR VALVES A. Refer to HVAC valve schedule articles for applications of valves. B. Valve Pressure and Temperature Ratings: Not less than indicated and as required for system pressures and temperatures. C. Valve Sizes: Same as upstream piping unless otherwise indicated. D. Valve Actuator Types: 1. Gear Actuator: For quarter-turn valves NPS 8 and larger. 2. Handwheel: For valves other than quarter-turn types. 3. Handlever: For quarter-turn valves NPS 6 and smaller except plug valves. 4. Wrench: For plug valves with square heads. Furnish Owner with 1 wrench for every 10 plug valves, for each size square plug-valve head. 5. Chainwheel: Device for attachment to valve handwheel, stem, or other actuator; of size and with chain for mounting height, as indicated in the "Valve Installation" Article. E. Valves in Insulated Piping: With 2-inch stem extensions and the following features: 1. Gate Valves: With rising stem. 2. Ball Valves: With extended operating handle of non-thermal-conductive material, and protective sleeve that allows operation of valve without breaking the vapor seal or disturbing insulation. 3. Butterfly Valves: With extended neck. F. Valve-End Connections: 1. Flanged: With flanges according to ASME B16.1 for iron valves. 2. Grooved: With grooves according to AWWA C606. 3. Solder Joint: With sockets according to ASME B16.18. 4. Threaded: With threads according to ASME B1.20.1. Mountain Haus Boiler Replacement 03/18/2014 100% CD's/Permit GENERAL-DUTY VALVES FOR HVAC PIPING 23 0523 - 3 G. Valve Bypass and Drain Connections: MSS SP-45. 2.02 BRONZE ANGLE VALVES A. Class 125, Bronze Angle Valves with Bronze Disc: 1. Manufacturers: Subject to compliance with requirements, provide products by one of the following: a. Hammond Valve. b. Milwaukee Valve Company. 2. Description: a. Standard: MSS SP-80, Type 1. b. CWP Rating: 200 psig. c. Body Material: ASTM B 62, bronze with integral seat and screw-in bonnet. d. Ends: Threaded. e. Stem and Disc: Bronze. f. Packing: Asbestos free. g. Handwheel: Malleable iron. 2.03 BRONZE BALL VALVES A. Two-Piece, Full-Port, Bronze Ball Valves with Stainless-Steel Trim: 1. Manufacturers: Subject to compliance with requirements, provide products by one of the following: a. Crane Co.; Crane Valve Group; Crane Valves. b. Hammond Valve. c. Milwaukee Valve Company. d. NIBCO INC. 2. Description: a. Standard: MSS SP-110. b. SWP Rating: 150 psig. c. CWP Rating: 600 psig. d. Body Design: Two piece. e. Body Material: Bronze. f. Ends: Threaded. g. Seats: PTFE or TFE. h. Stem: Stainless steel. i. Ball: Stainless steel, vented. j. Port: Full. 2.04 IRON, SINGLE-FLANGE BUTTERFLY VALVES A. 150 CWP, Iron, Single-Flange Butterfly Valves with EPDM Seat and Stainless-Steel Disc: 1. Manufacturers: Subject to compliance with requirements, provide products by one of the following: a. Crane Co.; Crane Valve Group; Jenkins Valves. b. Hammond Valve. c. Milwaukee Valve Company. d. NIBCO INC. 2. Description: a. Standard: MSS SP-67, Type I. b. CWP Rating: 150 psig. c. Body Design: Lug type; suitable for bidirectional dead-end service at rated pressure without use of downstream flange. d. Body Material: ASTM A 126, cast iron or ASTM A 536, ductile iron. e. Seat: EPDM. f. Stem: One- or two-piece stainless steel. g. Disc: Stainless steel. B. 200 CWP, Iron, Single-Flange Butterfly Valves with EPDM Seat and Stainless-Steel Disc: 1. Manufacturers: Subject to compliance with requirements, provide products by one of the following: Mountain Haus Boiler Replacement 03/18/2014 100% CD's/Permit GENERAL-DUTY VALVES FOR HVAC PIPING 23 0523 - 4 a. Crane Co.; Crane Valve Group; Jenkins Valves. b. Hammond Valve. c. Milwaukee Valve Company. d. NIBCO INC. 2. Description: a. Standard: MSS SP-67, Type I. b. CWP Rating: 200 psig. c. Body Design: Lug type; suitable for bidirectional dead-end service at rated pressure without use of downstream flange. d. Body Material: ASTM A 126, cast iron or ASTM A 536, ductile iron. e. Seat: EPDM. f. Stem: One- or two-piece stainless steel. g. Disc: Stainless steel. 2.05 IRON, GROOVED-END BUTTERFLY VALVES A. 175 CWP, Iron, Grooved-End Butterfly Valves: 1. Manufacturers: Subject to compliance with requirements, provide products by one of the following: a. Shurjoint Piping Products. b. Tyco Fire Products LP; Grinnell Mechanical Products. c. Victaulic Company. 2. Description: a. Standard: MSS SP-67, Type I. b. CWP Rating: 175 psig. c. Body Material: Coated, ductile iron. d. Stem: Two-piece stainless steel. e. Disc: Coated, ductile iron. f. Seal: EPDM. 2.06 HIGH-PERFORMANCE BUTTERFLY VALVES A. Class 150, Single-Flange, High-Performance Butterfly Valves: 1. Manufacturers: Subject to compliance with requirements, provide products by one of the following: a. Crane Co.; Crane Valve Group; Flowseal. b. Hammond Valve. c. Milwaukee Valve Company. d. NIBCO INC. 2. Description: a. Standard: MSS SP-68. b. CWP Rating: 285 psig at 100 deg F. c. Body Design: Lug type; suitable for bidirectional dead-end service at rated pressure without use of downstream flange. d. Body Material: Carbon steel, cast iron, ductile iron, or stainless steel. e. Seat: Reinforced PTFE or metal. f. Stem: Stainless steel; offset from seat plane. g. Disc: Carbon steel. h. Service: Bidirectional. 2.07 BRONZE LIFT CHECK VALVES A. Class 125, Lift Check Valves with Nonmetallic Disc: 1. Manufacturers: Subject to compliance with requirements, provide products by one of the following: a. Hammond Valve. b. Milwaukee Valve Company. c. NIBCO INC. 2. Description: a. Standard: MSS SP-80, Type 2. Mountain Haus Boiler Replacement 03/18/2014 100% CD's/Permit GENERAL-DUTY VALVES FOR HVAC PIPING 23 0523 - 5 b. CWP Rating: 200 psig. c. Body Design: Vertical flow. d. Body Material: ASTM B 61 or ASTM B 62, bronze. e. Ends: Threaded. f. Disc: NBR, PTFE, or TFE. 2.08 BRONZE SWING CHECK VALVES A. Class 150, Bronze Swing Check Valves with Nonmetallic Disc: 1. Manufacturers: Subject to compliance with requirements, provide products by one of the following: a. Crane Co.; Crane Valve Group; Crane Valves. b. Hammond Valve. c. Milwaukee Valve Company. d. NIBCO INC. 2. Description: a. Standard: MSS SP-80, Type 4. b. CWP Rating: 300 psig. c. Body Design: Horizontal flow. d. Body Material: ASTM B 62, bronze. e. Ends: Threaded. f. Disc: PTFE or TFE. 2.09 IRON SWING CHECK VALVES A. Class 250, Iron Swing Check Valves with Metal Seats: 1. Manufacturers: Subject to compliance with requirements, provide products by one of the following: a. Crane Co.; Crane Valve Group; Crane Valves. b. Hammond Valve. c. Milwaukee Valve Company. d. NIBCO INC. 2. Description: a. Standard: MSS SP-71, Type I. b. NPS 2-1/2 to NPS 12, CWP Rating: 500 psig. c. NPS 14 to NPS 24, CWP Rating: 300 psig. d. Body Design: Clear or full waterway. e. Body Material: ASTM A 126, gray iron with bolted bonnet. f. Ends: Flanged. g. Trim: Bronze. h. Gasket: Asbestos free. 2.10 IRON SWING CHECK VALVES WITH CLOSURE CONTROL A. Class 125, Iron Swing Check Valves with Lever and Weight-Closure Control: 1. Manufacturers: Subject to compliance with requirements, provide products by one of the following: a. Crane Co.; Crane Valve Group; Crane Valves. b. Hammond Valve. c. Milwaukee Valve Company. d. NIBCO INC. 2. Description: a. Standard: MSS SP-71, Type I. b. NPS 2-1/2 to NPS 12, CWP Rating: 200 psig. c. NPS 14 to NPS 24, CWP Rating: 150 psig. d. Body Design: Clear or full waterway. e. Body Material: ASTM A 126, gray iron with bolted bonnet. f. Ends: Flanged. g. Trim: Bronze. h. Gasket: Asbestos free. Mountain Haus Boiler Replacement 03/18/2014 100% CD's/Permit GENERAL-DUTY VALVES FOR HVAC PIPING 23 0523 - 6 i. Closure Control: Factory-installed, exterior lever and weight. 2.11 IRON, GROOVED-END SWING CHECK VALVES A. 300 CWP, Iron, Grooved-End Swing Check Valves: 1. Manufacturers: Subject to compliance with requirements, provide products by one of the following: a. Shurjoint Piping Products. b. Tyco Fire Products LP; Grinnell Mechanical Products. c. Victaulic Company. 2. Description: a. CWP Rating: 300 psig. b. Body Material: ASTM A 536, ductile iron. c. Seal: EPDM. d. Disc: Spring operated, ductile iron or stainless steel. 2.12 BRONZE GATE VALVES A. Class 125, NRS Bronze Gate Valves: 1. Manufacturers: Subject to compliance with requirements, provide products by one of the following: 2. Description: a. Standard: MSS SP-80, Type 1. b. CWP Rating: 200 psig. c. Body Material: ASTM B 62, bronze with integral seat and screw-in bonnet. d. Ends: Threaded or solder joint. e. Stem: Bronze. f. Disc: Solid wedge; bronze. g. Packing: Asbestos free. h. Handwheel: Malleable iron, bronze, or aluminum. 2.13 BRONZE GLOBE VALVES A. Class 125, Bronze Globe Valves with Bronze Disc: 1. Manufacturers: Subject to compliance with requirements, provide products by one of the following: a. Crane Co.; Crane Valve Group; Crane Valves. b. Hammond Valve. c. Milwaukee Valve Company. d. NIBCO INC. 2. Description: a. Standard: MSS SP-80, Type 1. b. CWP Rating: 200 psig. c. Body Material: ASTM B 62, bronze with integral seat and screw-in bonnet. d. Ends: Threaded or solder joint. e. Stem and Disc: Bronze. f. Packing: Asbestos free. g. Handwheel: Malleable iron, bronze, or aluminum. 2.14 IRON GLOBE VALVES A. Class 250, Iron Globe Valves: 1. Manufacturers: Subject to compliance with requirements, provide products by one of the following: a. Crane Co.; Crane Valve Group; Crane Valves. b. Hammond Valve. c. Milwaukee Valve Company. d. NIBCO INC. 2. Description: a. Standard: MSS SP-85, Type I. b. CWP Rating: 500 psig. Mountain Haus Boiler Replacement 03/18/2014 100% CD's/Permit GENERAL-DUTY VALVES FOR HVAC PIPING 23 0523 - 7 c. Body Material: ASTM A 126, gray iron with bolted bonnet. d. Ends: Flanged. e. Trim: Bronze. f. Packing and Gasket: Asbestos free. 2.15 ECCENTRIC PLUG VALVES A. 175 CWP, Eccentric Plug Valves with Resilient Seating. 1. Manufacturers: Subject to compliance with requirements, provide products by one of the following: a. Homestead Valve; a division of Olson Technologies, Inc. b. M&H Valve Company; a division of McWane, Inc. c. Milliken Valve Company. d. Henry Pratt Company. 2. Description: a. Standard: MSS SP-108. b. CWP Rating: 175 psig minimum. c. Body and Plug: ASTM A 48/A 48M, gray iron; ASTM A 126, gray iron; or ASTM A 536, ductile iron. d. Bearings: Oil-impregnated bronze or stainless steel. e. Ends: Flanged. f. Stem-Seal Packing: Asbestos free. g. Plug, Resilient-Seating Material: Suitable for potable-water service unless otherwise indicated. 2.16 CHAINWHEELS A. Manufacturers: Subject to compliance with requirements, provide products by one of the following: 1. Babbitt Steam Specialty Co. 2. Roto Hammer Industries. 3. Trumbull Industries. B. Description: Valve actuation assembly with sprocket rim, brackets, and chain. 1. Brackets: Type, number, size, and fasteners required to mount actuator on valve. 2. Attachment: For connection to ball butterfly and plug valve stems. 3. Sprocket Rim with Chain Guides: Cast iron, of type and size required for valve. Include zinc coating. 4. Chain: Hot-dip, galvanized steel, of size required to fit sprocket rim. PART 3 EXECUTION 3.01 EXAMINATION A. Examine valve interior for cleanliness, freedom from foreign matter, and corrosion. Remove special packing materials, such as blocks, used to prevent disc movement during shipping and handling. B. Operate valves in positions from fully open to fully closed. Examine guides and seats made accessible by such operations. C. Examine threads on valve and mating pipe for form and cleanliness. D. Examine mating flange faces for conditions that might cause leakage. Check bolting for proper size, length, and material. Verify that gasket is of proper size, that its material composition is suitable for service, and that it is free from defects and damage. E. Do not attempt to repair defective valves; replace with new valves. Mountain Haus Boiler Replacement 03/18/2014 100% CD's/Permit GENERAL-DUTY VALVES FOR HVAC PIPING 23 0523 - 8 3.02 VALVE INSTALLATION A. Install valves with unions or flanges at each piece of equipment arranged to allow service, maintenance, and equipment removal without system shutdown. B. Locate valves for easy access and provide separate support where necessary. C. Install valves in horizontal piping with stem at or above center of pipe. D. Install valves in position to allow full stem movement. E. Install chainwheels on operators for ball butterfly globe and plug valvesmore than 96 inches above floor. Extend chains to above finished floor. F. Install check valves for proper direction of flow and as follows: 1. Swing Check Valves: In horizontal position with hinge pin level. 2. Lift Check Valves: With stem upright and plumb. 3.03 ADJUSTING A. Adjust or replace valve packing after piping systems have been tested and put into service but before final adjusting and balancing. Replace valves if persistent leaking occurs. 3.04 GENERAL REQUIREMENTS FOR VALVE APPLICATIONS A. If valve applications are not indicated, use the following: 1. Shutoff Service: Ball, butterfly valves. 2. Butterfly Valve Dead-End Service: Single-flange (lug) type. 3. Throttling Service except Steam: Globe or butterfly valves. 4. Pump-Discharge Check Valves: a. NPS 2 and Smaller: Bronze swing check valves with bronze disc. b. NPS 2-1/2 and Larger: Iron swing check valves with lever and weight or with spring or iron, center-guided, metal -seat check valves. B. If valves with specified SWP classes or CWP ratings are not available, the same types of valves with higher SWP classes or CWP ratings may be substituted. C. Select valves, except wafer types, with the following end connections: 1. For Copper Tubing, NPS 2 and Smaller: Threaded ends except where solder-joint valve-end option is indicated in valve schedules below. 2. For Copper Tubing, NPS 2-1/2 to NPS 4: Flanged ends except where threaded valve-end option is indicated in valve schedules below. 3. For Copper Tubing, NPS 5 and Larger: Flanged ends. 4. For Steel Piping, NPS 2 and Smaller: Threaded ends. 5. For Steel Piping, NPS 2-1/2 to NPS 4: Flanged ends except where threaded valve-end option is indicated in valve schedules below. 6. For Steel Piping, NPS 5 and Larger: Flanged ends. 7. For Grooved-End Steel: Valve ends may be grooved. 3.05 DOMESTIC, HOT- AND COLD-WATER VALVE SCHEDULE A. Pipe NPS 2 and Smaller: 1. Bronze and Brass Valves: May be provided with solder-joint ends instead of threaded ends. Mountain Haus Boiler Replacement 03/18/2014 100% CD's/Permit GENERAL-DUTY VALVES FOR HVAC PIPING 23 0523 - 9 2. Bronze Angle Valves: Class 150, bronze disc. 3. Ball Valves: Two piece, full port, bronze with stainless-steel trim. 4. Bronze Swing Check Valves: Class 150, bronze disc. 5. Bronze Globe Valves: Class 150, bronze disc. B. Pipe NPS 2-1/2 and Larger: 1. Iron Ball Valves: Class 150. 2. Iron, Single-Flange Butterfly Valves: 200 CWP, EPDM seat, stainless-steel disc. 3. Iron, Grooved-End Butterfly Valves: 175 CWP. 4. Iron Swing Check Valves: Class 125 or Class 250, metal seats. 5. Iron Swing Check Valves with Closure Control: Class 125, lever and spring. 6. Iron Globe Valves: Class 125, Class 250, N. 3.06 SANITARY-WASTE AND STORM-DRAINAGE VALVE SCHEDULE A. Pipe NPS 2 and Smaller: 1. Bronze and Brass Valves: May be provided with solder-joint ends instead of threaded ends. 2. Bronze Angle Valves: Class 150, bronze disc. 3. Ball Valves: Two piece, full port, bronze with stainless-steel trim. 4. Bronze Swing Check Valves: Class 150, bronze disc. 5. Bronze Globe Valves: Class 150, bronze disc. B. Pipe NPS 2-1/2 and Larger: 1. Iron Ball Valves: Class 150. 2. Iron, Single-Flange Butterfly Valves: 200 CWP, EPDM seat, stainless-steel disc. 3. Iron, Grooved-End Butterfly Valves: 175 CWP. 4. Iron Swing Check Valves: Class 125 or Class 250, metal seats. 5. Iron Swing Check Valves with Closure Control: Class 125, lever and spring. 6. Iron Globe Valves: Class 125, Class 250,. 3.07 HEATING-WATER VALVE SCHEDULE A. Pipe NPS 2 and Smaller: 1. Bronze and Brass Valves: May be provided with solder-joint ends instead of threaded ends. 2. Ball Valves: Two piece, full port, bronze with stainless-steel trim. 3. Bronze Swing Check Valves: Class 150, bronze disc. 4. Bronze Globe Valves: Class 150,bronze disc. B. Pipe NPS 2-1/2 and Larger: 1. Iron, Single-Flange Butterfly Valves, NPS 2-1/2 to NPS 12: 200 CWP, EPDM seat, stainless-steel disc. 2. Iron, Single-Flange Butterfly Valves, NPS 14 to NPS 24: 150 CWP, EPDM seat, stainless-steel disc. 3. Iron, Grooved-End Butterfly Valves, NPS 2-1/2 to NPS 12: CWP. 4. High-Performance Butterfly Valves: Class 150, single flange. 5. Iron Swing Check Valves: Class 125, Metal seats. 6. Iron Swing Check Valves with Closure Control, NPS 2-1/2 to NPS 12: Class 125, lever and weight. 7. Iron, Grooved-End Check Valves, NPS 3 to NPS 12: 300 CWP. 8. Iron Globe Valves, NPS 2-1/2 to NPS 12: Class 250. END OF SECTION 23 0523 Mountain Haus Boiler Replacement 03/18/2014 100% CD's/Permit HANGERS AND SUPPORTS FOR HVAC PIPING AND EQUIPMENT 23 0529 - 1 SECTION 23 0529 - HANGERS AND SUPPORTS FOR HVAC PIPING AND EQUIPMENT PART 1 GENERAL 1.01 RELATED DOCUMENTS A. Drawings and general provisions of the Contract, including General and Supplementary Conditions and Division 01 Specification Sections, apply to this Section. 1.02 SUMMARY A. Section Includes: 1. Metal pipe hangers and supports. 2. Trapeze pipe hangers. 3. Metal framing systems. 4. Thermal-hanger shield inserts. 5. Fastener systems. 6. Pipe stands. 7. Equipment supports. B. Related Sections: 1. Section 05 5000 "Metal Fabrications" for structural-steel shapes and plates for trapeze hangers for pipe and equipment supports. 2. Section 230548 "Vibration and Seismic Controls for HVAC Piping and Equipment" for vibration isolation devices. 1.03 DEFINITIONS A. MSS: Manufacturers Standardization Society of The Valve and Fittings Industry Inc. 1.04 PERFORMANCE REQUIREMENTS A. Delegated Design: Design trapeze pipe hangers and equipment supports, including comprehensive engineering analysis by a qualified professional engineer, using performance requirements and design criteria indicated. B. Structural Performance: Hangers and supports for HVAC piping and equipment shall withstand the effects of gravity loads and stresses within limits and under conditions indicated according to ASCE/SEI 7. 1. Design supports for multiple pipes, including pipe stands, capable of supporting combined weight of supported systems, system contents, and test water. 2. Design equipment supports capable of supporting combined operating weight of supported equipment and connected systems and components. 3. Design seismic-restraint hangers and supports for piping and equipment and obtain approval from authorities having jurisdiction. 1.05 ACTION SUBMITTALS A. Product Data: For each type of product indicated. B. Shop Drawings: Signed and sealed by a qualified professional engineer. Show fabrication and installation details and include calculations for the following; include Product Data for components: 1. Trapeze pipe hangers. 2. Metal framing systems. 3. Equipment supports. Mountain Haus Boiler Replacement 03/18/2014 100% CD's/Permit HANGERS AND SUPPORTS FOR HVAC PIPING AND EQUIPMENT 23 0529 - 2 C. Delegated-Design Submittal: For trapeze hangers indicated to comply with performance requirements and design criteria, including analysis data signed and sealed by the qualified professional engineer responsible for their preparation. 1. Detail fabrication and assembly of trapeze hangers. 2. Design Calculations: Calculate requirements for designing trapeze hangers. 1.06 QUALITY ASSURANCE A. Structural Steel Welding Qualifications: Qualify procedures and personnel according to AWS D1.1/D1.1M, "Structural Welding Code - Steel." B. Pipe Welding Qualifications: Qualify procedures and operators according to ASME Boiler and Pressure Vessel Code. PART 2 PRODUCTS 2.01 METAL PIPE HANGERS AND SUPPORTS A. Carbon-Steel Pipe Hangers and Supports: 1. Description: MSS SP-58, Types 1 through 58, factory-fabricated components. 2. Galvanized Metallic Coatings: Pregalvanized or hot dipped. 3. Nonmetallic Coatings: Plastic coating, jacket, or liner. 4. Padded Hangers: Hanger with fiberglass or other pipe insulation pad or cushion to support bearing surface of piping. 5. Hanger Rods: Continuous-thread rod, nuts, and washer made of Stainless steel . 2.02 TRAPEZE PIPE HANGERS A. Description: MSS SP-69, Type 59, shop- or field-fabricated pipe-support assembly made from structural carbon-steel shapes with MSS SP-58 carbon-steel hanger rods, nuts, saddles, and U-bolts. 2.03 METAL FRAMING SYSTEMS A. MFMA Manufacturer Metal Framing Systems: 1. Manufacturers: Subject to compliance with requirements, provide products by one of the following: a. Allied Tube & Conduit. b. Cooper B-Line, Inc. c. Flex-Strut Inc. d. Thomas & Betts Corporation. e. Unistrut Corporation; Tyco International, Ltd. 2. Description: Shop- or field-fabricated pipe-support assembly for supporting multiple parallel pipes. 3. Standard: MFMA-4. 4. Channels: Continuous slotted steel channel with inturned lips. 5. Channel Nuts: Formed or stamped steel nuts or other devices designed to fit into channel slot and, when tightened, prevent slipping along channel. 6. Hanger Rods: Continuous-thread rod, nuts, and washer made of stainless steel. 7. Metallic Coating: Hot-dipped galvanized . 8. Paint Coating: Epoxy. 2.04 THERMAL-HANGER SHIELD INSERTS A. Manufacturers: Subject to compliance with requirements, provide products by one of the following: 1. Carpenter & Paterson, Inc. 2. Clement Support Services. 3. ERICO International Corporation. Mountain Haus Boiler Replacement 03/18/2014 100% CD's/Permit HANGERS AND SUPPORTS FOR HVAC PIPING AND EQUIPMENT 23 0529 - 3 4. National Pipe Hanger Corporation. 5. PHS Industries, Inc. 6. Pipe Shields, Inc.; a subsidiary of Piping Technology & Products, Inc. 7. Piping Technology & Products, Inc. 8. Rilco Manufacturing Co., Inc. 9. Value Engineered Products, Inc. B. Insulation-Insert Material for Cold Piping: ASTM C 552, Type II cellular glass with 100-psig orASTM C 591, Type VI, Grade 1 polyisocyanurate with 125-psig minimum compressive strength and vapor barrier. C. Insulation-Insert Material for Hot Piping: ASTM C 552, Type II cellular glass with 100-psig or ASTM C 591, Type VI, Grade 1 polyisocyanurate with 125-psig minimum compressive strength. D. For Trapeze or Clamped Systems: Insert and shield shall cover entire circumference of pipe. E. For Clevis or Band Hangers: Insert and shield shall cover lower 180 degrees of pipe. F. Insert Length: Extend 2 inches beyond sheet metal shield for piping operating below ambient air temperature. 2.05 FASTENER SYSTEMS A. Powder-Actuated Fasteners: Threaded-steel stud, for use in hardened portland cement concrete with pull-out, tension, and shear capacities appropriate for supported loads and building materials where used. B. Mechanical-Expansion Anchors: Insert-wedge-type, zinc-coated steel anchors, for use in hardened portland cement concrete; with pull-out, tension, and shear capacities appropriate for supported loads and building materials where used. 2.06 PIPE STANDS A. General Requirements for Pipe Stands: Shop- or field-fabricated assemblies made of manufactured corrosion-resistant components to support roof-mounted piping. B. Low-Type, Single-Pipe Stand: One-piece stainless-steel base unit with plastic roller, for roof installation without membrane penetration. C. High-Type, Single-Pipe Stand: 1. Description: Assembly of base, vertical and horizontal members, and pipe support, for roof installation without membrane penetration. 2. Base: Stainless steel. 3. Vertical Members: Two or more cadmium-plated-steel or stainless-steel, continuous-thread rods. 4. Horizontal Member: Cadmium-plated-steel or stainless-steel rod with plastic or stainless-steel, roller-type pipe support. 2.07 PIPE POSITIONING SYSTEMS A. Description: IAPMO PS 42, positioning system of metal brackets, clips, and straps for positioning piping in pipe spaces; for plumbing fixtures in commercial applications. 2.08 EQUIPMENT SUPPORTS A. Description: Welded, shop- or field-fabricated equipment support made from structural carbon-steel shapes. 2.09 MISCELLANEOUS MATERIALS A. Structural Steel: ASTM A 36/A 36M, carbon-steel plates, shapes, and bars; black and galvanized. Mountain Haus Boiler Replacement 03/18/2014 100% CD's/Permit HANGERS AND SUPPORTS FOR HVAC PIPING AND EQUIPMENT 23 0529 - 4 B. Grout: ASTM C 1107, factory-mixed and -packaged, dry, hydraulic-cement, nonshrink and nonmetallic grout; suitable for interior and exterior applications. 1. Properties: Nonstaining, noncorrosive, and nongaseous. 2. Design Mix: 5000-psi, 28-day compressive strength. PART 3 EXECUTION 3.01 HANGER AND SUPPORT INSTALLATION A. Metal Pipe-Hanger Installation: Comply with MSS SP-69 and MSS SP-89. Install hangers, supports, clamps, and attachments as required to properly support piping from the building structure. B. Metal Trapeze Pipe-Hanger Installation: Comply with MSS SP-69 and MSS SP-89. Arrange for grouping of parallel runs of horizontal piping, and support together on field-fabricated trapeze pipe hangers. 1. Pipes of Various Sizes: Support together and space trapezes for smallest pipe size or install intermediate supports for smaller diameter pipes as specified for individual pipe hangers. 2. Field fabricate from ASTM A 36/A 36M, carbon-steel shapes selected for loads being supported. Weld steel according to AWS D1.1/D1.1M. C. Metal Framing System Installation: Arrange for grouping of parallel runs of piping, and support together on field-assembled metal framing systems. D. Thermal-Hanger Shield Installation: Install in pipe hanger or shield for insulated piping. E. Fastener System Installation: 1. Install powder-actuated fasteners for use in lightweight concrete or concrete slabs less than 4 inches thick in concrete after concrete is placed and completely cured. Use operators that are licensed by powder-actuated tool manufacturer. Install fasteners according to powder-actuated tool manufacturer's operating manual. 2. Install mechanical-expansion anchors in concrete after concrete is placed and completely cured. Install fasteners according to manufacturer's written instructions. F. Pipe Stand Installation: 1. Pipe Stand Types except Curb-Mounted Type: Assemble components and mount on smooth roof surface. Do not penetrate roof membrane. 2. Curb-Mounted-Type Pipe Stands: Assemble components or fabricate pipe stand and mount on permanent, stationary roof curb. See Section 077200 "Roof Accessories" for curbs. G. Install hangers and supports complete with necessary attachments, inserts, bolts, rods, nuts, washers, and other accessories. H. Equipment Support Installation: Fabricate from welded-structural-steel shapes. I. Install hangers and supports to allow controlled thermal and seismic movement of piping systems, to permit freedom of movement between pipe anchors, and to facilitate action of expansion joints, expansion loops, expansion bends, and similar units. J. Install lateral bracing with pipe hangers and supports to prevent swaying. K. Install building attachments within concrete slabs or attach to structural steel. Install additional attachments at concentrated loads, including valves, flanges, and strainers, NPS 2-1/2 and larger and at changes in direction of piping. Install concrete inserts before concrete is placed; fasten inserts to forms and install reinforcing bars through openings at top of inserts. Mountain Haus Boiler Replacement 03/18/2014 100% CD's/Permit HANGERS AND SUPPORTS FOR HVAC PIPING AND EQUIPMENT 23 0529 - 5 L. Load Distribution: Install hangers and supports so that piping live and dead loads and stresses from movement will not be transmitted to connected equipment. M. Pipe Slopes: Install hangers and supports to provide indicated pipe slopes and to not exceed maximum pipe deflections allowed by ASME B31.9 for building services piping. N. Insulated Piping: 1. Attach clamps and spacers to piping. a. Piping Operating above Ambient Air Temperature: Clamp may project through insulation. b. Piping Operating below Ambient Air Temperature: Use thermal-hanger shield insert with clamp sized to match OD of insert. c. Do not exceed pipe stress limits allowed by ASME B31.9 for building services piping. 2. Shield Dimensions for Pipe: Not less than the following: a. NPS 1/4 to NPS 3-1/2: 12 inches long and 0.048 inch thick. b. NPS 4: 12 inches long and 0.06 inch thick. c. NPS 5 and NPS 6: 18 inches long and 0.06 inch thick. d. NPS 8 to NPS 14: 24 inches long and 0.075 inch thick. e. NPS 16 to NPS 24: 24 inches long and 0.105 inch thick. 3. Pipes NPS 8 and Larger: Include wood or reinforced calcium-silicate-insulation inserts of length at least as long as protective shield. 4. Thermal-Hanger Shields: Install with insulation same thickness as piping insulation. 3.02 EQUIPMENT SUPPORTS A. Fabricate structural-steel stands to suspend equipment from structure overhead or to support equipment above floor. B. Grouting: Place grout under supports for equipment and make bearing surface smooth. C. Provide lateral bracing, to prevent swaying, for equipment supports. 3.03 METAL FABRICATIONS A. Cut, drill, and fit miscellaneous metal fabrications for trapeze pipe hangers equipment supports. B. Fit exposed connections together to form hairline joints. Field weld connections that cannot be shop welded because of shipping size limitations. C. Field Welding: Comply with AWS D1.1/D1.1M procedures for shielded, metal arc welding; appearance and quality of welds; and methods used in correcting welding work; and with the following: 1. Use materials and methods that minimize distortion and develop strength and corrosion resistance of base metals. 2. Obtain fusion without undercut or overlap. 3. Remove welding flux immediately. 4. Finish welds at exposed connections so no roughness shows after finishing and so contours of welded surfaces match adjacent contours. 3.04 ADJUSTING A. Hanger Adjustments: Adjust hangers to distribute loads equally on attachments and to achieve indicated slope of pipe. B. Trim excess length of continuous-thread hanger and support rods to 1-1/2 inches. Mountain Haus Boiler Replacement 03/18/2014 100% CD's/Permit HANGERS AND SUPPORTS FOR HVAC PIPING AND EQUIPMENT 23 0529 - 6 3.05 HANGER AND SUPPORT SCHEDULE A. Specific hanger and support requirements are in Sections specifying piping systems and equipment. B. Comply with MSS SP-69 for pipe-hanger selections and applications that are not specified in piping system Sections. C. Use hangers and supports with galvanized metallic coatings for piping and equipment that will not have field-applied finish. D. Use nonmetallic coatings on attachments for electrolytic protection where attachments are in direct contact with copper tubing. E. Use carbon-steel pipe hangers and supports metal trapeze pipe hangers and metal framing systems and attachments for general service applications. F. Use thermal-hanger shield inserts for insulated piping and tubing. G. Horizontal-Piping Hangers and Supports: Unless otherwise indicated and except as specified in piping system Sections, install the following types: 1. Adjustable, Steel Clevis Hangers (MSS Type 1): For suspension of noninsulated or insulated, stationary pipes NPS 1/2 to NPS 30. 2. Yoke-Type Pipe Clamps (MSS Type 2): For suspension of up to 1050 deg F, pipes NPS 4 to NPS 24, requiring up to 4 inches of insulation. 3. Pipe Hangers (MSS Type 5): For suspension of pipes NPS 1/2 to NPS 4, to allow off-center closure for hanger installation before pipe erection. 4. Pipe Saddle Supports (MSS Type 36): For support of pipes NPS 4 to NPS 36, with steel-pipe base stanchion support and cast-iron floor flange or carbon-steel plate. 5. Adjustable Pipe Saddle Supports (MSS Type 38): For stanchion-type support for pipes NPS 2-1/2 to NPS 36 if vertical adjustment is required, with steel-pipe base stanchion support and cast-iron floor flange. 6. Adjustable Pipe Roll and Base Units (MSS Type 46): For support of pipes NPS 2 to NPS 30 if vertical and lateral adjustment during installation might be required in addition to expansion and contraction. H. Vertical-Piping Clamps: Unless otherwise indicated and except as specified in piping system Sections, install the following types: 1. Extension Pipe or Riser Clamps (MSS Type 8): For support of pipe risers NPS 3/4 to NPS 24. 2. Carbon- or Alloy-Steel Riser Clamps (MSS Type 42): For support of pipe risers NPS 3/4 to NPS 24 if longer ends are required for riser clamps. I. Hanger-Rod Attachments: Unless otherwise indicated and except as specified in piping system Sections, install the following types: 1. Steel Turnbuckles (MSS Type 13): For adjustment up to 6 inches for heavy loads. 2. Steel Clevises (MSS Type 14): For 120 to 450 deg F piping installations. J. Building Attachments: Unless otherwise indicated and except as specified in piping system Sections, install the following types: 1. Steel or Malleable Concrete Inserts (MSS Type 18): For upper attachment to suspend pipe hangers from concrete ceiling. 2. Side-Beam or Channel Clamps (MSS Type 20): For attaching to bottom flange of beams, channels, or angles. 3. Center-Beam Clamps (MSS Type 21): For attaching to center of bottom flange of beams. 4. Welded Beam Attachments (MSS Type 22): For attaching to bottom of beams if loads are considerable and rod sizes are large. 5. C-Clamps (MSS Type 23): For structural shapes. 6. Side-Beam Clamps (MSS Type 27): For bottom of steel I-beams. Mountain Haus Boiler Replacement 03/18/2014 100% CD's/Permit HANGERS AND SUPPORTS FOR HVAC PIPING AND EQUIPMENT 23 0529 - 7 7. Welded-Steel Brackets: For support of pipes from below or for suspending from above by using clip and rod. Use one of the following for indicated loads: a. Light (MSS Type 31): 750 lb. b. Medium (MSS Type 32): 1500 lb. c. Heavy (MSS Type 33): 3000 lb. K. Saddles and Shields: Unless otherwise indicated and except as specified in piping system Sections, install the following types: 1. Thermal-Hanger Shield Inserts: For supporting insulated pipe. L. Spring Hangers and Supports: Unless otherwise indicated and except as specified in piping system Sections, install the following types: 1. Restraint-Control Devices (MSS Type 47): Where indicated to control piping movement. M. Comply with MSS SP-69 for trapeze pipe-hanger selections and applications that are not specified in piping system Sections. N. Comply with MFMA-103 for metal framing system selections and applications that are not specified in piping system Sections. O. Use powder-actuated fasteners mechanical-expansion anchors instead of building attachments where required in concrete construction. END OF SECTION 230529 Mountain Haus Boiler Replacement 03/18/2014 100% CD's/Permit IDENTIFICATION FOR HVAC PIPING AND EQUIPMENT 23 0553 - 1 SECTION 23 0553 - IDENTIFICATION FOR HVAC PIPING AND EQUIPMENT PART 1 GENERAL 1.01 RELATED DOCUMENTS A. Drawings and general provisions of the Contract, including General and Supplementary Conditions and Division 01 Specification Sections, apply to this Section. 1.02 SUMMARY A. Section Includes: 1. Equipment labels. 2. Warning signs and labels. 3. Pipe labels. 4. Duct labels. 5. Valve tags. 6. Warning tags. 1.03 ACTION SUBMITTALS A. Product Data: For each type of product indicated. B. Valve numbering scheme. 1.04 COORDINATION A. Coordinate installation of identifying devices with completion of covering and painting of surfaces where devices are to be applied. B. Coordinate installation of identifying devices with locations of access panels and doors. C. Install identifying devices before installing acoustical ceilings and similar concealment. PART 2 PRODUCTS 2.01 EQUIPMENT LABELS A. Metal Labels for Equipment: 1. Material and Thickness: Stainless steel, 0.025-inch minimum thickness, and having predrilled or stamped holes for attachment hardware. 2. Minimum Label Size: Length and width vary for required label content, but not less than 2-1/2 by 3/4 inch. 3. Minimum Letter Size: 1/4 inch for name of units if viewing distance is less than 24 inches, 1/2 inch for viewing distances up to 72 inches, and proportionately larger lettering for greater viewing distances. Include secondary lettering two-thirds to three-fourths the size of principal lettering. 4. Fasteners: Stainless-steel rivets or self-tapping screws . 5. Adhesive: Contact-type permanent adhesive, compatible with label and with substrate. B. Label Content: Include equipment's Drawing designation or unique equipment number, Drawing numbers where equipment is indicated (plans, details, and schedules), plus the Specification Section number and title where equipment is specified. Mountain Haus Boiler Replacement 03/18/2014 100% CD's/Permit IDENTIFICATION FOR HVAC PIPING AND EQUIPMENT 23 0553 - 2 2.02 WARNING SIGNS AND LABELS A. Material and Thickness: Multilayer, multicolor, plastic labels for mechanical engraving, 1/16 inch thick, and having predrilled holes for attachment hardware. B. Letter Color: Red. C. Background Color: Yellow. D. Maximum Temperature: Able to withstand temperatures up to 160 deg F. E. Minimum Label Size: Length and width vary for required label content, but not less than 2-1/2 by 3/4 inch. F. Minimum Letter Size: 1/4 inch for name of units if viewing distance is less than 24 inches, 1/2 inch for viewing distances up to 72 inches, and proportionately larger lettering for greater viewing distances. Include secondary lettering two-thirds to three-fourths the size of principal lettering. G. Fasteners: Stainless-steel rivets or self-tapping screws . H. Adhesive: Contact-type permanent adhesive, compatible with label and with substrate. I. Label Content: Include caution and warning information, plus emergency notification instructions. 2.03 PIPE LABELS A. General Requirements for Manufactured Pipe Labels: Preprinted, color-coded, with lettering indicating service, and showing flow direction. B. Pretensioned Pipe Labels: Precoiled, semirigid plastic formed to cover full circumference of pipe and to attach to pipe without fasteners or adhesive. C. Pipe Label Contents: Include identification of piping service using same designations or abbreviations as used on Drawings, pipe size, and an arrow indicating flow direction. 1. Flow-Direction Arrows: Integral with piping system service lettering to accommodate both directions, or as separate unit on each pipe label to indicate flow direction. 2. Lettering Size: According to ASME A13.1. 2.04 VALVE TAGS A. Valve Tags: Stamped or engraved with 1/4-inch letters for piping system abbreviation and 1/2-inch numbers. 1. Tag Material: Brass, 0.032-inch or Stainless steel, 0.025-inch minimum thickness, and having predrilled or stamped holes for attachment hardware. 2. Fasteners: Brass wire-link or beaded chain; or S-hook . B. Valve Schedules: For each piping system, on 8-1/2-by-11-inch bond paper. Tabulate valve number, piping system, system abbreviation (as shown on valve tag), location of valve (room or space), normal-operating position (open, closed, or modulating), and variations for identification. Mark valves for emergency shutoff and similar special uses. 1. Valve-tag schedule shall be included in operation and maintenance data. 2.05 WARNING TAGS A. Warning Tags: Preprinted or partially preprinted, accident-prevention tags, of plasticized card stock with matte finish suitable for writing. 1. Size: Approximately 4 by 7 inches. 2. Fasteners: Brass grommet and wire. Mountain Haus Boiler Replacement 03/18/2014 100% CD's/Permit IDENTIFICATION FOR HVAC PIPING AND EQUIPMENT 23 0553 - 3 3. Nomenclature: Large-size primary caption such as "DANGER," "CAUTION," or "DO NOT OPERATE." 4. Color: Yellow background with black lettering. PART 3 EXECUTION 3.01 PREPARATION A. Clean piping and equipment surfaces of substances that could impair bond of identification devices, including dirt, oil, grease, release agents, and incompatible primers, paints, and encapsulants. 3.02 EQUIPMENT LABEL INSTALLATION A. Install or permanently fasten labels on each major item of mechanical equipment. B. Locate equipment labels where accessible and visible. 3.03 PIPE LABEL INSTALLATION A. Locate pipe labels where piping is exposed or above accessible ceilings in finished spaces; machine rooms; accessible maintenance spaces such as shafts, tunnels, and plenums; and exterior exposed locations as follows: 1. Near each valve and control device. 2. Near each branch connection, excluding short takeoffs for fixtures and terminal units. Where flow pattern is not obvious, mark each pipe at branch. 3. Near penetrations through walls, floors, ceilings, and inaccessible enclosures. 4. At access doors, manholes, and similar access points that permit view of concealed piping. 5. Near major equipment items and other points of origination and termination. 6. Spaced at maximum intervals of 50 feet along each run. Reduce intervals to 15 feet in areas of congested piping and equipment. 7. On piping above removable acoustical ceilings. Omit intermediately spaced labels. B. Pipe Label Color Schedule: 1. Domestic Water Piping: a. Background Color: Green b. Letter Color: White. 2. Sanitary Waste and Storm Drainage Piping: a. Background Color: Green b. Letter Color: White. 3. Gas Piping: Pipe Labels not required in exposed utility areas where pipe is painted yellow. a. Background Color: Yellow. b. Letter Color: Black. 4. Chilled-Water Piping: a. Background Color: Green. b. Letter Color: White. 5. Heating Water and Snowmelt Piping: a. Background Color: Yellow. b. Letter Color: Black. 3.04 VALVE-TAG INSTALLATION A. Install tags on valves and control devices in piping systems, except check valves; valves within factory-fabricated equipment units; shutoff valves; faucets; convenience and lawn-watering hose connections; and HVAC terminal devices and similar roughing-in connections of end-use fixtures and units. List tagged valves in a valve schedule. Mountain Haus Boiler Replacement 03/18/2014 100% CD's/Permit IDENTIFICATION FOR HVAC PIPING AND EQUIPMENT 23 0553 - 4 B. Valve-Tag Application Schedule: Tag valves according to size, shape, and color scheme and with captions similar to those indicated in the following subparagraphs: 1. Valve-Tag Size and Shape: a. Cold Water: 1-1/2 inches, round. b. Hot Water: 1-1/2 inches (38 mm), round. c. Chilled Water: 1-1/2 inches, round. d. Hot Water: 1-1/2 inches, round. e. Gas: 1-1/2 inches, round. 3.05 WARNING-TAG INSTALLATION A. Write required message on, and attach warning tags to, equipment and other items where required. END OF SECTION 23 0553 Mountain Haus Boiler Replacement 03/18/2014 100% CD's/Permit TESTING, ADJUSTING, AND BALANCING FOR HVAC 23 0593 - 1 SECTION 23 0593 - TESTING, ADJUSTING, AND BALANCING FOR HVAC PART 1 GENERAL 1.01 RELATED DOCUMENTS A. Drawings and general provisions of the Contract, including General and Supplementary Conditions and Division 01 Specification Sections, apply to this Section. 1.02 SUMMARY A. Section Includes: 1. Balancing Air Systems: a. Constant-volume air systems. b. Variable-air-volume systems. 2. Balancing Hydronic Piping Systems: a. Variable-flow hydronic systems. b. Primary-secondary hydronic systems. 1.03 DEFINITIONS A. AABC: Associated Air Balance Council. B. NEBB: National Environmental Balancing Bureau. C. TAB: Testing, adjusting, and balancing. D. TABB: Testing, Adjusting, and Balancing Bureau. E. TAB Specialist: An entity engaged to perform TAB Work. 1.04 INFORMATIONAL SUBMITTALS A. Qualification Data: Within 30 days of Contractor's Notice to Proceed, submit documentation that the TAB contractor and this Project's TAB team members meet the qualifications specified in "Quality Assurance" Article. B. Strategies and Procedures Plan: Within 30 days of Contractor's Notice to Proceed, submit TAB strategies and step-by-step procedures as specified in "Preparation" Article. C. Certified TAB reports. 1.05 QUALITY ASSURANCE A. TAB Contractor Qualifications: Engage a TAB entity certified by TABB. 1. TAB Field Supervisor: Employee of the TAB contractor and certified by NEBB or . 2. TAB Technician: Employee of the TAB contractor and who is certified by TABB as a TAB technician. B. TAB Report Forms: Use standard TAB contractor's forms approved by Commissioning Authority. C. Instrumentation Type, Quantity, Accuracy, and Calibration: As described in ASHRAE 111, Section 5, "Instrumentation." D. ASHRAE Compliance: Applicable requirements in ASHRAE 62.1, Section 7.2.2 - "Air Balancing." Mountain Haus Boiler Replacement 03/18/2014 100% CD's/Permit TESTING, ADJUSTING, AND BALANCING FOR HVAC 23 0593 - 2 E. ASHRAE/IESNA Compliance: Applicable requirements in ASHRAE/IESNA 90.1, Section 6.7.2.3 - "System Balancing." 1.06 PROJECT CONDITIONS A. Full Owner Occupancy: Owner will occupy the site and existing building during entire TAB period. Cooperate with Owner during TAB operations to minimize conflicts with Owner's operations. B. Partial Owner Occupancy: Owner may occupy completed areas of building before Substantial Completion. Cooperate with Owner during TAB operations to minimize conflicts with Owner's operations. 1.07 COORDINATION A. Notice: Provide seven days' advance notice for each test. Include scheduled test dates and times. B. Perform TAB after leakage and pressure tests on air and water distribution systems have been satisfactorily completed. PART 2 PRODUCTS (Not Applicable) PART 3 EXECUTION 3.01 EXAMINATION A. Examine the Contract Documents to become familiar with Project requirements and to discover conditions in systems' designs that may preclude proper TAB of systems and equipment. B. Examine systems for installed balancing devices, such as test ports, gage cocks, thermometer wells, flow-control devices, balancing valves and fittings, and manual volume dampers. Verify that locations of these balancing devices are accessible. C. Examine the approved submittals for HVAC systems and equipment. D. Examine design data including HVAC system descriptions, statements of design assumptions for environmental conditions and systems' output, and statements of philosophies and assumptions about HVAC system and equipment controls. E. Examine ceiling plenums and underfloor air plenums used for supply, return, or relief air to verify that they meet the leakage class of connected ducts as specified in Section 233113 "Metal Ducts" and are properly separated from adjacent areas. Verify that penetrations in plenum walls are sealed and fire-stopped if required. F. Examine equipment performance data including fan and pump curves. 1. Relate performance data to Project conditions and requirements, including system effects that can create undesired or unpredicted conditions that cause reduced capacities in all or part of a system. 2. Calculate system-effect factors to reduce performance ratings of HVAC equipment when installed under conditions different from the conditions used to rate equipment performance. To calculate system effects for air systems, use tables and charts found in AMCA 201, "Fans and Systems," or in SMACNA's "HVAC Systems - Duct Design." Compare results with the design data and installed conditions. G. Examine system and equipment installations and verify that field quality-control testing, cleaning, and adjusting specified in individual Sections have been performed. H. Examine test reports specified in individual system and equipment Sections. Mountain Haus Boiler Replacement 03/18/2014 100% CD's/Permit TESTING, ADJUSTING, AND BALANCING FOR HVAC 23 0593 - 3 I. Examine HVAC equipment and filters and verify that bearings are greased, belts are aligned and tight, and equipment with functioning controls is ready for operation. J. Examine terminal units, such as variable-air-volume boxes, and verify that they are accessible and their controls are connected and functioning. K. Examine strainers. Verify that startup screens are replaced by permanent screens with indicated perforations. L. Examine three-way valves for proper installation for their intended function of diverting or mixing fluid flows. M. Examine heat-transfer coils for correct piping connections and for clean and straight fins. N. Examine system pumps to ensure absence of entrained air in the suction piping. O. Examine operating safety interlocks and controls on HVAC equipment. P. Report deficiencies discovered before and during performance of TAB procedures. Observe and record system reactions to changes in conditions. Record default set points if different from indicated values. 3.02 PREPARATION A. Prepare a TAB plan that includes strategies and step-by-step procedures. B. Complete system-readiness checks and prepare reports. Verify the following: 1. Permanent electrical-power wiring is complete. 2. Hydronic systems are filled, clean, and free of air. 3. Automatic temperature-control systems are operational. 4. Equipment and duct access doors are securely closed. 5. Balance, smoke, and fire dampers are open. 6. Isolating and balancing valves are open and control valves are operational. 7. Ceilings are installed in critical areas where air-pattern adjustments are required and access to balancing devices is provided. 8. Windows and doors can be closed so indicated conditions for system operations can be met. 3.03 GENERAL PROCEDURES FOR TESTING AND BALANCING A. Perform testing and balancing procedures on each system according to the procedures contained in ASHRAE 111 and in this Section. 1. Comply with requirements in ASHRAE 62.1, Section 7.2.2 - "Air Balancing." B. Cut insulation, ducts, pipes, and equipment cabinets for installation of test probes to the minimum extent necessary for TAB procedures. 1. After testing and balancing, patch probe holes in ducts with same material and thickness as used to construct ducts. 2. After testing and balancing, install test ports and duct access doors that comply with requirements in Section 23 3300 "Air Duct Accessories." 3. Install and join new insulation that matches removed materials. Restore insulation, coverings, vapor barrier, and finish according to Section 23 0713 "Duct Insulation," Section 23 0716 "HVAC Equipment Insulation," and Section 23 0719 "HVAC Piping Insulation." C. Mark equipment and balancing devices, including damper-control positions, valve position indicators, fan-speed-control levers, and similar controls and devices, with paint or other suitable, permanent identification material to show final settings. D. Take and report testing and balancing measurements in inch-pound (IP) units. Mountain Haus Boiler Replacement 03/18/2014 100% CD's/Permit TESTING, ADJUSTING, AND BALANCING FOR HVAC 23 0593 - 4 3.04 GENERAL PROCEDURES FOR BALANCING AIR SYSTEMS A. Prepare test reports for both fans and outlets. Obtain manufacturer's outlet factors and recommended testing procedures. Crosscheck the summation of required outlet volumes with required fan volumes. B. Prepare schematic diagrams of systems' "as-built" duct layouts. C. For variable-air-volume systems, develop a plan to simulate diversity. D. Determine the best locations in main and branch ducts for accurate duct-airflow measurements. E. Check airflow patterns from the outdoor-air louvers and dampers and the return- and exhaust-air dampers through the supply-fan discharge and mixing dampers. F. Locate start-stop and disconnect switches, electrical interlocks, and motor starters. G. Verify that motor starters are equipped with properly sized thermal protection. H. Check dampers for proper position to achieve desired airflow path. I. Check for airflow blockages. J. Check condensate drains for proper connections and functioning. K. Check for proper sealing of air-handling-unit components. L. Verify that air duct system is sealed as specified in Section 23 3113 "Metal Ducts." 3.05 PROCEDURES FOR CONSTANT-VOLUME AIR SYSTEMS A. Adjust fans to deliver total indicated airflows within the maximum allowable fan speed listed by fan manufacturer. 1. Measure total airflow. a. Where sufficient space in ducts is unavailable for Pitot-tube traverse measurements, measure airflow at terminal outlets and inlets and calculate the total airflow. 2. Measure fan static pressures as follows to determine actual static pressure: a. Measure outlet static pressure as far downstream from the fan as practical and upstream from restrictions in ducts such as elbows and transitions. b. Measure static pressure directly at the fan outlet or through the flexible connection. c. Measure inlet static pressure of single-inlet fans in the inlet duct as near the fan as possible, upstream from the flexible connection, and downstream from duct restrictions. d. Measure inlet static pressure of double-inlet fans through the wall of the plenum that houses the fan. 3. Measure static pressure across each component that makes up an air-handling unit, rooftop unit, and other air-handling and -treating equipment. a. Report the cleanliness status of filters and the time static pressures are measured. 4. Measure static pressures entering and leaving other devices, such as sound traps, heat-recovery equipment, and air washers, under final balanced conditions. 5. Review Record Documents to determine variations in design static pressures versus actual static pressures. Calculate actual system-effect factors. Recommend adjustments to accommodate actual conditions. 6. Obtain approval from Commissioning Authority for adjustment of fan speed higher or lower than indicated speed. Comply with requirements in HVAC Sections for air-handling units for adjustment of fans, belts, and pulley sizes to achieve indicated air-handling-unit performance. 7. Do not make fan-speed adjustments that result in motor overload. Consult equipment manufacturers about fan-speed safety factors. Modulate dampers and measure fan-motor amperage to ensure that no Mountain Haus Boiler Replacement 03/18/2014 100% CD's/Permit TESTING, ADJUSTING, AND BALANCING FOR HVAC 23 0593 - 5 overload will occur. Measure amperage in full-cooling, full-heating, economizer, and any other operating mode to determine the maximum required brake horsepower. B. Adjust volume dampers for main duct, submain ducts, and major branch ducts to indicated airflows within specified tolerances. 1. Measure airflow of submain and branch ducts. a. Where sufficient space in submain and branch ducts is unavailable for Pitot-tube traverse measurements, measure airflow at terminal outlets and inlets and calculate the total airflow for that zone. 2. Measure static pressure at a point downstream from the balancing damper, and adjust volume dampers until the proper static pressure is achieved. 3. Remeasure each submain and branch duct after all have been adjusted. Continue to adjust submain and branch ducts to indicated airflows within specified tolerances. C. Measure air outlets and inlets without making adjustments. 1. Measure terminal outlets using a direct-reading hood or outlet manufacturer's written instructions and calculating factors. D. Adjust air outlets and inlets for each space to indicated airflows within specified tolerances of indicated values. Make adjustments using branch volume dampers rather than extractors and the dampers at air terminals. 1. Adjust each outlet in same room or space to within specified tolerances of indicated quantities without generating noise levels above the limitations prescribed by the Contract Documents. 2. Adjust patterns of adjustable outlets for proper distribution without drafts. 3.06 PROCEDURES FOR VARIABLE-AIR-VOLUME SYSTEMS A. Compensating for Diversity: When the total airflow of all terminal units is more than the indicated airflow of the fan, place a selected number of terminal units at a minimum set-point airflow with the remainder at maximum-airflow condition until the total airflow of the terminal units equals the indicated airflow of the fan. Select the reduced-airflow terminal units so they are distributed evenly among the branch ducts. B. Pressure-Independent, Variable-Air-Volume Systems: After the fan systems have been adjusted, adjust the variable-air-volume systems as follows: 1. Set outdoor-air dampers at minimum, and set return- and exhaust-air dampers at a position that simulates full-cooling load. 2. Select the terminal unit that is most critical to the supply-fan airflow and static pressure. Measure static pressure. Adjust system static pressure so the entering static pressure for the critical terminal unit is not less than the sum of the terminal-unit manufacturer's recommended minimum inlet static pressure plus the static pressure needed to overcome terminal-unit discharge system losses. 3. Measure total system airflow. Adjust to within indicated airflow. 4. Set terminal units at maximum airflow and adjust controller or regulator to deliver the designed maximum airflow. Use terminal-unit manufacturer's written instructions to make this adjustment. When total airflow is correct, balance the air outlets downstream from terminal units the same as described for constant-volume air systems. 5. Set terminal units at minimum airflow and adjust controller or regulator to deliver the designed minimum airflow. Check air outlets for a proportional reduction in airflow the same as described for constant-volume air systems. a. If air outlets are out of balance at minimum airflow, report the condition but leave outlets balanced for maximum airflow. 6. Remeasure the return airflow to the fan while operating at maximum return airflow and minimum outdoor airflow. a. Adjust the fan and balance the return-air ducts and inlets the same as described for constant-volume air systems. 7. Measure static pressure at the most critical terminal unit and adjust the static-pressure controller at the main supply-air sensing station to ensure that adequate static pressure is maintained at the most critical unit. Mountain Haus Boiler Replacement 03/18/2014 100% CD's/Permit TESTING, ADJUSTING, AND BALANCING FOR HVAC 23 0593 - 6 8. Record final fan-performance data. C. Pressure-Dependent, Variable-Air-Volume Systems without Diversity: After the fan systems have been adjusted, adjust the variable-air-volume systems as follows: 1. Balance variable-air-volume systems the same as described for constant-volume air systems. 2. Set terminal units and supply fan at full-airflow condition. 3. Adjust inlet dampers of each terminal unit to indicated airflow and verify operation of the static-pressure controller. When total airflow is correct, balance the air outlets downstream from terminal units the same as described for constant-volume air systems. 4. Readjust fan airflow for final maximum readings. 5. Measure operating static pressure at the sensor that controls the supply fan if one is installed, and verify operation of the static-pressure controller. 6. Set supply fan at minimum airflow if minimum airflow is indicated. Measure static pressure to verify that it is being maintained by the controller. 7. Set terminal units at minimum airflow and adjust controller or regulator to deliver the designed minimum airflow. Check air outlets for a proportional reduction in airflow the same as described for constant-volume air systems. a. If air outlets are out of balance at minimum airflow, report the condition but leave the outlets balanced for maximum airflow. 8. Measure the return airflow to the fan while operating at maximum return airflow and minimum outdoor airflow. a. Adjust the fan and balance the return-air ducts and inlets the same as described for constant-volume air systems. D. Pressure-Dependent, Variable-Air-Volume Systems with Diversity: After the fan systems have been adjusted, adjust the variable-air-volume systems as follows: 1. Set system at maximum indicated airflow by setting the required number of terminal units at minimum airflow. Select the reduced-airflow terminal units so they are distributed evenly among the branch ducts. 2. Adjust supply fan to maximum indicated airflow with the variable-airflow controller set at maximum airflow. 3. Set terminal units at full-airflow condition. 4. Adjust terminal units starting at the supply-fan end of the system and continuing progressively to the end of the system. Adjust inlet dampers of each terminal unit to indicated airflow. When total airflow is correct, balance the air outlets downstream from terminal units the same as described for constant-volume air systems. 5. Adjust terminal units for minimum airflow. 6. Measure static pressure at the sensor. 7. Measure the return airflow to the fan while operating at maximum return airflow and minimum outdoor airflow. Adjust the fan and balance the return-air ducts and inlets the same as described for constant-volume air systems. 3.07 GENERAL PROCEDURES FOR HYDRONIC SYSTEMS A. Prepare test reports with pertinent design data, and number in sequence starting at pump to end of system. Check the sum of branch-circuit flows against the approved pump flow rate. Correct variations that exceed plus or minus 5 percent. B. Prepare hydronic systems for testing and balancing according to the following, in addition to the general preparation procedures specified above: 1. Open all manual valves for maximum flow. 2. Check liquid level in expansion tank. 3. Check makeup water-station pressure gage for adequate pressure for highest vent. 4. Check flow-control valves for specified sequence of operation, and set at indicated flow. 5. Set differential-pressure control valves at the specified differential pressure. Do not set at fully closed position when pump is positive-displacement type unless several terminal valves are kept open. 6. Set system controls so automatic valves are wide open to heat exchangers. Mountain Haus Boiler Replacement 03/18/2014 100% CD's/Permit TESTING, ADJUSTING, AND BALANCING FOR HVAC 23 0593 - 7 7. Check pump-motor load. If motor is overloaded, throttle main flow-balancing device so motor nameplate rating is not exceeded. 8. Check air vents for a forceful liquid flow exiting from vents when manually operated. 3.08 PROCEDURES FOR VARIABLE-FLOW HYDRONIC SYSTEMS A. Balance systems with automatic two- and three-way control valves by setting systems at maximum flow through heat-exchange terminals and proceed as specified above for hydronic systems. 3.09 PROCEDURES FOR PRIMARY-SECONDARY HYDRONIC SYSTEMS A. Balance the primary circuit flow first and then balance the secondary circuits. 3.10 PROCEDURES FOR HEAT EXCHANGERS A. Measure water flow through all circuits. B. Adjust water flow to within specified tolerances. C. Measure inlet and outlet water temperatures. D. Measure inlet steam pressure. E. Check settings and operation of safety and relief valves. Record settings. 3.11 PROCEDURES FOR MOTORS A. Motors, 1/2 HP and Larger: Test at final balanced conditions and record the following data: 1. Manufacturer's name, model number, and serial number. 2. Motor horsepower rating. 3. Motor rpm. 4. Efficiency rating. 5. Nameplate and measured voltage, each phase. 6. Nameplate and measured amperage, each phase. 7. Starter thermal-protection-element rating. B. Motors Driven by Variable-Frequency Controllers: Test for proper operation at speeds varying from minimum to maximum. Test the manual bypass of the controller to prove proper operation. Record observations including name of controller manufacturer, model number, serial number, and nameplate data. 3.12 PROCEDURES FOR BOILERS A. Hydronic Boilers: Measure and record entering- and leaving-water temperatures and water flow. B. Steam Boilers: Measure and record entering-water temperature and flow and leaving-steam pressure, temperature, and flow. 3.13 PROCEDURES FOR HEAT-TRANSFER COILS A. Measure, adjust, and record the following data for each water coil: 1. Entering- and leaving-water temperature. 2. Water flow rate. 3. Water pressure drop. 4. Dry-bulb temperature of entering and leaving air. 5. Wet-bulb temperature of entering and leaving air for cooling coils. 6. Airflow. Mountain Haus Boiler Replacement 03/18/2014 100% CD's/Permit TESTING, ADJUSTING, AND BALANCING FOR HVAC 23 0593 - 8 7. Air pressure drop. B. Measure, adjust, and record the following data for each electric heating coil: 1. Nameplate data. 2. Airflow. 3. Entering- and leaving-air temperature at full load. 4. Voltage and amperage input of each phase at full load and at each incremental stage. 5. Calculated kilowatt at full load. 6. Fuse or circuit-breaker rating for overload protection. 3.14 TOLERANCES A. Set HVAC system's air flow rates and water flow rates within the following tolerances: 1. Supply, Return, and Exhaust Fans and Equipment with Fans: Plus or minus 10 percent. 2. Air Outlets and Inlets: Plus or minus 10 percent. 3. Heating-Water Flow Rate: Plus or minus 10 percent. 4. Cooling-Water Flow Rate: Plus or minus 10 percent. 3.15 REPORTING A. Initial Construction-Phase Report: Based on examination of the Contract Documents as specified in "Examination" Article, prepare a report on the adequacy of design for systems' balancing devices. Recommend changes and additions to systems' balancing devices to facilitate proper performance measuring and balancing. Recommend changes and additions to HVAC systems and general construction to allow access for performance measuring and balancing devices. B. Status Reports: Prepare monthly progress reports to describe completed procedures, procedures in progress, and scheduled procedures. Include a list of deficiencies and problems found in systems being tested and balanced. Prepare a separate report for each system and each building floor for systems serving multiple floors. 3.16 FINAL REPORT A. General: Prepare a certified written report; tabulate and divide the report into separate sections for tested systems and balanced systems. 1. Include a list of instruments used for procedures, along with proof of calibration. B. Final Report Contents: In addition to certified field-report data, include the following: 1. Pump curves. 2. Fan curves. 3. Manufacturers' test data. 4. Field test reports prepared by system and equipment installers. 5. Other information relative to equipment performance; do not include Shop Drawings and product data. C. General Report Data: In addition to form titles and entries, include the following data: 1. Title page. 2. Name and address of the TAB contractor. 3. Project name. 4. Project location. 5. Architect's name and address. 6. Engineer's name and address. 7. Contractor's name and address. 8. Report date. 9. Signature of TAB supervisor who certifies the report. 10. Table of Contents with the total number of pages defined for each section of the report. Number each page in the report. Mountain Haus Boiler Replacement 03/18/2014 100% CD's/Permit TESTING, ADJUSTING, AND BALANCING FOR HVAC 23 0593 - 9 11. Summary of contents including the following: a. Indicated versus final performance. b. Notable characteristics of systems. c. Description of system operation sequence if it varies from the Contract Documents. 12. Nomenclature sheets for each item of equipment. 13. Data for terminal units, including manufacturer's name, type, size, and fittings. 14. Notes to explain why certain final data in the body of reports vary from indicated values. 15. Test conditions for fans and pump performance forms including the following: a. Settings for outdoor-, return-, and exhaust-air dampers. b. Conditions of filters. c. Cooling coil, wet- and dry-bulb conditions. d. Face and bypass damper settings at coils. e. Fan drive settings including settings and percentage of maximum pitch diameter. f. Inlet vane settings for variable-air-volume systems. g. Settings for supply-air, static-pressure controller. h. Other system operating conditions that affect performance. D. System Diagrams: Include schematic layouts of air and hydronic distribution systems. Present each system with single-line diagram and include the following: 1. Quantities of outdoor, supply, return, and exhaust airflows. 2. Water and steam flow rates. 3. Duct, outlet, and inlet sizes. 4. Pipe and valve sizes and locations. 5. Terminal units. 6. Balancing stations. 7. Position of balancing devices. E. Air-Handling-Unit Test Reports: For air-handling units with coils, include the following: 1. Unit Data: a. Unit identification. b. Location. c. Make and type. d. Model number and unit size. e. Manufacturer's serial number. f. Unit arrangement and class. g. Discharge arrangement. h. Sheave make, size in inches, and bore. i. Center-to-center dimensions of sheave, and amount of adjustments in inches. j. Number, make, and size of belts. k. Number, type, and size of filters. 2. Motor Data: a. Motor make, and frame type and size. b. Horsepower and rpm. c. Volts, phase, and hertz. d. Full-load amperage and service factor. e. Sheave make, size in inches, and bore. f. Center-to-center dimensions of sheave, and amount of adjustments in inches. 3. Test Data (Indicated and Actual Values): a. Total air flow rate in cfm. b. Total system static pressure in inches wg. c. Fan rpm. d. Discharge static pressure in inches wg. e. Filter static-pressure differential in inches wg. f. Preheat-coil static-pressure differential in inches wg. g. Cooling-coil static-pressure differential in inches wg. h. Heating-coil static-pressure differential in inches wg. i. Outdoor airflow in cfm. Mountain Haus Boiler Replacement 03/18/2014 100% CD's/Permit TESTING, ADJUSTING, AND BALANCING FOR HVAC 23 0593 - 10 j. Return airflow in cfm. k. Outdoor-air damper position. l. Return-air damper position. m. Vortex damper position. F. Apparatus-Coil Test Reports: 1. Coil Data: a. System identification. b. Location. c. Coil type. d. Number of rows. e. Fin spacing in fins per inch o.c. f. Make and model number. g. Face area in sq. ft.. h. Tube size in NPS. i. Tube and fin materials. j. Circuiting arrangement. 2. Test Data (Indicated and Actual Values): a. Air flow rate in cfm. b. Average face velocity in fpm. c. Air pressure drop in inches wg. d. Outdoor-air, wet- and dry-bulb temperatures in deg F. e. Return-air, wet- and dry-bulb temperatures in deg F. f. Entering-air, wet- and dry-bulb temperatures in deg F. g. Leaving-air, wet- and dry-bulb temperatures in deg F. h. Water flow rate in gpm. i. Water pressure differential in feet of head or psig. j. Entering-water temperature in deg F. k. Leaving-water temperature in deg F. l. Refrigerant expansion valve and refrigerant types. m. Refrigerant suction pressure in psig. G. Gas- and Oil-Fired Heat Apparatus Test Reports: In addition to manufacturer's factory startup equipment reports, include the following: 1. Unit Data: a. System identification. b. Location. c. Make and type. d. Model number and unit size. e. Manufacturer's serial number. f. Fuel type in input data. g. Output capacity in Btu/h. h. Ignition type. i. Burner-control types. j. Motor horsepower and rpm. k. Motor volts, phase, and hertz. l. Motor full-load amperage and service factor. m. Sheave make, size in inches, and bore. n. Center-to-center dimensions of sheave, and amount of adjustments in inches. 2. Test Data (Indicated and Actual Values): a. Total air flow rate in cfm. b. Entering-air temperature in deg F. c. Leaving-air temperature in deg F. d. Air temperature differential in deg F. e. Entering-air static pressure in inches wg. f. Leaving-air static pressure in inches wg. g. Air static-pressure differential in inches wg. Mountain Haus Boiler Replacement 03/18/2014 100% CD's/Permit TESTING, ADJUSTING, AND BALANCING FOR HVAC 23 0593 - 11 h. Low-fire fuel input in Btu/h. i. High-fire fuel input in Btu/h. j. Manifold pressure in psig. k. High-temperature-limit setting in deg F. l. Operating set point in Btu/h. m. Motor voltage at each connection. n. Motor amperage for each phase. o. Heating value of fuel in Btu/h. H. Electric-Coil Test Reports: For electric furnaces, duct coils, and electric coils installed in central-station air-handling units, include the following: 1. Unit Data: a. System identification. b. Location. c. Coil identification. d. Capacity in Btu/h. e. Number of stages. f. Connected volts, phase, and hertz. g. Rated amperage. h. Air flow rate in cfm. i. Face area in sq. ft.. j. Minimum face velocity in fpm. 2. Test Data (Indicated and Actual Values): a. Heat output in Btu/h. b. Air flow rate in cfm. c. Air velocity in fpm. d. Entering-air temperature in deg F. e. Leaving-air temperature in deg F. f. Voltage at each connection. g. Amperage for each phase. I. Fan Test Reports: For supply, return, and exhaust fans, include the following: 1. Fan Data: a. System identification. b. Location. c. Make and type. d. Model number and size. e. Manufacturer's serial number. f. Arrangement and class. g. Sheave make, size in inches, and bore. h. Center-to-center dimensions of sheave, and amount of adjustments in inches. 2. Motor Data: a. Motor make, and frame type and size. b. Horsepower and rpm. c. Volts, phase, and hertz. d. Full-load amperage and service factor. e. Sheave make, size in inches, and bore. f. Center-to-center dimensions of sheave, and amount of adjustments in inches. g. Number, make, and size of belts. 3. Test Data (Indicated and Actual Values): a. Total airflow rate in cfm. b. Total system static pressure in inches wg. c. Fan rpm. d. Discharge static pressure in inches wg. e. Suction static pressure in inches wg. Mountain Haus Boiler Replacement 03/18/2014 100% CD's/Permit TESTING, ADJUSTING, AND BALANCING FOR HVAC 23 0593 - 12 J. Round, Flat-Oval, and Rectangular Duct Traverse Reports: Include a diagram with a grid representing the duct cross-section and record the following: 1. Report Data: a. System and air-handling-unit number. b. Location and zone. c. Traverse air temperature in deg F. d. Duct static pressure in inches wg. e. Duct size in inches. f. Duct area in sq. ft.. g. Indicated air flow rate in cfm. h. Indicated velocity in fpm. i. Actual air flow rate in cfm. j. Actual average velocity in fpm. k. Barometric pressure in psig. K. Air-Terminal-Device Reports: 1. Unit Data: a. System and air-handling unit identification. b. Location and zone. c. Apparatus used for test. d. Area served. e. Make. f. Number from system diagram. g. Type and model number. h. Size. i. Effective area in sq. ft.. 2. Test Data (Indicated and Actual Values): a. Air flow rate in cfm. b. Air velocity in fpm. c. Preliminary air flow rate as needed in cfm. d. Preliminary velocity as needed in fpm. e. Final air flow rate in cfm. f. Final velocity in fpm. g. Space temperature in deg F. L. System-Coil Reports: For reheat coils and water coils of terminal units, include the following: 1. Unit Data: a. System and air-handling-unit identification. b. Location and zone. c. Room or riser served. d. Coil make and size. e. Flowmeter type. 2. Test Data (Indicated and Actual Values): a. Air flow rate in cfm. b. Entering-water temperature in deg F. c. Leaving-water temperature in deg F. d. Water pressure drop in feet of head or psig. e. Entering-air temperature in deg F. f. Leaving-air temperature in deg F. M. Pump Test Reports: Calculate impeller size by plotting the shutoff head on pump curves and include the following: 1. Unit Data: a. Unit identification. b. Location. c. Service. Mountain Haus Boiler Replacement 03/18/2014 100% CD's/Permit TESTING, ADJUSTING, AND BALANCING FOR HVAC 23 0593 - 13 d. Make and size. e. Model number and serial number. f. Water flow rate in gpm. g. Water pressure differential in feet of head or psig. h. Required net positive suction head in feet of head or psig. i. Pump rpm. j. Impeller diameter in inches. k. Motor make and frame size. l. Motor horsepower and rpm. m. Voltage at each connection. n. Amperage for each phase. o. Full-load amperage and service factor. p. Seal type. 2. Test Data (Indicated and Actual Values): a. Static head in feet of head or psig. b. Pump shutoff pressure in feet of head or psig. c. Actual impeller size in inches. d. Full-open flow rate in gpm. e. Full-open pressure in feet of head or psig. f. Final discharge pressure in feet of head or psig. g. Final suction pressure in feet of head or psig. h. Final total pressure in feet of head or psig. i. Final water flow rate in gpm. j. Voltage at each connection. k. Amperage for each phase. N. Instrument Calibration Reports: 1. Report Data: a. Instrument type and make. b. Serial number. c. Application. d. Dates of use. e. Dates of calibration. 3.17 INSPECTIONS A. Initial Inspection: 1. After testing and balancing are complete, operate each system and randomly check measurements to verify that the system is operating according to the final test and balance readings documented in the final report. 2. Check the following for each system: a. Measure airflow of at least 10 percent of air outlets. b. Measure water flow of at least 5 percent of terminals. c. Measure room temperature at each thermostat/temperature sensor. Compare the reading to the set point. d. Verify that balancing devices are marked with final balance position. e. Note deviations from the Contract Documents in the final report. B. Final Inspection: 1. After initial inspection is complete and documentation by random checks verifies that testing and balancing are complete and accurately documented in the final report, request that a final inspection be made by Construction Manager. 2. The TAB contractor's test and balance engineer shall conduct the inspection in the presence of Construction Manager Commissioning Authority. Mountain Haus Boiler Replacement 03/18/2014 100% CD's/Permit TESTING, ADJUSTING, AND BALANCING FOR HVAC 23 0593 - 14 3. Construction Manager Commissioning Authority shall randomly select measurements, documented in the final report, to be rechecked. Rechecking shall be limited to either 10 percent of the total measurements recorded or the extent of measurements that can be accomplished in a normal 8-hour business day. 4. If rechecks yield measurements that differ from the measurements documented in the final report by more than the tolerances allowed, the measurements shall be noted as "FAILED." 5. If the number of "FAILED" measurements is greater than 10 percent of the total measurements checked during the final inspection, the testing and balancing shall be considered incomplete and shall be rejected. C. TAB Work will be considered defective if it does not pass final inspections. If TAB Work fails, proceed as follows: 1. Recheck all measurements and make adjustments. Revise the final report and balancing device settings to include all changes; resubmit the final report and request a second final inspection. 2. If the second final inspection also fails, Owner may contract the services of another TAB contractor to complete TAB Work according to the Contract Documents and deduct the cost of the services from the original TAB contractor's final payment. D. Prepare test and inspection reports. END OF SECTION 230593 Mountain Haus Boiler Replacement 03/18/2014 100% CD's/Permit MECHANICAL INSULATION 23 0711 - 1 SECTION 23 0711 - MECHANICAL INSULATION PART 1 GENERAL 1.01 SUMMARY A. This Section includes mechanical insulation for boiler breeching, duct, equipment, and pipe, including the following: 1. Insulation Materials: a. Cellular glass. b. Flexible elastomeric. c. Mineral fiber. 2. Fire-rated insulation systems. 3. Adhesives. 4. Mastics. 5. Lagging adhesives. 6. Sealants. 7. Factory-applied jackets. 8. Field-applied jackets. 9. Tapes. 10. Securements. 11. Corner angles. 1.02 DEFINITIONS A. ASJ: All-service jacket. B. FSK: Foil, scrim, kraft paper. C. FSP: Foil, scrim, polyethylene. D. PVDC: Polyvinylidene chloride. E. SSL: Self-sealing lap. 1.03 SUBMITTALS A. Product Data: For each type of product indicated, identify thermal conductivity, thickness, and jackets (both factory and field applied, if any), and flame spread and smoke developed indices. 1.04 QUALITY ASSURANCE A. Installer Qualifications: Skilled mechanics who have successfully completed an apprenticeship program or another craft training program certified by the Department of Labor, Bureau of Apprenticeship and Training. 1.05 DELIVERY, STORAGE, AND HANDLING A. Packaging: Insulation material containers shall be marked by manufacturer with appropriate ASTM standard designation, type and grade, and maximum use temperature. 1.06 COORDINATION A. Coordinate size and location of supports, hangers, and insulation shields specified in Division 23 Section "Hangers and Supports." Mountain Haus Boiler Replacement 03/18/2014 100% CD's/Permit MECHANICAL INSULATION 23 0711 - 2 B. Coordinate clearance requirements with piping Installer for piping insulation application, duct Installer for duct insulation application, and equipment Installer for equipment insulation application. Before preparing piping and ductwork Shop Drawings, establish and maintain clearance requirements for installation of insulation and field-applied jackets and finishes and for space required for maintenance. C. Coordinate installation and testing of heat tracing. 1.07 SCHEDULING A. Schedule insulation application after pressure testing systems and, where required, after installing and testing heat tracing. Insulation application may begin on segments that have satisfactory test results. B. Complete installation and concealment of plastic materials as rapidly as possible in each area of construction. PART 2 PRODUCTS 2.01 INSULATION MATERIALS A. Refer to Part 3 schedule articles for requirements about where insulating materials shall be applied. B. Products shall not contain asbestos, lead, mercury, or mercury compounds. C. Products that come in contact with stainless steel shall have a leachable chloride content of less than 50 ppm when tested according to ASTM C 871. D. Insulation materials for use on austenitic stainless steel shall be qualified as acceptable according to ASTM C 795. E. Foam insulation materials shall not use CFC or HCFC blowing agents in the manufacturing process. F. Cellular Glass: Inorganic, incombustible, foamed or cellulated glass with annealed, rigid, hermetically sealed cells. Factory-applied jacket requirements are specified in Part 2 "Factory-Applied Jackets" Article. 1. Products: a. Cell-U-Foam Corporation; Ultra-CUF. b. Pittsburgh Corning Corporation; Foamglas Super K. 2. Block Insulation: ASTM C 552, Type I. 3. Special-Shaped Insulation: ASTM C 552, Type III. 4. Board Insulation: ASTM C 552, Type IV. 5. Preformed Pipe Insulation without Jacket: Comply with ASTM C 552, Type II, Class 1. 6. Preformed Pipe Insulation with Factory-Applied ASJ-SSL: Comply with ASTM C 552, Type II, Class 2. 7. Factory fabricate shapes according to ASTM C 450 and ASTM C 585. G. Flexible Elastomeric: Closed-cell, sponge- or expanded-rubber materials. Comply with ASTM C 534, Type I for tubular materials and Type II for sheet materials. 1. Products: a. Aeroflex USA Inc.; Aerocel. b. Armacell LLC; AP Armaflex. c. RBX Corporation; Insul-Sheet 1800 and Insul-Tube 180. H. Mineral-Fiber Blanket Insulation: Mineral or glass fibers bonded with a thermosetting resin. Comply with ASTM C 553, Type II and ASTM C 1290. Factory-applied jacket requirements are specified in Part 2 "Factory-Applied Jackets" Article. 1. Products: a. CertainTeed Corp.; Duct Wrap. b. Johns Manville; Microlite. c. Knauf Insulation; Duct Wrap. Mountain Haus Boiler Replacement 03/18/2014 100% CD's/Permit MECHANICAL INSULATION 23 0711 - 3 d. Manson Insulation Inc.; Alley Wrap. e. Owens Corning; All-Service Duct Wrap. I. Mineral-Fiber Board Insulation: Mineral or glass fibers bonded with a thermosetting resin. Comply with ASTM C 612, Type IA or Type IB. For duct and plenum applications, provide insulation with factory-applied FSK jacket. For equipment applications, provide insulation without factory-applied jacket. Factory-applied jacket requirements are specified in Part 2 "Factory-Applied Jackets" Article. 1. Products: a. CertainTeed Corp.; Commercial Board. b. Fibrex Insulations Inc.; FBX. c. Johns Manville; 800 Series Spin-Glas. d. Knauf Insulation; Insulation Board. e. Manson Insulation Inc.; AK Board. f. Owens Corning; Fiberglas 700 Series. J. Mineral-Fiber, Preformed Pipe Insulation: 1. Products: a. Fibrex Insulations Inc.; Coreplus 1200. b. Johns Manville; Micro-Lok. c. Knauf Insulation; 1000(Pipe Insulation. d. Manson Insulation Inc.; Alley-K. e. Owens Corning; Fiberglas Pipe Insulation. 2. Type I, 850 deg F Materials: Mineral or glass fibers bonded with a thermosetting resin. Comply with ASTM C 547, Type I, Grade A, with factory-applied ASJ-SSL. Factory-applied jacket requirements are specified in Part 2 "Factory-Applied Jackets" Article. K. Mineral-Fiber, Pipe and Tank Insulation: Mineral or glass fibers bonded with a thermosetting resin. Semirigid board material with factory-applied ASJ complying with ASTM C 1393, Type II or Type IIIA Category 2, or with properties similar to ASTM C 612, Type IB. Nominal density is 2.5 lb/cu. ft. or more. Thermal conductivity (k-value) at 100 deg F is 0.29 Btu x in./h x sq. ft. x deg F or less. Factory-applied jacket requirements are specified in Part 2 "Factory-Applied Jackets" Article. 1. Products: a. CertainTeed Corp.; CrimpWrap. b. Johns Manville; MicroFlex. c. Knauf Insulation; Pipe and Tank Insulation. d. Manson Insulation Inc.; AK Flex. e. Owens Corning; Fiberglas Pipe and Tank Insulation. 2.02 ADHESIVES A. Materials shall be compatible with insulation materials, jackets, and substrates and for bonding insulation to itself and to surfaces to be insulated, unless otherwise indicated. B. Cellular-Glass and Polyisocyanurate Adhesive: Solvent-based resin adhesive, with a service temperature range of minus 75 to plus 300 deg F. 1. Products: a. Childers Products, Division of ITW; CP-96. b. Foster Products Corporation, H. B. Fuller Company; 81-33. C. Flexible Elastomeric Adhesive: Comply with MIL-A-24179A, Type II, Class I. 1. Products: a. Aeroflex USA Inc.; Aeroseal. b. Armacell LCC; 520 Adhesive. c. Foster Products Corporation, H. B. Fuller Company; 85-75. d. RBX Corporation; Rubatex Contact Adhesive. D. Mineral-Fiber Adhesive: Comply with MIL-A-3316C, Class 2, Grade A. Mountain Haus Boiler Replacement 03/18/2014 100% CD's/Permit MECHANICAL INSULATION 23 0711 - 4 1. Products: a. Childers Products, Division of ITW; CP-82. b. Foster Products Corporation, H. B. Fuller Company; 85-20. c. ITW TACC, Division of Illinois Tool Works; S-90/80. d. Marathon Industries, Inc.; 225. E. Mon-Eco Industries, Inc.; 22-25.ASJ Adhesive, and FSK and PVDC Jacket Adhesive: Comply with MIL-A-3316C, Class 2, Grade A for bonding insulation jacket lap seams and joints. 1. Products: a. Childers Products, Division of ITW; CP-82. b. Foster Products Corporation, H. B. Fuller Company; 85-20. c. ITW TACC, Division of Illinois Tool Works; S-90/80. d. Marathon Industries, Inc.; 225. e. Mon-Eco Industries, Inc.; 22-25. F. PVC Jacket Adhesive: Compatible with PVC jacket. 1. Products: a. Dow Chemical Company (The); 739, Dow Silicone. b. Johns-Manville; Zeston Perma-Weld, CEEL-TITE Solvent Welding Adhesive. c. P.I.C. Plastics, Inc.; Welding Adhesive. d. Red Devil, Inc.; Celulon Ultra Clear. e. Speedline Corporation; Speedline Vinyl Adhesive. 2.03 MASTICS A. Materials shall be compatible with insulation materials, jackets, and substrates; comply with MIL-C-19565C, Type II. B. Vapor-Barrier Mastic: Water based; suitable for indoor and outdoor use on below ambient services. 1. Products: a. Childers Products, Division of ITW; CP-35. b. Foster Products Corporation, H. B. Fuller Company; 30-90. c. ITW TACC, Division of Illinois Tool Works; CB-50. d. Marathon Industries, Inc.; 590. e. Mon-Eco Industries, Inc.; 55-40. f. Vimasco Corporation; 749. 2. Water-Vapor Permeance: ASTM E 96, Procedure B, 0.013 perm at 43-mil dry film thickness. 3. Service Temperature Range: Minus 20 to plus 180 deg F. 4. Solids Content: ASTM D 1644, 59 percent by volume and 71 percent by weight. 2.04 LAGGING ADHESIVES A. Description: Comply with MIL-A-3316C Class I, Grade A and shall be compatible with insulation materials, jackets, and substrates. 1. Products: a. Childers Products, Division of ITW; CP-52. b. Foster Products Corporation, H. B. Fuller Company; 81-42. c. Marathon Industries, Inc.; 130. d. Mon-Eco Industries, Inc.; 11-30. e. Vimasco Corporation; 136. 2. Fire-resistant, water-based lagging adhesive and coating for use indoors to adhere fire-resistant lagging cloths over duct, equipment, and pipe insulation. 3. Service Temperature Range: Minus 50 to plus 180 deg F. 2.05 SEALANTS A. Joint Sealants: Mountain Haus Boiler Replacement 03/18/2014 100% CD's/Permit MECHANICAL INSULATION 23 0711 - 5 1. Joint Sealants for Cellular-Glass, Phenolic-Foam, and Polyisocyanurate Products: a. Childers Products, Division of ITW; CP-76. b. Foster Products Corporation, H. B. Fuller Company; 30-45. c. Marathon Industries, Inc.; 405. d. Mon-Eco Industries, Inc.; 44-05. e. Pittsburgh Corning Corporation; Pittseal 444. f. Vimasco Corporation; 750. 2. Materials shall be compatible with insulation materials, jackets, and substrates. 3. Permanently flexible, elastomeric sealant. 4. Service Temperature Range: Minus 100 to plus 300 deg F. B. FSK and Metal Jacket Flashing Sealants: 1. Products: a. Childers Products, Division of ITW; CP-76-8. b. Foster Products Corporation, H. B. Fuller Company; 95-44. c. Marathon Industries, Inc.; 405. d. Mon-Eco Industries, Inc.; 44-05. e. Vimasco Corporation; 750. 2. Materials shall be compatible with insulation materials, jackets, and substrates. 3. Fire- and water-resistant, flexible, elastomeric sealant. 4. Service Temperature Range: Minus 40 to plus 250 deg F. 2.06 FIELD-APPLIED JACKETS A. Field-applied jackets shall comply with ASTM C 921, Type I, unless otherwise indicated. B. PVC Jacket: High-impact-resistant, UV-resistant PVC complying with ASTM D 1784, Class 16354-C; thickness as scheduled; roll stock ready for shop or field cutting and forming. Thickness is indicated in field-applied jacket schedules. 1. Products: a. Johns Manville; Zeston. b. P.I.C. Plastics, Inc.; FG Series. c. Proto PVC Corporation; LoSmoke. d. Speedline Corporation; SmokeSafe. 2. Adhesive: As recommended by jacket material manufacturer. 3. Factory-fabricated fitting covers to match jacket if available; otherwise, field fabricate. 4. Factory-fabricated tank heads and tank side panels. 2.07 TAPES A. ASJ Tape: White vapor-retarder tape matching factory-applied jacket with acrylic adhesive, complying with ASTM C 1136 and UL listed. 1. Products: a. Avery Dennison Corporation, Specialty Tapes Division; Fasson 0835. b. Compac Corp.; 104 and 105. c. Ideal Tape Co., Inc., an American Biltrite Company; 428 AWF ASJ. d. Venture Tape; 1540 CW Plus, 1542 CW Plus, and 1542 CW Plus/SQ. 2. Width: 3 inches. 3. Thickness: 11.5 mils. 4. Adhesion: 90 ounces force/inch in width. 5. Elongation: 2 percent. 6. Tensile Strength: 40 lbf/inch in width. B. PVC Tape: White vapor-retarder tape matching field-applied PVC jacket with acrylic adhesive. Suitable for indoor and outdoor applications. . 1. Products: Mountain Haus Boiler Replacement 03/18/2014 100% CD's/Permit MECHANICAL INSULATION 23 0711 - 6 a. Avery Dennison Corporation, Specialty Tapes Division; Fasson 0555. b. Compac Corp.; 130. c. Ideal Tape Co., Inc., an American Biltrite Company; 370 White PVC tape. d. Venture Tape; 1506 CW NS. 2. Width: 2 inches. 3. Thickness: 6 mils. 4. Adhesion: 64 ounces force/inch in width. 5. Elongation: 500 percent. 6. Tensile Strength: 18 lbf/inch in width. s. 2.08 CORNER ANGLES A. PVC Corner Angles: 30 mils thick, minimum 1 by 1 inch, PVC according to ASTM D 1784, Class 16354-C. White or color-coded to match adjacent surface. PART 3 EXECUTION 3.01 PREPARATION A. Surface Preparation: Clean and dry surfaces to receive insulation. Remove materials that will adversely affect insulation application. B. Surface Preparation: Clean and prepare surfaces to be insulated. Before insulating, apply a corrosion coating to insulated surfaces as follows: 1. Stainless Steel: Coat 300 series stainless steel with an epoxy primer 5 mils thick and an epoxy finish 5 mils thick if operating in a temperature range between 140 and 300 deg F. Consult coating manufacturer for appropriate coating materials and application methods for operating temperature range. 2. Carbon Steel: Coat carbon steel operating at a service temperature between 32 and 300 deg F with an epoxy coating. Consult coating manufacturer for appropriate coating materials and application methods for operating temperature range. C. Coordinate insulation installation with the trade installing heat tracing. Comply with requirements for heat tracing that applies to insulation. 3.02 COMMON INSTALLATION REQUIREMENTS A. Install insulation materials, accessories, and finishes with smooth, straight, and even surfaces; free of voids throughout the length of equipment, ducts and fittings, and piping including fittings, valves, and specialties. B. Install insulation materials, forms, vapor barriers or retarders, jackets, and thicknesses required for each item of equipment, duct system, and pipe system as specified in insulation system schedules. C. Install accessories compatible with insulation materials and suitable for the service. Install accessories that do not corrode, soften, or otherwise attack insulation or jacket in either wet or dry state. D. Install insulation with longitudinal seams at top and bottom of horizontal runs. E. Install multiple layers of insulation with longitudinal and end seams staggered. F. Do not weld brackets, clips, or other attachment devices to piping, fittings, and specialties. G. Keep insulation materials dry during application and finishing. H. Install insulation with tight longitudinal seams and end joints. Bond seams and joints with adhesive recommended by insulation material manufacturer. Mountain Haus Boiler Replacement 03/18/2014 100% CD's/Permit MECHANICAL INSULATION 23 0711 - 7 I. Install insulation with least number of joints practical. J. Where vapor barrier is indicated, seal joints, seams, and penetrations in insulation at hangers, supports, anchors, and other projections with vapor-barrier mastic. 1. Install insulation continuously through hangers and around anchor attachments. 2. For insulation application where vapor barriers are indicated, extend insulation on anchor legs from point of attachment to supported item to point of attachment to structure. Taper and seal ends at attachment to structure with vapor-barrier mastic. 3. Install insert materials and install insulation to tightly join the insert. Seal insulation to insulation inserts with adhesive or sealing compound recommended by insulation material manufacturer. 4. Cover inserts with jacket material matching adjacent pipe insulation. Install shields over jacket, arranged to protect jacket from tear or puncture by hanger, support, and shield. K. Apply adhesives, mastics, and sealants at manufacturer's recommended coverage rate and wet and dry film thicknesses. L. Install insulation with factory-applied jackets as follows: 1. Draw jacket tight and smooth. 2. Cover circumferential joints with 3-inch-wide strips, of same material as insulation jacket. Secure strips with adhesive and outward clinching staples along both edges of strip, spaced 4 inches o.c. 3. Overlap jacket longitudinal seams at least 1-1/2 inches. Install insulation with longitudinal seams at bottom of pipe. Clean and dry surface to receive self-sealing lap. Staple laps with outward clinching staples along edge at 2 inches o.c. a. For below ambient services, apply vapor-barrier mastic over staples. 4. Cover joints and seams with tape as recommended by insulation material manufacturer to maintain vapor seal. 5. Where vapor barriers are indicated, apply vapor-barrier mastic on seams and joints and at ends adjacent to duct and pipe flanges and fittings. M. Cut insulation in a manner to avoid compressing insulation more than 75 percent of its nominal thickness. N. Finish installation with systems at operating conditions. Repair joint separations and cracking due to thermal movement. O. Repair damaged insulation facings by applying same facing material over damaged areas. Extend patches at least 4 inches beyond damaged areas. Adhere, staple, and seal patches similar to butt joints. P. For above ambient services, do not install insulation to the following: 1. Vibration-control devices. 2. Testing agency labels and stamps. 3. Nameplates and data plates. 4. Manholes. 5. Handholes. 6. Cleanouts. 3.03 PENETRATIONS A. Insulation Installation at Roof Penetrations: Install insulation continuously through roof penetrations. 1. Seal penetrations with flashing sealant. 2. For applications requiring only indoor insulation, terminate insulation above roof surface and seal with joint sealant. For applications requiring indoor and outdoor insulation, install insulation for outdoor applications tightly joined to indoor insulation ends. Seal joint with joint sealant. 3. Extend jacket of outdoor insulation outside roof flashing at least 2 inches below top of roof flashing. 4. Seal jacket to roof flashing with flashing sealant. B. Insulation Installation at Below-Grade Exterior Wall Penetrations: Terminate insulation flush with sleeve seal. Seal terminations with flashing sealant. Mountain Haus Boiler Replacement 03/18/2014 100% CD's/Permit MECHANICAL INSULATION 23 0711 - 8 C. Insulation Installation at Aboveground Exterior Wall Penetrations: Install insulation continuously through wall penetrations. 1. Seal penetrations with flashing sealant. 2. For applications requiring only indoor insulation, terminate insulation inside wall surface and seal with joint sealant. For applications requiring indoor and outdoor insulation, install insulation for outdoor applications tightly joined to indoor insulation ends. Seal joint with joint sealant. 3. Extend jacket of outdoor insulation outside wall flashing and overlap wall flashing at least 2 inches. 4. Seal jacket to wall flashing with flashing sealant. D. Insulation Installation at Interior Wall and Partition Penetrations (That Are Not Fire Rated): Install insulation continuously through walls and partitions. E. Insulation Installation at Fire-Rated Wall and Partition Penetrations: Install insulation continuously through penetrations of fire-rated walls and partitions. Terminate insulation at fire damper sleeves for fire-rated wall and partition penetrations. Externally insulate damper sleeves to match adjacent insulation and overlap duct insulation at least 2 inches. 1. Firestopping and fire-resistive joint sealers are specified in Division 7 Section "Through-Penetration Firestop Systems." F. Insulation Installation at Floor Penetrations: 1. Duct: Install insulation continuously through floor penetrations that are not fire rated. For penetrations through fire-rated assemblies, terminate insulation at fire damper sleeves and externally insulate damper sleeve beyond floor to match adjacent duct insulation. Overlap damper sleeve and duct insulation at least 2 inches. 2. Pipe: Install insulation continuously through floor penetrations. 3. Seal penetrations through fire-rated assemblies according to Division 7 Section "Through-Penetration Firestop Systems." 3.04 EQUIPMENT, TANK, AND VESSEL INSULATION INSTALLATION A. Secure insulation with adhesive and anchor pins and speed washers. 1. Apply adhesives according to manufacturer's recommended coverage rates per unit area, for 100 percent coverage of tank and vessel surfaces. 2. Groove and score insulation materials to fit as closely as possible to equipment, including contours. Bevel insulation edges for cylindrical surfaces for tight joints. Stagger end joints. 3. Protect exposed corners with secured corner angles. 4. Install adhesively attached or self-sticking insulation hangers and speed washers on sides of tanks and vessels as follows: a. Do not weld anchor pins to ASME-labeled pressure vessels. b. Select insulation hangers and adhesive that is compatible with service temperature and with substrate. c. On tanks and vessels, maximum anchor-pin spacing is 3 inches from insulation end joints, and 16 inches o.c. in both directions. d. Do not overcompress insulation during installation. e. Cut and miter insulation segments to fit curved sides and domed heads of tanks and vessels. f. Impale insulation over anchor pins and attach speed washers. g. Cut excess portion of pins extending beyond speed washers or bend parallel with insulation surface. Cover exposed pins and washers with tape matching insulation facing. 5. Secure each layer of insulation with stainless-steel or aluminum bands. Select band material compatible with insulation materials. 6. Where insulation hangers on equipment and vessels are not permitted or practical and where insulation support rings are not provided, install a girdle network for securing insulation. Stretch prestressed aircraft cable around the diameter of vessel and make taut with clamps, turnbuckles, or breather springs. Place one circumferential girdle around equipment approximately 6 inches from each end. Install wire or cable between two circumferential girdles 12 inches o.c. Install a wire ring around each end and around outer periphery of center openings, and stretch prestressed aircraft cable radially from the wire ring to nearest circumferential girdle. Install additional circumferential girdles along the body of equipment or Mountain Haus Boiler Replacement 03/18/2014 100% CD's/Permit MECHANICAL INSULATION 23 0711 - 9 tank at a minimum spacing of 48 inches o.c. Use this network for securing insulation with tie wire or bands. 7. Stagger joints between insulation layers at least 3 inches 8. Install insulation in removable segments on equipment access doors, manholes, handholes, and other elements that require frequent removal for service and inspection. 9. Bevel and seal insulation ends around manholes, handholes, ASME stamps, and nameplates. 10. For equipment with surface temperatures below ambient, apply mastic to open ends, joints, seams, breaks, and punctures in insulation. B. Insulation Installation on Pumps: 1. Fabricate metal boxes lined with insulation. Fit boxes around pumps and coincide box joints with splits in pump casings. Fabricate joints with outward bolted flanges. Bolt flanges on 6-inch centers, starting at corners. Install 3/8-inch-diameter fasteners with wing nuts. Alternatively, secure the box sections together using a latching mechanism. 2. Fabricate boxes from galvanized steel, at least .040 inch thick. 3. For below ambient services, install a vapor barrier at seams, joints, and penetrations. Seal between flanges with replaceable gasket material to form a vapor barrier. 3.05 GENERAL PIPE INSULATION INSTALLATION A. Requirements in this Article generally apply to all insulation materials except where more specific requirements are specified in various pipe insulation material installation articles. B. Insulation Installation on Fittings, Valves, Strainers, Flanges, and Unions: 1. Install insulation over fittings, valves, strainers, flanges, unions, and other specialties with continuous thermal and vapor-retarder integrity, unless otherwise indicated. 2. Insulate pipe elbows using preformed fitting insulation or mitered fittings made from same material and density as adjacent pipe insulation. Each piece shall be butted tightly against adjoining piece and bonded with adhesive. Fill joints, seams, voids, and irregular surfaces with insulating cement finished to a smooth, hard, and uniform contour that is uniform with adjoining pipe insulation. 3. Insulate tee fittings with preformed fitting insulation or sectional pipe insulation of same material and thickness as used for adjacent pipe. Cut sectional pipe insulation to fit. Butt each section closely to the next and hold in place with tie wire. Bond pieces with adhesive. 4. Insulate valves using preformed fitting insulation or sectional pipe insulation of same material, density, and thickness as used for adjacent pipe. Overlap adjoining pipe insulation by not less than two times the thickness of pipe insulation, or one pipe diameter, whichever is thicker. For valves, insulate up to and including the bonnets, valve stuffing-box studs, bolts, and nuts. Fill joints, seams, and irregular surfaces with insulating cement. 5. Insulate strainers using preformed fitting insulation or sectional pipe insulation of same material, density, and thickness as used for adjacent pipe. Overlap adjoining pipe insulation by not less than two times the thickness of pipe insulation, or one pipe diameter, whichever is thicker. Fill joints, seams, and irregular surfaces with insulating cement. Insulate strainers so strainer basket flange or plug can be easily removed and replaced without damaging the insulation and jacket. Provide a removable reusable insulation cover. For below ambient services, provide a design that maintains vapor barrier. 6. Insulate flanges and unions using a section of oversized preformed pipe insulation. Overlap adjoining pipe insulation by not less than two times the thickness of pipe insulation, or one pipe diameter, whichever is thicker. 7. Cover segmented insulated surfaces with a layer of finishing cement and coat with a mastic. Install vapor-barrier mastic for below ambient services and a breather mastic for above ambient services. Reinforce the mastic with fabric-reinforcing mesh. Trowel the mastic to a smooth and well-shaped contour. 8. For services not specified to receive a field-applied jacket except for flexible elastomeric install fitted PVC cover over elbows, tees, strainers, valves, flanges, and unions. Terminate ends with PVC end caps. Tape PVC covers to adjoining insulation facing using PVC tape. 9. Label the outside insulation jacket of each union with the word "UNION." Match size and color of pipe labels. Mountain Haus Boiler Replacement 03/18/2014 100% CD's/Permit MECHANICAL INSULATION 23 0711 - 10 C. Insulate instrument connections for thermometers, pressure gages, pressure temperature taps, test connections, flow meters, sensors, switches, and transmitters on insulated pipes, vessels, and equipment. Shape insulation at these connections by tapering it to and around the connection with insulating cement and finish with finishing cement, mastic, and flashing sealant. D. Install removable insulation covers as necessary. Installation shall conform to the following: 1. Make removable flange and union insulation from sectional pipe insulation of same thickness as that on adjoining pipe. Install same insulation jacket as adjoining pipe insulation. 2. When flange and union covers are made from sectional pipe insulation, extend insulation from flanges or union long at least two times the insulation thickness over adjacent pipe insulation on each side of flange or union. Secure flange cover in place with stainless-steel or aluminum bands. Select band material compatible with insulation and jacket. 3. Construct removable valve insulation covers in same manner as for flanges except divide the two-part section on the vertical center line of valve body. 4. When covers are made from block insulation, make two halves, each consisting of mitered blocks wired to stainless-steel fabric. Secure this wire frame, with its attached insulation, to flanges with tie wire. Extend insulation at least 2 inches over adjacent pipe insulation on each side of valve. Fill space between flange or union cover and pipe insulation with insulating cement. Finish cover assembly with insulating cement applied in two coats. After first coat is dry, apply and trowel second coat to a smooth finish. 5. Unless a PVC jacket is indicated in field-applied jacket schedules, finish exposed surfaces with a metal jacket. 3.06 CELLULAR-GLASS INSULATION INSTALLATION A. Insulation Installation on Straight Pipes and Tubes: 1. Secure each layer of insulation to pipe with wire or bands and tighten bands without deforming insulation materials. 2. Where vapor barriers are indicated, seal longitudinal seams, end joints, and protrusions with vapor-barrier mastic and joint sealant. 3. For insulation with factory-applied jackets on above ambient services, secure laps with outward clinched staples at 6 inches o.c. 4. For insulation with factory-applied jackets on below ambient services, do not staple longitudinal tabs but secure tabs with additional adhesive as recommended by insulation material manufacturer and seal with vapor-barrier mastic and flashing sealant. B. Insulation Installation on Pipe Flanges: 1. Install preformed pipe insulation to outer diameter of pipe flange. 2. Make width of insulation section same as overall width of flange and bolts, plus twice the thickness of pipe insulation. 3. Fill voids between inner circumference of flange insulation and outer circumference of adjacent straight pipe segments with cut sections of cellular-glass block insulation of same thickness as pipe insulation. 4. Install jacket material with manufacturer's recommended adhesive, overlap seams at least 1 inch, and seal joints with flashing sealant. C. Insulation Installation on Pipe Fittings and Elbows: 1. Install preformed sections of same material as straight segments of pipe insulation when available. Secure according to manufacturer's written instructions. 2. When preformed sections of insulation are not available, install mitered sections of cellular-glass insulation. Secure insulation materials with wire or bands. D. Insulation Installation on Valves and Pipe Specialties: 1. Install preformed sections of cellular-glass insulation to valve body. 2. Arrange insulation to permit access to packing and to allow valve operation without disturbing insulation. 3. Install insulation to flanges as specified for flange insulation application. Mountain Haus Boiler Replacement 03/18/2014 100% CD's/Permit MECHANICAL INSULATION 23 0711 - 11 3.07 FLEXIBLE ELASTOMERIC INSULATION INSTALLATION A. Seal longitudinal seams and end joints with manufacturer's recommended adhesive to eliminate openings in insulation that allow passage of air to surface being insulated. B. Insulation Installation on Pipe Flanges: 1. Install pipe insulation to outer diameter of pipe flange. 2. Make width of insulation section same as overall width of flange and bolts, plus twice the thickness of pipe insulation. 3. Fill voids between inner circumference of flange insulation and outer circumference of adjacent straight pipe segments with cut sections of sheet insulation of same thickness as pipe insulation. 4. Secure insulation to flanges and seal seams with manufacturer's recommended adhesive to eliminate openings in insulation that allow passage of air to surface being insulated. C. Insulation Installation on Pipe Fittings and Elbows: 1. Install mitered sections of pipe insulation. 2. Secure insulation materials and seal seams with manufacturer's recommended adhesive to eliminate openings in insulation that allow passage of air to surface being insulated. D. Insulation Installation on Valves and Pipe Specialties: 1. Install preformed valve covers manufactured of same material as pipe insulation when available. 2. When preformed valve covers are not available, install cut sections of pipe and sheet insulation to valve body. Arrange insulation to permit access to packing and to allow valve operation without disturbing insulation. 3. Install insulation to flanges as specified for flange insulation application. 4. Secure insulation to valves and specialties and seal seams with manufacturer's recommended adhesive to eliminate openings in insulation that allow passage of air to surface being insulated. 3.08 MINERAL-FIBER INSULATION INSTALLATION A. Insulation Installation on Straight Pipes and Tubes: 1. Secure each layer of preformed pipe insulation to pipe with wire or bands and tighten bands without deforming insulation materials. 2. Where vapor barriers are indicated, seal longitudinal seams, end joints, and protrusions with vapor-barrier mastic and joint sealant. 3. For insulation with factory-applied jackets on above ambient surfaces, secure laps with outward clinched staples at 6 inches o.c. 4. For insulation with factory-applied jackets on below ambient surfaces, do not staple longitudinal tabs but secure tabs with additional adhesive as recommended by insulation material manufacturer and seal with vapor-barrier mastic and flashing sealant. B. Insulation Installation on Pipe Flanges: 1. Install preformed pipe insulation to outer diameter of pipe flange. 2. Make width of insulation section same as overall width of flange and bolts, plus twice the thickness of pipe insulation. 3. Fill voids between inner circumference of flange insulation and outer circumference of adjacent straight pipe segments with mineral-fiber blanket insulation. 4. Install jacket material with manufacturer's recommended adhesive, overlap seams at least 1 inch, and seal joints with flashing sealant. C. Insulation Installation on Pipe Fittings and Elbows: 1. Install preformed sections of same material as straight segments of pipe insulation when available. 2. When preformed insulation elbows and fittings are not available, install mitered sections of pipe insulation, to a thickness equal to adjoining pipe insulation. Secure insulation materials with wire or bands. D. Insulation Installation on Valves and Pipe Specialties: Mountain Haus Boiler Replacement 03/18/2014 100% CD's/Permit MECHANICAL INSULATION 23 0711 - 12 1. Install preformed sections of same material as straight segments of pipe insulation when available. 2. When preformed sections are not available, install mitered sections of pipe insulation to valve body. 3. Arrange insulation to permit access to packing and to allow valve operation without disturbing insulation. 4. Install insulation to flanges as specified for flange insulation application. E. Blanket Insulation Installation on Ducts and Plenums: Secure with adhesive and insulation pins. 1. Apply adhesives according to manufacturer's recommended coverage rates per unit area, for 100 percent coverage of duct and plenum surfaces. 2. Apply adhesive to entire circumference of ducts and to all surfaces of fittings and transitions. 3. Install either capacitor-discharge-weld pins and speed washers or cupped-head, capacitor-discharge-weld pins on sides and bottom of horizontal ducts and sides of vertical ducts as follows: a. On duct sides with dimensions 18 inches and smaller, place pins along longitudinal centerline of duct. Space 3 inches maximum from insulation end joints, and 16 inches o.c. b. On duct sides with dimensions larger than 18 inches, place pins 16 inches o.c. each way and 3 inches maximum from insulation joints. Install additional pins to hold insulation tightly against surface at cross bracing. c. Pins may be omitted from top surface of horizontal, rectangular ducts and plenums. d. Do not overcompress insulation during installation. e. Impale insulation over pins and attach speed washers. f. Cut excess portion of pins extending beyond speed washers or bend parallel with insulation surface. Cover exposed pins and washers with tape matching insulation facing. 4. For ducts and plenums with surface temperatures below ambient, install a continuous unbroken vapor barrier. Create a facing lap for longitudinal seams and end joints with insulation by removing 2 inches (50 mm) from 1 edge and 1 end of insulation segment. Secure laps to adjacent insulation section with 1/2-inch (13-mm) outward-clinching staples, 1 inch (25 mm) o.c. Install vapor barrier consisting of factory- or field-applied jacket, adhesive, vapor-barrier mastic, and sealant at joints, seams, and protrusions. a. Repair punctures, tears, and penetrations with tape or mastic to maintain vapor-barrier seal. b. Install vapor stops for ductwork and plenums operating below 50 deg F (10 deg C) at 18-foot (5.5-m) intervals. Vapor stops shall consist of vapor-barrier mastic applied in a Z-shaped pattern over insulation face, along butt end of insulation, and over the surface. Cover insulation face and surface to be insulated a width equal to 2 times the insulation thickness but not less than 3 inches (75 mm). 5. Overlap unfaced blankets a minimum of 2 inches on longitudinal seams and end joints. At end joints, secure with steel bands spaced a maximum of 18 inches o.c. 6. Install insulation on rectangular duct elbows and transitions with a full insulation section for each surface. Install insulation on round and flat-oval duct elbows with individually mitered gores cut to fit the elbow. 7. Insulate duct stiffeners, hangers, and flanges that protrude beyond insulation surface with 6-inch-wide strips of same material used to insulate duct. Secure on alternating sides of stiffener, hanger, and flange with pins spaced 6 inches o.c. 3.09 FIELD-APPLIED JACKET INSTALLATION A. Where glass-cloth jackets are indicated, install directly over bare insulation or insulation with factory-applied jackets. 1. Draw jacket smooth and tight to surface with 2-inch overlap at seams and joints. 2. Embed glass cloth between two 0.062-inch-thick coats of lagging adhesive. 3. Completely encapsulate insulation with coating, leaving no exposed insulation. B. Where FSK jackets are indicated, install as follows: 1. Draw jacket material smooth and tight. 2. Install lap or joint strips with same material as jacket. 3. Secure jacket to insulation with manufacturer's recommended adhesive. 4. Install jacket with 1-1/2-inch laps at longitudinal seams and 3-inch-wide joint strips at end joints. 5. Seal openings, punctures, and breaks in vapor-retarder jackets and exposed insulation with vapor-barrier mastic. Mountain Haus Boiler Replacement 03/18/2014 100% CD's/Permit MECHANICAL INSULATION 23 0711 - 13 C. Where PVC jackets are indicated, install with 1-inch overlap at longitudinal seams and end joints; for horizontal applications, install with longitudinal seams along top and bottom of tanks and vessels. Seal with manufacturer's recommended adhesive. 1. Apply two continuous beads of adhesive to seams and joints, one bead under lap and the finish bead along seam and joint edge. D. Where metal jackets are indicated, install with 2-inch overlap at longitudinal seams and end joints. Overlap longitudinal seams arranged to shed water. Seal end joints with weatherproof sealant recommended by insulation manufacturer. Secure jacket with stainless-steel bands 12 inches (300 mm) o.c. and at end joints. E. Where PVDC jackets are indicated, install as follows: 1. Apply three separate wraps of filament tape per insulation section to secure pipe insulation to pipe prior to installation of PVDC jacket. 2. Wrap factory-presized jackets around individual pipe insulation sections with one end overlapping the previously installed sheet. Install presized jacket with an approximate overlap at butt joint of 2 inches over the previous section. Adhere lap seal using adhesive or SSL, and then apply 1-1/4 circumferences of appropriate PVDC tape around overlapped butt joint. 3. Continuous jacket can be spiral wrapped around a length of pipe insulation. Apply adhesive or PVDC tape at overlapped spiral edge. When electing to use adhesives, refer to manufacturer's written instructions for application of adhesives along this spiral edge to maintain a permanent bond. 4. Jacket can be wrapped in cigarette fashion along length of roll for insulation systems with an outer circumference of 33-1/2 inches or less. The 33-1/2-inch-circumference limit allows for 2-inch-overlap seal. Using the length of roll allows for longer sections of jacket to be installed at one time. Use adhesive on the lap seal. Visually inspect lap seal for "fishmouthing," and use PVDC tape along lap seal to secure joint. 5. Repair holes or tears in PVDC jacket by placing PVDC tape over the hole or tear and wrapping a minimum of 1-1/4 circumferences to avoid damage to tape edges. 3.10 FIRE-RATED INSULATION SYSTEM INSTALLATION A. Where fire-rated insulation system is indicated, secure system to ducts and duct hangers and supports to maintain a continuous UL-listed fire rating. B. Insulate duct access panels and doors to achieve same fire rating as duct. C. Install firestopping at penetrations through fire-rated assemblies. Fire-stop systems are specified in Division 7 Section "Through-Penetration Firestop Systems." 3.11 FINISHES A. Duct, Equipment, and Pipe Insulation with ASJ, Glass-Cloth, or Other Paintable Jacket Material: Paint jacket with paint system identified below and as specified in Division 9 painting Sections. 1. Flat Acrylic Finish: Two finish coats over a primer that is compatible with jacket material and finish coat paint. Add fungicidal agent to render fabric mildew proof. a. Finish Coat Material: Interior, flat, latex-emulsion size. B. Flexible Elastomeric Thermal Insulation: After adhesive has fully cured, apply two coats of insulation manufacturer's recommended protective coating. C. Color: Final color as selected by Architect. Vary first and second coats to allow visual inspection of the completed Work. D. Do not field paint aluminum or stainless-steel jackets. 3.12 BOILER BREECHING INSULATION SCHEDULE A. Breeching and connector insulation shall be the following: Mountain Haus Boiler Replacement 03/18/2014 100% CD's/Permit MECHANICAL INSULATION 23 0711 - 14 1. Calcium Silicate: 4 inches thick. 2. Mineral-Fiber Blanket: 2 inches thick and 1.5-lb/cu. ft. nominal density. 3. Mineral-Fiber Board: 2 inches thick and 3-lb/cu. ft. nominal density. 4. Phenolic: 1-1/2 inches thick. 3.13 EQUIPMENT INSULATION SCHEDULE A. Insulation materials and thicknesses are identified below. If more than one material is listed for a type of equipment, selection from materials listed is Contractor's option. B. Insulate indoor and outdoor equipment in paragraphs below that is not factory insulated. C. Heat-exchanger (water-to-water for heating service) insulation shall be the following: 1. Calcium Silicate: 3 inches thick. 2. Mineral-Fiber Board: 2 inches thick and 2-lb/cu. ft. nominal density. D. Heating-hot-water expansion/compression tank insulation shall be the following: 1. Cellular Glass: 1-1/2 inches thick. E. Heating-hot-water air-separator insulation shall be the following: 1. Cellular Glass: 3 inches thick. F. Domestic hot-water storage tank insulation shall be the following: 1. Mineral-Fiber Pipe and Tank: 4 inches thick. 3.14 PIPING INSULATION SCHEDULE, GENERAL A. Acceptable preformed pipe and tubular insulation materials and thicknesses are identified for each piping system and pipe size range. If more than one material is listed for a piping system, selection from materials listed is Contractor's option. B. Items Not Insulated: Unless otherwise indicated, do not install insulation on the following: 1. Fire-suppression piping. 2. Below-grade piping. 3. Chrome-plated pipes and fittings unless there is a potential for personnel injury. 3.15 INDOOR PIPING INSULATION SCHEDULE A. Domestic Cold Water: 1. NPS 1 and Smaller: Insulation shall be the following: a. Flexible Elastomeric: 1/2 inch thick. b. Mineral Fiber: 1/2 inch thick. 2. NPS 1-1/4 and Larger: Insulation shall be the following: a. Cellular Glass: 1-1/2 inches thick. b. Mineral Fiber: 1-1/2 inches thick. B. Domestic Hot and Recirculated Hot Water: 1. NPS 1-1/4 and Smaller: Insulation shall be the following: a. Flexible Elastomeric: 3/4 inch thick. b. Mineral Fiber: 3/4 inch thick. 2. NPS 1-1/2 and Larger: Insulation shall be the following: a. Cellular Glass: 1-1/2 inches thick. b. Mineral Fiber: 1-1/2 inches thick. C. Exposed Sanitary Drains, Domestic Water, Domestic Hot Water, and Stops for Plumbing Fixtures for People with Disabilities: Mountain Haus Boiler Replacement 03/18/2014 100% CD's/Permit MECHANICAL INSULATION 23 0711 - 15 1. All Pipe Sizes: Insulation shall be the following: a. Flexible Elastomeric: 1/2 inch thick. b. Mineral Fiber: 1/2 inch thick. D. Condensate and Equipment Drain Water below 60 Deg F: 1. All Pipe Sizes: Insulation shall be the following: a. Cellular Glass: 1-1/2 inches thick. b. Mineral Fiber: 1-1/2 inches thick. E. Heating-Hot-Water Supply and Return, 200 Deg F and below: 1. NPS 12 and Smaller: Insulation shall be the following: 2. NPS 14 and Larger: Insulation shall be the following: a. Cellular Glass: 2 inches thick. b. Mineral Fiber: 2 inches thick. c. Cellular Glass: 2 inches thick. 3.16 INDOOR, FIELD-APPLIED JACKET SCHEDULE A. Install jacket over insulation material. For insulation with factory-applied jacket, install the field-applied jacket over the factory-applied jacket. B. If more than one material is listed, selection from materials listed is Contractor's option. C. Equipment, Exposed, up to 48 Inches in Diameter or with Flat Surfaces up to 72 Inches: 1. PVC: 20 mils thick. D. Equipment, Exposed, Larger Than 48 Inches in Diameter or with Flat Surfaces Larger Than 72 Inches: 1. PVC: 20 mils thick. E. Piping, Concealed: 1. None. F. Piping, Exposed: 1. PVC: 20 mils thick. END OF SECTION 23 0711 Mountain Haus Boiler Replacement 03/18/2014 100% CD's/Permit INSTRUMENTATION AND CONTROL FOR HVAC 23 0900 - 1 SECTION 23 0900 - INSTRUMENTATION AND CONTROL FOR HVAC PART 1 GENERAL 1.01 RELATED DOCUMENTS A. Drawings and general provisions of the Contract, including General and Supplementary Conditions and Division 01 Specification Sections, apply to this Section. 1.02 SUMMARY A. This Section includes control equipment for HVAC systems and components, including control components for terminal heating and cooling units not supplied with factory-wired controls. B. Related Sections include the following: 1. Section 23 0519 "Meters and Gages for HVAC Piping" for measuring equipment that relates to this Section. 1.03 DEFINITIONS A. DDC: Direct digital control. B. I/O: Input/output. C. MS/TP: Master slave/token passing. D. PC: Personal computer. E. PID: Proportional plus integral plus derivative. F. RTD: Resistance temperature detector. 1.04 SYSTEM PERFORMANCE A. Comply with the following performance requirements: 1. Graphic Display: Display graphic with minimum 20 dynamic points with current data within 10 seconds. 2. Graphic Refresh: Update graphic with minimum 20 dynamic points with current data within 8 seconds. 3. Object Command: Reaction time of less than two seconds between operator command of a binary object and device reaction. 4. Object Scan: Transmit change of state and change of analog values to control units or workstation within six seconds. 5. Alarm Response Time: Annunciate alarm at workstation within 45 seconds. Multiple workstations must receive alarms within five seconds of each other. 6. Program Execution Frequency: Run capability of applications as often as five seconds, but selected consistent with mechanical process under control. 7. Performance: Programmable controllers shall execute DDC PID control loops, and scan and update process values and outputs at least once per second. 8. Reporting Accuracy and Stability of Control: Report values and maintain measured variables within tolerances as follows: a. Water Temperature: Plus or minus 1 deg F. b. Water Flow: Plus or minus 5 percent of full scale. c. Water Pressure: Plus or minus 2 percent of full scale. d. Space Temperature: Plus or minus 1 deg F. e. Ducted Air Temperature: Plus or minus 1 deg F. f. Outside Air Temperature: Plus or minus 2 deg F. Mountain Haus Boiler Replacement 03/18/2014 100% CD's/Permit INSTRUMENTATION AND CONTROL FOR HVAC 23 0900 - 2 g. Temperature Differential: Plus or minus 0.25 deg F. h. Electrical: Plus or minus 5 percent of reading. 1.05 ACTION SUBMITTALS A. Product Data: Include manufacturer's technical literature for each control device. Indicate dimensions, capacities, performance characteristics, electrical characteristics, finishes for materials, and installation and startup instructions for each type of product indicated. 1. DDC System Hardware: Bill of materials of equipment indicating quantity, manufacturer, and model number. Include technical data for operator workstation equipment, interface equipment, control units, transducers/transmitters, sensors, actuators, valves, relays/switches, control panels, and operator interface equipment. 2. Control System Software: Include technical data for operating system software, operator interface, color graphics, and other third-party applications. 3. Controlled Systems: Instrumentation list with element name, type of device, manufacturer, model number, and product data. Include written description of sequence of operation including schematic diagram. B. Shop Drawings: Detail equipment assemblies and indicate dimensions, weights, loads, required clearances, method of field assembly, components, and location and size of each field connection. 1. Bill of materials of equipment indicating quantity, manufacturer, and model number. 2. Schematic flow diagrams showing fans, pumps, coils, dampers, valves, and control devices. 3. Wiring Diagrams: Power, signal, and control wiring. 4. Details of control panel faces, including controls, instruments, and labeling. 5. Written description of sequence of operation. 6. Schedule of dampers including size, leakage, and flow characteristics. 7. Schedule of valves including flow characteristics. 8. DDC System Hardware: a. Wiring diagrams for control units with termination numbers. b. Schematic diagrams and floor plans for field sensors and control hardware. c. Schematic diagrams for control, communication, and power wiring, showing trunk data conductors and wiring between operator workstation and control unit locations. 9. Control System Software: List of color graphics indicating monitored systems, data (connected and calculated) point addresses, output schedule, and operator notations. 10. Controlled Systems: a. Schematic diagrams of each controlled system with control points labeled and control elements graphically shown, with wiring. b. Scaled drawings showing mounting, routing, and wiring of elements including bases and special construction. c. Written description of sequence of operation including schematic diagram. d. Points list. C. Samples for Initial Selection: For each color required, of each type of thermostat or sensor cover with factory-applied color finishes. D. Samples for Verification: For each color required, of each type of thermostat or sensor cover. 1.06 INFORMATIONAL SUBMITTALS A. Data Communications Protocol Certificates: Certify that each proposed DDC system component complies with ASHRAE 135. B. Qualification Data: For Installer. C. Software Upgrade Kit: For Owner to use in modifying software to suit future systems revisions or monitoring and control revisions. Mountain Haus Boiler Replacement 03/18/2014 100% CD's/Permit INSTRUMENTATION AND CONTROL FOR HVAC 23 0900 - 3 1.07 CLOSEOUT SUBMITTALS A. Operation and Maintenance Data: For HVAC instrumentation and control system to include in emergency, operation, and maintenance manuals. In addition to items specified in Section 017823 "Operation and Maintenance Data," include the following: 1. Maintenance instructions and lists of spare parts for each type of control device and compressed-air station. 2. Interconnection wiring diagrams with identified and numbered system components and devices. 3. Keyboard illustrations and step-by-step procedures indexed for each operator function. 4. Inspection period, cleaning methods, cleaning materials recommended, and calibration tolerances. 5. Calibration records and list of set points. B. Software and Firmware Operational Documentation: Include the following: 1. Software operating and upgrade manuals. 2. Program Software Backup: On a magnetic media or compact disc, complete with data files. 3. Device address list. 4. Printout of software application and graphic screens. 5. Software license required by and installed for DDC workstations and control systems. 1.08 MAINTENANCE MATERIAL SUBMITTALS A. Furnish extra materials described below that match products installed and that are packaged with protective covering for storage and identified with labels describing contents. 1. Replacement Materials: One replacement relay mechanism for each unique thermostat . 2. Maintenance Materials: One thermostat adjusting key(s). 1.09 QUALITY ASSURANCE A. Installer Qualifications: Automatic control system manufacturer's authorized representative who is trained and approved for installation of system components required for this Project. B. Electrical Components, Devices, and Accessories: Listed and labeled as defined in NFPA 70, Article 100, by a testing agency acceptable to authorities having jurisdiction, and marked for intended use. C. Comply with ASHRAE 135 for DDC system components. 1.10 DELIVERY, STORAGE, AND HANDLING A. Factory-Mounted Components: Where control devices specified in this Section are indicated to be factory mounted on equipment, arrange for shipping of control devices to equipment manufacturer. B. System Software: Update to latest version of software at Project completion. 1.11 COORDINATION A. Coordinate location of thermostats, humidistats, and other exposed control sensors with plans and room details before installation. B. Coordinate equipment with Section 281600 "Intrusion Detection" to achieve compatibility with equipment that interfaces with that system and with building master clock. C. Coordinate equipment with Section 281300 "Access Control" to achieve compatibility with equipment that interfaces with that system. D. Coordinate equipment with Section 275313 "Clock Systems" to achieve compatibility with equipment that interfaces with that system. Mountain Haus Boiler Replacement 03/18/2014 100% CD's/Permit INSTRUMENTATION AND CONTROL FOR HVAC 23 0900 - 4 E. Coordinate equipment with Section 284619 "PLC Electronic Detention Monitoring and Control Systems" to achieve compatibility with equipment that interfaces with that system. F. Coordinate equipment with Section 260943.13 "Addressable-Fixture Lighting Controls" and Section 260943.23 "Relay-Based Lighting Controls" to achieve compatibility with equipment that interfaces with that system. G. Coordinate equipment with Section 283111 "Digital, Addressable Fire-Alarm System" and Section 283112 "Zoned (DC Loop) Fire-Alarm System" to achieve compatibility with equipment that interfaces with that system. H. Coordinate supply of conditioned electrical branch circuits for control units and operator workstation. I. Coordinate equipment with Section 260913 "Electrical Power Monitoring and Control" to achieve compatibility of communication interfaces. J. Coordinate equipment with Section 262416 "Panelboards" to achieve compatibility with starter coils and annunciation devices. K. Coordinate equipment with Section 262419 "Motor-Control Centers" to achieve compatibility with motor starters and annunciation devices. L. Coordinate size and location of concrete bases. Cast anchor-bolt inserts into bases. Concrete, reinforcement, and formwork requirements are specified in Section 033000 "Cast-in-Place Concrete." PART 2 PRODUCTS 2.01 MANUFACTURERS A. In other Part 2 articles where titles below introduce lists, the following requirements apply to product selection: 1. Available Manufacturers: Subject to compliance with requirements, manufacturers offering products that may be incorporated into the Work include, but are not limited to, manufacturers specified. 2. Manufacturers: Subject to compliance with requirements, provide products by one of the manufacturers specified. 2.02 CONTROL SYSTEM A. Manufacturers: 1. Alerton Inc. 2. Honeywell International Inc.; Home & Building Control. 3. Johnson Controls, Inc.; Controls Group. 4. Siemens Building Technologies, Inc. 5. Trane; Worldwide Applied Systems Group B. Control system shall consist of sensors, indicators, actuators, final control elements, interface equipment, other apparatus, and accessories to control mechanical systems. C. Control system shall consist of sensors, indicators, actuators, final control elements, interface equipment, other apparatus, accessories, and software connected to distributed controllers operating in multiuser, multitasking environment on token-passing network and programmed to control mechanical systems. An operator workstation permits interface with the network via dynamic color graphics with each mechanical system, building floor plan, and control device depicted by point-and-click graphics. D. Control system shall include the following: 1. Building intrusion detection system specified in Section 281600 "Intrusion Detection." 2. Building clock control system specified in Section 275313 "Clock Systems." 3. Building lighting control system specified in Section 260943.13 "Addressable-Fixture Lighting Controls" and Section 260943.23 "Relay-Based Lighting Controls." Mountain Haus Boiler Replacement 03/18/2014 100% CD's/Permit INSTRUMENTATION AND CONTROL FOR HVAC 23 0900 - 5 4. Fire alarm system specified in Section 283111 "Digital, Addressable Fire-Alarm System" and Section 283112 "Zoned (DC Loop) Fire-Alarm System." 2.03 DDC EQUIPMENT A. Operator Workstation: One PC-based microcomputer(s) with minimum configuration as follows: 1. Motherboard: With 8 integrated USB 2.0 ports, integrated Intel Pro 10/100 (Ethernet), integrated audio, bios, and hardware monitoring. 2. Processor: Intel Pentium 4. 3. Random-Access Memory: 512 MB. 4. Graphics: Video adapter, minimum 1280 x 1024 pixels, 64 -MB video memory, with TV out. 5. Monitor: 19 inches, LCD color. 6. Keyboard: QWERTY, 105 keys in ergonomic shape. 7. Hard-Disk Drive: 80 GB. 8. CD-ROM Read/Write Drive: 48x24x48. 9. Mouse: Three button, optical. 10. Uninterruptible Power Supply: 2 kVa. 11. Operating System: Microsoft Windows XP Professional with high-speed Internet access. a. ASHRAE 135 Compliance: Workstation shall use ASHRAE 135 protocol and communicate using ISO 8802-3 (Ethernet) datalink/physical layer protocol. 12. Application Software: a. I/O capability from operator station. b. System security for each operator via software password and access levels. c. Automatic system diagnostics; monitor system and report failures. d. Database creation and support. e. Automatic and manual database save and restore. f. Dynamic color graphic displays with up to 10 screen displays at once. g. Custom graphics generation and graphics library of HVAC equipment and symbols. h. Alarm processing, messages, and reactions. i. Trend logs retrievable in spreadsheets and database programs. j. Alarm and event processing. k. Object and property status and control. l. Automatic restart of field equipment on restoration of power. m. Data collection, reports, and logs. Include standard reports for the following: 1) Current values of all objects. 2) Current alarm summary. 3) Disabled objects. 4) Alarm lockout objects. 5) Logs. n. Custom report development. o. Utility and weather reports. p. Workstation application editors for controllers and schedules. q. Maintenance management. B. Control Units: Modular, comprising processor board with programmable, nonvolatile, random-access memory; local operator access and display panel; integral interface equipment; and backup power source. 1. Units monitor or control each I/O point; process information; execute commands from other control units, devices, and operator stations; and download from or upload to operator workstation or diagnostic terminal unit. 2. Stand-alone mode control functions operate regardless of network status. Functions include the following: a. Global communications. b. Discrete/digital, analog, and pulse I/O. c. Monitoring, controlling, or addressing data points. d. Software applications, scheduling, and alarm processing. e. Testing and developing control algorithms without disrupting field hardware and controlled environment. Mountain Haus Boiler Replacement 03/18/2014 100% CD's/Permit INSTRUMENTATION AND CONTROL FOR HVAC 23 0900 - 6 3. Standard Application Programs: a. Electric Control Programs: Demand limiting, duty cycling, automatic time scheduling, start/stop time optimization, night setback/setup, on-off control with differential sequencing, staggered start, antishort cycling, PID control, DDC with fine tuning, and trend logging. b. HVAC Control Programs: Optimal run time, supply-air reset, and enthalpy switchover. c. Chiller Control Programs: Control function of condenser-water reset, chilled-water reset, and equipment sequencing. d. Programming Application Features: Include trend point; alarm processing and messaging; weekly, monthly, and annual scheduling; energy calculations; run-time totalization; and security access. e. Remote communications. f. Maintenance management. g. Units of Measure: Inch-pound and SI (metric). 4. Local operator interface provides for download from or upload to operator workstation or diagnostic terminal unit. 5. ASHRAE 135 Compliance: Control units shall use ASHRAE 135 protocol and communicate using ISO 8802-3 (Ethernet) datalink/physical layer protocol. C. Local Control Units: Modular, comprising processor board with electronically programmable, nonvolatile, read-only memory; and backup power source. 1. ASHRAE 135 Compliance: Control units shall use ASHRAE 135 protocol and communicate using ISO 8802-3 (Ethernet) datalink/physical layer protocol. 2.04 UNITARY CONTROLLERS A. Unitized, capable of stand-alone operation with sufficient memory to support its operating system, database, and programming requirements, and with sufficient I/O capacity for the application. 1. Configuration: Local keypad and display; diagnostic LEDs for power, communication, and processor; wiring termination to terminal strip or card connected with ribbon cable; memory with bios; and 72 -hour battery backup. 2. Operating System: Manage I/O communication to allow distributed controllers to share real and virtual object information and allow central monitoring and alarms. Perform scheduling with real-time clock.$ds~Perform automatic system diagnostics; monitor system and report failures. 3. ASHRAE 135 Compliance: Communicate using read (execute and initiate) and write (execute and initiate) property services defined in ASHRAE 135. Reside on network using MS/TP datalink/physical layer protocol and have service communication port for connection to diagnostic terminal unit. 4. Enclosure: Dustproof rated for operation at 32 to 120 deg F. 5. Enclosure: Waterproof rated for operation at 40 to 150 deg F. 2.05 ALARM PANELS A. Unitized cabinet with suitable brackets for wall or floor mounting. Fabricate of 0.06-inch- thick, furniture-quality steel or extruded-aluminum alloy, totally enclosed, with hinged doors and keyed lock and with manufacturer's standard shop-painted finish.$ds~Provide common keying for all panels. B. Indicating light for each alarm point, single horn, acknowledge switch, and test switch, mounted on hinged cover. 1. Alarm Condition: Indicating light flashes and horn sounds. 2. Acknowledge Switch: Horn is silent and indicating light is steady. 3. Second Alarm: Horn sounds and indicating light is steady. 4. Alarm Condition Cleared: System is reset and indicating light is extinguished. 5. Contacts in alarm panel allow remote monitoring by independent alarm company. 2.06 ANALOG CONTROLLERS A. Step Controllers: 6- or 10-stage type, with heavy-duty switching rated to handle loads and operated by electric motor. Mountain Haus Boiler Replacement 03/18/2014 100% CD's/Permit INSTRUMENTATION AND CONTROL FOR HVAC 23 0900 - 7 B. Electric, Outdoor-Reset Controllers: Remote-bulb or bimetal rod-and-tube type, proportioning action with adjustable throttling range, adjustable set point, scale range minus 10 to plus 70 deg F, and single- or double-pole contacts. C. Electronic Controllers: Wheatstone-bridge-amplifier type, in steel enclosure with provision for remote-resistance readjustment. Identify adjustments on controllers, including proportional band and authority. 1. Single controllers can be integral with control motor if provided with accessible control readjustment potentiometer. D. Receiver Controllers: Single- or multiple-input models with control-point adjustment, direct or reverse acting with mechanical set-point adjustment with locking device, proportional band adjustment, authority adjustment, and proportional control mode. 1. Remote-control-point adjustment shall be plus or minus 20 percent of sensor span, input signal of 3 to 13 psig. 2. Proportional band shall extend from 2 to 20 percent for 5 psig. 3. Authority shall be 20 to 200 percent. 4. Air-supply pressure of 18 psig, input signal of 3 to 15 psig, and output signal of zero to supply pressure. 5. Gages: 2-1/2 inches in diameter, 2.5 percent wide-scale accuracy, and range to match transmitter input or output pressure. 2.07 ELECTRONIC SENSORS A. Description: Vibration and corrosion resistant; for wall, immersion, or duct mounting as required. B. Thermistor Temperature Sensors and Transmitters: 1. Accuracy: Plus or minus 0.5 deg F at calibration point. 2. Wire: Twisted, shielded-pair cable. 3. Insertion Elements in Ducts: Single point, 8 inches long; use where not affected by temperature stratification or where ducts are smaller than 9 sq. ft.. 4. Averaging Elements in Ducts: 72 inches long, flexible; use where prone to temperature stratification or where ducts are larger than 10 sq. ft.. 5. Insertion Elements for Liquids: Brass or stainless-steel socket with minimum insertion length of 2-1/2 inches. 6. Room Sensor Cover Construction: Manufacturer's standard locking covers. a. Set-Point Adjustment: Exposed. b. Set-Point Indication: Exposed. c. Thermometer: Red-reading glass. d. Color: Selected by Architect. e. Orientation: Vertical. 7. Outside-Air Sensors: Watertight inlet fitting, shielded from direct sunlight. 8. Room Security Sensors: Stainless-steel cover plate with insulated back and security screws. C. RTDs and Transmitters: 1. Accuracy: Plus or minus 0.2 percent at calibration point. 2. Wire: Twisted, shielded-pair cable. 3. Insertion Elements in Ducts: Single point, 8 inches long; use where not affected by temperature stratification or where ducts are smaller than 9 sq. ft.. 4. Averaging Elements in Ducts: 24 incheslong, rigid; use where prone to temperature stratification or where ducts are larger than 9 sq. ft.; length as required. 5. Insertion Elements for Liquids: Brass socket with minimum insertion length of 2-1/2 inches. 6. Room Sensor Cover Construction: See B.6 above. . 7. Outside-Air Sensors: Watertight inlet fitting, shielded from direct sunlight. 8. Room Security Sensors: Stainless-steel cover plate with insulated back and security screws. D. Pressure Transmitters/Transducers: 1. Static-Pressure Transmitter: Nondirectional sensor with suitable range for expected input, and temperature compensated. Mountain Haus Boiler Replacement 03/18/2014 100% CD's/Permit INSTRUMENTATION AND CONTROL FOR HVAC 23 0900 - 8 a. Accuracy: 2 percent of full scale with repeatability of 0.5 percent. b. Output: 4 to 20 mA. c. Building Static-Pressure Range: 0- to 0.25-inch wg. d. Duct Static-Pressure Range: 0- to 5-inch wg. 2. Water Pressure Transducers: Stainless-steel diaphragm construction, suitable for service; minimum 150-psig operating pressure; linear output 4 to 20 mA. 3. Water Differential-Pressure Transducers: Stainless-steel diaphragm construction, suitable for service; minimum 150-psig operating pressure and tested to 300-psig; linear output 4 to 20 mA. 4. Differential-Pressure Switch (Air or Water): Snap acting, with pilot-duty rating and with suitable scale range and differential. 5. Pressure Transmitters: Direct acting for gas, liquid, or steam service; range suitable for system; linear output 4 to 20 mA. 2.08 STATUS SENSORS A. Status Inputs for Fans: Differential-pressure switch with pilot-duty rating and with adjustable range of 0- to 5-inch wg. B. Status Inputs for Pumps: Differential-pressure switch with pilot-duty rating and with adjustable pressure-differential range of 8 to 60 psig, piped across pump. C. Status Inputs for Electric Motors: Comply with ISA 50.00.01, current-sensing fixed- or split-core transformers with self-powered transmitter, adjustable and suitable for 175 percent of rated motor current. D. Voltage Transmitter (100- to 600-V ac): Comply with ISA 50.00.01, single-loop, self-powered transmitter, adjustable, with suitable range and 1 percent full-scale accuracy. E. Power Monitor: 3-phase type with disconnect/shorting switch assembly, listed voltage and current transformers, with pulse kilowatt hour output and 4- to 20-mA kW output, with maximum 2 percent error at 1.0 power factor and 2.5 percent error at 0.5 power factor. F. Current Switches: Self-powered, solid-state with adjustable trip current, selected to match current and system output requirements. G. Electronic Valve/Damper Position Indicator: Visual scale indicating percent of travel and 2- to 10-V dc, feedback signal. H. Water-Flow Switches: Bellows-actuated mercury or snap-acting type with pilot-duty rating, stainless-steel or bronze paddle, with appropriate range and differential adjustment, in NEMA 250, Type 1 enclosure. 2.09 THERMOSTATS A. Low-Voltage, On-Off Thermostats: NEMA DC 3, 24-V, bimetal-operated, mercury-switch type, with adjustable or fixed anticipation heater, concealed set-point adjustment, 55 to 85 deg F set-point range, and 2 deg F maximum differential. B. Line-Voltage, On-Off Thermostats: Bimetal-actuated, open contact or bellows-actuated, enclosed, snap-switch or equivalent solid-state type, with heat anticipator; listed for electrical rating; with concealed set-point adjustment, 55 to 85 deg F set-point range, and 2 deg F maximum differential. 1. Electric Heating Thermostats: Equip with off position on dial wired to break ungrounded conductors. 2. Selector Switch: Integral, manual on-off-auto. C. Remote-Bulb Thermostats: On-off or modulating type, liquid filled to compensate for changes in ambient temperature; with copper capillary and bulb, unless otherwise indicated. 1. Bulbs in water lines with separate wells of same material as bulb. 2. Bulbs in air ducts with flanges and shields. Mountain Haus Boiler Replacement 03/18/2014 100% CD's/Permit INSTRUMENTATION AND CONTROL FOR HVAC 23 0900 - 9 3. Averaging Elements: Copper tubing with either single- or multiple-unit elements, extended to cover full width of duct or unit; adequately supported. 4. Scale settings and differential settings are clearly visible and adjustable from front of instrument. 5. On-Off Thermostat: With precision snap switches and with electrical ratings required by application. 6. Modulating Thermostats: Construct so complete potentiometer coil and wiper assembly is removable for inspection or replacement without disturbing calibration of instrument. 2.10 ACTUATORS A. Electric Motors: Size to operate with sufficient reserve power to provide smooth modulating action or two-position action. 1. Comply with requirements in Section 230513 "Common Motor Requirements for HVAC Equipment." 2. Permanent Split-Capacitor or Shaded-Pole Type: Gear trains completely oil immersed and sealed. Equip spring-return motors with integral spiral-spring mechanism in housings designed for easy removal for service or adjustment of limit switches, auxiliary switches, or feedback potentiometer. 3. Nonspring-Return Motors for Valves Larger Than NPS 2-1/2: Size for running torque of 150 in. x lbf and breakaway torque of 300 in. x lbf. 4. Spring-Return Motors for Valves Larger Than NPS 2-1/2: Size for running and breakaway torque of 150 in. x lbf. 5. Nonspring-Return Motors for Dampers Larger Than 25 Sq. Ft.: Size for running torque of 150 in. x lbf and breakaway torque of 300 in. x lbf. 6. Spring-Return Motors for Dampers Larger Than 25 Sq. Ft.: Size for running and breakaway torque of 150 in. x lbf. B. Electronic Actuators: Direct-coupled type designed for minimum 60,000 full-stroke cycles at rated torque. 1. Valves: Size for torque required for valve close off at maximum pump differential pressure. 2. Dampers: Size for running torque calculated as follows: a. Parallel-Blade Damper with Edge Seals: 7 inch-lb/sq. ft. of damper. b. Opposed-Blade Damper with Edge Seals: 5 inch-lb/sq. ft. of damper. c. Parallel-Blade Damper without Edge Seals: 4 inch-lb/sq. ft of damper. d. Opposed-Blade Damper without Edge Seals: 3 inch-lb/sq. ft.of damper. e. Dampers with 2- to 3-Inch wg of Pressure Drop or Face Velocities of 1000 to 2500 fpm: Increase running torque by 1.5. f. Dampers with 3- to 4-Inch wg of Pressure Drop or Face Velocities of 2500 to 3000 fpm: Increase running torque by 2.0. 3. Coupling: V-bolt and V-shaped, toothed cradle. 4. Overload Protection: Electronic overload or digital rotation-sensing circuitry. 5. Fail-Safe Operation: Mechanical, spring-return mechanism. Provide external, manual gear release on nonspring-return actuators. 6. Power Requirements (Two-Position Spring Return): 24 -V ac. 7. Power Requirements (Modulating): Maximum 10 VA at 24-V ac or 8 W at 24-V dc. 8. Proportional Signal: 2- to 10-V dc or 4 to 20 mA, and 2- to 10-V dc position feedback signal. 9. Temperature Rating: Minus 22 to plus 122 deg F. 10. Temperature Rating (Smoke Dampers): Minus 22 to plus 250 deg F. 11. Run Time: 12 seconds open, 5 seconds closed. 2.11 CONTROL VALVES A. Control Valves: Factory fabricated, of type, body material, and pressure class based on maximum pressure and temperature rating of piping system, unless otherwise indicated. B. Hydronic system globe valves shall have the following characteristics: 1. NPS 2 and Smaller: Class 250 bronze body, bronze trim, rising stem, renewable composition disc, and screwed ends with backseating capacity repackable under pressure. 2. NPS 2-1/2 and Larger: Class 125 iron body, bronze trim, rising stem, plug-type disc, flanged ends, and renewable seat and disc. 3. Internal Construction: Replaceable plugs and stainless-steel or brass seats. Mountain Haus Boiler Replacement 03/18/2014 100% CD's/Permit INSTRUMENTATION AND CONTROL FOR HVAC 23 0900 - 10 a. Single-Seated Valves: Cage trim provides seating and guiding surfaces for plug on top and bottom. b. Double-Seated Valves: Balanced plug; cage trim provides seating and guiding surfaces for plugs on top and bottom. 4. Sizing: 5-psig maximum pressure drop at design flow rate or the following: a. Two Position: Line size. b. Two-Way Modulating: Either the value specified above or twice the load pressure drop, whichever is more. c. Three-Way Modulating: Twice the load pressure drop, but not more than value specified above. 5. Flow Characteristics: Two-way valves shall have equal percentage characteristics; three-way valves shall have linear characteristics. 6. Close-Off (Differential) Pressure Rating: Combination of actuator and trim shall provide minimum close-off pressure rating of 150 percent of total system (pump) head for two-way valves and 100 percent of pressure differential across valve or 100 percent of total system (pump) head. C. Butterfly Valves: 200-psig, 150-psig maximum pressure differential, ASTM A 126 cast-iron or ASTM A 536 ductile-iron body and bonnet, extended neck, stainless-steel stem, field-replaceable EPDM or Buna N sleeve and stem seals. 1. Body Style: Lug. 2. Disc Type: Stainless Steel or Nickel-plated ductile iron. 3. Sizing: 1-psig maximum pressure drop at design flow rate. D. Terminal Unit Control Valves: Bronze body, bronze trim, two or three ports as indicated, replaceable plugs and seats, and union and threaded ends. 1. Rating: Class 125 for service at 125 psig and 250 deg F operating conditions. 2. Sizing: 3-psig maximum pressure drop at design flow rate, to close against pump shutoff head. 3. Flow Characteristics: Two-way valves shall have equal percentage characteristics; three-way valves shall have linear characteristics. 2.12 DAMPERS A. Manufacturers: 1. Air Balance Inc. 2. Don Park Inc.; Autodamp Div. 3. Greenheck, 4. Ruskin. B. Dampers: AMCA-rated, opposed-blade design; 0.108-inch- minimum thick, galvanized-steel or 0.125-inch- minimum thick, extruded-aluminum frames with holes for duct mounting; damper blades shall not be less than 0.064-inch- thick galvanized steel with maximum blade width of 8 inches and length of 48 inches. 1. Secure blades to 1/2-inch- diameter, zinc-plated axles using zinc-plated hardware, with oil-impregnated sintered bronze blade bearings, blade-linkage hardware of zinc-plated steel and brass, ends sealed against spring-stainless-steel blade bearings, and thrust bearings at each end of every blade. 2. Operating Temperature Range: From minus 40 to plus 200 deg F. 3. Edge Seals, Standard Pressure Applications: Closed-cell neoprene. 4. Edge Seals, Low-Leakage Applications: Use inflatable blade edging or replaceable rubber blade seals and spring-loaded stainless-steel side seals, rated for leakage at less than 10 cfm per sq. ft. of damper area, at differential pressure of 4-inch wg when damper is held by torque of 50 in. x lbf; when tested according to AMCA 500D. 2.13 CONTROL CABLE A. Electronic and fiber-optic cables for control wiring are specified in Section 271500 "Communications Horizontal Cabling." Mountain Haus Boiler Replacement 03/18/2014 100% CD's/Permit INSTRUMENTATION AND CONTROL FOR HVAC 23 0900 - 11 PART 3 EXECUTION 3.01 EXAMINATION A. Verify that conditioned power supply is available to control units and operator workstation. 3.02 INSTALLATION A. Install software in control units and operator workstation(s). Implement all features of programs to specified requirements and as appropriate to sequence of operation. B. Connect and configure equipment and software to achieve sequence of operation specified. C. Verify location of thermostats, humidistats, and other exposed control sensors with Drawings and room details before installation. Install devices 48 inches above the floor. 1. Install averaging elements in ducts and plenums in crossing or zigzag pattern. D. Install guards on thermostats in the following locations: 1. Entrances. 2. Public areas. 3. Where indicated. E. Install automatic dampers according to Section 233300 "Air Duct Accessories." F. Install damper motors on outside of duct in warm areas, not in locations exposed to outdoor temperatures. G. Install labels and nameplates to identify control components according to Section 230553 "Identification for HVAC Piping and Equipment." H. Install hydronic instrument wells, valves, and other accessories according to Section 232113 "Hydronic Piping." I. Install steam and condensate instrument wells, valves, and other accessories according to Section 232213 "Steam and Condensate Heating Piping." J. Install refrigerant instrument wells, valves, and other accessories according to Section 232300 "Refrigerant Piping." K. Install duct volume-control dampers according to Section 233113 "Metal Ducts" and Section 233116 "Nonmetal Ducts." L. Install electronic and fiber-optic cables according to Section 271500 "Communications Horizontal Cabling." 3.03 ELECTRICAL WIRING AND CONNECTION INSTALLATION A. Install raceways, boxes, and cabinets according to Section 260533 "Raceways and Boxes for Electrical Systems." B. Install building wire and cable according to Section 260519 "Low-Voltage Electrical Power Conductors and Cables." C. Install signal and communication cable according to Section 271500 "Communications Horizontal Cabling." 1. Conceal cable, except in mechanical rooms and areas where other conduit and piping are exposed. 2. Install exposed cable in raceway. 3. Install concealed cable in raceway. 4. Bundle and harness multiconductor instrument cable in place of single cables where several cables follow a common path. Mountain Haus Boiler Replacement 03/18/2014 100% CD's/Permit INSTRUMENTATION AND CONTROL FOR HVAC 23 0900 - 12 5. Fasten flexible conductors, bridging cabinets and doors, along hinge side; protect against abrasion. Tie and support conductors. 6. Number-code or color-code conductors for future identification and service of control system, except local individual room control cables. 7. Install wire and cable with sufficient slack and flexible connections to allow for vibration of piping and equipment. D. Connect manual-reset limit controls independent of manual-control switch positions. Automatic duct heater resets may be connected in interlock circuit of power controllers. E. Connect hand-off-auto selector switches to override automatic interlock controls when switch is in hand position. 3.04 FIELD QUALITY CONTROL A. Manufacturer's Field Service: Engage a factory-authorized service representative to inspect, test, and adjust field-assembled components and equipment installation, including connections, and to assist in field testing. Report results in writing. B. Perform the following field tests and inspections and prepare test reports: 1. Operational Test: After electrical circuitry has been energized, start units to confirm proper unit operation. Remove and replace malfunctioning units and retest. 2. Test and adjust controls and safeties. 3. Test calibration of electronic controllers by disconnecting input sensors and stimulating operation with compatible signal generator. 4. Test each point through its full operating range to verify that safety and operating control set points are as required. 5. Test each control loop to verify stable mode of operation and compliance with sequence of operation. Adjust PID actions. 6. Test each system for compliance with sequence of operation. 7. Test software and hardware interlocks. C. Replace damaged or malfunctioning controls and equipment and repeat testing procedures. 3.05 ADJUSTING A. Calibrating and Adjusting: 1. Calibrate instruments. 2. Make three-point calibration test for both linearity and accuracy for each analog instrument. 3. Calibrate equipment and procedures using manufacturer's written recommendations and instruction manuals. Use test equipment with accuracy at least double that of instrument being calibrated. 4. Control System Inputs and Outputs: a. Check analog inputs at 0, 50, and 100 percent of span. b. Check analog outputs using milliampere meter at 0, 50, and 100 percent output. c. Check digital inputs using jumper wire. d. Check digital outputs using ohmmeter to test for contact making or breaking. e. Check resistance temperature inputs at 0, 50, and 100 percent of span using a precision-resistant source. 5. Flow: a. Set differential pressure flow transmitters for 0 and 100 percent values with 3-point calibration accomplished at 50, 90, and 100 percent of span. b. Manually operate flow switches to verify that they make or break contact. 6. Pressure: a. Calibrate pressure transmitters at 0, 50, and 100 percent of span. b. Calibrate pressure switches to make or break contacts, with adjustable differential set at minimum. 7. Temperature: a. Calibrate resistance temperature transmitters at 0, 50, and 100 percent of span using a precision-resistance source. Mountain Haus Boiler Replacement 03/18/2014 100% CD's/Permit INSTRUMENTATION AND CONTROL FOR HVAC 23 0900 - 13 b. Calibrate temperature switches to make or break contacts. 8. Stroke and adjust control valves and dampers without positioners, following the manufacturer's recommended procedure, so that valve or damper is 100 percent open and closed. 9. Stroke and adjust control valves and dampers with positioners, following manufacturer's recommended procedure, so that valve and damper is 0, 50, and 100 percent closed. 10. Provide diagnostic and test instruments for calibration and adjustment of system. 11. Provide written description of procedures and equipment for calibrating each type of instrument. Submit procedures review and approval before initiating startup procedures. B. Adjust initial temperature and humidity set points. C. Occupancy Adjustments: When requested within 12 months of date of Substantial Completion, provide on-site assistance in adjusting system to suit actual occupied conditions. Provide up to three visits to Project during other than normal occupancy hours for this purpose. 3.06 DEMONSTRATION A. Engage a factory-authorized service representative to train Owner's maintenance personnel to adjust, operate, and maintain HVAC instrumentation and controls. Refer to Section 017900 "Demonstration and Training." END OF SECTION 230900 Mountain Haus Boiler Replacement 03/18/2014 100% CD's/Permit VARIABLE-FREQUENCY DRIVES 23 0923 - 1 SECTION 23 0923 - VARIABLE-FREQUENCY DRIVES PART 1 GENERAL 1.01 SUMMARY A. Section includes separately enclosed, pre-assembled, combination VFDs, rated 600 V and less, for speed control of three-phase, squirrel-cage induction motors. 1.02 DEFINITIONS A. BAS: Building automation system. B. CPT: Control power transformer. C. EMI: Electromagnetic interference. D. IGBT: Insulated-gate bipolar transistor. E. LAN: Local area network. F. LED: Light-emitting diode. G. NC: Normally closed. H. NO: Normally open. I. OCPD: Overcurrent protective device. J. PCC: Point of common coupling. K. PID: Control action, proportional plus integral plus derivative. L. PWM: Pulse-width modulated. M. RFI: Radio-frequency interference. N. TDD: Total demand (harmonic current) distortion. O. THD(V): Total harmonic voltage demand. P. VFD: Variable-frequency motor drive. 1.03 SUBMITTALS A. Product Data: For each type and rating of VFD indicated. Include features, performance, electrical ratings, operating characteristics, shipping and operating weights, and furnished specialties and accessories. B. Shop Drawings: For each VFD indicated. Include dimensioned plans, elevations, and sections; and conduit entry locations and sizes, mounting arrangements, and details, including required clearances and service space around equipment. 1. Show tabulations of installed devices, equipment features, and ratings. Include the following: a. Each installed unit's type and details. b. Factory-installed devices. Mountain Haus Boiler Replacement 03/18/2014 100% CD's/Permit VARIABLE-FREQUENCY DRIVES 23 0923 - 2 c. Enclosure types and details. d. Nameplate legends. e. Short-circuit current (withstand) rating of enclosed unit. f. Features, characteristics, ratings, and factory settings of each VFD and installed devices. g. Specified modifications. 2. Schematic and Connection Wiring Diagrams: For power, signal, and control wiring. C. Harmonic Analysis Study and Report: Comply with IEEE 399 and NETA Acceptance Testing Specification; identify the effects of nonlinear loads and their associated harmonic contributions on the voltages and currents throughout the electrical system. Analyze possible operating scenarios, including recommendations for VFD input filtering to limit TDD and THD(V) at each VFD to specified levels. D. Source quality-control reports. E. Field quality-control reports. F. Operation and Maintenance Data: For VFDs to include in emergency, operation and maintenance manuals. In addition to items specified in Section "Operation and Maintenance Data", include the following: 1. Manufacturer's written instructions for testing and adjusting thermal-magnetic circuit breaker and MCP trip settings. 2. Manufacturer's written instructions for setting field-adjustable overload relays. 3. Manufacturer's written instructions for testing, adjusting and reprogramming microprocessor control modules. 4. Manufacturer's written instructions for setting field-adjustable timers, controls and status and alarm points. G. Load-Current and Overload-Relay Heater List: Compile after motors have been installed and arrange to demonstrate that selection of heaters suits actual motor nameplate, full-load currents. H. Load-Current and List of Settings of Adjustable Overload Relays: Compile after motors have been installed and arrange to demonstrate that switch settings for motor-running overload protectoin suit actual motors to be protected. 1.04 QUALITY ASSURANCE A. Electrical Components, Devices, and Accessories: Listed and labeled as defined in NFPA 70, by a qualified testing agency, and marked for intended location and application. B. Comply with NFPA 70. C. IEEE Compliance: Fabricate and test VFD according to IEEE 344 to withstand seismic forces defined in Section 260548 "Vibration and Seismic Controls for Electrical Systems." 1. VFDs serving Air Handlers 14 & 15 shall be seismically rated. 2. VFDs serving central plant chilled and condenser water pumps do not require seismic rating. 1.05 PROJECT CONDITIONS A. Environmental Limitations: Rate equipment for continuous operation, capable of driving full load without derating, under the following conditions unless otherwise indicated: 1. Ambient Temperature: Not less than 14 deg F and not exceeding 104 deg F. 2. Ambient Storage Temperature: Not less than minus 4 deg F and not exceeding 140 deg F) 3. Humidity: Less than 95 percent (noncondensing). 4. Altitude: 8000 feet. B. Interruption of Existing Electrical Systems: Do not interrupt electrical systems in facilities occupied by Owner or others unless permitted under the following conditions and then only after arranging to provide temporary electrical service according to requirements indicated: 1. Notify Construction Manager no fewer than two weeks in advance of proposed interruption of electrical Mountain Haus Boiler Replacement 03/18/2014 100% CD's/Permit VARIABLE-FREQUENCY DRIVES 23 0923 - 3 systems. 2. Indicate method of providing temporary electrical service. 3. Do not proceed with interruption of electrical systems without Construction Manager's written permission. 4. Comply with NFPA 70E. 1.06 COORDINATION A. Coordinate features of motors, load characteristics, installed units, and accessory devices to be compatible with the following: 1. Torque, speed, and horsepower requirements of the load. 2. Ratings and characteristics of supply circuit and required control sequence. 3. Ambient and environmental conditions of installation location. 1.07 WARRANTY A. Special Warranty: Manufacturer's standard form in which manufacturer agrees to repair or replace VFDs that fail in materials or workmanship within specified warranty period. 1. Warranty Period: Five years from date of Substantial Completion. 1.08 EXTRA MATERIALS A. Furnish extra materials described below that match products installed and that are packaged with protective covering for storage and identified with labels describing contents. 1. Power Fuses: Equal to 10 percent of quantity installed for each size and type, but no fewer than three of each size and type. PART 2 PRODUCTS 2.01 MANUFACTURED UNITS A. Manufacturers: Subject to compliance with requirements, provide products by the following: 1. ABB Model ACH550-VCR 2. Danfoss. 3. Eaton B. General Requirements for VFDs: Comply with NEMA ICS 7, NEMA ICS 61800-2, and UL 508C. C. Application: variable torque. D. VFD Description: Variable-frequency power converter (rectifier, dc bus, and IGBT, PWM inverter) factory packaged in an enclosure, with integral disconnecting means and overcurrent and overload protection; listed and labeled by an NRTL as a complete unit; arranged to provide self-protection, protection, and variable-speed control of one or more three-phase induction motors by adjusting output voltage and frequency. 1. Units suitable for operation of inverter-duty motors as defined by NEMA MG 1, Section IV, Part 31, "Definite-Purpose Inverter-Fed Polyphase Motors." 2. Listed and labeled for integrated short-circuit current (withstand) rating by an NRTL acceptable to authorities having jurisdiction. E. Design and Rating: Match load type, such as fans, blowers, and pumps; and type of connection used between motor and load such as direct or through a power-transmission connection. F. Output Rating: Three-phase; 10 to 60 Hz, with voltage proportional to frequency throughout voltage range; maximum voltage equals input voltage. G. Unit Operating Requirements: 1. Input AC Voltage Tolerance: Plus 10 and minus 10 percent of VFD input voltage rating. Mountain Haus Boiler Replacement 03/18/2014 100% CD's/Permit VARIABLE-FREQUENCY DRIVES 23 0923 - 4 2. Input AC Voltage Unbalance: Not exceeding 3 percent. 3. Input Frequency Tolerance: Plus or minus 3 percent of VFD frequency rating. 4. Minimum Efficiency: 96 percent at 60 Hz, full load. 5. Minimum Displacement Primary-Side Power Factor: 96 percent under any load or speed condition. 6. Ambient Temperature Rating: Not less than 14 deg F and not exceeding 104 deg F. 7. Ambient Storage Temperature Rating: Not less than minus 4 deg F and not exceeding 140 deg F) 8. Humidity Rating: Less than 95 percent (noncondensing). 9. Altitude Rating: Not exceeding 3300 feet. 10. Vibration Withstand: Comply with IEC 60068-2-6. 11. Overload Capability: 1.5 times the base load current for 60 seconds; minimum of 1.8 times the base load current for three seconds. 12. Starting Torque: Minimum 100 percent of rated torque from 3 to 60 Hz. 13. Speed Regulation: Plus or minus 5 percent. 14. Output Carrier Frequency: Selectable; 0.5 to 15> kHz. 15. Stop Modes: Programmable; includes fast, free-wheel, and dc injection braking. H. Inverter Logic: Microprocessor based, 16 or 32 bit, isolated from all power circuits. I. Isolated Control Interface: Allows VFDs to follow remote-control signal over a minimum 40:1 speed range. 1. Signal: Electrical. J. Internal Adjustability Capabilities: 1. Minimum Speed: 5 to 25 percent of maximum rpm. 2. Maximum Speed: 80 to 100 percent of maximum rpm. 3. Acceleration: 0.1 to 999.9 seconds. 4. Deceleration: 0.1 to 999.9 seconds. 5. Current Limit: 30 to minimum of 150 percent of maximum rating. K. Self-Protection and Reliability Features: 1. Input transient protection by means of surge suppressors to provide three-phase protection against damage from supply voltage surges 10 percent or more above nominal line voltage. 2. Loss of Input Signal Protection: Selectable response strategy, including speed default to a percent of the most recent speed, a preset speed, or stop; with alarm. 3. Under- and overvoltage trips. 4. Inverter overcurrent trips. 5. VFD and Motor Overload/Overtemperature Protection: Microprocessor-based thermal protection system for monitoring VFDs and motor thermal characteristics, and for providing VFD overtemperature and motor overload alarm and trip; settings selectable via the keypad; NRTL approved. 6. Critical frequency rejection, with three selectable, adjustable deadbands. 7. Instantaneous line-to-line and line-to-ground overcurrent trips. 8. Loss-of-phase protection. 9. Reverse-phase protection. 10. Short-circuit protection. 11. Motor overtemperature fault. L. Automatic Reset/Restart: Attempt three restarts after drive fault or on return of power after an interruption and before shutting down for manual reset or fault correction; adjustable delay time between restart attempts. M. Power-Interruption Protection: To prevent motor from re-energizing after a power interruption until motor has stopped, unless "Bidirectional Autospeed Search" feature is available and engaged. N. Bidirectional Autospeed Search: Capable of starting VFD into rotating loads spinning in either direction and returning motor to set speed in proper direction, without causing damage to drive, motor, or load. O. Torque Boost: Automatically varies starting and continuous torque to at least 1.5 times the minimum torque to ensure high-starting torque and increased torque at slow speeds. Mountain Haus Boiler Replacement 03/18/2014 100% CD's/Permit VARIABLE-FREQUENCY DRIVES 23 0923 - 5 P. Motor Temperature Compensation at Slow Speeds: Adjustable current fall-back based on output frequency for temperature protection of self-cooled, fan-ventilated motors at slow speeds. Q. Integral Input Disconnecting Means and OCPD: NEMA AB 1, instantaneous-trip circuit breaker with pad-lockable, door-mounted handle mechanism. 1. Disconnect Rating: Not less than 115 percent of VFD input current rating. 2. Disconnect Rating: Not less than 115 percent of NFPA 70 motor full-load current rating or VFD input current rating, whichever is larger. 3. Auxiliary Contacts: NO/NC, arranged to activate before switch blades open. 4. Auxiliary contacts "a" and "b" arranged to activate with circuit-breaker handle. 5. NC or NO alarm contact (user selectable) that operates only when circuit breaker has tripped. 2.02 CONTROLS AND INDICATION A. Status Lights: Door-mounted LED indicators displaying the following conditions: 1. Power on. 2. Run. 3. Overvoltage. 4. Line fault. 5. Overcurrent. 6. External fault. B. Panel-Mounted Operator Station: Manufacturer's standard front-accessible, sealed keypad and plain-English language digital display; allows complete programming, program copying, operating, monitoring, and diagnostic capability. 1. Keypad: In addition to required programming and control keys, include keys for HAND, OFF, and AUTO modes. 2. Security Access: Provide electronic security access to controls through identification and password with at least three levels of access: View only; view and operate; and view, operate, and service. a. Control Authority: Supports at least four conditions: Off, local manual control at VFD, local automatic control at VFD, and automatic control through a remote source. C. Historical Logging Information and Displays: 1. Real-time clock with current time and date. 2. Running log of total power versus time. 3. Total run time. 4. Fault log, maintaining last four faults with time and date stamp for each. D. Indicating Devices: Digital displayand additional readout devices as required, mounted flush in VFD door and connected to display VFD parameters including, but not limited to: 1. Output frequency (Hz). 2. Motor speed (rpm). 3. Motor status (running, stop, fault). 4. Motor current (amperes). 5. Motor torque (percent). 6. Fault or alarming status (code). 7. PID feedback signal (percent). 8. DC-link voltage (V dc). 9. Set point frequency (Hz). 10. Motor output voltage (V ac). E. Control Signal Interfaces: 1. Electric Input Signal Interface: a. A minimum of two programmable analog inputs: Operator-selectable "x"- to "y"-mA or -dc. b. A minimum of six multifunction programmable digital inputs. 2. Remote Signal Inputs: Capability to accept any of the following speed-setting input signals from the BAS or other control systems: Mountain Haus Boiler Replacement 03/18/2014 100% CD's/Permit VARIABLE-FREQUENCY DRIVES 23 0923 - 6 a. 0- to 10-V dc. b. 4- to 20-mA dc. c. Potentiometer using up/down digital inputs. d. Fixed frequencies using digital inputs. 3. Output Signal Interface: A minimum of one programmable analog output signal(s) (operator-selectable "x"- to "y"-mA dc), which can be configured for any of the following: a. Output frequency (Hz). b. Output current (load). c. DC-link voltage (V dc). d. Motor torque (percent). e. Motor speed (rpm). f. Set point frequency (Hz). 4. Remote Indication Interface: A minimum of two programmable dry-circuit relay outputs (120-V ac, 1 A) for remote indication of the following: a. Motor running. b. Set point speed reached. c. Fault and warning indication (overtemperature or overcurrent). d. PID high- or low-speed limits reached. F. PID Control Interface: Provides closed-loop set point, differential feedback control in response to dual feedback signals. Allows for closed-loop control of fans and pumps for pressure, flow, or temperature regulation. 1. Number of Loops: Two. G. BAS Interface: Factory-installed hardware and software to enable the BAS to monitor, control, and display VFD status and alarms. Allows VFD to be used with an external system within a multidrop LAN configuration; settings retained within VFD's nonvolatile memory. 1. Network Communications Ports: Ethernet and RS-485. 2. Embedded BAS Protocols for Network Communications: ASHRAE 135 BACnet; protocols accessible via the communications ports. 2.03 LINE CONDITIONING AND FILTERING A. Input Line Conditioning: Provide harmonic analysis study and report to conclusively confirm that harmonic input line conditioning is not required. 1. TDD at input terminals of all VFDs to less than 5 percent and THD(V) to 3 percent. B. Output Filtering: Provide output reactor. C. EMI/RFI Filtering: CE marked; certify compliance with IEC 61800-3 for Category C2. 2.04 BYPASS SYSTEMS A. Bypass Operation: Safely transfers motor between power converter output and bypass circuit, manually, automatically, or both. Selector switches set modes and indicator lights indicate mode selected. Unit is capable of stable operation (starting, stopping, and running) with motor completely disconnected from power converter. B. Bypass Mode: Field-selectable automatic or manual, allows local and remote transfer between power converter and bypass contactor and retransfer, either via manual operator interface or automatic control system feedback. C. Bypass Drive: Two-contactor-style bypass allows motor operation via the power converter or the bypass drive; with input isolating switch and barrier arranged to isolate the power converter and permit safe troubleshooting and testing, both energized and de-energized, while motor is operating in bypass mode. 1. Bypass Contactor: Load-break, NEMA-rated contactor. 2. Output Isolating Contactor: Non-load-break, NEMA-rated contactor. Mountain Haus Boiler Replacement 03/18/2014 100% CD's/Permit VARIABLE-FREQUENCY DRIVES 23 0923 - 7 3. Isolating Switch: Non-load-break switch arranged to isolate power converter and permit safe troubleshooting and testing of the power converter, both energized and de-energized, while motor is operating in bypass mode; pad-lockable, door-mounted handle mechanism. D. Bypass Contactor Configuration: Full-voltage (across-the-line) type. 1. NORMAL/BYPASS selector switch. 2. HAND/OFF/AUTO selector switch. 3. NORMAL/TEST Selector Switch: Allows testing and adjusting of VFD while the motor is running in the bypass mode. 4. Contactor Coils: Pressure-encapsulated type with coil transient suppressors. a. Operating Voltage: Depending on contactor NEMA size and line-voltage rating, manufacturer's standard matching control power or line voltage. b. Power Contacts: Totally enclosed, double break, and silver-cadmium oxide; assembled to allow inspection and replacement without disturbing line or load wiring. 5. Overload Relays: NEMA ICS 2. a. Melting-Alloy Overload Relays: 1) Inverse-time-current characteristic. 2) Class 20 tripping characteristic. 3) Heaters in each phase matched to nameplate full-load current of actual protected motor and with appropriate adjustment for duty cycle. 2.05 ENCLOSURES A. VFD Enclosures: NEMA 250, to comply with environmental conditions at installed location. 1. Outdoor Locations: Type 4X. 2. Other Wet or Damp Indoor Locations (Central Utility Plant): Type 4 . B. Plenum Rating: UL 1995; NRTL certification label on enclosure, clearly identifying VFD as "Plenum Rated." 2.06 ACCESSORIES A. General Requirements for Control-Circuit and Pilot Devices: NEMA ICS 5; factory installed in VFD enclosure cover unless otherwise indicated. 1. Push Buttons, Pilot Lights, and Selector Switches: Standard-duty, oiltight type. B. Reversible NC/NO bypass contactor auxiliary contact(s). C. Control Relays: Auxiliary and adjustable solid-state time-delay relays. D. Phase-Failure, Phase-Reversal, and Undervoltage and Overvoltage Relays: Solid-state sensing circuit with isolated output contacts for hard-wired connections. Provide adjustable undervoltage, overvoltage, and time-delay settings. 1. Current Transformers: Continuous current rating, basic impulse insulating level (BIL) rating, burden, and accuracy class suitable for connected circuitry. Comply with IEEE C57.13. E. Supplemental Meters: 1. Elapsed-time meter. 2. Kilowatt meter. 3. Kilowatt-hour meter. F. Breather and drain assemblies, to maintain interior pressure and release condensation in NEMA 250, Type 4X enclosures installed outdoors or in unconditioned interior spaces subject to humidity and temperature swings. G. Space heaters, with NC auxiliary contacts, to mitigate condensation in NEMA 250, Type 4X enclosures installed outdoors or in unconditioned interior spaces subject to humidity and temperature swings. H. Spare control-wiring terminal blocks; unwired. Mountain Haus Boiler Replacement 03/18/2014 100% CD's/Permit VARIABLE-FREQUENCY DRIVES 23 0923 - 8 2.07 SOURCE QUALITY CONTROL A. Testing: Test and inspect VFDs according to requirements in NEMA ICS 61800-2. 1. Test each VFD while connected to a motor that is comparable to that for which the VFD is rated. 2. Verification of Performance: Rate VFDs according to operation of functions and features specified. B. VFDs will be considered defective if they do not pass tests and inspections. C. Prepare test and inspection reports. PART 3 EXECUTION 3.01 EXAMINATION A. Examine areas, surfaces, and substrates to receive VFDs, with Installer present, for compliance with requirements for installation tolerances, potential sources of damage from overhead mechanical or plumbing systems, and other conditions affecting performance. B. Examine VFD before installation. Reject VFDs that are wet, moisture damaged, or mold damaged. C. Examine roughing-in for conduit systems to verify actual locations of conduit connections before VFD installation. D. Proceed with installation only after unsatisfactory conditions have been corrected. 3.02 INSTALLATION A. Coordinate layout and installation of VFDs with other construction including conduit, piping, equipment, and adjacent surfaces. Maintain required workspace clearances and required clearances for equipment access doors and panels. B. Wall-Mounting Drives: Install VFDs on walls with tops at uniform height and with disconnect operating handles not higher than 79 inches above finished floor unless otherwise indicated, and by bolting units to wall or mounting on lightweight structural-steel channels bolted to wall. For drives not on walls, provide freestanding racks complying with Section 260529 "Hangers and Supports for Electrical Systems." C. Floor-Mounting Drives: Install VFDs on 4-inch nominal thickness concrete base. Comply with requirements for concrete base specified in Section 033053 "Miscellaneous Cast-in-Place Concrete." 1. Install dowel rods to connect concrete base to concrete floor. Unless otherwise indicated, install dowel rods on 18-inch centers around the full perimeter of concrete base. 2. For supported equipment, install epoxy-coated anchor bolts that extend through concrete base and anchor into structural concrete floor. 3. Place and secure anchorage devices. Use setting drawings, templates, diagrams, instructions, and directions furnished with items to be embedded. 4. Install anchor bolts to elevations required for proper attachment to supported equipment. D. Seismic Bracing: Comply with requirements specified in Section 260548 "Vibration and Seismic Controls for Electrical Systems" for restraint of VFDs serving fans on Level 5 air handling systems. E. Temporary Lifting Provisions: Remove temporary lifting eyes, channels, and brackets and temporary blocking of moving parts from enclosures and components. F. Install fuses in control circuits if not factory installed. Comply with requirements in Section 262813 "Fuses." G. Install heaters in thermal-overload relays. Select heaters based on actual nameplate full-load amperes after motors have been installed. Mountain Haus Boiler Replacement 03/18/2014 100% CD's/Permit VARIABLE-FREQUENCY DRIVES 23 0923 - 9 H. Install, connect, and fuse thermal-protector monitoring relays furnished with motor-driven equipment. I. Comply with NECA 1. 3.03 IDENTIFICATION A. Identify VFDs, components, and control wiring. Comply with requirements for identification specified in Section 260553 "Identification for Electrical Systems." 1. Identify field-installed conductors, interconnecting wiring, and components; provide warning signs. 2. Label each VFD with engraved nameplate. 3. Label each enclosure-mounted control and pilot device. B. Operating Instructions: Frame printed operating instructions for VFDs, including control sequences and emergency procedures. Fabricate frame of finished metal, and cover instructions with clear acrylic plastic. Mount on front of VFD units. 3.04 CONTROL WIRING INSTALLATION A. Install wiring between VFDs and remote devices and facility's central-control system. Comply with requirements in Section 260523 "Control-Voltage Electrical Power Cables." B. Bundle, train, and support wiring in enclosures. C. Connect selector switches and other automatic control devices where applicable. 1. Connect selector switches to bypass only those manual- and automatic control devices that have no safety functions when switches are in manual-control position. 2. Connect selector switches with control circuit in both manual and automatic positions for safety-type control devices such as low- and high-pressure cutouts, high-temperature cutouts, and motor overload protectors. 3.05 FIELD QUALITY CONTROL A. Manufacturer's Field Service: Engage a factory-authorized service representative to inspect, test, and adjust components, assemblies, and equipment installations, including connections. B. Acceptance Testing Preparation: 1. Test insulation resistance for each VFD element, bus, component, connecting supply, feeder, and control circuit. 2. Test continuity of each circuit. C. Tests and Inspections: 1. Inspect VFD, wiring, components, connections, and equipment installation. Test and adjust drives, components, and equipment. 2. Test insulation resistance for each VFD element, component, connecting motor supply, feeder, and control circuits. 3. Test continuity of each circuit. 4. Verify that voltages at VFD locations are within 10 percent of motor nameplate rated voltages. If outside this range for any motor, notify Architect before starting the motor(s). 5. Test each motor for proper phase rotation. 6. Perform each electrical test and visual and mechanical inspection stated in NETA Acceptance Testing Specification. Certify compliance with test parameters. 7. Correct malfunctioning units on-site, where possible, and retest to demonstrate compliance; otherwise, replace with new units and retest. 8. Perform the following infrared (thermographic) scan tests and inspections and prepare reports: a. Initial Infrared Scanning: After Substantial Completion, but not more than 60 days after Final Acceptance, perform an infrared scan of each VFD. Remove front panels so joints and connections are accessible to portable scanner. Mountain Haus Boiler Replacement 03/18/2014 100% CD's/Permit VARIABLE-FREQUENCY DRIVES 23 0923 - 10 b. Follow-up Infrared Scanning: Perform an additional follow-up infrared scan of each VFD 11 months after date of Substantial Completion. c. Instruments and Equipment: Use an infrared scanning device designed to measure temperature or to detect significant deviations from normal values. Provide calibration record for device. 9. Test and adjust controls, remote monitoring, and safeties. Replace damaged and malfunctioning controls and equipment. D. VFDs will be considered defective if they do not pass tests and inspections. E. Prepare test and inspection reports, including a certified report that identifies the VFD and describes scanning results. Include notation of deficiencies detected, remedial action taken, and observations made after remedial action. 3.06 STARTUP SERVICE A. Engage a factory-authorized service representative to perform startup service. 1. Complete installation and startup checks according to manufacturer's written instructions. 3.07 ADJUSTING A. Program microprocessors for required operational sequences, status indications, alarms, event recording, and display features. Clear events memory after final acceptance testing and prior to Substantial Completion. B. Set field-adjustable switches, auxiliary relays, time-delay relays, timers, and overload-relay pickup and trip ranges. C. Adjust the trip settings of MCPs and thermal-magnetic circuit breakers with adjustable, instantaneous trip elements. Initially adjust to six times the motor nameplate full-load amperes and attempt to start motors several times, allowing for motor cool-down between starts. If tripping occurs on motor inrush, adjust settings in increments until motors start without tripping. Do not exceed eight times the motor full-load amperes (or 11 times for NEMA Premium Efficient motors if required). Where these maximum settings do not allow starting of a motor, notify Engineer before increasing settings. D. Set the taps on reduced-voltage autotransformer drives. E. Set field-adjustable circuit-breaker trip ranges as specified in Section 260573 "Overcurrent Protective Device Coordination Study." 3.08 PROTECTION A. Temporary Heating: Apply temporary heat to maintain temperature according to manufacturer's written instructions until drives are ready to be energized and placed into service. B. Replace VFDs whose interiors have been exposed to water or other liquids prior to Substantial Completion. 3.09 DEMONSTRATION A. Engage a factory-authorized service representative to train Owner's maintenance personnel to adjust, operate, reprogram, and maintain VFDs. END OF SECTION 23 0923 Mountain Haus Boiler Replacement 03/18/2014 100% CD's/Permit HYDRONIC PIPING 23 2113 - 1 SECTION 23 2113 - HYDRONIC PIPING PART 1 GENERAL 1.01 RELATED DOCUMENTS A. Drawings and general provisions of the Contract, including General and Supplementary Conditions and Division 01 Specification Sections, apply to this Section. 1.02 SUMMARY A. This Section includes pipe and fitting materials, joining methods, special-duty valves, and specialties for the following: 1. Hot-water heating piping. 2. Glycol cooling-water piping. 3. Makeup-water piping. 4. Condensate-drain piping. 1.03 DEFINITIONS A. PTFE: Polytetrafluoroethylene. B. RTRF: Reinforced thermosetting resin (fiberglass) fittings. C. RTRP: Reinforced thermosetting resin (fiberglass) pipe. 1.04 PERFORMANCE REQUIREMENTS A. Hydronic piping components and installation shall be capable of withstanding the following minimum working pressure and temperature: 1. Hot-Water Heating Piping: 125 psig at 200 deg F. 2. Makeup-Water Piping: 80 psig at 150 deg F. 3. Condensate-Drain Piping: 150 deg F. 1.05 ACTION SUBMITTALS A. Product Data: For each type of the following: 1. Pressure-seal fittings. 2. Valves. Include flow and pressure drop curves based on manufacturer's testing for calibrated-orifice balancing valves and automatic flow-control valves. 3. Air control devices. 4. Hydronic specialties. 1.06 INFORMATIONAL SUBMITTALS A. Qualification Data: For Installer. B. Welding certificates. 1.07 MAINTENANCE MATERIAL SUBMITTALS A. Water-Treatment Chemicals: Furnish enough chemicals for initial system startup and for preventive maintenance for one year from date of Substantial Completion. Mountain Haus Boiler Replacement 03/18/2014 100% CD's/Permit HYDRONIC PIPING 23 2113 - 2 B. Differential Pressure Meter: For each type of balancing valve and automatic flow control valve, include flowmeter, probes, hoses, flow charts, and carrying case. 1.08 QUALITY ASSURANCE A. Installer Qualifications: 1. Installers of Pressure-Sealed Joints: Installers shall be certified by the pressure-seal joint manufacturer as having been trained and qualified to join piping with pressure-seal pipe couplings and fittings. 2. Fiberglass Pipe and Fitting Installers: Installers of RTRF and RTRP shall be certified by the manufacturer of pipes and fittings as having been trained and qualified to join fiberglass piping with manufacturer-recommended adhesive. B. Steel Support Welding: Qualify processes and operators according to AWS D1.1/D1.1M, "Structural Welding Code - Steel." C. Welding: Qualify processes and operators according to ASME Boiler and Pressure Vessel Code: Section IX. 1. Comply with provisions in ASME B31 Series, "Code for Pressure Piping." 2. Certify that each welder has passed AWS qualification tests for welding processes involved and that certification is current. D. ASME Compliance: Comply with ASME B31.9, "Building Services Piping," for materials, products, and installation. Safety valves and pressure vessels shall bear the appropriate ASME label. Fabricate and stamp air separators and expansion tanks to comply with ASME Boiler and Pressure Vessel Code: Section VIII, Division 1. PART 2 PRODUCTS 2.01 COPPER TUBE AND FITTINGS A. Drawn-Temper Copper Tubing: ASTM B 88, Type L. B. Annealed-Temper Copper Tubing: ASTM B 88, Type K. C. Wrought-Copper Fittings: ASME B16.22. D. Copper or Bronze Pressure-Seal Fittings: 1. Manufacturers: Subject to compliance with requirements, provide products by one of the following: a. Stadler-Viega. 2. Housing: Copper. 3. O-Rings and Pipe Stops: EPDM. 4. Tools: Manufacturer's special tools. 5. Minimum 200-psig working-pressure rating at 250 deg F. E. Wrought-Copper Unions: ASME B16.22. 2.02 STEEL PIPE AND FITTINGS A. Steel Pipe: ASTM A 53/A 53M, black steel with plain ends; type, grade, and wall thickness as indicated in Part 3 "Piping Applications" Article. B. Cast-Iron Threaded Fittings: ASME B16.4; Classes 125 and 250 as indicated in Part 3 "Piping Applications" Article. C. Malleable-Iron Threaded Fittings: ASME B16.3, Classes 150 and 300 as indicated in Part 3 "Piping Applications" Article. Mountain Haus Boiler Replacement 03/18/2014 100% CD's/Permit HYDRONIC PIPING 23 2113 - 3 D. Malleable-Iron Unions: ASME B16.39; Classes 150, 250, and 300 as indicated in Part 3 "Piping Applications" Article. E. Wrought-Steel Fittings: ASTM A 234/A 234M, wall thickness to match adjoining pipe. F. Wrought Cast- and Forged-Steel Flanges and Flanged Fittings: ASME B16.5, including bolts, nuts, and gaskets of the following material group, end connections, and facings: 1. Material Group: 1.1. 2. End Connections: Butt welding. 3. Facings: Raised face. G. Grooved Mechanical-Joint Fittings and Couplings: 1. Manufacturers: Subject to compliance with requirements, provide products by one of the following: a. Anvil International, Inc. b. National Fittings, Inc. c. Victaulic Company. 2. Joint Fittings: ASTM A 536, Grade 65-45-12 ductile iron; ASTM A 47/A 47M, Grade 32510 malleable iron; ASTM A 53/A 53M, Type F, E, or S, Grade B fabricated steel; or ASTM A 106, Grade B steel fittings with grooves or shoulders constructed to accept grooved-end couplings; with nuts, bolts, locking pin, locking toggle, or lugs to secure grooved pipe and fittings. 3. Couplings: Ductile- or malleable-iron housing and synthetic rubber gasket of central cavity pressure-responsive design; with nuts, bolts, locking pin, locking toggle, or lugs to secure grooved pipe and fittings. H. Steel Pipe Nipples: ASTM A 733, made of same materials and wall thicknesses as pipe in which they are installed. 2.03 JOINING MATERIALS A. Pipe-Flange Gasket Materials: Suitable for chemical and thermal conditions of piping system contents. 1. ASME B16.21, nonmetallic, flat, asbestos free, 1/8-inch maximum thickness unless thickness or specific material is indicated. a. Full-Face Type: For flat-face, Class 125, cast-iron and cast-bronze flanges. b. Narrow-Face Type: For raised-face, Class 250, cast-iron and steel flanges. B. Flange Bolts and Nuts: ASME B18.2.1, carbon steel, unless otherwise indicated. C. Plastic, Pipe-Flange Gasket, Bolts, and Nuts: Type and material recommended by piping system manufacturer, unless otherwise indicated. D. Solder Filler Metals: ASTM B 32, lead-free alloys. Include water-flushable flux according to ASTM B 813. E. Brazing Filler Metals: AWS A5.8, BCuP Series, copper-phosphorus alloys for joining copper with copper; or BAg-1, silver alloy for joining copper with bronze or steel. F. Welding Filler Metals: Comply with AWS D10.12/D10.12M for welding materials appropriate for wall thickness and chemical analysis of steel pipe being welded. G. Gasket Material: Thickness, material, and type suitable for fluid to be handled and working temperatures and pressures. 2.04 DIELECTRIC FITTINGS A. General Requirements: Assembly of copper alloy and ferrous materials with separating nonconductive insulating material. Include end connections compatible with pipes to be joined. B. Dielectric Flanges: Mountain Haus Boiler Replacement 03/18/2014 100% CD's/Permit HYDRONIC PIPING 23 2113 - 4 1. Manufacturers: Subject to compliance with requirements, provide products by one of the following: a. Capitol Manufacturing Company. b. Watts Regulator Co.; a division of Watts Water Technologies, Inc. c. Wilkins; a Zurn company. 2. Description: a. Standard: ASSE 1079. b. Factory-fabricated, bolted, companion-flange assembly. c. Pressure Rating: 125 psig minimum at 180 deg F. d. End Connections: Solder-joint copper alloy and threaded ferrous; threaded solder-joint copper alloy and threaded ferrous. C. Dielectric-Flange Insulating Kits: 1. Manufacturers: Subject to compliance with requirements, provide products by one of the following: a. Advance Products & Systems, Inc. b. Calpico, Inc. c. Central Plastics Company. d. Pipeline Seal and Insulator, Inc. e. . 2. Description: a. Nonconducting materials for field assembly of companion flanges. b. Pressure Rating: 150 psig. c. Gasket: Neoprene or phenolic. d. Bolt Sleeves: Phenolic or polyethylene. e. Washers: Phenolic with steel backing washers. 2.05 VALVES A. Gate, Globe, Check, Ball, and Butterfly Valves: Comply with requirements specified in Section 230523 "General-Duty Valves for HVAC Piping." B. Automatic Temperature-Control Valves, Actuators, and Sensors: Comply with requirements specified in Section 230900 "Instrumentation and Control for HVAC." C. Bronze, Calibrated-Orifice, Balancing Valves: 1. Manufactureres: Subject to compliance with requirements, provideproduct by one of the following: a. Armstrong Pumps, Inc. b. Bell & Gossett Domestic Pump; a division of ITT Industries. c. Flow Design Inc. d. Taco. 2. Body: Bronze, ball or plug type with calibrated orifice or venturi. 3. Ball: Brass or stainless steel. 4. Plug: Resin. 5. Seat: PTFE. 6. End Connections: Threaded or socket. 7. Pressure Gage Connections: Integral seals for portable differential pressure meter. 8. Handle Style: Lever, with memory stop to retain set position. 9. CWP Rating: Minimum 125 psig. 10. Maximum Operating Temperature: 250 deg F. D. Cast-Iron or Steel, Calibrated-Orifice, Balancing Valves: 1. Manufacturers: Subject to compliance with requirements, provide products by one of the following: a. Armstrong Pumps, Inc. b. Bell & Gossett Domestic Pump; a division of ITT Industries. c. Flow Design Inc. d. Taco. 2. Body: Cast-iron or steel body, ball, plug, or globe pattern with calibrated orifice or venturi. 3. Ball: Brass or stainless steel. Mountain Haus Boiler Replacement 03/18/2014 100% CD's/Permit HYDRONIC PIPING 23 2113 - 5 4. Stem Seals: EPDM O-rings. 5. Disc: Glass and carbon-filled PTFE. 6. Seat: PTFE. 7. End Connections: Flanged or grooved. 8. Pressure Gage Connections: Integral seals for portable differential pressure meter. 9. Handle Style: Lever, with memory stop to retain set position. 10. CWP Rating: Minimum 125 psig. 11. Maximum Operating Temperature: 250 deg F. 2.06 AIR CONTROL DEVICES A. Manufacturers: Subject to compliance with requirements, provide products by one of the following: 1. Amtrol, Inc. 2. Armstrong Pumps, Inc. 3. Bell & Gossett Domestic Pump; a division of ITT Industries. 4. Taco. B. Manual Air Vents: 1. Body: Bronze. 2. Internal Parts: Nonferrous. 3. Operator: Screwdriver or thumbscrew. 4. Inlet Connection: NPS 1/2. 5. Discharge Connection: NPS 1/8. 6. CWP Rating: 150 psig. 7. Maximum Operating Temperature: 225 deg F. C. Automatic Air Vents: 1. Body: Bronze or cast iron. 2. Internal Parts: Nonferrous. 3. Operator: Noncorrosive metal float. 4. Inlet Connection: NPS 1/2. 5. Discharge Connection: NPS 1/4. 6. CWP Rating: 150 psig. 7. Maximum Operating Temperature: 240 deg F. D. Diaphragm-Type Expansion Tanks: 1. Tank: Welded steel, rated for 125-psig working pressure and 375 deg F maximum operating temperature. Factory test with taps fabricated and supports installed and labeled according to ASME Boiler and Pressure Vessel Code: Section VIII, Division 1. 2. Diaphragm: Securely sealed into tank to separate air charge from system water to maintain required expansion capacity. 3. Air-Charge Fittings: Schrader valve, stainless steel with EPDM seats. E. Tangential-Type Air Separators: 1. Tank: Welded steel; ASME constructed and labeled for 125-psig minimum working pressure and 375 deg F maximum operating temperature. 2. Air Collector Tube: Perforated stainless steel, constructed to direct released air into expansion tank. 3. Tangential Inlet and Outlet Connections: Threaded for NPS 2 and smaller; flanged connections for NPS 2-1/2 and larger. 4. Blowdown Connection: Threaded. 5. Size: Match system flow capacity. 2.07 HYDRONIC PIPING SPECIALTIES A. Y-Pattern Strainers: 1. Body: ASTM A 126, Class B, cast iron with bolted cover and bottom drain connection. 2. End Connections: Threaded ends for NPS 2 and smaller; flanged ends for NPS 2-1/2 and larger. Mountain Haus Boiler Replacement 03/18/2014 100% CD's/Permit HYDRONIC PIPING 23 2113 - 6 3. Strainer Screen: 40 -mesh startup strainer, and perforated stainless-steel basket with 50 percent free area. 4. CWP Rating: 125 psig. B. Stainless-Steel Bellow, Flexible Connectors: 1. Body: Stainless-steel bellows with woven, flexible, bronze, wire-reinforcing protective jacket. 2. End Connections: Threaded or flanged to match equipment connected. 3. Performance: Capable of 3/4-inch misalignment. 4. CWP Rating: 150 psig. 5. Maximum Operating Temperature: 250 deg F. C. Spherical, Rubber, Flexible Connectors: 1. Body: Fiber-reinforced rubber body. 2. End Connections: Steel flanges drilled to align with Classes 150 and 300 steel flanges. 3. Performance: Capable of misalignment. 4. CWP Rating: 150 psig. 5. Maximum Operating Temperature: 250 deg F. PART 3 EXECUTION 3.01 PIPING APPLICATIONS A. Hot-water heating piping, aboveground, NPS 2 and smaller, shall be any of the following: 1. Type L , drawn-temper copper tubing, wrought-copper fittings, and brazed joints. 2. Schedule 40 steel pipe; Class 150, malleable-iron fittings; cast-iron flanges and flange fittings; and threaded joints. B. Hot-water heating piping, aboveground, NPS 2-1/2 and larger, shall be any of the following: 1. Schedule 40 steel pipe, wrought-steel fittings and wrought-cast or forged-steel flanges and flange fittings, and welded and flanged joints. 2. Schedule 40 steel pipe; grooved, mechanical joint coupling and fittings; and grooved, mechanical joints. C. Makeup-water piping installed aboveground shall be either of the following: 1. Type L , drawn-temper copper tubing, wrought-copper fittings, and soldered joints. D. Condensate-Drain Piping: Type , drawn-temper copper tubing, wrought-copper fittings, and soldered joints or Schedule 40 PVC plastic pipe and fittings and solvent-welded joints. 3.02 VALVE APPLICATIONS A. Install shutoff-duty valves at each branch connection to supply mains, and at supply connection to each piece of equipment. B. Install calibrated-orifice, balancing valves at each branch connection to return main. C. Install calibrated-orifice, balancing valves in the return pipe of each heating or cooling terminal. D. Install check valves at each pump discharge and elsewhere as required to control flow direction. E. Install safety valves at hot-water generators and elsewhere as required by ASME Boiler and Pressure Vessel Code. Install drip-pan elbow on safety-valve outlet and pipe without valves to the outdoors; and pipe drain to nearest floor drain or as indicated on Drawings. Comply with ASME Boiler and Pressure Vessel Code: Section VIII, Division 1, for installation requirements. F. Install pressure-reducing valves at makeup-water connection to regulate system fill pressure. Mountain Haus Boiler Replacement 03/18/2014 100% CD's/Permit HYDRONIC PIPING 23 2113 - 7 3.03 PIPING INSTALLATIONS A. Drawing plans, schematics, and diagrams indicate general location and arrangement of piping systems. Indicate piping locations and arrangements if such were used to size pipe and calculate friction loss, expansion, pump sizing, and other design considerations. Install piping as indicated unless deviations to layout are approved on Coordination Drawings. B. Install piping in concealed locations, unless otherwise indicated and except in equipment rooms and service areas. C. Install piping indicated to be exposed and piping in equipment rooms and service areas at right angles or parallel to building walls. Diagonal runs are prohibited unless specifically indicated otherwise. D. Install piping above accessible ceilings to allow sufficient space for ceiling panel removal. E. Install piping to permit valve servicing. F. Install piping at indicated slopes. G. Install piping free of sags and bends. H. Install fittings for changes in direction and branch connections. I. Install piping to allow application of insulation. J. Select system components with pressure rating equal to or greater than system operating pressure. K. Install groups of pipes parallel to each other, spaced to permit applying insulation and servicing of valves. L. Install drains, consisting of a tee fitting, NPS 3/4 ball valve, and short NPS 3/4 threaded nipple with cap, at low points in piping system mains and elsewhere as required for system drainage. M. Install piping at a uniform grade of 0.2 percent upward in direction of flow. N. Reduce pipe sizes using eccentric reducer fitting installed with level side up. O. Install branch connections to mains using mechanically formed tee fittings in main pipe, with the branch connected to the bottom of the main pipe. For up-feed risers, connect the branch to the top of the main pipe. P. Install valves according to Section 230523 "General-Duty Valves for HVAC Piping." Q. Install unions in piping, NPS 2 and smaller, adjacent to valves, at final connections of equipment, and elsewhere as indicated. R. Install flanges in piping, NPS 2-1/2 and larger, at final connections of equipment and elsewhere as indicated. S. Install strainers on inlet side of each control valve, pressure-reducing valve, solenoid valve, in-line pump, and elsewhere as indicated. Install NPS 3/4 nipple and ball valve in blowdown connection of strainers NPS 2 and larger. Match size of strainer blowoff connection for strainers smaller than NPS 2. T. Identify piping as specified in Section 230553 "Identification for HVAC Piping and Equipment." U. Install sleeves for piping penetrations of walls, ceilings, and floors. Comply with requirements for sleeves specified in Section 230517 "Sleeves and Sleeve Seals for HVAC Piping." Mountain Haus Boiler Replacement 03/18/2014 100% CD's/Permit HYDRONIC PIPING 23 2113 - 8 V. Install sleeve seals for piping penetrations of concrete walls and slabs. Comply with requirements for sleeve seals specified in Section 230517 "Sleeves and Sleeve Seals for HVAC Piping." W. Install escutcheons for piping penetrations of walls, ceilings, and floors. Comply with requirements for escutcheons specified in Section 230518 "Escutcheons for HVAC Piping." 3.04 HANGERS AND SUPPORTS A. Hanger, support, and anchor devices are specified in Section 230529 "Hangers and Supports for HVAC Piping and Equipment." Comply with the following requirements for maximum spacing of supports. B. Seismic restraints are specified in Section 230548 "Vibration and Seismic Controls for HVAC Piping and Equipment." C. Install the following pipe attachments: 1. Adjustable steel clevis hangers for individual horizontal piping less than 20 feet long. 2. Adjustable roller hangers and spring hangers for individual horizontal piping 20 feet or longer. 3. Pipe Roller: MSS SP-58, Type 44 for multiple horizontal piping 20 feet or longer, supported on a trapeze. 4. Spring hangers to support vertical runs. 5. Provide copper-clad hangers and supports for hangers and supports in direct contact with copper pipe. 6. On plastic pipe, install pads or cushions on bearing surfaces to prevent hanger from scratching pipe. D. Install hangers for steel piping with the following maximum spacing and minimum rod sizes: 1. NPS 3/4: Maximum span, 7 feet; minimum rod size, 1/4 inch. 2. NPS 1: Maximum span, 7 feet; minimum rod size, 1/4 inch. 3. NPS 1-1/2: Maximum span, 9 feet; minimum rod size, 3/8 inch. 4. NPS 2: Maximum span, 10 feet; minimum rod size, 3/8 inch. 5. NPS 2-1/2: Maximum span, 11 feet; minimum rod size, 3/8 inch. 6. NPS 3: Maximum span, 12 feet; minimum rod size, 3/8 inch. 7. NPS 4: Maximum span, 14 feet; minimum rod size, 1/2 inch. 8. NPS 6: Maximum span, 17 feet; minimum rod size, 1/2 inch. 9. NPS 8: Maximum span, 19 feet; minimum rod size, 5/8 inch. 10. NPS 10: Maximum span, 20 feet; minimum rod size, 3/4 inch. 11. NPS 12: Maximum span, 23 feet; minimum rod size, 7/8 inch. 12. NPS 14: Maximum span, 25 feet; minimum rod size, 1 inch. 13. NPS 16: Maximum span, 27 feet; minimum rod size, 1 inch. 14. NPS 18: Maximum span, 28 feet; minimum rod size, 1-1/4 inches. 15. NPS 20: Maximum span, 30 feet; minimum rod size, 1-1/4 inches. E. Install hangers for drawn-temper copper piping with the following maximum spacing and minimum rod sizes: 1. NPS 3/4: Maximum span, 5 feet; minimum rod size, 1/4 inch. 2. NPS 1: Maximum span, 6 feet; minimum rod size, 1/4 inch. 3. NPS 1-1/2: Maximum span, 8 feet; minimum rod size, 3/8 inch. 4. NPS 2: Maximum span, 8 feet; minimum rod size, 3/8 inch. 5. NPS 2-1/2: Maximum span, 9 feet; minimum rod size, 3/8 inch. 6. NPS 3: Maximum span, 10 feet; minimum rod size, 3/8 inch. F. Support vertical runs at roof, at each floor, and at 10-foot intervals between floors. 3.05 PIPE JOINT CONSTRUCTION A. Ream ends of pipes and tubes and remove burrs. Bevel plain ends of steel pipe. B. Remove scale, slag, dirt, and debris from inside and outside of pipe and fittings before assembly. Mountain Haus Boiler Replacement 03/18/2014 100% CD's/Permit HYDRONIC PIPING 23 2113 - 9 C. Soldered Joints: Apply ASTM B 813, water-flushable flux, unless otherwise indicated, to tube end. Construct joints according to ASTM B 828 or CDA's "Copper Tube Handbook," using lead-free solder alloy complying with ASTM B 32. D. Brazed Joints: Construct joints according to AWS's "Brazing Handbook," "Pipe and Tube" Chapter, using copper-phosphorus brazing filler metal complying with AWS A5.8. E. Threaded Joints: Thread pipe with tapered pipe threads according to ASME B1.20.1. Cut threads full and clean using sharp dies. Ream threaded pipe ends to remove burrs and restore full ID. Join pipe fittings and valves as follows: 1. Apply appropriate tape or thread compound to external pipe threads unless dry seal threading is specified. 2. Damaged Threads: Do not use pipe or pipe fittings with threads that are corroded or damaged. Do not use pipe sections that have cracked or open welds. F. Welded Joints: Construct joints according to AWS D10.12/D10.12M, using qualified processes and welding operators according to Part 1 "Quality Assurance" Article. G. Flanged Joints: Select appropriate gasket material, size, type, and thickness for service application. Install gasket concentrically positioned. Use suitable lubricants on bolt threads. H. Plastic Piping Solvent-Cemented Joints: Clean and dry joining surfaces. Join pipe and fittings according to the following: 1. Comply with ASTM F 402 for safe-handling practice of cleaners, primers, and solvent cements. 2. CPVC Piping: Join according to ASTM D 2846/D 2846M Appendix. 3. PVC Pressure Piping: Join ASTM D 1785 schedule number, PVC pipe and PVC socket fittings according to ASTM D 2672. Join other-than-schedule number PVC pipe and socket fittings according to ASTM D 2855. 4. PVC Nonpressure Piping: Join according to ASTM D 2855. I. Fiberglass Bonded Joints: Prepare pipe ends and fittings, apply adhesive, and join according to pipe manufacturer's written instructions. J. Grooved Joints: Assemble joints with coupling and gasket, lubricant, and bolts. Cut or roll grooves in ends of pipe based on pipe and coupling manufacturer's written instructions for pipe wall thickness. Use grooved-end fittings and rigid, grooved-end-pipe couplings. K. Mechanically Formed, Copper-Tube-Outlet Joints: Use manufacturer-recommended tool and procedure, and brazed joints. L. Pressure-Sealed Joints: Use manufacturer-recommended tool and procedure. Leave insertion marks on pipe after assembly. 3.06 HYDRONIC SPECIALTIES INSTALLATION A. Install manual air vents at high points in piping, at heat-transfer coils, and elsewhere as required for system air venting. B. Install automatic air vents at high points of system piping in mechanical equipment rooms only. Manual vents at heat-transfer coils and elsewhere as required for air venting. C. Install piping from boiler air outlet, air separator, or air purger to expansion tank with a 2 percent upward slope toward tank. D. Install in-line air separators in pump suction. Install drain valve on air separators NPS 2 and larger. Mountain Haus Boiler Replacement 03/18/2014 100% CD's/Permit HYDRONIC PIPING 23 2113 - 10 E. Install tangential air separator in pump suction. Install blowdown piping with gate or full-port ball valve; extend full size to nearest floor drain. F. Install bypass chemical feeders in each hydronic system where indicated, in upright position with top of funnel not more than 48 inches above the floor. Install feeder in minimum NPS 3/4 bypass line, from main with full-size, full-port, ball valve in the main between bypass connections. Install NPS 3/4 pipe from chemical feeder drain, to nearest equipment drain and include a full-size, full-port, ball valve. G. Install expansion tanks above the air separator. Install tank fitting in tank bottom and charge tank. Use manual vent for initial fill to establish proper water level in tank. 1. Install tank fittings that are shipped loose. 2. Support tank from floor or structure above with sufficient strength to carry weight of tank, piping connections, fittings, plus tank full of water. Do not overload building components and structural members. H. Install expansion tanks on the floor. Vent and purge air from hydronic system, and ensure tank is properly charged with air to suit system Project requirements. 3.07 TERMINAL EQUIPMENT CONNECTIONS A. Sizes for supply and return piping connections shall be the same as or larger than equipment connections. B. Install control valves in accessible locations close to connected equipment. C. Install bypass piping with globe valve around control valve. If parallel control valves are installed, only one bypass is required. D. Install ports for pressure gages and thermometers at coil inlet and outlet connections according to Section 230519 "Meters and Gages for HVAC Piping." 3.08 CHEMICAL TREATMENT A. Refer to specification section 232516 HVAC Water Treatment for Closed Loop Systems. B. Fill system with fresh water and add liquid alkaline compound with emulsifying agents and detergents to remove grease and petroleum products from piping. Circulate solution for a minimum of 24 hours, drain, clean strainer screens, and refill with fresh water. C. Add initial chemical treatment and maintain water quality in ranges noted above for the first year of operation. D. Fill systems indicated to have antifreeze or glycol solutions with the following concentrations: 1. Hot-Water Heating Piping: Minimum 30 percent propylene glycol.Snowmelt Heating Piping: Minimum 50 percent propylene glycol. 3.09 FIELD QUALITY CONTROL A. Prepare hydronic piping according to ASME B31.9 and as follows: 1. Leave joints, including welds, uninsulated and exposed for examination during test. 2. Provide temporary restraints for expansion joints that cannot sustain reactions due to test pressure. If temporary restraints are impractical, isolate expansion joints from testing. 3. Flush hydronic piping systems with clean water; then remove and clean or replace strainer screens. 4. Isolate equipment from piping. If a valve is used to isolate equipment, its closure shall be capable of sealing against test pressure without damage to valve. Install blinds in flanged joints to isolate equipment. 5. Install safety valve, set at a pressure no more than one-third higher than test pressure, to protect against damage by expanding liquid or other source of overpressure during test. Mountain Haus Boiler Replacement 03/18/2014 100% CD's/Permit HYDRONIC PIPING 23 2113 - 11 B. Perform the following tests on hydronic piping: 1. Use ambient temperature water as a testing medium unless there is risk of damage due to freezing. Another liquid that is safe for workers and compatible with piping may be used. 2. While filling system, use vents installed at high points of system to release air. Use drains installed at low points for complete draining of test liquid. 3. Isolate expansion tanks and determine that hydronic system is full of water. 4. Subject piping system to hydrostatic test pressure that is not less than 1.5 times the system's working pressure. Test pressure shall not exceed maximum pressure for any vessel, pump, valve, or other component in system under test. Verify that stress due to pressure at bottom of vertical runs does not exceed 90 percent of specified minimum yield strength or 1.7 times "SE" value in Appendix A in ASME B31.9, "Building Services Piping." 5. After hydrostatic test pressure has been applied for at least 10 minutes, examine piping, joints, and connections for leakage. Eliminate leaks by tightening, repairing, or replacing components, and repeat hydrostatic test until there are no leaks. 6. Prepare written report of testing. C. Perform the following before operating the system: 1. Open manual valves fully. 2. Inspect pumps for proper rotation. 3. Set makeup pressure-reducing valves for required system pressure. 4. Inspect air vents at high points of system and determine if all are installed and operating freely (automatic type), or bleed air completely (manual type). 5. Set temperature controls so all coils are calling for full flow. 6. Inspect and set operating temperatures of hydronic equipment, such as boilers, chillers, cooling towers, to specified values. 7. Verify lubrication of motors and bearings. END OF SECTION 232113 Mountain Haus Boiler Replacement 03/18/2014 100% CD's/Permit HYDRONIC PUMPS 23 2123 - 1 SECTION 23 2123 - HYDRONIC PUMPS PART 1 GENERAL 1.01 RELATED DOCUMENTS A. Drawings and general provisions of the Contract, including General and Supplementary Conditions and Division 01 Specification Sections, apply to this Section. 1.02 SUMMARY A. Section Includes: 1. Close-coupled, in-line centrifugal pumps. 2. Separately coupled, vertically mounted, in-line centrifugal pumps. 3. Separately coupled, base-mounted, end-suction centrifugal pumps. 4. Automatic condensate pump units. 1.03 DEFINITIONS A. Buna-N: Nitrile rubber. B. EPT: Ethylene propylene terpolymer. 1.04 ACTION SUBMITTALS A. Product Data: For each type of pump. Include certified performance curves and rated capacities, operating characteristics, furnished specialties, final impeller dimensions, and accessories for each type of product indicated. Indicate pump's operating point on curves. B. Shop Drawings: For each pump. 1. Show pump layout and connections. 2. Include diagrams for power, signal, and control wiring. 1.05 CLOSEOUT SUBMITTALS A. Operation and Maintenance Data: For pumps to include in emergency, operation, and maintenance manuals. 1.06 MAINTENANCE MATERIAL SUBMITTALS A. Furnish extra materials described below that match products installed and that are packaged with protective covering for storage and identified with labels describing contents. 1. Mechanical Seals: One mechanical seal(s) for each pump. PART 2 PRODUCTS 2.01 CLOSE-COUPLED, IN-LINE CENTRIFUGAL PUMPS A. Manufacturers: Subject to compliance with requirements, provide products by one of the following: 1. Armstrong Pumps Inc. 2. Grundfos Pumps Corporation. 3. ITT Corporation; Bell & Gossett. 4. TACO Incorporated. Mountain Haus Boiler Replacement 03/18/2014 100% CD's/Permit HYDRONIC PUMPS 23 2123 - 2 B. Description: Factory-assembled and -tested, centrifugal, overhung-impeller, close-coupled, in-line pump as defined in HI 1.1-1.2 and HI 1.3; designed for installation with pump and motor shafts mounted horizontally or vertically. C. Pump Construction: 1. Casing: Radially split, cast iron, with threaded gage tappings at inlet and outlet, replaceable bronze wear rings, and threaded companion-flange connections. 2. Impeller: ASTM B 584, cast bronze; statically and dynamically balanced, keyed to shaft, and secured with a locking cap screw. For constant-speed pumps, trim impeller to match specified performance. 3. Pump Shaft: Stainless steel. 4. Seal: Mechanical seal consisting of carbon rotating ring against a ceramic seat held by a stainless-steel spring, and Buna-N bellows and gasket. Include water slinger on shaft between motor and seal. 5. Pump Bearings: Permanently lubricated ball bearings. D. Motor: Single speed and rigidly mounted to pump casing. 1. Electrical Components, Devices, and Accessories: Listed and labeled as defined in NFPA 70, by a qualified testing agency, and marked for intended location and application. 2. Comply with NEMA designation, temperature rating, service factor, and efficiency requirements for motors specified in Section 23 0513 "Common Motor Requirements for HVAC Equipment." a. Enclosure: Open, dripproof. b. Enclosure Materials: Rolled steel. c. Motor Bearings: Grease-lubricated ball bearings. d. Unusual Service Conditions: 1) Altitude: 8000 feetabove sea level. e. Efficiency: Premium efficient. f. NEMA Design: 1. 2.02 SEPARATELY COUPLED, VERTICALLY MOUNTED, IN-LINE CENTRIFUGAL PUMPS A. Manufacturers: Subject to compliance with requirements, provide products by one of the following: 1. Armstrong Pumps Inc. 2. ITT Corporation; Bell & Gossett. 3. TACO Incorporated. B. Description: Factory-assembled and -tested, centrifugal, overhung-impeller, separately coupled, in-line pump as defined in HI 1.1-1.2 and HI 1.3; designed for installation with pump and motor shafts mounted vertically. C. Pump Construction: 1. Casing: Radially split, cast iron, with threaded gage tappings at inlet and outlet[, replaceable bronze wear rings,] and threaded companion-flange connections. 2. Impeller: ASTM B 584, cast bronze; statically and dynamically balanced, keyed to shaft, and secured with a locking cap screw. For pumps not frequency-drive controlled, trim impeller to match specified performance. 3. Pump Shaft: Stainless steel. 4. Seal: Mechanical seal consisting of carbon rotating ring against a ceramic seat held by a stainless-steel spring, and Buna-N bellows and gasket. Include water slinger on shaft between motor and seal. 5. Pump Bearings: Oil lubricated; bronze-journal or thrust type. D. Shaft Coupling: Axially split spacer coupling. E. Motor: Single speed and rigidly mounted to pump casing with lifting eyebolt and supporting lugs in motor enclosure. 1. Electrical Components, Devices, and Accessories: Listed and labeled as defined in NFPA 70, by a qualified testing agency, and marked for intended location and application. 2. Comply with NEMA designation, temperature rating, service factor, and efficiency requirements for motors specified in Section 230513 "Common Motor Requirements for HVAC Equipment." a. Enclosure: Open, dripproof. Mountain Haus Boiler Replacement 03/18/2014 100% CD's/Permit HYDRONIC PUMPS 23 2123 - 3 b. Enclosure Materials: Rolled steel. c. Motor Bearings: Grease-lubricated ball bearings. d. Unusual Service Conditions: 1) Altitude: 8000 above sea level. e. Efficiency: Premium efficient. f. NEMA Design: 1. 2.03 SEPARATELY COUPLED, BASE-MOUNTED, END-SUCTION CENTRIFUGAL PUMPS A. Manufacturers: Subject to compliance with requirements, provide products by one of the following: 1. Armstrong Pumps Inc. 2. ITT Corporation; Bell & Gossett. 3. TACO Incorporated. B. Description: Factory-assembled and -tested, centrifugal, overhung-impeller, separately coupled, end-suction pump as defined in HI 1.1-1.2 and HI 1.3; designed for base mounting, with pump and motor shafts horizontal. C. Pump Construction: 1. Casing: Radially split, cast iron, with replaceable bronze wear rings, threaded gage tappings at inlet and outlet, drain plug at bottom and air vent at top of volute, and flanged connections. Provide integral mount on volute to support the casing, and provide attached piping to allow removal and replacement of impeller without disconnecting piping or requiring the realignment of pump and motor shaft. 2. Impeller: ASTM B 584, cast bronze; statically and dynamically balanced, keyed to shaft, and secured with a locking cap screw. For pumps not frequency-drive controlled, trim impeller to match specified performance. 3. Pump Shaft: Stainless steel. 4. Seal: Mechanical seal consisting of carbon rotating ring against a ceramic seat held by a stainless-steel spring, and Buna-N bellows and gasket. 5. Pump Bearings: Grease-lubricated ball bearings in cast-iron housing with grease fittings. D. Shaft Coupling: Molded-rubber insert and interlocking spider capable of absorbing vibration. Couplings shall be drop-out type to allow disassembly and removal without removing pump shaft or motor. EPDM coupling sleeve for variable-speed applications. E. Coupling Guard: Dual rated; ANSI B15.1, Section 8; OSHA 1910.219 approved; steel; removable; attached to mounting frame. F. Mounting Frame: Welded-steel frame and cross members, factory fabricated from ASTM A 36/A 36M channels and angles. Fabricate to mount pump casing, coupling guard, and motor. G. Motor: Single speed, secured to mounting frame, with adjustable alignment. 1. Electrical Components, Devices, and Accessories: Listed and labeled as defined in NFPA 70, by a qualified testing agency, and marked for intended location and application. 2. Comply with NEMA designation, temperature rating, service factor, and efficiency requirements for motors specified in Section 230513 "Common Motor Requirements for HVAC Equipment." a. Enclosure: Open, dripproof. b. Enclosure Materials: Rolled steel. c. Motor Bearings: Grease-lubricated ball bearings. d. Unusual Service Conditions: 1) Altitude: 8000 above sea level. e. Efficiency: Premium efficient. f. NEMA Design: 1. 2.04 PUMP SPECIALTY FITTINGS A. Suction Diffuser: 1. Angle pattern. Mountain Haus Boiler Replacement 03/18/2014 100% CD's/Permit HYDRONIC PUMPS 23 2123 - 4 2. 175-psig pressure rating, cast -iron body and end cap, pump-inlet fitting. 3. Bronze startup and bronze or stainless-steel permanent strainers. 4. Bronze or stainless-steel straightening vanes. 5. Drain plug. 6. Factory-fabricated support. PART 3 EXECUTION 3.01 EXAMINATION A. Examine equipment foundations and anchor-bolt locations for compliance with requirements for installation tolerances and other conditions affecting performance of the Work. B. Examine roughing-in for piping systems to verify actual locations of piping connections before pump installation. C. Examine foundations and inertia bases for suitable conditions where pumps are to be installed. D. Proceed with installation only after unsatisfactory conditions have been corrected. 3.02 PUMP INSTALLATION A. Comply with HI 1.4 and HI2.4 B. Install pumps to provide access for periodic maintenance including removing motors, impellers, couplings, and accessories. C. Independently support pumps and piping so weight of piping is not supported by pumps and weight of pumps is not supported by piping. D. Automatic Condensate Pump Units: Install units for collecting condensate and extend to open drain. E. Equipment Mounting: Install base-mounted pumps on cast-in-place concrete equipment base(s) using restrained spring isolators. Comply with requirements for equipment bases specified in Section 033053 "Miscellaneous Cast-in-Place Concrete." Comply with requirements for vibration isolation devices specified in Section 230548 "Vibration and Seismic Controls for HVAC Piping and Equipment." 1. Minimum Deflection: 1 inch. 2. Coordinate sizes and locations of concrete bases with actual equipment provided. Cast anchor-bolt inserts into bases. 3. Install on 4-inch- high concrete base designed to withstand, without damage to equipment, seismic force required by code. 3.03 ALIGNMENT A. Perform alignment service. B. Comply with requirements in Hydronics Institute standards for alignment of pump and motor shaft. Add shims to the motor feet and bolt motor to base frame. Do not use grout between motor feet and base frame. C. Comply with pump and coupling manufacturers' written instructions. D. After alignment is correct, tighten foundation bolts evenly but not too firmly. Completely fill baseplate with nonshrink, nonmetallic grout while metal blocks and shims or wedges are in place. After grout has cured, fully tighten foundation bolts. Mountain Haus Boiler Replacement 03/18/2014 100% CD's/Permit HYDRONIC PUMPS 23 2123 - 5 3.04 CONNECTIONS A. Comply with requirements for piping specified in Section 232213 "Steam and Condensate Heating Piping." Drawings indicate general arrangement of piping, fittings, and specialties. B. Where installing piping adjacent to pump, allow space for service and maintenance. C. Connect piping to pumps. Install valves that are same size as piping connected to pumps. D. Install suction and discharge pipe sizes equal to or greater than diameter of pump nozzles. E. Install check, shutoff, and throttling valves on discharge side of pumps. F. Install Y-type strainer suction diffuser and shutoff valve on suction side of pumps. G. Install flexible connectors on suction and discharge sides of base-mounted pumps between pump casing and valves. H. Install pressure gages on pump suction and discharge or at integral pressure-gage tapping, or install single gage with multiple-input selector valve. I. Install check valve and gate or ball valve on each condensate pump unit discharge. J. Ground equipment according to Section 260526 "Grounding and Bonding for Electrical Systems." K. Connect wiring according to Section 260519 "Low-Voltage Electrical Power Conductors and Cables." 3.05 STARTUP SERVICE A. Perform startup service. 1. Complete installation and startup checks according to manufacturer's written instructions. 2. Check piping connections for tightness. 3. Clean strainers on suction piping. 4. Perform the following startup checks for each pump before starting: a. Verify bearing lubrication. b. Verify that pump is free to rotate by hand and that pump for handling hot liquid is free to rotate with pump hot and cold. If pump is bound or drags, do not operate until cause of trouble is determined and corrected. c. Verify that pump is rotating in the correct direction. 5. Prime pump by opening suction valves and closing drains, and prepare pump for operation. 6. Start motor. 7. Open discharge valve slowly. 3.06 DEMONSTRATION A. Train Owner's maintenance personnel to adjust, operate, and maintain hydronic pumps. END OF SECTION 232123 Mountain Haus Boiler Replacement 03/18/2014 100% CD's/Permit HVAC WATER TREATMENT FOR CLOSED LOOP SYSTEMS 23 2516 - 1 SECTION 23 2500 - HVAC WATER TREATMENT FOR CLOSED LOOP SYSTEMS PART 1 GENERAL 1.01 RELATED DOCUMENTS A. Drawings and general provisions of the Contract, including General and Supplementary Conditions and Division 01 Specification Sections, apply to this Section. 1.02 SUMMARY A. This Section includes the following HVAC water-treatment systems: 1. Heat Transfer Fluids. 2. Bypass chemical-feed equipment and controls. 3. Chemical treatment test equipment. 4. HVAC water-treatment chemicals. 1.03 DEFINITIONS A. Low Voltage: As defined in NFPA 70 for circuits and equipment operating at less than 50 V or for remote-control, signaling power-limited circuits. B. TDS: Total dissolved solids. C. UV: Ultraviolet. 1.04 PERFORMANCE REQUIREMENTS A. Water quality for HVAC systems shall minimize corrosion, scale buildup, and biological growth for optimum efficiency of HVAC equipment without creating a hazard to operating personnel or the environment. B. Base HVAC water treatment on quality of water available at Project site, HVAC system equipment material characteristics and functional performance characteristics, operating personnel capabilities, and requirements and guidelines of authorities having jurisdiction. C. Closed hydronic systems, including hot-water heating, shall have the following water qualities: 1. pH: Maintain a value within 9.0 to 10.5 . 2. "P" Alkalinity: Maintain a value within 100 to 500 ppm. 3. Boron: Maintain a value within 100 to 200 ppm. 4. Chemical Oxygen Demand: Maintain a maximum value of 100 ppm. 5. Soluble Copper: Maintain a maximum value of 0.20 ppm. 6. TDS: Maintain a maximum value of 10 ppm. 7. Ammonia: Maintain a maximum value of 20 ppm. 8. Free Caustic Alkalinity: Maintain a maximum value of 20 ppm. 9. Microbiological Limits: a. Total Aerobic Plate Count: Maintain a maximum value of 1000 rganisms/ml. b. Total Anaerobic Plate Count: Maintain a maximum value of 100 organisms/ml. c. Nitrate Reducers: Maintain a maximum value of 100 organisms/ml. d. Sulfate Reducers: Maintain a maximum value of 0 organisms/ml. e. Iron Bacteria: Maintain a maximum value of 0 organisms/ml. 1.05 ACTION SUBMITTALS A. Product Data: Include rated capacities, operating characteristics, furnished specialties, and accessories for the Mountain Haus Boiler Replacement 03/18/2014 100% CD's/Permit HVAC WATER TREATMENT FOR CLOSED LOOP SYSTEMS 23 2516 - 2 following products: 1. Bypass feeders. 2. Chemical solution tanks. 3. Chemical test equipment. 4. Chemical material safety data sheets. 1.06 INFORMATIONAL SUBMITTALS A. Field quality-control test reports. 1.07 QUALITY ASSURANCE A. HVAC Water-Treatment Service Provider Qualifications: An experienced HVAC water-treatment service provider capable of analyzing water qualities, installing water-treatment equipment, and applying water treatment as specified in this Section. B. Electrical Components, Devices, and Accessories: Listed and labeled as defined in NFPA 70, Article 100, by a testing agency acceptable to authorities having jurisdiction, and marked for intended use. 1.08 MAINTENANCE SERVICE A. Scope of Maintenance Service: Provide chemicals and service program to maintain water conditions required above to inhibit corrosion, scale formation, and biological growth for cooling, chilled-water piping heating, hot-water piping and equipment. Services and chemicals shall be provided for a period of one year from date of Substantial Completion, and shall include the following: 1. Initial water analysis and HVAC water-treatment recommendations. 2. Startup assistance for Contractor to flush the systems, clean with detergents, and initially fill systems with required chemical treatment prior to operation. 3. Periodic field service and consultation. 4. Customer report charts and log sheets. 5. Laboratory technical analysis. 6. Analyses and reports of all chemical items concerning safety and compliance with government regulations. PART 2 PRODUCTS 2.01 HEAT TRANSFER FLUIDS A. Manufactures: Subject to compliance with requirements, manufacturers offering products that may be incorporated into the Work include, but are not limited to, the following: 1. Interstate Chemical Co. 2. Dow Chemical Co. 3. Dyanene 4. Dupont. 5. Thermal Fluids inc. B. The closed loop piping system shall contain a preblended solution of industrially inhibited propylene glycol and deionized water. The solution concentration shall as follows 1. Heating Water: 2. Chilled Solution: 3. Snowmelt Heating Fluid: C. The selected coolant must meet or exceed the ASTM D-1384 corrosion test for coolants in glassware @ 190deg F for 336 hours. A certificate of Assurance must be provided by the supplier prior to delivery. Mountain Haus Boiler Replacement 03/18/2014 100% CD's/Permit HVAC WATER TREATMENT FOR CLOSED LOOP SYSTEMS 23 2516 - 3 D. The solution shall contain a fluorescent pink dye to facilitate easy leak detection for propylene glycol fluids and flourescent pink for ethylene glycol based fluids. E. Automotive grade antifreeze is not acceptable. F. No chemical additions shall be made to the glycol water solution until an analysis has been completed by the coolant manufacturer. Should such a chemical addition required, it will be done in accordance with the recommendations on the analyticals as supplied by the manufacturer. 2.02 MANUAL CHEMICAL-FEED EQUIPMENT A. Bypass Feeders: Steel, with corrosion-resistant exterior coating, minimum 3-1/2-inchfill opening in the top, and NPS 3/4bottom inlet and top side outlet. Quarter turn or threaded fill cap with gasket seal and diaphragm to lock the top on the feeder when exposed to system pressure in the vessel. 1. Capacity: 2 gal. 2. Minimum Working Pressure: 125 psig. PART 3 EXECUTION 3.01 WATER ANALYSIS A. Perform an analysis of supply water to determine quality of water available at Project site. 3.02 INSTALLATION A. Install chemical application equipment on concrete bases, level and plumb. Maintain manufacturer's recommended clearances. Arrange units so controls and devices that require servicing are accessible. Anchor chemical tanks and floor-mounting accessories to substrate. B. Install seismic restraints for equipment and floor-mounting accessories and anchor to building structure. Refer to Section 230548 "Vibration and Seismic Controls for HVAC Piping and Equipment" for seismic restraints. C. Install water testing equipment on wall near water chemical application equipment. D. Install interconnecting control wiring for chemical treatment controls and sensors. E. Mount sensors and injectors in piping circuits. F. Bypass Feeders: Install in closed hydronic systems, including hot-water heating, and equipped with the following: 1. Install bypass feeder in a bypass circuit around circulating pumps, unless otherwise indicated on Drawings. 2. Install water meter in makeup water supply. 3. Install test-coupon assembly in bypass circuit around circulating pumps, unless otherwise indicated on Drawings. 4. Install a gate or full-port ball isolation valves on inlet, outlet, and drain below feeder inlet. 5. Install a swing check on inlet after the isolation valve. 3.03 CLOSED LOOP HYDRONIC SYSTEM PREPERATION AND CLEANING A. Clean and flush piping system, remove, clean and replace strainer screens once the system water is clear. B. Water flush applies to the following systems: 1. Heating Water 1. Chilled Water Mountain Haus Boiler Replacement 03/18/2014 100% CD's/Permit HVAC WATER TREATMENT FOR CLOSED LOOP SYSTEMS 23 2516 - 4 2. Snowmelt Heating Water 3. Glycol Water C. The mechanical contractor shall meter the initial water fill for the purpose of hydrostatic pressure testing and/or system flushing. After completion of this requirement the water shall be metered out. This will provide the contractor with a precise measure of coolant required to fill the system as well as the amount of water trapped in the system. This process will allow for any adjustments required prior to delivery of the premixed glycol solution and ensure that the solution strength is in compliance with the specification D. Chemical Cleaning: 1. Refill the system with water and allow for 10 volume percent of pre-cleaner for the removal of scale, oils and other extraneous materials. Add the required amount of cleaner and circulate for 6 to 8 hours at 150 degrees F, or 12 hours if less than 90 degrees Fahrenheit. 2. Drain the system after the required circulation period as quickly as possible, this will prevent settling of foulants. Run circulating pumps and flush with clean water until the discharge water is clear. E. When system water is clear, remove, clean and replace all strainers. F. Fill the system with the approved glycol blend, all air vents should be opened during the filling process to ensure that the air is purged from the system. Once the system is full, all air vents should be closed. G. Circulate the glycol water mixture for 24 hours before a sample is taken and tested for the proper concentration, freeze point, reserve alkalinity and pH. 3.04 CONNECTIONS A. Piping installation requirements are specified in other Sections. Drawings indicate general arrangement of piping, fittings, and specialties. B. Install piping adjacent to equipment to allow service and maintenance. C. Make piping connections between HVAC water-treatment equipment and dissimilar-metal piping with dielectric fittings. Dielectric fittings are specified in Section 232113 "Hydronic Piping." D. Install shutoff valves on HVAC water-treatment equipment inlet and outlet. Metal general-duty valves are specified in Section 230523 "General-Duty Valves for HVAC Piping." E. Refer to Section 221119 "Domestic Water Piping Specialties" for backflow preventers required in makeup water connections to potable-water systems. F. Confirm applicable electrical requirements in electrical Sections for connecting electrical equipment. G. Ground equipment according to Section 260526 "Grounding and Bonding for Electrical Systems." H. Connect wiring according to Section 260519 "Low-Voltage Electrical Power Conductors and Cables." 3.05 FIELD QUALITY CONTROL A. Perform tests and inspections and prepare test reports. 1. Manufacturer's Field Service: Engage a factory-authorized service representative to inspect components, assemblies, and equipment installations, including connections, and to assist in testing. B. Tests and Inspections: 1. Inspect field-assembled components and equipment installation, including piping and electrical connections. Mountain Haus Boiler Replacement 03/18/2014 100% CD's/Permit HVAC WATER TREATMENT FOR CLOSED LOOP SYSTEMS 23 2516 - 5 2. Inspect piping and equipment to determine that systems and equipment have been cleaned, flushed, and filled with water, and are fully operational before introducing chemicals for water-treatment system. 3. Place HVAC water-treatment system into operation and calibrate controls during the preliminary phase of HVAC systems' startup procedures. 4. Do not enclose, cover, or put piping into operation until it is tested and satisfactory test results are achieved. 5. Test for leaks and defects. If testing is performed in segments, submit separate report for each test, complete with diagram of portion of piping tested. 6. Leave uncovered and unconcealed new, altered, extended, and replaced water piping until it has been tested and approved. Expose work that has been covered or concealed before it has been tested and approved. 7. Cap and subject piping to static water pressure of 50 psig above operating pressure, without exceeding pressure rating of piping system materials. Isolate test source and allow test pressure to stand for four hours. Leaks and loss in test pressure constitute defects. 8. Repair leaks and defects with new materials and retest piping until no leaks exist. C. Remove and replace malfunctioning units and retest as specified above. D. At six -week intervals following Substantial Completion, perform separate water analyses on hydronic systems to show that automatic chemical-feed systems are maintaining water quality within performance requirements specified in this Section. Submit written reports of water analysis advising Owner of changes necessary to adhere to Part 1 "Performance Requirements" Article. E. Comply with ASTM D 3370 and with the following standards: 1. Silica: ASTM D 859. 2. Steam System: ASTM D 1066. 3. Acidity and Alkalinity: ASTM D 1067. 4. Iron: ASTM D 1068. 5. Water Hardness: ASTM D 1126. 3.06 DEMONSTRATION A. Train Owner's maintenance personnel to adjust, operate, and maintain HVAC water-treatment systems and equipment. Refer to Section 017900 "Demonstration and Training." END OF SECTION 232500 Mountain Haus Boiler Replacement 03/18/2014 100% CD's/Permit BREECHINGS, CHIMNEYS, AND STACKS 23 5100 - 1 SECTION 23 5100 - BREECHINGS, CHIMNEYS, AND STACKS PART 1 GENERAL 1.01 RELATED DOCUMENTS A. Drawings and general provisions of the Contract, including General and Supplementary Conditions and Division 01 Specification Sections, apply to this Section. 1.02 SUMMARY A. This Section includes the following: 1. Listed chimney liners. 2. Field-fabricated metal breechings. 1.03 ACTION SUBMITTALS A. Shop Drawings: For vents, breechings, chimneys, and stacks. Include plans, elevations, sections, details, and attachments to other work. 1. Detail equipment assemblies and indicate dimensions, weights, loads, required clearances, methods of field assembly, components, hangers and seismic restraints, and location and size of each field connection. 2. For installed products indicated to comply with design loads, include calculations required for selecting seismic restraints and structural analysis data signed and sealed by the qualified professional engineer responsible for their preparation. 1.04 INFORMATIONAL SUBMITTALS A. Welding certificates. B. Manufacturer Seismic Qualification Certification: Submit certification that factory-fabricated breeching, chimneys, and stacks; accessories; and components will withstand seismic forces defined in Section 230548 "Vibration and Seismic Controls for HVAC Piping and Equipment." Include the following: 1. Dimensioned Outline Drawings of Breeching, Chimneys, and Stacks: Identify center of gravity and locate and describe mounting and anchorage provisions. 2. Detailed description of anchorage devices on which the certification is based and their installation requirements. 1.05 QUALITY ASSURANCE A. Source Limitations: Obtain listed system components through one source from a single manufacturer. B. Welding: Qualify procedures and personnel according to AWS D1.1/D1.1M, "Structural Welding Code--Steel," for hangers and supports and AWS D9.1/D9.1M, "Sheet Metal Welding Code," for shop and field welding of joints and seams in vents, breechings, and stacks. C. Certified Sizing Calculations: Manufacturer shall certify venting system sizing calculations. 1.06 COORDINATION A. Coordinate size and location of concrete bases. Cast anchor-bolt inserts into bases. Concrete, reinforcement, and formwork requirements are specified with concrete. B. Coordinate installation of roof curbs, equipment supports, and roof penetrations. These items are specified in Section 077200 "Roof Accessories." Mountain Haus Boiler Replacement 03/18/2014 100% CD's/Permit BREECHINGS, CHIMNEYS, AND STACKS 23 5100 - 2 PART 2 PRODUCTS 2.01 LISTED CHIMNEY LINERS A. Manufacturers: Subject to compliance with requirements, provide products by one of the following 1. Heat-Fab, Inc. 2. Metal-Fab, Inc. 3. Selkirk Inc.; Selkirk Metalbestos and Air Mate. B. Description: Straight, single-wall chimney liner tested according to UL 1777 and rated for 1000 deg F continuously, or 2100 deg F for 10 minutes; with negative or positive flue pressure complying with NFPA 211. C. Straight Liner Materials: ASTM A 666, Type 304 stainless steel. D. Accessories: 1. Fittings: Tees, elbows, increasers, draft-hood connectors, metal caps with bird barriers, adjustable roof flashings, storm collars, support assemblies, thimbles, firestop spacers, and fasteners; fabricated from similar or compatible materials and designs. 2. Sealant: Manufacturer's standard high-temperature sealant. 3. Insulating Fill: Manufacturer's standard high-temperature insulation fill material in annular space surrounding chimney liner including high-temperature, ceramic-fiber insulation required to seal chimney at top and bottom. 4. Hart & Cooley, Inc. 5. Metal-Fab, Inc. 6. Selkirk Inc.; Selkirk Metalbestos and Air Mate. 7. Van-Packer Company, Inc. 2.02 FIELD-FABRICATED METAL BREECHINGS AND CHIMNEYS A. Fabricate freestanding chimneys according to SMACNA's "Guide for Steel Stack Design and Construction." . B. Fabricate breechings and chimneys from ASTM A 1011/A 1011M hot-rolled steel with continuously welded joints, complying with NFPA 211 for minimum metal thickness. 1. Equal to or Less Than 1.069 Sq. Ft. or 14 Inches in Diameter: 0.053 inch. 2. Up to 1.396 Sq. Ft. or 16 Inches in Diameter: 0.067 inch. 3. Up to 1.764 Sq. Ft. or 18 Inches in Diameter: 0.093 inch. 4. Larger Than Above: 0.123 inch. C. Fabricate chimneys and vent connectors from ASTM B 209, Type 1100 or 3003, aluminum or stainless steel, complying with NFPA 211 for the following minimum metal thicknesses: 1. Aluminum: 0.027 inch. 2. Stainless Steel: 0.012 inch. D. Fabricate cleanout doors from compatible material, same thickness as breeching, bolted and gasketed. PART 3 EXECUTION 3.01 EXAMINATION A. Examine areas and conditions for compliance with requirements for installation tolerances and other conditions affecting performance of work. 1. Proceed with installation only after unsatisfactory conditions have been corrected. 3.02 APPLICATION A. Listed Chimney Liners: High-efficiency boiler or furnace vents in masonry chimney, dishwasher exhaust, or Mountain Haus Boiler Replacement 03/18/2014 100% CD's/Permit BREECHINGS, CHIMNEYS, AND STACKS 23 5100 - 3 Type II commercial kitchen hood. B. Field-Fabricated Metal Breechings and Chimneys: Dual-fuel boilers, oven vents, water heaters, exhaust for engines, fireplaces, and other solid-fuel-burning appliances. 3.03 INSTALLATION OF LISTED VENTS AND CHIMNEYS A. Locate to comply with minimum clearances from combustibles and minimum termination heights according to product listing or NFPA 211, whichever is most stringent. B. Support vents at intervals recommended by manufacturer to support weight of vents and all accessories, without exceeding appliance loading. C. Slope breechings down in direction of appliance, with condensate drain connection at lowest point piped to nearest drain. D. Lap joints in direction of flow. E. Connect base section to foundation using anchor lugs of size and number recommended by manufacturer. F. Join sections with acid-resistant joint cement to provide continuous joint and smooth interior finish. G. Erect stacks plumb to finished tolerance of no more than 1 inch out of plumb from top to bottom. 3.04 CLEANING A. After completing system installation, including outlet fittings and devices, inspect exposed finish. Remove burrs, dirt, and construction debris and repair damaged finishes. B. Clean breechings internally, during and after installation, to remove dust and debris. Clean external surfaces to remove welding slag and mill film. Grind welds smooth and apply touchup finish to match factory or shop finish. C. Provide temporary closures at ends of breechings, chimneys, and stacks that are not completed or connected to equipment. END OF SECTION 235100 Mountain Haus Boiler Replacement 03/18/2014 100% CD's/Permit CAST-IRON BOILERS 23 5223 - 1 SECTION 23 5223 - CAST-IRON BOILERS PART 1 GENERAL 1.01 RELATED DOCUMENTS A. Drawings and general provisions of the Contract, including General and Supplementary Conditions and Division 01 Specification Sections, apply to this Section. 1.02 SUMMARY A. This Section includes packaged cast-iron boilers, trim, and accessories for generating hot water with the following configurations and burners: 1. Field assembled. 2. Forced-draft, gas burner. 1.03 ACTION SUBMITTALS A. Product Data: Include performance data, operating characteristics, furnished specialties, and accessories. B. Shop Drawings: For boilers, boiler trim, and accessories. Include plans, elevations, sections, details, and attachments to other work. 1. Design calculations and vibration isolation base details, signed and sealed by a qualified professional engineer. a. Design Calculations: Calculate requirements for selecting vibration isolators and seismic restraints and for designing vibration isolation bases. b. Vibration Isolation Base Details: Detail fabrication including anchorages and attachments to structure and to supported equipment. Include auxiliary motor slides and rails and equipment mounting frames. 2. Wiring Diagrams: Power, signal, and control wiring. 1.04 INFORMATIONAL SUBMITTALS A. Manufacturer Seismic Qualification Certification: Submit certification that boiler, accessories, and components will withstand seismic forces defined in Section 23 0548 "Vibration and Seismic Controls for HVAC Piping and Equipment." Include the following: 1. Basis for Certification: Indicate whether withstand certification is based on actual test of assembled components or on calculation. a. The term "withstand" means "the unit will remain in place without separation of any parts from the device when subjected to the seismic forces specified." b. The term "withstand" means "the unit will remain in place without separation of any parts from the device when subjected to the seismic forces specified and the unit will be fully operational after the seismic event." 2. Dimensioned Outline Drawings of Equipment Unit: Identify center of gravity and locate and describe mounting and anchorage provisions. 3. Detailed description of equipment anchorage devices on which the certification is based and their installation requirements. B. Other Informational Submittals: 1. Startup service reports. 1.05 CLOSEOUT SUBMITTALS A. Operation and Maintenance Data: For boilers, components, and accessories to include in emergency, operation, and maintenance manuals. Mountain Haus Boiler Replacement 03/18/2014 100% CD's/Permit CAST-IRON BOILERS 23 5223 - 2 1.06 QUALITY ASSURANCE A. Electrical Components, Devices, and Accessories: Listed and labeled as defined in NFPA 70, Article 100, by a testing agency acceptable to authorities having jurisdiction, and marked for intended use. B. ASME Compliance: Fabricate and label boilers to comply with ASME Boiler and Pressure Vessel Code. C. ASHRAE/IESNA 90.1 Compliance: Boilers shall have minimum efficiency according to "Gas and Oil Fired Boilers - Minimum Efficiency Requirements." D. DOE Compliance: Minimum efficiency shall comply with 10 CFR 430, Subpart B, Appendix N, "Uniform Test Method for Measuring the Energy Consumption of Furnaces and Boilers." E. I=B=R Compliance: Boilers shall be tested and rated according to HI's "Rating Procedure for Heating Boilers" and "Testing Standard for Commercial Boilers," with I=B=R emblem on a nameplate affixed to boiler. F. UL Compliance: Test boilers for compliance with ." Boilers shall be listed and labeled by a testing agency acceptable to authorities having jurisdiction. 1.07 COORDINATION A. Coordinate size and location of concrete bases. Cast anchor-bolt inserts into bases. Concrete, reinforcement, and formwork requirements are specified with concrete. 1.08 WARRANTY A. Special Warranty: Manufacturer's standard form in which manufacturer agrees to repair or replace controls and heat exchangers of boilers that fail in materials or workmanship within specified warranty period. 1. Warranty Period for Controls: Two years from date of Substantial Completion. 2. Warranty Period for Heat Exchangers: Five years from date of Substantial Completion. PART 2 PRODUCTS 2.01 MANUFACTURERS A. Manufacturers: Subject to compliance with requirements, provide products by one of the following: 1. Burnham Hydronics. 2. Lennox Industries Inc. 3. Peerless Boilers. 4. Smith Cast Iron Boilers. 5. Viessmann Manufacturing Co. (US) Inc. 6. Weil-McLain; a United Dominion Company. 7. Buderus. 2.02 MANUFACTURED UNITS A. Description: Factory fabricated and field assembled. 1. Cast-iron sections shall be sealed pressure tight and held together with tie rods[ set on an insulated steel base]; including insulated jacket and flue-gas vent connection. B. Cast-Iron Section Design: 1. Configuration: Wet base. 2. Number of Passes: Multiple. 3. Sectional Joints: High-temperature sealant to seal flue-gas passages not in contact with heating medium, machined steel push nipples, and held together with tie rods. 4. Drain and blowdown tappings. Mountain Haus Boiler Replacement 03/18/2014 100% CD's/Permit CAST-IRON BOILERS 23 5223 - 3 5. Return injection tube to equalize water flow to all sections. 6. Crown inspection tappings with brass plugs. C. Casing: 1. Jacket: Sheet metal, with snap-in or interlocking closures and baked-enamel protective finish. 2. Insulation: Minimum 3-1/2inch- thick, mineral-fiber insulation surrounding the heat exchanger. 3. Combustion Chamber Access: Refractory lined, hinged, front. 4. Access: For cleaning between cast-iron sections. 5. Draft Hood: Flue canopy and rear flue connection shall be constructed of stainless steel containing adjustable outlet damper assembly. 6. Insulated base constructed of aluminized steel to permit boiler to be installed on combustible floor. 7. Mounting Frame: Steel rails to mount assembled boiler package on concrete base. a. Seismic Fabrication Requirements: Fabricate mounting base and attachment to boiler, accessories, and components with reinforcement strong enough to withstand seismic forces defined in Section 23 0548 "Vibration and Seismic Controls for HVAC Piping and Equipment" when mounting base is anchored to building structure. 2.03 BURNER A. Gas Train: Control devices and full-modulation control sequence shall comply with requirements in ASME CSD-1. 2.04 BURNER A. Burner: Welded construction with multivane, stainless-steel, flame-retention diffuser for natural gas. B. Blower: Forward-curved centrifugal fan integral to burner, directly driven by motor; with adjustable, dual-blade damper assembly and locking quadrant to set air-fuel ratio. 1. Motors: Comply with requirements specified in Section 230513 "Common Motor Requirements for HVAC Equipment." a. Motor Sizes: Minimum size as indicated. If not indicated, large enough so driven load will not require motor to operate in service factor range above 1.0. C. Gas Train: Control devices and modulating control sequence shall comply with requirements in ASME CSD-1. D. Pilot: Intermittent -electric-spark pilot ignition with 100 percent main-valve and pilot-safety shutoff with electronic supervision of burner flame. 2.05 TRIM A. Include devices sized to comply with ANSI B31.9, "Building Services Piping." B. Aquastat Controllers: Operating, firing rate, and high limit. C. Safety Relief Valve: ASME rated. D. Pressure and Temperature Gage: Minimum 3-1/2-inch- diameter, combination water-pressure and -temperature gage. Gages shall have operating-pressure and -temperature ranges so normal operating range is about 50 percent of full range. E. Boiler Air Vent: Automatic. F. Drain Valve: Minimum NPS 3/4 hose-end gate valve. 2.06 TRIM A. Safety Relief Valve: Mountain Haus Boiler Replacement 03/18/2014 100% CD's/Permit CAST-IRON BOILERS 23 5223 - 4 1. Size and Capacity: As required for equipment according to ASME Boiler and Pressure Vessel Code. 2. Description: Fully enclosed steel spring with adjustable pressure range and positive shutoff; factory set and sealed. a. Drip-Pan Elbow: Cast iron and having threaded inlet and outlet with threads complying with ASME B1.20.1. B. Stop-Check Valves: Factory-installed, stop-check valve and stop valve at boiler outlet with free-blow drain valve factory installed between the two valves and visible when operating stop-check valve. 2.07 CONTROLS A. Refer to Section 230900 "Instrumentation and Control for HVAC." B. Burner Operating Controls: To maintain safe operating conditions, burner safety controls limit burner operation. 1. High Cutoff: Manual reset stops burner if operating conditions rise above maximum boiler design temperature . 2. Low-Water Cutoff Switch: Electronic probe shall prevent burner operation on low water. Cutoff switch shall be manual -reset type. 3. Audible Alarm: Factory mounted on control panel with silence switch; shall sound alarm for above conditions. C. Building Management System Interface: Factory install hardware and software to enable building management system to monitor, control, and display boiler status and alarms. 1. Hardwired Points: a. Monitoring: On/off status, common trouble alarm low water level alarm. b. Control: On/off operation, hot water supply temperature set-point adjustment. 2. A communication interface with building management system shall enable building management system operator to remotely control and monitor the boiler from an operator workstation. Control features available, and monitoring points displayed, locally at boiler control panel shall be available through building management system. 2.08 ELECTRICAL POWER A. Controllers, Electrical Devices, and Wiring: Electrical devices and connections are specified in electrical Sections. 2.09 SOURCE QUALITY CONTROL A. Test and inspect factory-assembled boilers, before shipping, according to ASME Boiler and Pressure Vessel Code. B. Burner and Hydrostatic Test: Factory adjust burner to eliminate excess oxygen, carbon dioxide, oxides of nitrogen emissions, and carbon monoxide in flue gas and to achieve combustion efficiency; perform hydrostatic test. C. Allow Owner access to source quality-control testing of boilers. Notify Architect 14 days in advance of testing. PART 3 EXECUTION 3.01 EXAMINATION A. Before boiler installation, examine roughing-in for concrete equipment bases, anchor-bolt sizes and locations, and piping and electrical connections to verify actual locations, sizes, and other conditions affecting boiler performance, maintenance, and operations. 1. Final boiler locations indicated on Drawings are approximate. Determine exact locations before roughing-in for piping and electrical connections. Mountain Haus Boiler Replacement 03/18/2014 100% CD's/Permit CAST-IRON BOILERS 23 5223 - 5 B. Examine mechanical spaces for suitable conditions where boilers will be installed. C. Proceed with installation only after unsatisfactory conditions have been corrected. 3.02 BOILER INSTALLATION A. Equipment Mounting: Install boilers on cast-in-place concrete equipment base(s). Comply with requirements for equipment bases specified in Section 033000 "Cast-in-Place Concrete." 1. Coordinate sizes and locations of concrete bases with actual equipment provided. 2. Construct bases to withstand, without damage to equipment, seismic force required by code. 3. Construct concrete bases 4 inches high and extend base not less than 6 inches in all directions beyond the maximum dimensions of boiler unless otherwise indicated or unless required for seismic anchor support. 4. Install dowel rods to connect concrete base to concrete floor. Unless otherwise indicated, install dowel rods on 18-inch centers around the full perimeter of concrete base. 5. For supported equipment, install epoxy-coated anchor bolts that extend through concrete base, and anchor into structural concrete floor. 6. Place and secure anchorage devices. Use setting drawings, templates, diagrams, instructions, and directions furnished with items to be embedded. 7. Install anchor bolts to elevations required for proper attachment to supported equipment. B. Install gas-fired boilers according to NFPA 54. C. Assemble boiler sections in sequence and seal between each section. D. Assemble and install boiler trim. E. Install electrical devices furnished with boiler but not specified to be factory mounted. F. Install control wiring to field-mounted electrical devices. 3.03 CONNECTIONS A. Piping installation requirements are specified in other Sections. Drawings indicate general arrangement of piping, fittings, and specialties. B. Install piping adjacent to boiler to allow service and maintenance. C. Connect gas piping to boiler gas-train inlet with union. Piping shall be at least full size of gas train connection. Provide a reducer if required. D. Connect hot-water piping to supply- and return-boiler tappings with shutoff valve and union or flange at each connection. E. Install piping from safety relief valves to nearest floor drain. F. Install piping from safety valves to drip-pan elbow and to nearest floor drain. G. Install piping from equipment drain connection to nearest floor drain. Piping shall be at least full size of connection. Provide an isolation valve if required. H. Connect breeching full size to boiler outlet. Comply with requirements in Section 235100 "Breechings, Chimneys, and Stacks" for venting materials. I. Ground equipment according to Section 260526 "Grounding and Bonding for Electrical Systems." J. Connect wiring according to Section 260519 "Low-Voltage Electrical Power Conductors and Cables." Mountain Haus Boiler Replacement 03/18/2014 100% CD's/Permit CAST-IRON BOILERS 23 5223 - 6 3.04 FIELD QUALITY CONTROL A. Perform tests and inspections and prepare test reports. 1. Manufacturer's Field Service: Engage a factory-authorized service representative to inspect components, assemblies, and equipment installations, including connections, and to assist in testing. B. Tests and Inspections: 1. Perform installation and startup checks according to manufacturer's written instructions. 2. Leak Test: Hydrostatic test. Repair leaks and retest until no leaks exist. 3. Operational Test: Start units to confirm proper motor rotation and unit operation. Adjust air-fuel ratio and combustion. 4. Test and adjust controls and safeties. Replace damaged and malfunctioning controls and equipment. a. Burner Test: Adjust burner to eliminate excess oxygen, carbon dioxide, oxides of nitrogen emissions, and carbon monoxide in flue gas and to achieve combustion efficiency. b. Check and adjust initial operating set points and high- and low-limit safety set points of fuel supply, water level and water temperature. c. Set field-adjustable switches and circuit-breaker trip ranges as indicated. C. Remove and replace malfunctioning units and retest as specified above. D. Occupancy Adjustments: When requested within 12 months of date of Substantial Completion, provide on-site assistance in adjusting system to suit actual occupied conditions. Provide up to two visits to Project during other than normal occupancy hours for this purpose. E. Performance Tests: 1. Engage a factory-authorized service representative to inspect component assemblies and equipment installations, including connections, and to conduct performance testing. 2. Boilers shall comply with performance requirements indicated, as determined by field performance tests. Adjust, modify, or replace equipment to comply. 3. Perform field performance tests to determine capacity and efficiency of boilers. a. For dual-fuel boilers, perform tests for each fuel. b. Test for full capacity. c. Test for boiler efficiency at low fire 20, 40, 60, 80, 100, 80, 60, 40, and 20 percent of full capacity. Determine efficiency at each test point. 4. Repeat tests until results comply with requirements indicated. 5. Provide analysis equipment required to determine performance. 6. Provide temporary equipment and system modifications necessary to dissipate the heat produced during tests if building systems are not adequate. 7. Notify Architect in advance of test dates. 8. Document test results in a report and submit to Architect. 3.05 DEMONSTRATION A. Train Owner's maintenance personnel to adjust, operate, and maintain boilers. Refer to Section 017900 "Demonstration and Training." END OF SECTION 235223 Mountain Haus Boiler Replacement 03/18/2014 100% CD's/Permit ELECTRICAL GENERAL PROVISIONS 26 0010 - 1 SECTION 26 0010--ELECTRICAL GENERAL PROVISIONS PART 1 GENERAL 1.01 RELATED DOCUMENTS A. The General Conditions, Special Conditions, and Contract Documents are part of these specifications. Consult them further for instructions and be governed by the requirements contained there under. 1.02 DESCRIPTION A. Work Included 1. Work shall consist of furnishing all labor, equipment, supplies and materials, unless otherwise specified, necessary for the installation of complete electrical systems as required by the specifications and as shown on the drawings, subject to the terms and conditions of the contract. The work shall also include the completion of those details of electrical work not mentioned or shown which are necessary for the successful operation of all electrical systems. B. Work Not Included 1. Certain labor, materials, and equipment may be furnished under other sections of these specifications, by Utility Companies or by the Owner; when this is the case, the extent, source, and description of these items will be as indicated on the drawings or as described in the specification. 1.03 PROVISIONS A. Work performed under this division of the specifications shall conform to the requirements of Division 1, the electrical drawings, and all items hereinafter specified. 1. Prior to any work being performed under this division, examine architectural and mechanical drawings and specifications. If any discrepancies occur between them and the electrical drawings and specifications, report discrepancies to the Architect in writing and obtain written instructions for the work. 2. Electrical drawings are diagrammatic, but shall be followed as closely as actual construction of the building will permit. All changes from drawings necessary to make the electrical work conform to the building as constructed shall be made without additional cost to the Owner. 3. Coordinate the electrical work with the General Contractor and be responsible to him for satisfactory progress of the same. Coordinate electrical work with all other trades on the project without additional cost to the Owner. 4. All work and materials covered by drawings and specifications shall be subject to review at any time by representatives of the Architect and Owner. If the Architect or Owner’s agent finds any materials or installation that does not conform to these drawings and specifications, Contractor shall remove the material from the premises and correct the installation to the satisfaction of the agent. 5. In acceptance or rejection of installed electrical systems, no allowance will be made for lack of skill on the part of the installers. 1.04 CODES AND STANDARDS A. The latest editions of the following standards (including supplements and official interpretations) are minimum requirements: 1. NFPA 70 - National Electrical Code (NEC). 2. NFPA 72 – National Fire Alarm Code. 3. NFPA 101 – Life Safety Code. 4. Conform to all applicable State and Local Codes. 5. American National Standards Institute (ANSI). 6. National Electrical Safety Code (NESC). 7. Americans with Disabilities Acts (ADA) and American National Standards Institute (ANSI) 117. 8. National Electrical Manufacturer’s Association (NEMA). Mountain Haus Boiler Replacement 03/18/2014 100% CD's/Permit ELECTRICAL GENERAL PROVISIONS 26 0010 - 2 9. Underwriter’s Laboratories (UL). 10. Insulated Cable Engineers Association (ICEA). 11. International Building Code. 12. International Mechanical Code. 13. International Fire Code. 14. Institute of Electrical and Electronic Engineers (IEEE). B. The complete installation shall comply with requirements of the utility and telephone companies furnishing service to this installation. The drawings and specifications take precedence when they are more stringent than codes, statutes, or ordinances in effect. Applicable codes, ordinances, standards and statutes take precedence when they are more stringent or conflict with the drawings and specifications. 1.05 SPECIAL REQUIREMENTS A. Definitions: “Provide” shall mean “furnish and install”. “Furnish” means to supply all materials, labor, equipment, testing apparatus, controls, tests, accessories and all other items customarily required for the proper and complete application. “Install” means to join, unit, fasten, link, attach, set up or otherwise connect together before testing and turning over to Owner, complete and ready for regular operation. The words “accept” or “acceptable” denote only that the equipment items are in general conformance with the design concept of the project. B. Drawings: 1. The drawings indicate the general arrangement of circuits and outlets, locations of switches, panelboards and other work. Information shown on the drawings is schematic, however, re-circuiting will not be permitted without specific acceptance. Drawings and specifications are complementary to each other. What is called for by one shall be as binding as if called for by both. Data presented on these drawings is accurate as planning can be determined, but accuracy is not guaranteed and field verification of all dimensions, locations, levels, etc., to suit field conditions is directed. Review all Architectural, Structural and Mechanical Drawings and Specifications; adjust all work to conform to all conditions shown therein. The Architectural drawings shall take precedence over all other drawings. 2. Discrepancies between different plans, between plans and specifications, between specifications or regulations and codes governing this installation shall be brought to the attention of the Architect in writing before the date of bid opening. In the event such discrepancies exist, and the Architect is not so notified, the adjudication of responsibility shall be solely at the discretion of the Architect. 1.06 EXAMINATION OF BIDDING DOCUMENTS A. Each bidder shall examine the bidding documents carefully, and not later than seven days prior to the date of receipt of bids, shall make written request to the Engineer for interpretation or correction of any discrepancies, ambiguity, inconsistency, or error therein which he may discover. Any interpretation or correction will be issued as an addendum by the Architect. Only a written interpretation or correction by addendum shall be binding. No bidder shall rely upon interpretations or corrections given by any other method. If discrepancies, ambiguity, inconsistency, or error are not covered by addendum or written directive, Contractor shall include in his bid, labor materials and methods of construction resulting in higher cost. After award of contract, no allowance or extra compensation will be made on behalf of the Contractor due to his failure to make the written requests as described above. B. Failure to request clarification during the bid period of any inadequacy, omission, or conflict will not relieve the Contractor of their responsibilities. The signing of the contract will be considered as implicitly denoting that the Contractor has a thorough comprehension of the full intent and scope of the working drawings and specifications. 1.07 PERMITS, FEES & NOTICES A. Obtain and pay for all necessary permits, inspections and certificates that may be necessary for the full completion of the work. Furnish the Architect with a certificate of final inspection and approval from the AHJ Mountain Haus Boiler Replacement 03/18/2014 100% CD's/Permit ELECTRICAL GENERAL PROVISIONS 26 0010 - 3 over the electrical installation. B. Notify proper authorities when work is ready for inspections required by applicable codes, rules and regulations, allowing sufficient time for inspections to be made without hindering progress of the work. Furnish to the Owner copies of inspection certificates of acceptance. 1.08 TESTS A. Upon completion of all work and adjustment of all equipment, provide complete operational tests of all electrical equipment provided under this division. 1.09 WARRANTY A. Guarantee that all work governed by this division shall be free of defects in workmanship, materials and parts for a period of one (1) year after written acceptance. Promptly repair, revise, and replace defects as directed with no additional cost to the Owner (lamps and fuses are exempt). 1.10 RECORD DRAWINGS A. Maintain a current set of electrical drawings at the site. Neatly mark all changes and deviations from the original drawings. Use a color which contrasts with the prints. This shall be a separate set of drawings, not used for construction purposes, and shall be kept up to date as the job progresses and shall be made available for inspection by the Architect at all times. These updated progress drawings shall be used to produce the final record drawings that shall be in AutoCad electronic format media upon project completion. B. Upon completion of the contract, both sets (electronic and hard copy drawings) of record drawings shall be delivered to the Architect. C. The Contractor shall mark all record drawings on the front lower right hand corner with a stamp impression that reads ‘RECORD DRAWINGS’ or similar. 1.11 PROJECT/SITE CONDITIONS A. Install work in locations shown on Drawings, unless prevented by Project conditions. B. Prior to submitting a bid, visit the site of job and ascertain all conditions affecting the proposed installation and adjust all work accordingly. Make provisions for these costs. C. Coordinate the work with that of all other trades. Where conflicts of work occur and departure from the indicated arrangements are necessary, consult with other Contractors involved; come to agreement as to changed locations and elevations, etc., and obtain written acceptance from the Architect of proposed changes before proceeding with work. D. All outages of electrical service shall be scheduled with the Owner and Utility Company five (5) days in advance of proposed outage. Include an overtime allowance in the bid for the performance of all work requiring outages at such time as it is approved by the Owner. Outages shall be at a time and of such duration as accepted by the Owner. 1.12 SEQUENCING AND SCHEDULING A. Construct Work in sequence under provisions of Division 1. 1.13 USE OF THE ARCHITECT’S AND/OR ENGINEER’S DRAWINGS A. The Contractor shall obtain, at the Contractor’s expense, from the Architect or Engineer a set of AutoCAD or compatible format architectural and engineering drawings on electronic media where desired by the Contractor and/or required by the Specifications for use in preparing the shop drawings, coordination drawings, and record Mountain Haus Boiler Replacement 03/18/2014 100% CD's/Permit ELECTRICAL GENERAL PROVISIONS 26 0010 - 4 drawings. The Contractor shall provide to the Architect and Engineer a written release of liability acceptable to the Architect and Engineer prior to receiving the electronic media. PART 2 GENERAL 2.01 STANDARD FOR MATERIALS A. All materials shall conform to current applicable industry standards. Workmanship and neat appearance shall be as important as the electrical and mechanical operation. Defective or damaged materials shall be replaced or repaired, prior to final acceptance, in a manner acceptable to the Architect or Owner at no additional cost to the Owner. B. All electrical materials shall be acceptable for installation only if labeled or listed by a nationally recognized testing laboratory and if accepted by local authorities. 2.02 SUBMITTALS A. Submit under provision of Division 1. B. Listing of Equipment: The Contractor shall submit, within thirty days after the award of the contract, a complete typewritten list of those items of equipment which will be furnished under this contract. Include the name or description of the item, name of manufacturer, model, type, and catalog number. C. Present shop drawing submittal data at one time, bound in three-ring binders, indexed in a neat and orderly manner. Partial submittals will not be accepted. Do not begin work until (1) copy is returned. D. Submit five (5) copies of shop drawings, layouts, manufacturer's data, wiring diagrams and material schedules that may be requested by the Architect for his review. The review by the Architect will not constitute concurrence with any deviation from the plans and specifications unless such deviations are specifically identified by the method described below, nor shall it relieve the Contractor of responsibility for errors or omissions in the submitted data. E. Processed shop drawings shall not be construed as change orders. The shop drawings shall demonstrate that the Contractor understands the design concept, indicate which equipment and materials he intends to provide, and detail the fabrication and installation methods he intends to use. If deviations, discrepancies or conflicts between shop drawing submittals and the design drawings and specifications are discovered, the design drawings and specifications shall govern. F. Contractor shall be responsible for dimensions (which he shall confirm and correlate at the job site), fabrication processes and techniques of construction and coordination of his work with that of other trades. The Contractor shall check and verify all measurements and review shop drawings before submitting them and sign a statement on the shop drawings which signifies that they comply with plans and specifications and that equipment is dimensionally suitable for the application. If any deviations from the specified requirements for any item of material or equipment exist, such deviation shall be expressly stated in writing and incorporated with the submittal. The Owner's copies (two of each) of the reviewed submittals shall be retained by the Contractor until completion of the project and presented in bound form to the Owner. G. Provide, with shop drawing submittal, 1/4" scale layout drawings of room with switchboards, transformers, telephone backboards, panelboards, and data equipment. Layouts shall show locations of, and shall be coordinated with mechanical equipment. Equipment shall be drawn to scale. 2.03 BID ALTERNATE(S) A. Refer to Division 1 and all contract documents for additional information. B. Alternate(s) for Material and Equipment Mountain Haus Boiler Replacement 03/18/2014 100% CD's/Permit ELECTRICAL GENERAL PROVISIONS 26 0010 - 5 1. Equipment and material bid alternate(s) shall be proposed as additive or deductive alternate(s) to specified items by submitting it as a separate line item from the base bid on the Bidder's letterhead. 2. Such bid alternate proposals shall not be substituted or included in the base bid. Bid alternate proposal(s) must be accompanied by full descriptive data on the proposed equipment, together with a statement of the cost to be added or deducted for each item. The bid alternate shall include all materials, equipment, labor, electrical connections, coordination with all other trades, etc. for a complete and operational system. 3. The Contractor shall submit the bid alternates at the time the base bids are due. 2.04 SUBSTITUTION AND APPROVALS A. Substitutions of Material after Award of Contract 1. Other items of material and equipment may be offered (at the Contractor's option) as alternates to specified items, either as provided for in the Proposal Forms or, if no provisions are made, by submitting it with his bid on the Bidder's letterhead. 2. Such alternate proposal shall not be included under the base bid and must be accompanied by full descriptive data on the proposed equipment, together with a statement of the cost to be added or deducted for each item. If any such alternate material proposals are considered, the Contractor shall submit a list of the proposed alternate substitution items in accordance with the requirements of "Review of Proposed Substitutions". 2.05 SUBSTITUTIONS (CONTRACTOR AND/OR OWNER INITIATED) A. Materials or equipment listed by several manufacturers’ names are intended to be bidder's choice, and any of the listed manufacturers may be used in the base bid. Materials or equipment not listed are considered substitutions. B. Performance Specification: When any item is specified by requirement to meet a performance, industry or regulating body standard or is specified generically (no manufacturer's name listed), no prior review by the Consulting Electrical Engineer is needed unless specifically called for in these specifications. C. Contractor to be responsible for any changes and costs to accommodate any equipment except the first named in the specification. D. Substitutions for Material 1. Equipment and materials not listed as equivalents may be proposed as deductive alternates to specified items by submitting it as a separate line item to the base bid on the Bidder's letterhead. 2. Such substitutions shall not be substituted for the base bid and must be accompanied by a full description of the difference between the Contract Document requirements and that of the substitution, the comparative features of each, and the effect of the change on the end result performance. Include the impact of all changes on other contractors and acknowledge the inclusion of additional costs to the other trades. If any such alternates are considered, the Contractor shall submit a list of the proposed alternate substitution items within 14 days of award of contract. Late requests for proposed substitutions will not be accepted by the Engineer due to scheduling or delivery concerns. PART 3 EXECUTION 3.01 WORKMANSHIP AND COMPLETION OF INSTALLATION A. Contractor's personnel and subcontractors selected to perform the work shall be well versed and skilled in the trades involved. B. Coordinate electrical equipment and materials installation with other building components. C. Sequence, coordinate, and integrate installations of electrical materials and equipment for efficient flow of the Work. Give particular attention to large equipment requiring positioning prior to closing-in the building. Mountain Haus Boiler Replacement 03/18/2014 100% CD's/Permit ELECTRICAL GENERAL PROVISIONS 26 0010 - 6 D. Any changes or deviations from the drawings and specifications must be accepted in writing by the Architect/Engineer. All errors in installation shall be corrected at the expense of the Contractor. All specialties shall be installed as detailed on the drawings. Where detail or specific installation requirements are not provided, manufacturer's recommendations shall be followed. E. Upon completion of work, all equipment and materials shall be installed complete, thoroughly checked, correctly adjusted, and left ready for intended use or operation. All work shall be thoroughly cleaned and all residue shall be removed from surfaces. Exterior surfaces of all material and equipment shall be delivered in a perfect, unblemished condition. F. Contractor shall provide a complete installation, including all required labor, material, cartage, insurance, permits, and taxes. 3.02 PROGRESS OF WORK A. Order the progress of electrical work to conform to the progress of the work of the other trades. Complete the entire installation as soon as the condition of the building will permit. Any cost resulting from defective or ill-timed work performed under this Section shall be borne by this Contractor. 3.03 CHASES, OPENINGS, CUTTING, AND PATCHING A. Carefully lay out all work in advance so as to eliminate where possible, cutting, channeling, chasing or drilling of floors, walls, partitions, ceilings and roofs. Any damage to the building, structure, piping, ducts, equipment or any defaced finish shall be repaired by skilled mechanics of the trades involved at no additional cost to the Owner and to the satisfaction of the Architect. Any necessary cutting, channeling, drilling or anchoring of raceways, outlets, or other electrical equipment shall be performed in a careful manner, and as accepted by the Architect. B. All openings made in fire-rated walls, floors, or ceilings shall be patched and made tight in a manner to conform to the fire rating for the surface penetrated. C. All penetrations required through existing concrete construction shall be core drilled at minimum size required. Precautions shall be taken when drilling to prevent damage to structural concrete. Contractor shall obtain permission from the Architect before proceeding with drilling. D. Provide all cutting, trenching, backfilling, patching and refinishing or resurfacing required for electrical work in a manner meeting the approval of the Engineer and at no additional cost to the Owner. 3.04 DELIVERY AND STORAGE OF MATERIALS A. Arrange and be held responsible for delivery and safe storage of materials and equipment for electrical installation. B. Store materials and equipment for easy inspection and checking. C. Carefully mark and store all materials. D. Deliver materials to the job site in stages of the work that will expedite the work as a whole. E. Carefully check materials furnished to this Contractor for installation, and provide receipt acknowledging acceptance of delivery and condition of the materials received. Thereafter, assume full responsibility for its safekeeping until the final installation has been reviewed and accepted. 3.05 PROTECTION OF WORK AND PROPERTY A. Where there are existing facilities, be responsible for the protection thereof, whether or not such facility is to be removed or relocated. Moving or removing any facility must be done so as not to cause interruption of the work Mountain Haus Boiler Replacement 03/18/2014 100% CD's/Permit ELECTRICAL GENERAL PROVISIONS 26 0010 - 7 of Owner’s operation. B. Close all conduit openings with caps or plugs during installation. Cover all fixtures and equipment and protect against injury. At the final completion, clean all work and deliver in an unblemished condition, or refinish and repaint at the discretion of the Architect. C. Any equipment or conduit systems found to have been damaged or contaminated above “MILL” or “SHOP” conditions shall be replaced or cleaned to the Engineer’s satisfaction. 3.06 FINAL ACCEPTANCE A. Final acceptance by the Owner will not occur until all operating instructions are received and Owner's personnel have been thoroughly indoctrinated in the maintenance and operation of all equipment. B. Operating manual, parts lists, and indoctrination of operating and maintenance personnel: Furnish the services of a qualified representative of the supplier for each item or system itemized below who shall instruct specific personnel, as designated by the Owner, in the operation and maintenance of that item or system. C. Deliver three (3) complete operating manuals and parts lists to the Owner (or his designated representative) at the time of the above required indoctrination. Fully explain the contents of the manuals as part of required indoctrination and instruct the Owner's personnel in the correct procedure in obtaining service, both during and after the guarantee period. The operating manual and parts lists shall give complete information as to whom the Owner shall contact for service and parts, including the address and phone number. Furnish evidence that an authorized service organization regularly carries a complete stock of repair parts for these items (or systems), and that the organization is available for service. Service shall be furnished within twenty four (24) hours after requested. D. Clean up: Remove all materials, scrap, etc., relative to the electrical installation and leave the premises and all equipment, lamps, fixtures, etc. in a clean, orderly condition. Any costs to the Owner for clean up of the site will be charged against the Contractor. E. Acceptance Demonstration: Upon completion of the work, at a time to be designated by the Architect, the Contractor shall demonstrate for the Owner the operation of the entire installation, including all systems provided under this contract. 3.07 CONSTRUCTION LIGHTING AND POWER A. Provide all temporary facilities required to supply construction power and light. Install and maintain facilities in a manner that will protect the public and workmen. Comply with all applicable laws and regulations. B. Provide covered walkway lights and obstruction lights which shall be kept burning continuously between sunset and sunrise where required. C. Upon completion of the work, remove all temporary facilities from the site. D. The General Contractor shall pay for all power and light used by him and his subcontractors where construction power is separately metered, or is taken from the permanent project metered service solely for construction use. E. The cutoff date for power cost allocation where permanent meters are used shall be either the agreed date of occupancy by the Owner or the date of final acceptance of the project, whichever shall be the earlier date. 3.08 MECHANICAL EQUIPMENT WIRING AND CONNECTIONS A. Unless otherwise indicated, all motors and controls shall be furnished, set in place, and wired in accordance with the Mechanical Equipment Wiring and Connections Schedule. All items necessary for a complete system shall be included in the base contract. Mountain Haus Boiler Replacement 03/18/2014 100% CD's/Permit ELECTRICAL GENERAL PROVISIONS 26 0010 - 8 B. Provide electrical connections to mechanical equipment. Refer to the Mechanical specifications and plans covering sprinkler systems, motor interlocks, switching, etc. Provide wiring, conduit, outlets and final electrical connections to all equipment. C. Where motor controllers are furnished by others, install controller and provide connections at line and load side of controllers. D. Where reduced voltage, multiple speed, duplex, triplex, lead-lag, pony motor and other unusual controller types are utilized, coordinate specific requirements of motor(s) and controller and provide required wiring between motor(s) and controller. 3.09 REMODELING PROVISIONS A. Existing systems and conditions shown on the drawings are provided for guidance only. The Electrical Contractor shall field check all existing conditions prior to bidding and shall include in his bid an allowance for the removal and relocation of existing conduits, wires, devices, fixtures, or other equipment as indicated on the plans or as required to coordinate and adapt new and existing electrical systems to all other work required for this project. B. Where the reuse of existing conduits, outlets, junction boxes, etc., is permissible, make certain that the wiring form them is continuous from outlet to outlet. Provide modifications to assure that circuits, or system, shall not pass through outlets or junction boxes which may be rendered inaccessible by changes to be made to the building. Existing conduits, wire, devices, fixtures, etc., which shall be removed shall become the property of this Contractor unless otherwise noted. C. Connect new work to existing in a manner that will assure proper raceway grounding throughout in conformance with the National Electrical Code. D. Remodel Work Cutting and Patching: The Contractor shall perform cutting, channeling, chasing, drilling, etc., as required to install or remove electrical equipment in areas of remodeling. This work shall be performed so as to minimize damage to portions of wall finishes, surfaces, plastering, or the structure which are to be reused, resurfaced, plastered or painted under another division of these specifications. E. Carefully coordinate with the required remodeling work, cutting and patching etc., performed by the other trades. Remove or relocate existing electrical conduits, wires, devices, fixtures and other equipment as necessary. F. All outages on portions of existing electrical systems shall be minimized and shall be at a time and of duration as accepted by the Owner. 3.10 ELECTRICAL DEMOLITION A. Examination 1. Verity field measurements and circuiting arrangements are as shown on drawings. 2. Verify that abandoned wiring and equipment serve only abandoned facilities. 3. Demolition drawings are based on casual field observation and existing record documents. Report discrepancies to Architect before disturbing existing installation. 4. Beginning of demolition means installer accepts existing conditions. B. Preparation 1. Disconnect electrical systems in walls, floors, and ceilings scheduled for removal. 2. Coordinate outages with Architect/Owner. 3. Provide temporary wiring and connections to maintain existing systems in service during construction. When work must be performed on energized equipment or circuits, use personnel experienced in such operations. 4. Existing telephone system: Maintain existing system in service. Disable system only to make switchovers and connections. Notify Owner/Architect in writing at least 24 hours before partially or completely disabling system. Minimize outage duration. Mountain Haus Boiler Replacement 03/18/2014 100% CD's/Permit ELECTRICAL GENERAL PROVISIONS 26 0010 - 9 C. Demolition and Extension of Existing Electrical Work 1. Demolish and extend existing electrical work under provisions of Division 1, Division 2, and this section. 2. Remove, relocate, and extend existing installations to accommodate new construction. 3. Remove abandoned wiring to source of supply. 4. Remove exposed abandoned conduit, including abandoned conduit above accessible ceiling finishes. Cut conduit flush with walls and floors, and patch surfaces. 5. Disconnect abandoned outlets and remove devices. Remove abandoned outlets if conduit servicing them is abandoned and removed. Provide blank cover for abandoned outlets, which are not removed. 6. Disconnect and remove abandoned panelboards and distribution equipment. 7. Disconnect and remove electrical devices and equipment serving utilization equipment that has been removed. 8. Disconnect and remove abandoned luminaires. Remove brackets, stems, hangers, and other accessories. 9. Repair adjacent construction and finishes damaged during demolition and extension work. 10. Maintain access to existing electrical installations, which remain active. Modify installation or provide access panel as appropriate. 11. Extend existing installations using materials and methods compatible with existing electrical installation, or as specified in individual section. D. Cleaning and Repair 1. Clean and repair existing materials and equipment, which remain or are to be reused. 2. Panelboards: Clean exposed surfaces and check tightness of electrical connections. Replace damaged circuit breakers and provide closure plates for vacant positions. Provide typed circuit directory showing revised circuiting arrangement. 3. Luminaries: Remove existing luminaires for cleaning. Use mild detergent to clean all exterior and interior surfaces; rinse with clean water and wipe dry. Replace lamps, non-operational ballasts, and broken electrical parts. E. Installation 1. Install relocated materials and equipment under the provisions of Division 1. 3.11 OWNER PROVIDED EQUIPMENT A. Provide electrical connections to owner furnished equipment. B. Inspect owner furnished equipment for damage, defects, missing components, etc. Report deficiencies to the Owner immediately. Do not install or connect deficient equipment. C. Provide supports, fastenings, and auxiliary hardware necessary for a complete installation in accordance with the finished building conditions. END OF SECTION 26 0010 Mountain Haus Boiler Replacement 03/18/2014 100% CD's/Permit LOW-VOLTAGE ELECTRICAL POWER CONDUCTORS AND CABLES 26 0519 - 1 SECTION 26 0519 - LOW-VOLTAGE ELECTRICAL POWER CONDUCTORS AND CABLES PART 1 GENERAL 1.01 RELATED DOCUMENTS A. Drawings and general provisions of the Contract, including General and Supplementary Conditions and Division 01 Specification Sections, apply to this Section. 1.02 SUMMARY A. Section Includes: 1. Building wires and cables rated 600 V and less. 2. Connectors, splices, and terminations rated 600 V and less. 1.03 DEFINITIONS A. VFC: Variable frequency controller. 1.04 ACTION SUBMITTALS A. Product Data: For each type of product. 1.05 INFORMATIONAL SUBMITTALS A. Qualification Data: For testing agency. PART 2 PRODUCTS 2.01 CONDUCTORS AND CABLES A. Aluminum Conductors: Comply with NEMA WC 70/ICEA S-95-658. B. Conductor Insulation: Comply with NEMA WC 70/ICEA S-95-658 for Type THHN-THWN. C. Multiconductor Cable: Comply with NEMA WC 70/ICEA S-95-658 for metal-clad cable, Type MC with ground wire. 2.02 CONNECTORS AND SPLICES A. Description: Factory-fabricated connectors and splices of size, ampacity rating, material, type, and class for application and service indicated. 2.03 SYSTEM DESCRIPTION A. Electrical Components, Devices, and Accessories: Listed and labeled as defined in NFPA 70, by a qualified testing agency, and marked for intended location and application. B. Comply with NFPA 70. Mountain Haus Boiler Replacement 03/18/2014 100% CD's/Permit LOW-VOLTAGE ELECTRICAL POWER CONDUCTORS AND CABLES 26 0519 - 2 PART 3 EXECUTION 3.01 CONDUCTOR MATERIAL APPLICATIONS A. Feeders: Copper for feeders smaller than No. 4 AWG; copper or aluminum for feeders No. 4 AWG and larger. Solid for No. 10 AWG and smaller; stranded for No. 8 AWG and larger. B. Branch Circuits: Copper. Solid for No. 10 AWG and smaller; stranded for No. 8 AWG and larger, except VFC cable, which shall be extra flexible stranded. 3.02 CONDUCTOR INSULATION AND MULTICONDUCTOR CABLE APPLICATIONS AND WIRING METHODS A. Exposed Feeders: Type THHN-THWN, single conductors in raceway. B. Exposed Branch Circuits, Including in Crawlspaces: Type THHN-THWN, single conductors in raceway. 3.03 INSTALLATION OF CONDUCTORS AND CABLES A. Complete raceway installation between conductor and cable termination points according to Section 26 0533 "Raceways and Boxes for Electrical Systems" prior to pulling conductors and cables. B. Use manufacturer-approved pulling compound or lubricant where necessary; compound used must not deteriorate conductor or insulation. Do not exceed manufacturer's recommended maximum pulling tensions and sidewall pressure values. C. Use pulling means, including fish tape, cable, rope, and basket-weave wire/cable grips, that will not damage cables or raceway. D. Install exposed cables parallel and perpendicular to surfaces of exposed structural members, and follow surface contours where possible. E. Support cables according to Section 26 0529 "Hangers and Supports for Electrical Systems." 3.04 CONNECTIONS A. Tighten electrical connectors and terminals according to manufacturer's published torque-tightening values. If manufacturer's torque values are not indicated, use those specified in UL 486A-486B. B. Make splices, terminations, and taps that are compatible with conductor material and that possess equivalent or better mechanical strength and insulation ratings than unspliced conductors. C. Wiring at Outlets: Install conductor at each outlet, with at least 12 inches of slack. 3.05 IDENTIFICATION A. Identify and color-code conductors and cables according to Section 26 0553 "Identification for Electrical Systems." 3.06 SLEEVE AND SLEEVE-SEAL INSTALLATION FOR ELECTRICAL PENETRATIONS A. Install sleeves and sleeve seals at penetrations of exterior floor and wall assemblies. Comply with requirements in Section 26 0544 "Sleeves and Sleeve Seals for Electrical Raceways and Cabling." 3.07 FIRESTOPPING A. Apply firestopping to electrical penetrations of fire-rated floor and wall assemblies to restore original Mountain Haus Boiler Replacement 03/18/2014 100% CD's/Permit LOW-VOLTAGE ELECTRICAL POWER CONDUCTORS AND CABLES 26 0519 - 3 fire-resistance rating of assembly according to Section 07 8413 "Penetration Firestopping." END OF SECTION 26 0519 Mountain Haus Boiler Replacement 03/18/2014 100% CD's/Permit GROUNDING AND BONDING FOR ELECTRICAL SYSTEMS 26 0526 - 1 SECTION 26 0526 - GROUNDING AND BONDING FOR ELECTRICAL SYSTEMS PART 1 GENERAL 1.01 SUMMARY A. Section Includes: Grounding systems and equipment. 1.02 SUBMITTALS A. Product Data: For each type of product indicated. B. Field quality-control test reports. PART 2 PRODUCTS 2.01 CONDUCTORS A. Insulated Conductors: Copper wire or cable insulated for 600 V unless otherwise required by applicable Code or authorities having jurisdiction. B. Bare Copper Conductors: 1. Solid Conductors: ASTM B 3. 2. Stranded Conductors: ASTM B 8. 3. Bonding Cable: 28 kcmil, 14 strands of No. 17 AWG conductor, 1/4 inch (6 mm) in diameter. 4. Bonding Conductor: No. 4 or No. 6 AWG, stranded conductor. 5. Bonding Jumper: Copper tape, braided conductors terminated with copper ferrules; 1-5/8 inches (41 mm) wide and 1/16 inch (1.6 mm) thick. 2.02 CONNECTORS A. Listed and labeled by an NRTL acceptable to authorities having jurisdiction for applications in which used and for specific types, sizes, and combinations of conductors and other items connected. B. Bolted Connectors for Conductors and Pipes: Copper or copper alloy, pressure type with at least two bolts. 1. Pipe Connectors: Clamp type, sized for pipe. C. Welded Connectors: Exothermic-welding kits of types recommended by kit manufacturer for materials being joined and installation conditions. PART 3 EXECUTION 3.01 APPLICATIONS A. Conductors: Install solid conductor for No. 8 AWG and smaller, and stranded conductors for No. 6 AWG and larger unless otherwise indicated. 3.02 EQUIPMENT GROUNDING A. Install insulated equipment grounding conductors with all feeders and branch circuits. B. Install insulated equipment grounding conductors with the following items, in addition to those required by NFPA Mountain Haus Boiler Replacement 03/18/2014 100% CD's/Permit GROUNDING AND BONDING FOR ELECTRICAL SYSTEMS 26 0526 - 2 70: 1. Feeders and branch circuits. 2. Lighting circuits. 3. Receptacle circuits. 4. Single-phase motor and appliance branch circuits. 5. Three-phase motor and appliance branch circuits. C. Air-Duct Equipment Circuits: Install insulated equipment grounding conductor to duct-mounted electrical devices operating at 120 V and more, including air cleaners, heaters, dampers, humidifiers, and other duct electrical equipment. Bond conductor to each unit and to air duct and connected metallic piping. D. Water Heater, Heat-Tracing, and Antifrost Heating Cables: Install a separate insulated equipment grounding conductor to each electric water heater and heat-tracing cable. Bond conductor to heater units, piping, connected equipment, and components. 3.03 INSTALLATION A. Grounding Conductors: Route along shortest and straightest paths possible unless otherwise indicated or required by Code. Avoid obstructing access or placing conductors where they may be subjected to strain, impact, or damage. B. Bonding Straps and Jumpers: Install in locations accessible for inspection and maintenance except where routed through short lengths of conduit. 1. Bonding to Structure: Bond straps directly to basic structure, taking care not to penetrate any adjacent parts. 2. Bonding to Equipment Mounted on Vibration Isolation Hangers and Supports: Install bonding so vibration is not transmitted to rigidly mounted equipment. 3. Use exothermic-welded connectors for outdoor locations; if a disconnect-type connection is required, use a bolted clamp. C. Grounding and Bonding for Piping: 1. Metal Water Service Pipe: Install insulated copper grounding conductors, in conduit, from building's main service equipment, or grounding bus, to main metal water service entrances to building. Connect grounding conductors to main metal water service pipes; use a bolted clamp connector or bolt a lug-type connector to a pipe flange by using one of the lug bolts of the flange. Where a dielectric main water fitting is installed, connect grounding conductor on street side of fitting. Bond metal grounding conductor conduit or sleeve to conductor at each end. 2. Water Meter Piping: Use braided-type bonding jumpers to electrically bypass water meters. Connect to pipe with a bolted connector. 3. Bond each aboveground portion of gas piping system downstream from equipment shutoff valve. 3.04 LABELING A. Comply with requirements in Section 26 0553 "Identification for Electrical Systems" for instruction signs. The label or its text shall be green. END OF SECTION 26 0526 Mountain Haus Boiler Replacement 03/18/2014 100% CD's/Permit HANGERS AND SUPPORTS FOR ELECTRICAL SYSTEMS 26 0529 - 1 SECTION 26 0529 - HANGERS AND SUPPORTS FOR ELECTRICAL SYSTEMS PART 1 GENERAL 1.01 RELATED DOCUMENTS A. Drawings and general provisions of the Contract, including General and Supplementary Conditions and Division 01 Specification Sections, apply to this Section. 1.02 SUMMARY A. This Section includes the following: 1. Hangers and supports for electrical equipment and systems. 1.03 DEFINITIONS A. EMT: Electrical metallic tubing. B. IMC: Intermediate metal conduit. C. RMC: Rigid metal conduit. 1.04 PERFORMANCE REQUIREMENTS A. Design supports for multiple raceways capable of supporting combined weight of supported systems and its contents. B. Design equipment supports capable of supporting combined operating weight of supported equipment and connected systems and components. C. Rated Strength: Adequate in tension, shear, and pullout force to resist maximum loads calculated or imposed for this Project, with a minimum structural safety factor of five times the applied force. 1.05 SUBMITTALS A. Product Data: For the following: 1. Steel slotted support systems. 2. Nonmetallic slotted support systems. 1.06 QUALITY ASSURANCE A. Welding: Qualify procedures and personnel according to AWS D1.1/D1.1M, "Structural Welding Code - Steel." B. Comply with NFPA 70. 1.07 COORDINATION A. Coordinate size and location of concrete bases. Cast anchor-bolt inserts into bases. Concrete, reinforcement, and formwork requirements are specified in Division 3. Mountain Haus Boiler Replacement 03/18/2014 100% CD's/Permit HANGERS AND SUPPORTS FOR ELECTRICAL SYSTEMS 26 0529 - 2 PART 2 PRODUCTS 2.01 SUPPORT, ANCHORAGE, AND ATTACHMENT COMPONENTS A. Steel Slotted Support Systems: Comply with MFMA-4, factory-fabricated components for field assembly. 1. Metallic Coatings: Hot-dip galvanized after fabrication and applied according to MFMA-4. 2. Channel Dimensions: Selected for applicable load criteria. B. Raceway and Cable Supports: As described in NECA 1 and NECA 101. C. Conduit and Cable Support Devices: Steel hangers, clamps, and associated fittings, designed for types and sizes of raceway or cable to be supported. D. Structural Steel for Fabricated Supports and Restraints: ASTM A 36/A 36M, steel plates, shapes, and bars; black and galvanized. E. Mounting, Anchoring, and Attachment Components: Items for fastening electrical items or their supports to building surfaces include the following: 1. Powder-Actuated Fasteners: Threaded-steel stud, for use in hardened portland cement concrete, steel, or wood, with tension, shear, and pullout capacities appropriate for supported loads and building materials where used. 2. Mechanical-Expansion Anchors: Insert-wedge-type, stainless steel, for use in hardened portland cement concrete with tension, shear, and pullout capacities appropriate for supported loads and building materials in which used. 3. Concrete Inserts: Steel or malleable-iron, slotted support system units similar to MSS Type 18; complying with MFMA-4 or MSS SP-58. 4. Clamps for Attachment to Steel Structural Elements: MSS SP-58, type suitable for attached structural element. 5. Through Bolts: Structural type, hex head, and high strength. Comply with ASTM A 325. 6. Toggle Bolts: All-steel springhead type. 7. Hanger Rods: Threaded steel. 2.02 FABRICATED METAL EQUIPMENT SUPPORT ASSEMBLIES A. Description: Welded or bolted, structural-steel shapes, shop or field fabricated to fit dimensions of supported equipment. B. Materials: Comply with requirements in Section 05 5000 "Metal Fabrications" for steel shapes and plates. PART 3 EXECUTION 3.01 APPLICATION A. Comply with NECA 1 and NECA 101 for application of hangers and supports for electrical equipment and systems except if requirements in this Section are stricter. B. Maximum Support Spacing and Minimum Hanger Rod Size for Raceway: Space supports for EMT, IMC, and RMC as required by scheduled in NECA 1, where its Table 1 lists maximum spacings less than stated in NFPA 70. Minimum rod size shall be 1/4 inch (6 mm) in diameter. C. Multiple Raceways or Cables: Install trapeze-type supports fabricated with steel slotted support system, sized so capacity can be increased by at least 25 percent in future without exceeding specified design load limits. 1. Secure raceways and cables to these supports with two-bolt conduit clamps. Mountain Haus Boiler Replacement 03/18/2014 100% CD's/Permit HANGERS AND SUPPORTS FOR ELECTRICAL SYSTEMS 26 0529 - 3 3.02 SUPPORT INSTALLATION A. Comply with NECA 1 and NECA 101 for installation requirements except as specified in this Article. B. Strength of Support Assemblies: Where not indicated, select sizes of components so strength will be adequate to carry present and future static loads within specified loading limits. Minimum static design load used for strength determination shall be weight of supported components plus 200 lb (90 kg). C. Mounting and Anchorage of Surface-Mounted Equipment and Components: Anchor and fasten electrical items and their supports to building structural elements by the following methods unless otherwise indicated by code: 1. To Wood: Fasten with lag screws or through bolts. 2. To New Concrete: Bolt to concrete inserts. 3. To Masonry: Approved toggle-type bolts on hollow masonry units and expansion anchor fasteners on solid masonry units. 4. To Existing Concrete: Expansion anchor fasteners. 5. To Steel: Welded threaded studs complying with AWS D1.1/D1.1M, with lock washers and nuts. 6. To Light Steel: Sheet metal screws. 7. Items Mounted on Hollow Walls and Nonstructural Building Surfaces: Mount cabinets, panelboards, disconnect switches, control enclosures, pull and junction boxes, transformers, and other devices on slotted-channel racks attached to substrate. D. Drill holes for expansion anchors in concrete at locations and to depths that avoid reinforcing bars. 3.03 INSTALLATION OF FABRICATED METAL SUPPORTS A. Comply with installation requirements in Section 05 5000 "Metal Fabrications" for site-fabricated metal supports. B. Cut, fit, and place miscellaneous metal supports accurately in location, alignment, and elevation to support and anchor electrical materials and equipment. C. Field Welding: Comply with AWS D1.1/D1.1M. 3.04 PAINTING A. Touchup: Clean field welds and abraded areas of shop paint. Paint exposed areas immediately after erecting hangers and supports. Use same materials as used for shop painting. Comply with SSPC-PA 1 requirements for touching up field-painted surfaces. 1. Apply paint by brush or spray to provide minimum dry film thickness of 2.0 mils (0.05 mm). B. Touchup: Comply with requirements in Division 9 painting Sections for cleaning and touchup painting of field welds, bolted connections, and abraded areas of shop paint on miscellaneous metal. C. Galvanized Surfaces: Clean welds, bolted connections, and abraded areas and apply galvanizing-repair paint to comply with ASTM A 780. END OF SECTION 26 0529 Mountain Haus Boiler Replacement 03/18/2014 100% CD's/Permit RACEWAYS AND BOXES FOR ELECTRICAL SYSTEMS 26 0533 - 1 SECTION 26 0533 - RACEWAYS AND BOXES FOR ELECTRICAL SYSTEMS PART 1 GENERAL 1.01 SUMMARY A. This Section includes raceways, fittings, boxes, enclosures and cabinets for eleectrical wiring. 1.02 DEFINITIONS A. EMT: Eletrical metal tubing. B. FMC: Flexible metal conduit. C. LFMC: Liquidtight flexible metal conduit. 1.03 SUBMITTALS A. Shop Drawings: For the following raceway components, include plans, elevations, sections, and attachment details to other work. 1. Custom enclosures and cabinets. 2. For handholes and boxes for underground wiring, including the following: a. Duct entry provisions, including locations and duct sizes. b. Frame and cover design. c. Grounding details. d. Dimensioned locatoins of cable rack inserts, and pulling-in and lifting irons. e. Joint details. PART 2 PRODUCTS 2.01 METAL CONDUIT AND TUBING A. Listing and Labeling: Metal conduits, tubing, and fittings shall be listed and labeled as defined in NFPA 70, by a qualified testing agency, and marked for intended location and application. B. Rigid Steel Conduit: Comply with ANSI C80.1 and UL 6. C. PVC-Coated Steel Conduit: 1. Comply with NEMA RN 1. 2. Coating Thickness: 0.040 inch (1 mm), minimum. D. EMT: Comply with ANSI C80.3 and UL 797. E. FMC: Comply with UL 1; zinc-coated steel. F. LFMC: Flexible steel conduit with PVC jacket and complying with UL 360. G. Fittings for Conduit (Including all Types and Flexible and Liquidtight), EMT and Cable: Comply with NEMA FB 1 and UL 514B; listed for type and size raceway with which used, and for application and environment in which installed. 1. Fittings for EMT: Die-cast, set-screw or compression Gland type. 2. Coating for Fittings for PVC-Coated Conduit: Minimum thickness, 0.040 inch, with overlapping sleeves protecting threaded joints. Mountain Haus Boiler Replacement 03/18/2014 100% CD's/Permit RACEWAYS AND BOXES FOR ELECTRICAL SYSTEMS 26 0533 - 2 H. Joint Compound for Rigid Steel Conduit or IMC: Listed for use in cable connector assemblies, and compounded for use to lubricate and protect threaded raceway joints from corrosion and enhance their conductivity. 2.02 METAL WIREWAYS A. Description: Sheet metal sized and shaped as indicated, complying with UL 870 and NEMA 250, Type 1 unless otherwise indicated, and sized according to NFPA 70. 1. Metal wireways installed outdoors shall be listed and labeled as defined in NFPA 70, by a qualified testing agency, and marked for intended location and application. B. Fittings and Accessories: Include couplings, offsets, elbows, expansion joints, adapters, hold-down straps, end caps, and other fittings to match and mate with wireways as required for complete system. C. Wireway Covers: Hinged type. D. Finish: Manufacturer's standard enamel finish. 2.03 SURFACE RACEWAYS A. Listing and Labeling: Surface raceways and tele-power poles shall be listed and labeled as defined in NFPA 70, by a qualified testing agency, and marked for intended location and application. B. Surface Metal Raceways: Galvanized steel with snap-on covers, complying with UL 5. Manufacturer's standard enamel finish in color selected by Architect. C. Surface Nonmetallic Raceways: Two- or three-piece construction, complying with UL 5A, and manufactured of rigid PVC with texture and color selected by Architect from manufacturer's standard colors. Product shall comply with UL 94 V-0 requirements for self-extinguishing characteristics. 2.04 BOXES, ENCLOSURES, AND CABINETS A. General Requirements for Boxes, Enclosures, and Cabinets: Boxes, enclosures, and cabinets installed in wet locations shall be listed for use in wet locations. B. Sheet Metal Outlet and Device Boxes: Comply with NEMA OS 1 and UL 514A. C. Cast-Metal Outlet and Device Boxes: Comply with NEMA FB 1, ferrous alloyType FD, with gasketed cover. D. Metal Floor Boxes: 1. Material: Cast metal or sheet metal. 2. Type: Fully adjustable. 3. Shape: Rectangular. 4. Listing and Labeling: Metal floor boxes shall be listed and labeled as defined in NFPA 70, by a qualified testing agency, and marked for intended location and application. E. Paddle Fan Outlet Boxes: Nonadjustable, designed for attachment of paddle fan weighing 70 lb (32 kg). 1. Listing and Labeling: Paddle fan outlet boxes shall be listed and labeled as defined in NFPA 70, by a qualified testing agency, and marked for intended location and application. F. Small Sheet Metal Pull and Junction Boxes: Comply with NEMA OS 1. G. Cast-Metal Access, Pull, and Junction Boxes: Comply with NEMA FB 1 and UL 1773, galvanized, cast iron with gasketed cover. H. Box extensions used to accommodate new building finishes shall be of same material as recessed box. Mountain Haus Boiler Replacement 03/18/2014 100% CD's/Permit RACEWAYS AND BOXES FOR ELECTRICAL SYSTEMS 26 0533 - 3 I. Device Box Dimensions: 4 inches square by 2-1/8 inches deep (100 mm square by 60 mm deep). J. Hinged-Cover Enclosures: NEMA 250, Type 1 with continuous-hinge cover with flush latch unless otherwise indicated. 1. Metal Enclosures: Steel, finished inside and out with manufacturer's standard enamel. K. Cabinets: 1. NEMA 250, Type 1galvanized-steel box with removable interior panel and removable front, finished inside and out with manufacturer's standard enamel. 2. Hinged door in front cover with flush latch and concealed hinge. 3. Key latch to match panelboards. 4. Metal barriers to separate wiring of different systems and voltage. 5. Accessory feet where required for freestanding equipment. 2.05 SLEEVES FOR RACEWAYS A. Steel Pipe Sleeves: ASTM A 53/A 53M, Type E, Grade B, Schedule 40, galvanized steel, plain ends. B. Cast-Iron Pipe Sleeves: Cast or fabricated "wall pipe," equivalent to ductile-iron pressure pipe, with plain ends and integral waterstop, unless otherwise indicated. C. Sleeves for Rectangular Openings: Galvanized sheet steel with minimum 0.052- or 0138-inch (1.3- or 3.5-mm) thickness as indicated and of length to suit application. D. Coordinate sleeve selection and application with selection and application of firestopping specified in Division 7 Section "Through-Penetration Firestop Systems." PART 3 EXECUTION 3.01 RACEWAY APPLICATION A. Indoors: Apply raceway products as specified below unless otherwise indicated: 1. Exposed, Not Subject to Physical Damage: EMT. 2. Exposed, Not Subject to Severe Physical Damage: EMT. 3. Exposed and Subject to Severe Physical Damage: Rigid steel conduit. Includes raceways in the following locations: a. Loading dock. b. Mechanical rooms. 4. Concealed in Ceilings and Interior Walls and Partitions: EMT. 5. Connection to Vibrating Equipment (Including Transformers and Hydraulic, Pneumatic, Electric Solenoid, or Motor-Driven Equipment): FMC, except use LFMC in damp or wet locations. 6. Damp or Wet Locations: Rigid steel conduit. 7. Boxes and Enclosures: NEMA 250, Type 1, except use NEMA 250, Type 4 stainless steel in damp or wet locations. B. Minimum Raceway Size: 3/4-inch (21-mm) trade size. C. Raceway Fittings: Compatible with raceways and suitable for use and location. 1. Rigid Steel Conduit: Use threaded rigid steel conduit fittings unless otherwise indicated. 2. PVC Externally Coated, Rigid Steel Conduits: Use only fittings listed for use with that material. Patch and seal all joints, nicks, and scrapes in PVC coating after installing conduits and fittings. Use sealant recommended by fitting manufacturer. 3. Do not install aluminum conduits in contact with concrete or earth. D. Install surface raceways only where indicated on Drawings. Mountain Haus Boiler Replacement 03/18/2014 100% CD's/Permit RACEWAYS AND BOXES FOR ELECTRICAL SYSTEMS 26 0533 - 4 E. Do not install nonmetallic conduit where ambient temperature exceeds 120 deg F (49 deg C). 3.02 INSTALLATION A. Comply with NECA 1 and NECA 101 for installation requirements applicable to products specified in Part 2 except where requirements on Drawings or in this article are stricter. B. Keep raceways at least 6 inches (150 mm) away from parallel runs of flues and steam or hot-water pipes. Install horizontal raceway runs above water and steam piping. C. Complete raceway installation before starting conductor installation. D. Within Pool and Spa Equipment rooms provide NEMA 4X enclosures and rigid steel conduit. E. Comply with requirements in Section 26 0529 "Hangers and Supports for Electrical Systems" for hangers and supports. F. Arrange stub-ups so curved portions of bends are not visible above finished slab. G. Install no more than the equivalent of three 90-degree bends in any conduit run except for communications conduits, for which fewer bends are allowed. Support within 12 inches of changes in direction. H. Support conduit within 12 inches (300 mm) of enclosures to which attached. I. Threaded Conduit Joints, Exposed to Wet, Damp, Corrosive, or Outdoor Conditions: Apply listed compound to threads of raceway and fittings before making up joints. Follow compound manufacturer's written instructions. J. Coat field-cut threads on PVC-coated raceway with a corrosion-preventing conductive compound prior to assembly. K. Raceway Terminations at Locations Subject to Moisture or Vibration: Use insulating bushings to protect conductors including conductors smaller than No. 4 AWG. L. Install raceways square to the enclosure and terminate at enclosures with locknuts. Install locknuts hand tight plus 1/4 turn more. M. Do not rely on locknuts to penetrate nonconductive coatings on enclosures. Remove coatings in the locknut area prior to assembling conduit to enclosure to assure a continuous ground path. N. Cut conduit perpendicular to the length. For conduits 2-inch (53-mm) trade size and larger, use roll cutter or a guide to make cut straight and perpendicular to the length. O. Install pull wires in empty raceways. Use polypropylene or monofilament plastic line with not less than 200-lb (90-kg) tensile strength. Leave at least 12 inches (300 mm) of slack at each end of pull wire. Cap underground raceways designated as spare above grade alongside raceways in use. P. Surface Raceways: 1. Install surface raceway with a minimum 2-inch (50-mm)radius control at bend points. 2. Secure surface raceway with screws or other anchor-type devices at intervals not exceeding 48 inches (1200 mm) and with no less than two supports per straight raceway section. Support surface raceway according to manufacturer's written instructions. Tape and glue are not acceptable support methods. Q. Install raceway sealing fittings at accessible locations according to NFPA 70 and fill them with listed sealing compound. For concealed raceways, install each fitting in a flush steel box with a blank cover plate having a finish similar to that of adjacent plates or surfaces. Install raceway sealing fittings according to NFPA 70 at the following points: Mountain Haus Boiler Replacement 03/18/2014 100% CD's/Permit RACEWAYS AND BOXES FOR ELECTRICAL SYSTEMS 26 0533 - 5 1. Where conduits pass from warm to cold locations, such as boundaries of refrigerated spaces. 2. Where otherwise required by NFPA 70. R. Flexible Conduit Connections: Comply with NEMA RV3. Use a maximum of 72 inches (1830 mm) of flexible conduit for recessed and semirecessed lighting fixtures, equipment subject to vibration, noise transmission, or movement; and for transformers and motors. 1. Use LFMC in damp or wet locations subject to severe physical damage. 2. Use LFMC or LFNC in damp or wet locations not subject to severe physical damage. S. Locate boxes so that cover or plate will not span different building finishes. T. Support boxes of three gangs or more from more than one side by spanning two framing members or mounting on brackets specifically designed for the purpose. U. Fasten junction and pull boxes to or support from building structure. Do not support boxes by conduits. 3.03 SLEEVE INSTALLATION FOR ELECTRICAL PENETRATIONS A. Coordinate sleeve selection and application with selection and application of firestopping specified in Division 7 Section "Through-Penetration Firestop Systems." 1. Concrete Slabs and Walls: Install sleeves for penetrations unless core-drilled holes or formed openings are used. Install sleeves during erection of slabs and walls. 2. Use pipe sleeves unless penetration arrangement requires rectangular sleeved opening. 3. Rectangular Sleeve Minimum Metal Thickness: a. For sleeve cross-section rectangle perimeter equal to, or greater than 16 inches, thickness shall be 0.052 inch. b. For sleeve cross-section rectangle perimeter equal to, or greater than, 50 inches and 1 or more sides equal to, or greater than, 16 inches, thickness shall be 0.138 inch. 4. Fire-Rated Assemblies: Install sleeves for penetrations of fire-rated floor and wall assemblies unless openings compatible with firestop system used are fabricated during construction of floor or wall. 5. Cust sleeves to length for mounting flush with both surfaces of walls. 6. Extend sleeves installed in floors 2 inches above finished floor level. 7. Size pipe sleeves to provide 1/4-inch (6.4-mm) annular clear space between sleeve and raceway unless sleeve seal is to be installed. 8. Seal space outside of sleeves with grout for penetrations of concrete and masonry and with approved joint compound for gypsum board assemblies. 9. Interior Penetrations of Non-Fire-Rated Walls and Floors: Seal annular space between sleeve and raceway, using joint sealant appropriate for size, depth and location of joint. Refer to Division 7 Section "Joint Selants" for materials and installation. 10. Fire-Rated-Assembly Penetrations: Maintain indicated fire rating of walls, partitions, ceilngs, and floors at raceway penetrations. Install sleeves and seal with firestop materials. Comply with Division 7 Section "Through-Penetration Firestop Systems." 11. Roof-Penetration Sleeves: Seal penetration of individual raceways with flexible, boot-type flashing units applied in coordinatoin with roofing work. 12. Aboveground, Exterior-Wall Penetrations: Seal penetrations using sleeves and mechanical sleeve seals. Select sleeve size to allow for 1-inch annular clear space between pipe and sleeve for installing mehcanical sleeve seals. 3.04 SLEEVE-SEAL INSTALLATION A. Install to seal underground, exterior wall penetrations. B. Use type and number of sealing elements recommended by manufacturer for raceway material and size. Position raceway in center of sleeve. Assemble mechanical sleeve seals and install in annular space between raceway and sleeve. Tighten bolts against pressure plates that cause sealing elements to expand and make watertight seal. Mountain Haus Boiler Replacement 03/18/2014 100% CD's/Permit RACEWAYS AND BOXES FOR ELECTRICAL SYSTEMS 26 0533 - 6 3.05 FIRESTOPPING A. Apply firestopping to electrical penetrations of fire-rated floor and wall assemblies to restore original fire-resistance rating of assembly. Firestopping materials and installation requirements are specified in Division 7 Section "Through-Penetration Firestop Systems." 3.06 PROTECTION A. Provide final protection and maintain conditions that ensure coatings, finishes and cabinets are without damage or deterioration at time of Substantial Completion. 1. Repair damage to galvanized finishes with zinc-rich paint recommended by manufacturer. 2. Repair damage to PVC coatings or paint finishes with matching touchup coating recommended by manufacturer. END OF SECTION 26 0533 Mountain Haus Boiler Replacement 03/18/2014 100% CD's/Permit IDENTIFICATION FOR ELECTRICAL SYSTEMS 26 0553 - 1 SECTION 26 0553 - IDENTIFICATION FOR ELECTRICAL SYSTEMS PART 1 GENERAL 1.01 RELATED DOCUMENTS A. Drawings and general provisions of the Contract, including General and Supplementary Conditions and Division 01 Specification Sections, apply to this Section. 1.02 SUMMARY A. Section Includes: 1. Identification for raceways. 2. Identification for conductors. 3. Warning labels and signs. 4. Instruction signs. 5. Equipment identification labels. 1.03 COORDINATION A. Coordinate identification names, abbreviations, colors, and other features with requirements in other Sections requiring identification applications, Drawings, Shop Drawings, manufacturer's wiring diagrams, and the Operation and Maintenance Manual; and with those required by codes, standards, and 29 CFR 1910.145. Use consistent designations throughout Project. B. Coordinate installation of identifying devices with completion of covering and painting of surfaces where devices are to be applied. C. Coordinate installation of identifying devices with location of access panels and doors. D. Install identifying devices before installing acoustical ceilings and similar concealment. PART 2 PRODUCTS 2.01 POWER AND CONTROL RACEWAY IDENTIFICATION MATERIALS A. Comply with ANSI A13.1 for minimum size of letters for legend and for minimum length of color field for each raceway size. B. Colors for Raceways Carrying Circuits at 600 V or Less: 1. Black letters on an orange field. 2. Legend: Indicate voltage and system or service type. C. Vinyl Labels for Raceways Carrying Circuits at 600 V or Less: Preprinted, flexible label laminated with a clear, weather- and chemical-resistant coating and matching wraparound clear adhesive tape for securing ends of legend label. 2.02 CONDUCTOR IDENTIFICATION MATERIALS A. Color-Coding Conductor Tape: Colored, self-adhesive vinyl tape not less than 3 mils thick by 1 to 2 inches wide. Mountain Haus Boiler Replacement 03/18/2014 100% CD's/Permit IDENTIFICATION FOR ELECTRICAL SYSTEMS 26 0553 - 2 2.03 FLOOR MARKING TAPE A. 2-inch- wide, 5-mil pressure-sensitive vinyl tape, with black and white stripes and clear vinyl overlay. 2.04 WARNING LABELS AND SIGNS A. Comply with NFPA 70 and 29 CFR 1910.145. B. Self-Adhesive Warning Labels: Factory-printed, multicolor, pressure-sensitive adhesive labels, configured for display on front cover, door, or other access to equipment unless otherwise indicated. C. Warning label and sign shall include, but are not limited to, the following legends: 1. Multiple Power Source Warning: "DANGER - ELECTRICAL SHOCK HAZARD - EQUIPMENT HAS MULTIPLE POWER SOURCES." 2. Fault Current Values: Indicate maximum available fault current and date of fault current calculation in accordance with NEC 110.24. 2.05 INSTRUCTION SIGNS A. Engraved, laminated acrylic or melamine plastic, minimum 1/16 inch thick for signs up to 20 sq. inches and 1/8 inch thick for larger sizes. 1. Engraved legend with black letters on white face. 2. Punched or drilled for mechanical fasteners. 3. Framed with mitered acrylic molding and arranged for attachment at applicable equipment. 2.06 EQUIPMENT IDENTIFICATION LABELS A. Engraved, Laminated Acrylic or Melamine Label: Punched or drilled for screw mounting. White letters on a dark-gray background. Minimum letter height shall be 3/8 inch. B. Stenciled Legend: In nonfading, waterproof, black ink or paint. Minimum letter height shall be 1 inch. 2.07 MISCELLANEOUS IDENTIFICATION PRODUCTS A. Paint: Comply with requirements in painting Sections for paint materials and application requirements. Select paint system applicable for surface material and location (exterior or interior). B. Fasteners for Labels and Signs: Self-tapping, stainless-steel screws or stainless-steel machine screws with nuts and flat and lock washers. PART 3 EXECUTION 3.01 INSTALLATION A. Verify identity of each item before installing identification products. B. Location: Install identification materials and devices at locations for most convenient viewing without interference with operation and maintenance of equipment. C. Apply identification devices to surfaces that require finish after completing finish work. D. Self-Adhesive Identification Products: Clean surfaces before application, using materials and methods recommended by manufacturer of identification device. Mountain Haus Boiler Replacement 03/18/2014 100% CD's/Permit IDENTIFICATION FOR ELECTRICAL SYSTEMS 26 0553 - 3 E. Attach signs and plastic labels that are not self-adhesive type with mechanical fasteners appropriate to the location and substrate. F. Attach plastic raceway and cable labels that are not self-adhesive type with clear vinyl tape with adhesive appropriate to the location and substrate. G. System Identification Color-Coding Bands for Raceways and Cables: Each color-coding band shall completely encircle cable or conduit. Place adjacent bands of two-color markings in contact, side by side. Locate bands at changes in direction, at penetrations of walls and floors, at 50-foot maximum intervals in straight runs, and at 25-foot maximum intervals in congested areas. H. I. Painted Identification: Comply with requirements in painting Sections for surface preparation and paint application. 3.02 IDENTIFICATION SCHEDULE A. Accessible Raceways and Metal-Clad Cables, 600 V or Less, for Service, Feeder, and Branch Circuits More Than 30 A, and 120 V to ground: Identify with self-adhesive vinyl label. Install labels at 30-foot maximum intervals. B. Accessible Raceways and Cables within Buildings: Identify the covers of each junction and pull box of the following systems with self-adhesive vinyl labels with the wiring system legend and system voltage. C. Power-Circuit Conductor Identification, 600 V or Less: For conductors in vaults, pull and junction boxes, manholes, and handholes, use color-coding conductor tape to identify the phase. 1. Color-Coding for Phase and Voltage Level Identification, 600 V or Less: Use colors listed below for ungrounded feeder and branch-circuit conductors. a. Color shall be factory applied or field applied for sizes larger than No. 8 AWG, if authorities having jurisdiction permit. b. Colors for 208/120-V Circuits: 1) Phase A: Black. 2) Phase B: Red. 3) Phase C: Blue. c. Field-Applied, Color-Coding Conductor Tape: Apply in half-lapped turns for a minimum distance of 6 inches from terminal points and in boxes where splices or taps are made. Apply last two turns of tape with no tension to prevent possible unwinding. Locate bands to avoid obscuring factory cable markings. D. Power-Circuit Conductor Identification, More than 600 V: For conductors in vaults, pull and junction boxes, manholes, and handholes, use nonmetallic plastic tag holder with adhesive-backed phase tags, and a separate tag with the circuit designation. E. Install instructional sign including the color-code for grounded and ungrounded conductors using adhesive-film-type labels. F. Conductors to Be Extended in the Future: Attach marker tape to conductors and list source. G. H. Operating Instruction Signs: Install instruction signs to facilitate proper operation and maintenance of electrical systems and items to which they connect. Install instruction signs with approved legend where instructions are needed for system or equipment operation. I. Equipment Identification Labels: On each unit of equipment, install unique designation label that is consistent with wiring diagrams, schedules, and the Operation and Maintenance Manual. Apply labels to disconnect Mountain Haus Boiler Replacement 03/18/2014 100% CD's/Permit IDENTIFICATION FOR ELECTRICAL SYSTEMS 26 0553 - 4 switches and protection equipment, central or master units, control panels, control stations, terminal cabinets, and racks of each system. Systems include power, lighting, control, communication, signal, monitoring, and alarm systems unless equipment is provided with its own identification. 1. Labeling Instructions: a. Indoor Equipment: Engraved, laminated acrylic or melamine label. Unless otherwise indicated, provide a single line of text with 1/2-inch- high letters on 1-1/2-inch- high label; where two lines of text are required, use labels 2 inches high. b. Elevated Components: Increase sizes of labels and letters to those appropriate for viewing from the floor. c. Unless provided with self-adhesive means of attachment, fasten labels with appropriate mechanical fasteners that do not change the NEMA or NRTL rating of the enclosure. 2. Equipment to Be Labeled: a. Panelboards: Typewritten directory of circuits in the location provided by panelboard manufacturer. Panelboard identification shall be engraved, laminated acrylic or melamine label. b. Enclosures and electrical cabinets. c. Access doors and panels for concealed electrical items. d. Enclosed switches. e. Enclosed circuit breakers. f. Enclosed controllers. g. Variable-speed controllers. h. Push-button stations. END OF SECTION 26 0553 Mountain Haus Boiler Replacement 03/18/2014 100% CD's/Permit LOW-VOLTAGE TRANSFORMERS 26 2200 - 1 SECTION 26 2200 - LOW-VOLTAGE TRANSFORMERS PART 1 GENERAL 1.01 RELATED DOCUMENTS A. Drawings and general provisions of the Contract, including General and Supplementary Conditions and Division 01 Specification Sections, apply to this Section. 1.02 SUMMARY A. This Section includes the following types of dry-type transformers rated 600 V and less, with capacities up to 1000 kVA: 1. Distribution transformers. 1.03 SUBMITTALS A. Product Data: Include rated nameplate data, capacities, weights, dimensions, minimum clearances, installed devices and features, and performance for each type and size of transformer indicated. B. Shop Drawings: Detail equipment assemblies and indicate dimensions, weights, loads, required clearances, method of field assembly, components, and location and size of each field connection. 1. Wiring Diagrams: Power, signal, and control wiring. 1.04 CLOSEOUT SUBMITTALS A. Operation and Maintenance Data: For transformers to include in emergency, operation, and maintenance manuals. 1.05 QUALITY ASSURANCE A. Source Limitations: Obtain each transformer type through one source from a single manufacturer. B. Electrical Components, Devices, and Accessories: Listed and labeled as defined in NFPA 70, Article 100, by a testing agency acceptable to authorities having jurisdiction, and marked for intended use. C. Comply with IEEE C57.12.91, "Test Code for Dry-Type Distribution and Power Transformers." 1.06 COORDINATION A. Coordinate size and location of concrete bases with actual transformer provided. Cast anchor-bolt inserts into bases. Concrete, reinforcement, and formwork requirements are specified with concrete. B. Coordinate installation of wall-mounting and structure-hanging supports with actual transformer provided. PART 2 PRODUCTS 2.01 GENERAL TRANSFORMER REQUIREMENTS A. Description: Factory-assembled and -tested, air-cooled units for 60-Hz service. B. Cores: Grain-oriented, non-aging silicon steel. Mountain Haus Boiler Replacement 03/18/2014 100% CD's/Permit LOW-VOLTAGE TRANSFORMERS 26 2200 - 2 C. Coils: Continuous windings without splices except for taps. 1. Internal Coil Connections: Brazed or pressure type. 2. Coil Material: Copper. 2.02 DISTRIBUTION TRANSFORMERS A. Comply with NEMA ST 20, and list and label as complying with UL 1561. B. Cores: One leg per phase. C. Enclosure: Ventilated, NEMA 250, Type 2. 1. Core and coil shall be encapsulated within resin compound, sealing out moisture and air. D. Transformer Enclosure Finish: Comply with NEMA 250. 1. Finish Color: Gray. E. Taps for Transformers 25 kVA and Larger: Two 2.5 percent taps above and two 2.5 percent taps below normal full capacity. F. Insulation Class: 220 deg C, UL-component-recognized insulation system with a maximum of 80 deg C rise above 40 deg C ambient temperature. G. Energy Efficiency for Transformers Rated 15 kVA and Larger: 1. Complying with NEMA TP 1, Class 1 efficiency levels. 2. Tested according to NEMA TP 2. H. Electrostatic Shielding: Each winding shall have an independent, single, full-width copper electrostatic shield arranged to minimize interwinding capacitance. 1. Arrange coil leads and terminal strips to minimize capacitive coupling between input and output terminals. 2. Include special terminal for grounding the shield. 3. Shield Effectiveness: a. Capacitance between Primary and Secondary Windings: Not to exceed 33 picofarads over a frequency range of 20 Hz to 1 MHz. b. Common-Mode Noise Attenuation: Minimum of minus 120 dBA at 0.5 to 1.5 kHz; minimum of minus 65 dBA at 1.5 to 100 kHz. c. Normal-Mode Noise Attenuation: Minimum of minus 52 dBA at 1.5 to 10 kHz. I. Wall Brackets: Manufacturer's standard brackets. 2.03 IDENTIFICATION DEVICES A. Nameplates: Engraved, laminated-plastic or metal nameplate for each distribution buck-boost transformer, mounted with corrosion-resistant screws. Nameplates and label products are specified in Section 26 0553 "Identification for Electrical Systems." 2.04 SOURCE QUALITY CONTROL A. Test and inspect transformers according to IEEE C57.12.91. B. Factory Sound-Level Tests: Conduct sound-level tests on equipment for this Project. PART 3 EXECUTION 3.01 EXAMINATION A. Examine conditions for compliance with enclosure- and ambient-temperature requirements for each transformer. Mountain Haus Boiler Replacement 03/18/2014 100% CD's/Permit LOW-VOLTAGE TRANSFORMERS 26 2200 - 3 B. Verify that field measurements are as needed to maintain working clearances required by NFPA 70 and manufacturer's written instructions. C. Examine walls, floors, roofs, and concrete bases for suitable mounting conditions where transformers will be installed. D. Verify that ground connections are in place and requirements in Section 26 0526 "Grounding and Bonding for Electrical Systems" have been met. Maximum ground resistance shall be 5 ohms at location of transformer. E. Proceed with installation only after unsatisfactory conditions have been corrected. 3.02 INSTALLATION A. Install wall-mounting transformers level and plumb with wall brackets fabricated by transformer manufacturer. B. Construct concrete bases and anchor floor-mounting transformers according to manufacturer's written instructions and requirements in Section 26 0529 "Hangers and Supports for Electrical Systems." 3.03 CONNECTIONS A. Ground equipment according to Section 26 0526 "Grounding and Bonding for Electrical Systems." B. Connect wiring according to Section 26 0519 "Low-Voltage Electrical Power Conductors and Cables." 3.04 FIELD QUALITY CONTROL A. Manufacturer's Field Service: Engage a factory-authorized service representative to inspect, test, and adjust components, assemblies, and equipment installations, including connections. Report results in writing. B. Tests and Inspections: 1. Perform each visual and mechanical inspection and electrical test stated in NETA Acceptance Testing Specification. Certify compliance with test parameters. C. Remove and replace units that do not pass tests or inspections and retest as specified above. D. Test Labeling: On completion of satisfactory testing of each unit, attach a dated and signed "Satisfactory Test" label to tested component. 3.05 ADJUSTING A. Output Settings Report: Prepare a written report recording output voltages and tap settings. 3.06 CLEANING A. Vacuum dirt and debris; do not use compressed air to assist in cleaning. END OF SECTION 26 2200 Mountain Haus Boiler Replacement 03/18/2014 100% CD's/Permit SWITCHBOARDS 26 2413 - 1 SECTION 26 2413 - SWITCHBOARDS PART 1 GENERAL 1.01 RELATED DOCUMENTS A. Drawings and general provisions of the Contract, including General and Supplementary Conditions and Division 01 Specification Sections, apply to this Section. 1.02 SUMMARY A. Section Includes: 1. Service and distribution switchboards rated 600 V and less. 2. Transient voltage suppression devices. 3. Disconnecting and overcurrent protective devices. 4. Instrumentation. 5. Identification. 6. Mimic bus. 1.03 SUBMITTALS A. Product Data: For each type of switchboard, overcurrent protective device, transient voltage suppression device, ground-fault protector, accessory, and component indicated. Include dimensions and manufacturers' technical data on features, performance, electrical characteristics, ratings, accessories, and finishes. B. Shop Drawings: For each switchboard and related equipment. 1. Include dimensioned plans, elevations, sections, and details, including required clearances and service space around equipment. Show tabulations of installed devices, equipment features, and ratings. 2. Detail enclosure types for types other than NEMA 250, Type 1. 3. Detail bus configuration, current, and voltage ratings. 4. Detail short-circuit current rating of switchboards and overcurrent protective devices. 5. Include descriptive documentation of optional barriers specified for electrical insulation and isolation. 6. Detail utility company's metering provisions with indication of approval by utility company. 7. Include evidence of NRTL listing for series rating of installed devices. 8. Detail features, characteristics, ratings, and factory settings of individual overcurrent protective devices and auxiliary components. 9. Include time-current coordination curves for each type and rating of overcurrent protective device included in switchboards. Submit on translucent log-log graft paper; include selectable ranges for each type of overcurrent protective device. 10. Include diagram and details of proposed mimic bus. 11. Include schematic and wiring diagrams for power, signal, and control wiring. C. Samples: Representative portion of mimic bus with specified material and finish, for color selection. 1.04 CLOSEOUT SUBMITTALS A. Operation and Maintenance Data: For switchboards and components to include in emergency, operation, and maintenance manuals. In addition to items specified in Section 017823 "Operation and Maintenance Data," include the following: 1. Routine maintenance requirements for switchboards and all installed components. 2. Manufacturer's written instructions for testing and adjusting overcurrent protective devices. 3. Time-current coordination curves for each type and rating of overcurrent protective device included in switchboards. Submit on translucent log-log graft paper; include selectable ranges for each type of overcurrent protective device. Mountain Haus Boiler Replacement 03/18/2014 100% CD's/Permit SWITCHBOARDS 26 2413 - 2 1.05 QUALITY ASSURANCE A. Source Limitations: Obtain switchboards, overcurrent protective devices, components, and accessories from single source from single manufacturer. B. Product Selection for Restricted Space: Drawings indicate maximum dimensions for switchboards including clearances between switchboards and adjacent surfaces and other items. Comply with indicated maximum dimensions. C. Comply with NEMA PB 2. D. Comply with NFPA 70. E. Comply with UL 891. 1.06 DELIVERY, STORAGE, AND HANDLING A. Deliver switchboards in sections or lengths that can be moved past obstructions in delivery path. B. Handle and prepare switchboards for installation according to NEMA PB 2.1. 1.07 PROJECT CONDITIONS A. Installation Pathway: Remove and replace access fencing, doors, lift-out panels, and structures to provide pathway for moving switchboards into place. B. Environmental Limitations: 1. Do not deliver or install switchboards until spaces are enclosed and weathertight, wet work in spaces is complete and dry, work above switchboards is complete, and temporary HVAC system is operating and maintaining ambient temperature and humidity conditions at occupancy levels during the remainder of the construction period. 2. Rate equipment for continuous operation under the following conditions unless otherwise indicated: a. Ambient Temperature: Not exceeding 104 deg F. b. Altitude: Not exceeding 6600 feet. C. Service Conditions: NEMA PB 2, usual service conditions, as follows: 1. Ambient temperatures within limits specified. 2. Altitude not exceeding 6600 feet. D. Interruption of Existing Electric Service: Do not interrupt electric service to facilities occupied by Owner or others unless permitted under the following conditions and then only after arranging to provide temporary electric service according to requirements indicated: 1. Notify Architect no fewer than seven days in advance of proposed interruption of electric service. 2. Indicate method of providing temporary electric service. 3. Do not proceed with interruption of electric service without Architect's written permission. 4. Comply with NFPA 70E. 1.08 COORDINATION A. Coordinate layout and installation of switchboards and components with other construction that penetrates walls or is supported by them, including electrical and other types of equipment, raceways, piping, encumbrances to workspace clearance requirements, and adjacent surfaces. Maintain required workspace clearances and required clearances for equipment access doors and panels. B. Coordinate sizes and locations of concrete bases with actual equipment provided. Cast anchor-bolt inserts into bases. Concrete, reinforcement, and formwork requirements are specified with concrete. Mountain Haus Boiler Replacement 03/18/2014 100% CD's/Permit SWITCHBOARDS 26 2413 - 3 PART 2 PRODUCTS 2.01 MANUFACTURED UNITS A. Basis-of-Design Product: Subject to compliance with requirements, provide Siemens or comparable product by one of the following: 1. Eaton Electrical Inc.; Cutler-Hammer Business Unit. 2. General Electric Company; GE Consumer & Industrial - Electrical Distribution. 3. Siemens Energy & Automation, Inc. 4. Square D; a brand of Schneider Electric. B. Front-Connected, Front-Accessible Switchboards: 1. Main Devices: Fixed, individually mounted. 2. Branch Devices: Panel mounted. 3. Sections front and rear aligned. C. Indoor Enclosures: Steel, NEMA 250, Type 1. D. Enclosure Finish for Indoor Units: Factory-applied finish in manufacturer's standard gray finish over a rust-inhibiting primer on treated metal surface. E. Barriers: Between adjacent switchboard sections. F. Insulation and isolation for main bus of main section and main and vertical buses of feeder sections. G. Utility Metering Compartment: Fabricated, barrier compartment and section complying with utility company's requirements; hinged sealed door; buses provisioned for mounting utility company's current transformers and potential transformers or potential taps as required by utility company. If separate vertical section is required for utility metering, match and align with basic switchboard. Provide service entrance label and necessary applicable service entrance features. H. Customer Metering Compartment: A separate customer metering compartment and section with front hinged door, for indicated metering, and current transformers for each meter. Current transformer secondary wiring shall be terminated on shorting-type terminal blocks. Include potential transformers having primary and secondary fuses with disconnecting means and secondary wiring terminated on terminal blocks. I. Bus Transition and Incoming Pull Sections: Matched and aligned with basic switchboard. J. Hinged Front Panels: Allow access to circuit breaker, metering, accessory, and blank compartments. K. Pull Box on Top of Switchboard: 1. Adequate ventilation to maintain temperature in pull box within same limits as switchboard. 2. Set back from front to clear circuit-breaker removal mechanism. 3. Removable covers shall form top, front, and sides. Top covers at rear shall be easily removable for drilling and cutting. 4. Bottom shall be insulating, fire-resistive material with separate holes for cable drops into switchboard. 5. Cable supports shall be arranged to facilitate cabling and adequate to support cables indicated, including those for future installation. L. Buses and Connections: Three phase, four wire unless otherwise indicated. 1. Phase- and Neutral-Bus Material: Hard-drawn copper of 98 percent conductivity, silver-plated, or tin-plated, high-strength, electrical-grade aluminum alloy. 2. Load Terminals: Insulated, rigidly braced, runback bus extensions, of same material as through buses, equipped with mechanical connectors for outgoing circuit conductors. Provide load terminals for future circuit-breaker positions at full-ampere rating of circuit-breaker position. 3. Ground Bus: 1/4-by-2-inch- Minimum-size required by UL 891,hard-drawn copper of 98 percent conductivity, equipped with mechanical connectors for feeder and branch-circuit ground conductors. For Mountain Haus Boiler Replacement 03/18/2014 100% CD's/Permit SWITCHBOARDS 26 2413 - 4 busway feeders, extend insulated equipment grounding cable to busway ground connection and support cable at intervals in vertical run. 4. Main Phase Buses and Equipment Ground Buses: Uniform capacity for entire length of switchboard's main and distribution sections. Provide for future extensions from both ends. 5. Neutral Buses: 100 percent of the ampacity of phase buses unless otherwise indicated, equipped with mechanical connectors for outgoing circuit neutral cables. Brace bus extensions for busway feeder neutral bus. 6. Isolation Barrier Access Provisions: Permit checking of bus-bolt tightness. M. Future Devices: Equip compartments with mounting brackets, supports, bus connections, and appurtenances at full rating of circuit-breaker compartment. N. Bus-Bar Insulation: Factory-applied, flame-retardant, tape wrapping of individual bus bars or flame-retardant, spray-applied insulation. Minimum insulation temperature rating of 105 deg C. 2.02 TRANSIENT VOLTAGE SUPPRESSION DEVICES A. Basis-of-Design Product: Subject to compliance with requirements, provide Insert manufacturer's name; product name or designation or comparable product by one of the following: 1. Eaton Electrical Inc.; Cutler-Hammer Business Unit. 2. General Electric Company; GE Consumer & Industrial - Electrical Distribution. 3. Siemens Energy & Automation, Inc. 4. Square D; a brand of Schneider Electric. B. Surge Protection Device Description: IEEE C62.41-compliant, integrally mounted, plug-in, solid-state, parallel-connected, modular (with field-replaceable modules) type, with sine-wave tracking suppression and filtering modules, UL 1449, second edition, short-circuit current rating matching or exceeding the switchboard short-circuit rating, and with the following features and accessories: 1. Fuses, rated at 200-kA interrupting capacity. 2. Fabrication using bolted compression lugs for internal wiring. 3. Integral disconnect switch. 4. Redundant suppression circuits. 5. Redundant replaceable modules. 6. Arrangement with wire connections to phase buses, neutral bus, and ground bus. 7. LED indicator lights for power and protection status. 8. Audible alarm, with silencing switch, to indicate when protection has failed. 9. Form-C contacts rated at 5 A and 250-V ac, one normally open and one normally closed, for remote monitoring of system operation. Contacts shall reverse position on failure of any surge diversion module or on opening of any current-limiting device. Coordinate with building power monitoring and control system. 10. Six-digit, transient-event counter set to totalize transient surges. C. Peak Single-Impulse Surge Current Rating: 120 kA per mode/240 kA per phase. D. Withstand Capabilities: 12,000 IEEE C62.41, Category C3 (10 kA), 8-by-20-mic.sec. surges with less than 5 percent change in clamping voltage. E. Protection modes and UL 1449 SVR for grounded wye circuits with 480Y/277 -V, three-phase, four-wire circuits shall be as follows: 1. Line to Neutral: 800 V for 480Y/277. 2. Line to Ground: 800 V for 480Y/277. 3. Neutral to Ground: 800 V for 480Y/277. 2.03 DISCONNECTING AND OVERCURRENT PROTECTIVE DEVICES A. Molded-Case Circuit Breaker (MCCB): Comply with UL 489, with series-connected rating to meet available fault currents. Mountain Haus Boiler Replacement 03/18/2014 100% CD's/Permit SWITCHBOARDS 26 2413 - 5 1. Thermal-Magnetic Circuit Breakers: Inverse time-current element for low-level overloads, and instantaneous magnetic trip element for short circuits. Adjustable magnetic trip setting for circuit-breaker frame sizes 250 A and larger. 2. Adjustable Instantaneous-Trip Circuit Breakers: Magnetic trip element with front-mounted, field-adjustable trip setting. 3. Electronic trip circuit breakers with rms sensing; field-replaceable rating plug or field-replicable electronic trip; and the following field-adjustable settings: a. Instantaneous trip. b. Long- and short-time pickup levels. c. Long- and short-time time adjustments. d. Ground-fault pickup level, time delay, and I2t response. 4. GFCI Circuit Breakers: Single- and two-pole configurations with Class A ground-fault protection (6-mA trip). 5. Ground-Fault Equipment Protection (GFEP) Circuit Breakers: Class B ground-fault protection (30-mA trip). 6. Molded-Case Circuit-Breaker (MCCB) Features and Accessories: a. Standard frame sizes, trip ratings, and number of poles. b. Lugs: Mechanical style, suitable for number, size, trip ratings, and conductor material. c. Application Listing: Appropriate for application; Type SWD for switching fluorescent lighting loads; Type HID for feeding fluorescent and high-intensity discharge (HID) lighting circuits. d. Ground-Fault Protection: Remote-mounted relay and trip unit with adjustable pickup and time-delay settings, push-to-test feature, and ground-fault indicator. e. Shunt Trip: 120-V trip coil energized from separate circuit, set to trip at 75 percent of rated voltage. f. Undervoltage Trip: Set to operate at 35 to 75 percent of rated voltage without intentional time delay. B. Fused Switch: NEMA KS 1, Type HD; clips to accommodate specified fuses; lockable handle. C. Fuses are specified in Section 262813 "Fuses." 2.04 INSTRUMENTATION A. Multifunction Digital-Metering Monitor: Microprocessor-based unit suitable for three- or four-wire systems and with the following features: 1. Switch-selectable digital display of the following values with maximum accuracy tolerances as indicated: a. Phase Currents, Each Phase: Plus or minus 1 percent. b. Phase-to-Phase Voltages, Three Phase: Plus or minus 1 percent. c. Phase-to-Neutral Voltages, Three Phase: Plus or minus 1 percent. d. Megawatts: Plus or minus 2 percent. e. Megavars: Plus or minus 2 percent. f. Power Factor: Plus or minus 2 percent. g. Frequency: Plus or minus 0.5 percent. h. Accumulated Energy, Megawatt Hours: Plus or minus 2 percent; accumulated values unaffected by power outages up to 72 hours. i. Megawatt Demand: Plus or minus 2 percent; demand interval programmable from five to 60 minutes. j. Contact devices to operate remote impulse-totalizing demand meter. 2. Mounting: Display and control unit flush or semiflush mounted in instrument compartment door. 2.05 IDENTIFICATION A. Mimic Bus: Continuously integrated mimic bus factory applied to front of switchboard. Arrange in single-line diagram format, using symbols and letter designations consistent with final mimic-bus diagram. B. Coordinate mimic-bus segments with devices in switchboard sections to which they are applied. Produce a concise visual presentation of principal switchboard components and connections. Mountain Haus Boiler Replacement 03/18/2014 100% CD's/Permit SWITCHBOARDS 26 2413 - 6 C. Presentation Media: Painted graphics in color contrasting with background color to represent bus and components, complete with lettered designations. D. Service Equipment Label: NRTL labeled for use as service equipment for switchboards with one or more service disconnecting and overcurrent protective devices. PART 3 EXECUTION 3.01 EXAMINATION A. Receive, inspect, handle, and store switchboards according to NEMA PB 2.1. B. Examine switchboards before installation. Reject switchboards that are moisture damaged or physically damaged. C. Examine elements and surfaces to receive switchboards for compliance with installation tolerances and other conditions affecting performance of the Work. D. Proceed with installation only after unsatisfactory conditions have been corrected. 3.02 INSTALLATION A. Install switchboards and accessories according to NEMA PB 2.1. B. Equipment Mounting: Install switchboards on concrete base, 4-inch nominal thickness. Comply with requirements for concrete base specified in Section 033000 "Cast-in-Place Concrete." 1. Install dowel rods to connect concrete base to concrete floor. Unless otherwise indicated, install dowel rods on 18-inch centers around the full perimeter of concrete base. 2. For supported equipment, install epoxy-coated anchor bolts that extend through concrete base and anchor into structural concrete floor. 3. Place and secure anchorage devices. Use setting drawings, templates, diagrams, instructions, and directions furnished with items to be embedded. 4. Install anchor bolts to elevations required for proper attachment to switchboards. C. Temporary Lifting Provisions: Remove temporary lifting eyes, channels, and brackets and temporary blocking of moving parts from switchboard units and components. D. Operating Instructions: Frame and mount the printed basic operating instructions for switchboards, including control and key interlocking sequences and emergency procedures. Fabricate frame of finished wood or metal and cover instructions with clear acrylic plastic. Mount on front of switchboards. E. Install filler plates in unused spaces of panel-mounted sections. F. Install overcurrent protective devices, transient voltage suppression devices, and instrumentation. 1. Set field-adjustable switches and circuit-breaker trip ranges. G. Comply with NECA 1. 3.03 CONNECTIONS A. Comply with requirements for terminating feeder bus specified in Section 262500 "Enclosed Bus Assemblies." Drawings indicate general arrangement of bus, fittings, and specialties. B. Comply with requirements for terminating cable trays specified in Section 260536 "Cable Trays for Electrical Systems." Drawings indicate general arrangement of cable trays, fittings, and specialties. Mountain Haus Boiler Replacement 03/18/2014 100% CD's/Permit SWITCHBOARDS 26 2413 - 7 3.04 IDENTIFICATION A. Identify field-installed conductors, interconnecting wiring, and components; provide warning signs complying with requirements for identification specified in Section 260553 "Identification for Electrical Systems." B. Switchboard Nameplates: Label each switchboard compartment with a nameplate complying with requirements for identification specified in Section 260553 "Identification for Electrical Systems." C. Device Nameplates: Label each disconnecting and overcurrent protective device and each meter and control device mounted in compartment doors with a nameplate complying with requirements for identification specified in Section 260553 "Identification for Electrical Systems." 3.05 FIELD QUALITY CONTROL A. Manufacturer's Field Service: Engage a factory-authorized service representative to inspect, test, and adjust components, assemblies, and equipment installations, including connections. B. Acceptance Testing Preparation: 1. Test insulation resistance for each switchboard bus, component, connecting supply, feeder, and control circuit. 2. Test continuity of each circuit. C. Tests and Inspections: 1. Test and adjust controls, remote monitoring, and safeties. Replace damaged and malfunctioning controls and equipment. D. Switchboard will be considered defective if it does not pass tests and inspections. 3.06 ADJUSTING A. Adjust moving parts and operable components to function smoothly, and lubricate as recommended by manufacturer. 3.07 PROTECTION A. Temporary Heating: Apply temporary heat, to maintain temperature according to manufacturer's written instructions, until switchboard is ready to be energized and placed into service. 3.08 DEMONSTRATION A. Engage a factory-authorized service representative to train Owner's maintenance personnel to adjust, operate, and maintain switchboards, overcurrent protective devices, instrumentation, and accessories, and to use and reprogram microprocessor-based trip, monitoring, and communication units. END OF SECTION 262413 Mountain Haus Boiler Replacement 03/18/2014 100% CD's/Permit PANELBOARDS 26 2416 - 1 SECTION 26 2416 - PANELBOARDS PART 1 GENERAL 1.01 RELATED DOCUMENTS A. Drawings and general provisions of the Contract, including General and Supplementary Conditions and Division 01 Specification Sections, apply to this Section. 1.02 SUMMARY A. Section Includes: 1. Distribution panelboards. 2. Lighting and appliance branch-circuit panelboards. 1.03 DEFINITIONS A. SVR: Suppressed voltage rating. B. TVSS: Transient voltage surge suppressor. 1.04 SUBMITTALS A. Product Data: For each type of panelboard, switching and overcurrent protective device, transient voltage suppression device, accessory, and component indicated. Include dimensions and manufacturers' technical data on features, performance, electrical characteristics, ratings, and finishes. B. Shop Drawings: For each panelboard and related equipment. 1. Include dimensioned plans, elevations, sections, and details. Show tabulations of installed devices, equipment features, and ratings. 2. Detail enclosure types and details for types other than NEMA 250, Type 1. 3. Detail bus configuration, current, and voltage ratings. 4. Short-circuit current rating of panelboards and overcurrent protective devices. 5. Include evidence of NRTL listing for series rating of installed devices. 6. Detail features, characteristics, ratings, and factory settings of individual overcurrent protective devices and auxiliary components. 7. Include wiring diagrams for power, signal, and control wiring. 8. Include time-current coordination curves for each type and rating of overcurrent protective device included in panelboards. Submit on translucent log-log graft paper; include selectable ranges for each type of overcurrent protective device. 1.05 INFORMATIONAL SUBMITTALS A. Field Quality-Control Reports: 1. Test procedures used. 2. Test results that comply with requirements. 3. Results of failed tests and corrective action taken to achieve test results that comply with requirements. B. Panelboard Schedules: For installation in panelboards. 1.06 CLOSEOUT SUBMITTALS A. Operation and Maintenance Data: For panelboards and components to include in emergency, operation, and maintenance manuals. In addition to items specified in Section 017823 "Operation and Maintenance Data," include the following: Mountain Haus Boiler Replacement 03/18/2014 100% CD's/Permit PANELBOARDS 26 2416 - 2 1. Manufacturer's written instructions for testing and adjusting overcurrent protective devices. 2. Time-current curves, including selectable ranges for each type of overcurrent protective device that allows adjustments. 1.07 QUALITY ASSURANCE A. Source Limitations: Obtain panelboards, overcurrent protective devices, components, and accessories from single source from single manufacturer. B. Product Selection for Restricted Space: Drawings indicate maximum dimensions for panelboards including clearances between panelboards and adjacent surfaces and other items. Comply with indicated maximum dimensions. C. Electrical Components, Devices, and Accessories: Listed and labeled as defined in NFPA 70, by a qualified testing agency, and marked for intended location and application. D. Comply with NEMA PB 1. E. Comply with NFPA 70. 1.08 DELIVERY, STORAGE, AND HANDLING A. Remove loose packing and flammable materials from inside panelboards; install temporary electric heating (250 W per panelboard) to prevent condensation. B. Handle and prepare panelboards for installation according to . 1.09 PROJECT CONDITIONS A. Environmental Limitations: 1. Do not deliver or install panelboards until spaces are enclosed and weathertight, wet work in spaces is complete and dry, work above panelboards is complete, and temporary HVAC system is operating and maintaining ambient temperature and humidity conditions at occupancy levels during the remainder of the construction period. B. Service Conditions: NEMA PB 1, usual service conditions, as follows: 1. Ambient temperatures within limits specified. 2. Altitude not exceeding 6600 feet. C. Interruption of Existing Electric Service: Do not interrupt electric service to facilities occupied by Owner or others unless permitted under the following conditions and then only after arranging to provide temporary electric service according to requirements indicated: 1. Notify Architect no fewer than two days in advance of proposed interruption of electric service. 2. Do not proceed with interruption of electric service without Architect's written permission. 3. Comply with NFPA 70E. 1.10 COORDINATION A. Coordinate layout and installation of panelboards and components with other construction that penetrates walls or is supported by them, including electrical and other types of equipment, raceways, piping, encumbrances to workspace clearance requirements, and adjacent surfaces. Maintain required workspace clearances and required clearances for equipment access doors and panels. B. Coordinate sizes and locations of concrete bases with actual equipment provided. Cast anchor-bolt inserts into bases. Concrete, reinforcement, and formwork requirements are specified with concrete. Mountain Haus Boiler Replacement 03/18/2014 100% CD's/Permit PANELBOARDS 26 2416 - 3 PART 2 PRODUCTS 2.01 GENERAL REQUIREMENTS FOR PANELBOARDS A. Enclosures: Flush- and surface-mounted cabinets. 1. Rated for environmental conditions at installed location. a. Indoor Dry and Clean Locations: NEMA 250, Type 1. b. Outdoor Locations: NEMA 250, Type 3R. c. Other Wet or Damp Indoor Locations: NEMA 250, Type 4. 2. Front: Secured to box with concealed trim clamps. For surface-mounted fronts, match box dimensions; for flush-mounted fronts, overlap box. 3. Hinged Front Cover: Entire front trim hinged to box and with standard door within hinged trim cover. 4. Skirt for Surface-Mounted Panelboards: Same gage and finish as panelboard front with flanges for attachment to panelboard, wall, and ceiling or floor. 5. Gutter Extension and Barrier: Same gage and finish as panelboard enclosure; integral with enclosure body. Arrange to isolate individual panel sections. 6. Finishes: a. Panels and Trim: Steel, factory finished immediately after cleaning and pretreating with manufacturer's standard two-coat, baked-on finish consisting of prime coat and thermosetting topcoat. b. Back Boxes: Galvanized steel. c. Fungus Proofing: Permanent fungicidal treatment for overcurrent protective devices and other components. 7. Directory Card: Inside panelboard door, mounted in transparent card holder. B. Incoming Mains Location: Top and bottom. C. Phase, Neutral, and Ground Buses: 1. Material: Tin-plated aluminum. 2. Equipment Ground Bus: Adequate for feeder and branch-circuit equipment grounding conductors; bonded to box. 3. Isolated Ground Bus: Adequate for branch-circuit isolated ground conductors; insulated from box. 4. Extra-Capacity Neutral Bus: Neutral bus rated 200 percent of phase bus and UL listed as suitable for nonlinear loads. 5. Split Bus: Vertical buses divided into individual vertical sections. D. Conductor Connectors: Suitable for use with conductor material and sizes. 1. Material: Tin-plated aluminum. 2. Main and Neutral Lugs: Mechanical type. 3. Ground Lugs and Bus-Configured Terminators: Mechanical type. 4. Feed-Through Lugs: Mechanical type, suitable for use with conductor material. Locate at opposite end of bus from incoming lugs or main device. 5. Subfeed (Double) Lugs: Mechanical type suitable for use with conductor material. Locate at same end of bus as incoming lugs or main device. 6. Gutter-Tap Lugs: Mechanical type suitable for use with conductor material. Locate at same end of bus as incoming lugs or main device. E. Service Equipment Label: NRTL labeled for use as service equipment for panelboards or load centers with one or more main service disconnecting and overcurrent protective devices. F. Future Devices: Mounting brackets, bus connections, filler plates, and necessary appurtenances required for future installation of devices. G. Panelboard Short-Circuit Current Rating: Rated for series-connected system with integral or remote upstream overcurrent protective devices and labeled by an NRTL. Include size and type of allowable upstream and branch devices, listed and labeled for series-connected short-circuit rating by an NRTL. Mountain Haus Boiler Replacement 03/18/2014 100% CD's/Permit PANELBOARDS 26 2416 - 4 H. Panelboard Short-Circuit Current Rating: Fully rated to interrupt symmetrical short-circuit current available at terminals. 2.02 DISTRIBUTION PANELBOARDS A. Basis-of-Design Product: Subject to compliance with requirements, provide Siemens or comparable product by one of the following: 1. Eaton Electrical Inc.; Cutler-Hammer Business Unit. 2. General Electric Company; GE Consumer & Industrial - Electrical Distribution. 3. Siemens Energy & Automation, Inc. 4. Square D; a brand of Schneider Electric. B. Panelboards: NEMA PB 1, power and feeder distribution type. C. Doors: Secured with vault-type latch with tumbler lock; keyed alike. 1. For doors more than 36 inches high, provide two latches, keyed alike. 2.03 LIGHTING AND APPLIANCE BRANCH-CIRCUIT PANELBOARDS A. Basis-of-Design Product: Subject to compliance with requirements, provide Siemens or comparable product by one of the following: 1. Eaton Electrical Inc.; Cutler-Hammer Business Unit. 2. General Electric Company; GE Consumer & Industrial - Electrical Distribution. 3. Siemens Energy & Automation, Inc. 4. Square D; a brand of Schneider Electric. B. Panelboards: NEMA PB 1, lighting and appliance branch-circuit type. C. Doors: Concealed hinges; secured with flush latch with tumbler lock; keyed alike. 2.04 DISCONNECTING AND OVERCURRENT PROTECTIVE DEVICES A. Basis-of-Design Product: Subject to compliance with requirements, provide Siemens or comparable product by one of the following: 1. Eaton Electrical Inc.; Cutler-Hammer Business Unit. 2. General Electric Company; GE Consumer & Industrial - Electrical Distribution. 3. Siemens Energy & Automation, Inc. 4. Square D; a brand of Schneider Electric. B. Molded-Case Circuit Breaker (MCCB): Comply with UL 489, with series-connected rating to meet available fault currents. 1. Thermal-Magnetic Circuit Breakers: Inverse time-current element for low-level overloads, and instantaneous magnetic trip element for short circuits. Adjustable magnetic trip setting for circuit-breaker frame sizes 250 A and larger. 2. GFCI Circuit Breakers: Single- and two-pole configurations with Class A ground-fault protection (6-mA trip). 3. Ground-Fault Equipment Protection (GFEP) Circuit Breakers: Class B ground-fault protection (30-mA trip). 4. Arc-Fault Circuit Interrupter (AFCI) Circuit Breakers: Comply with UL 1699; 120/240-V, single-pole configuration. 5. Molded-Case Circuit-Breaker (MCCB) Features and Accessories: a. Standard frame sizes, trip ratings, and number of poles. b. Lugs: Mechanical style, suitable for number, size, trip ratings, and conductor materials. c. Application Listing: Appropriate for application; Type SWD for switching fluorescent lighting loads; Type HID for feeding fluorescent and high-intensity discharge (HID) lighting circuits. d. Ground-Fault Protection: Integrally mounted relay and trip unit with adjustable pickup and time-delay settings, push-to-test feature, and ground-fault indicator. Mountain Haus Boiler Replacement 03/18/2014 100% CD's/Permit PANELBOARDS 26 2416 - 5 C. Fused Switch: NEMA KS 1, Type HD; clips to accommodate specified fuses; lockable handle. 1. Fuses, and Spare-Fuse Cabinet: Comply with requirements specified in Section 262813 "Fuses." 2. Fused Switch Features and Accessories: Standard ampere ratings and number of poles. PART 3 EXECUTION 3.01 EXAMINATION A. Receive, inspect, handle, and store panelboards according to NEMA PB 1.1. B. Examine panelboards before installation. Reject panelboards that are damaged or rusted or have been subjected to water saturation. C. Examine elements and surfaces to receive panelboards for compliance with installation tolerances and other conditions affecting performance of the Work. D. Proceed with installation only after unsatisfactory conditions have been corrected. 3.02 INSTALLATION A. Install panelboards and accessories according to NEMA PB 1.1. B. Equipment Mounting: Install panelboards on concrete bases, 4-inch nominal thickness. Comply with requirements for concrete base specified in Section 033000 "Cast-in-Place Concrete." 1. Install dowel rods to connect concrete base to concrete floor. Unless otherwise indicated, install dowel rods on 18-inch centers around full perimeter of base. 2. For panelboards, install epoxy-coated anchor bolts that extend through concrete base and anchor into structural concrete floor. 3. Place and secure anchorage devices. Use setting drawings, templates, diagrams, instructions, and directions furnished with items to be embedded. 4. Install anchor bolts to elevations required for proper attachment to panelboards. 5. Attach panelboard to the vertical finished or structural surface behind the panelboard. C. Temporary Lifting Provisions: Remove temporary lifting eyes, channels, and brackets and temporary blocking of moving parts from panelboards. D. Mount top of trim 90 inches above finished floor unless otherwise indicated. E. Mount panelboard cabinet plumb and rigid without distortion of box. Mount recessed panelboards with fronts uniformly flush with wall finish and mating with back box. F. Install overcurrent protective devices and controllers not already factory installed. 1. Set field-adjustable, circuit-breaker trip ranges. G. Install filler plates in unused spaces. H. Stub four 1-inch empty conduits from panelboard into accessible ceiling space or space designated to be ceiling space in the future. Stub four 1-inchempty conduits into raised floor space or below slab not on grade. I. Arrange conductors in gutters into groups and bundle and wrap with wire ties after completing load balancing. J. Comply with NECA 1. 3.03 IDENTIFICATION A. Identify field-installed conductors, interconnecting wiring, and components; provide warning signs complying Mountain Haus Boiler Replacement 03/18/2014 100% CD's/Permit PANELBOARDS 26 2416 - 6 with Section 260553 "Identification for Electrical Systems." B. Create a directory to indicate installed circuit loads; incorporate Owner's final room designations. Obtain approval before installing. Use a computer or typewriter to create directory; handwritten directories are not acceptable. C. Panelboard Nameplates: Label each panelboard with a nameplate complying with requirements for identification specified in Section 260553 "Identification for Electrical Systems." D. Device Nameplates: Label each branch circuit device in distribution panelboards with a nameplate complying with requirements for identification specified in Section 260553 "Identification for Electrical Systems." 3.04 FIELD QUALITY CONTROL A. Manufacturer's Field Service: Engage a factory-authorized service representative to inspect, test, and adjust components, assemblies, and equipment installations, including connections. B. Acceptance Testing Preparation: 1. Test insulation resistance for each panelboard bus, component, connecting supply, feeder, and control circuit. 2. Test continuity of each circuit. C. Tests and Inspections: 1. Perform each visual and mechanical inspection and electrical test stated in NETA Acceptance Testing Specification. Certify compliance with test parameters. 2. Correct malfunctioning units on-site, where possible, and retest to demonstrate compliance; otherwise, replace with new units and retest. D. Panelboards will be considered defective if they do not pass tests and inspections. E. Prepare test and inspection reports, including a certified report that identifies panelboards included and that describes scanning results. Include notation of deficiencies detected, remedial action taken, and observations after remedial action. 3.05 ADJUSTING A. Adjust moving parts and operable component to function smoothly, and lubricate as recommended by manufacturer. 3.06 PROTECTION A. Temporary Heating: Apply temporary heat to maintain temperature according to manufacturer's written instructions. END OF SECTION 262416 Mountain Haus Boiler Replacement 03/18/2014 100% CD's/Permit WIRING DEVICES 26 2726 - 1 SECTION 26 2726 - WIRING DEVICES PART 1 GENERAL 1.01 RELATED DOCUMENTS A. Drawings and general provisions of the Contract, including General and Supplementary Conditions and Division 01 Specification Sections, apply to this Section. 1.02 SUMMARY A. Section Includes: 1. Receptacles, receptacles with integral GFCI, and associated device plates. 2. Snap switches and wall-box dimmers. 1.03 DEFINITIONS A. EMI: Electromagnetic interference. B. GFCI: Ground-fault circuit interrupter. C. Pigtail: Short lead used to connect a device to a branch-circuit conductor. 1.04 SUBMITTALS A. Product Data: For each type of product. B. Shop Drawings: List of legends and description of materials and process used for premarking wall plates. C. Samples: One for each type of device and wall plate specified, in each color specified. 1.05 CLOSEOUT SUBMITTALS A. Operation and Maintenance Data: For wiring devices to include in all manufacturers' packing-label warnings and instruction manuals that include labeling conditions. PART 2 PRODUCTS 2.01 MANUFACTURERS A. Source Limitations: Obtain each type of wiring device and associated wall plate from single source from single manufacturer. 2.02 GENERAL WIRING-DEVICE REQUIREMENTS A. Wiring Devices, Components, and Accessories: Listed and labeled as defined in NFPA 70, by a qualified testing agency, and marked for intended location and application. B. Comply with NFPA 70. C. Devices that are manufactured for use with modular plug-in connectors may be substituted under the following conditions: 1. Connectors shall comply with UL 2459 and shall be made with stranding building wire. Mountain Haus Boiler Replacement 03/18/2014 100% CD's/Permit WIRING DEVICES 26 2726 - 2 2. Devices shall comply with the requirements in this Section. 2.03 STRAIGHT-BLADE RECEPTACLES A. Convenience Receptacles, 125 V, 20 A: Comply with NEMA WD 1, NEMA WD 6 Configuration 5-20R, UL 498, and FS W-C-596. 2.04 GFCI RECEPTACLES A. General Description: 1. Straight blade, feed -through type. 2. Comply with NEMA WD 1, NEMA WD 6, UL 498, UL 943 Class A, and FS W-C-596. 3. Include indicator light that shows when the GFCI has malfunctioned and no longer provides proper GFCI protection. 2.05 TOGGLE SWITCHES A. Comply with NEMA WD 1, UL 20, and FS W-S-896. B. Switches, 120/277 V, 20 A: 2.06 WALL PLATES A. Single and combination types shall match corresponding wiring devices. 1. Plate-Securing Screws: Metal with head color to match plate finish. 2. Material for Unfinished Spaces: Galvanized steel. 3. Material for Damp Locations: Thermoplastic with spring-loaded lift cover, and listed and labeled for use in wet and damp locations. B. Wet-Location, Weatherproof Cover Plates: NEMA 250, complying with Type 3R, weather-resistant, die-cast aluminum with lockable cover. PART 3 EXECUTION 3.01 INSTALLATION A. Comply with NECA 1, including mounting heights listed in that standard, unless otherwise indicated. B. Coordination with Other Trades: 1. Protect installed devices and their boxes. Do not place wall finish materials over device boxes and do not cut holes for boxes with routers that are guided by riding against outside of boxes. 2. Keep outlet boxes free of plaster, drywall joint compound, mortar, cement, concrete, dust, paint, and other material that may contaminate the raceway system, conductors, and cables. 3. Install wiring devices after all wall preparation, including painting, is complete. C. Conductors: 1. Do not strip insulation from conductors until right before they are spliced or terminated on devices. 2. Strip insulation evenly around the conductor using tools designed for the purpose. Avoid scoring or nicking of solid wire or cutting strands from stranded wire. 3. The length of free conductors at outlets for devices shall meet provisions of NFPA 70, Article 300, without pigtails. 4. Existing Conductors: a. Cut back and pigtail, or replace all damaged conductors. b. Straighten conductors that remain and remove corrosion and foreign matter. c. Pigtailing existing conductors is permitted, provided the outlet box is large enough. Mountain Haus Boiler Replacement 03/18/2014 100% CD's/Permit WIRING DEVICES 26 2726 - 3 D. Device Installation: 1. Replace devices that have been in temporary use during construction and that were installed before building finishing operations were complete. 2. Keep each wiring device in its package or otherwise protected until it is time to connect conductors. 3. Do not remove surface protection, such as plastic film and smudge covers, until the last possible moment. 4. Connect devices to branch circuits using pigtails that are not less than 6 inches in length. 5. When there is a choice, use side wiring with binding-head screw terminals. Wrap solid conductor tightly clockwise, two-thirds to three-fourths of the way around terminal screw. 6. Use a torque screwdriver when a torque is recommended or required by manufacturer. 7. When conductors larger than No. 12 AWG are installed on 15- or 20-A circuits, splice No. 12 AWG pigtails for device connections. 8. Tighten unused terminal screws on the device. 9. When mounting into metal boxes, remove the fiber or plastic washers used to hold device-mounting screws in yokes, allowing metal-to-metal contact. E. Device Plates: Do not use oversized or extra-deep plates. Repair wall finishes and remount outlet boxes when standard device plates do not fit flush or do not cover rough wall opening. F. Arrangement of Devices: Unless otherwise indicated, mount flush, with long dimension vertical and with grounding terminal of receptacles on top. Group adjacent switches under single, multigang wall plates. 3.02 GFCI RECEPTACLES A. Install non-feed-through-type GFCI receptacles where protection of downstream receptacles is not required. 3.03 IDENTIFICATION A. Comply with Section 26 0553 "Identification for Electrical Systems." END OF SECTION 26 2726 Mountain Haus Boiler Replacement 03/18/2014 100% CD's/Permit ENCLOSED SWITCHES AND CIRCUIT BREAKERS 26 2816 - 1 SECTION 26 2816 - ENCLOSED SWITCHES AND CIRCUIT BREAKERS PART 1 GENERAL 1.01 SUMMARY A. This Section includes the following individually mounted, enclosed switches and circuit breakers: 1. Fusible switches. 2. Nonfusible switches. 3. Molded-case circuit breakers . 4. Enclosures. 1.02 DEFINITIONS A. GD: General duty. B. GFCI: Ground-fault circuit interrupter. C. HD: Heavy duty. D. RMS: Root mean square. E. SPDT: Single pole, double throw. 1.03 PERFORMANCE REQUIREMENTS A. Seismic Performance: Enclosed switches and circuit breakers shall withstand the effects of earthquake motions determined according to ASCE/SEI 7. 1. The term "withstand" means "the unit will remain in place without separation of any parts from the device when subjected to the seismic forces specified." 1.04 SUBMITTALS A. Product Data: For each type of enclosed switch, circuit breaker, accessory, and component indicated. Include dimensioned elevations, sections, weights, and manufacturers' technical data on features, performance, electrical characteristics, ratings, accessories, and finishes. 1. Enclosure types and details for types other than NEMA 250, Type 1. 2. Current and voltage ratings. 3. Short-circuit current rating. 4. Features, characteristics, ratings, and factory settings of individual overcurrent protective devices, accessories, and auxiliary components. B. Operation and Maintenance Data: For enclosed switches and circuit breakers to include in emergency, operation and maintenance manuals. 1. Manufacturer's written instructions for testing and adjusting enclosed switches and circuit breakers. C. Shop Drawings: For enclosed switches and circuit breakers. Include plans, elevations, sections, details, and attachments to other work. 1. Wiring Diagrams: For power, signal, and control wiring. 1.05 QUALITY ASSURANCE A. Source Limitations: Obtain enclosed switches and circuit breakers, overcurrent protective devices, components, and accessories, within same product category, from single source from single manufacturer. Mountain Haus Boiler Replacement 03/18/2014 100% CD's/Permit ENCLOSED SWITCHES AND CIRCUIT BREAKERS 26 2816 - 2 B. Product Selection for Restricted Space: Drawings indicate maximum dimensions for enclosed switches and circuit breakers, including clearances between enclosures, and adjacent surfaces and other items. Comply with indicated maximum dimensions. C. Electrical Components, Devices, and Accessories: Listed and labeled as defined in NFPA 70, by a qualified testing agency, and marked for intended location and application. D. Comply with NFPA 70. 1.06 PROJECT CONDITIONS A. Environmental Limitations: Rate equipment for continuous operation under the following conditions unless otherwise indicated: 1. Ambient Temperature: Not less than minus 22 deg F and not exceeding 104 deg F. 2. Altitude: Not exceeding 6600 feet. B. Interruption of Existing Electric Service: Do not interrupt electric service to facilities occupied by Owner or others unless permitted under the following conditions and then only after arranging to provide temporary electric service according to requirements indicated: 1. Notify Architect no fewer than seven days in advance of proposed interruption of electric service. 2. Do not proceed with interruption of electric service without Architect's written permission. 3. Comply with NFPA 70E. 1.07 COORDINATION A. Coordinate layout and installation of switches, circuit breakers, and components with equipment served and adjacent surfaces. Maintain required workspace clearances and required clearances for equipment access doors and panels. 1.08 EXTRA MATERIALS PART 2 PRODUCTS 2.01 FUSIBLE SWITCHES A. Type GD, General Duty, Single Throw, 240-V ac, 800 A and Smaller: UL 98 and NEMA KS 1, horsepower rated, with cartridge fuse interiors to accommodate indicated fuses, lockable handle with capability to accept two padlocks, and interlocked with cover in closed position. B. Accessories: 1. Equipment Ground Kit: Internally mounted and labeled for copper and aluminum ground conductors. 2. Neutral Kit: Internally mounted; insulated, capable of being grounded and bonded; labeled for copper and aluminum neutral conductors. 3. Auxiliary Contact Kit: Auxiliary set of contacts arranged to open before switch blades open. 4. Class R Fuse Kit: Provides rejection of other fuse types when Class R fuses are specified. 5. Auxiliary Contact Kit: One NO/NC (Form "C") auxiliary contact(s), arranged to activate before switch blades open. 6. Lugs: Mechanical type, suitabel for number, size and conductor material. 7. Service-Rated Switches: Labeled for use as service equipment. 2.02 MOLDED-CASE CIRCUIT BREAKERS AND SWITCHES A. General Requirements: Comply with UL 489, NEMA AB 1, and NEMA AB 3, with interrupting capacity to comply with available fault currents. B. Thermal-Magnetic Circuit Breakers: Inverse time-current element for low-level overloads and instantaneous Mountain Haus Boiler Replacement 03/18/2014 100% CD's/Permit ENCLOSED SWITCHES AND CIRCUIT BREAKERS 26 2816 - 3 magnetic trip element for short circuits. Adjustable magnetic trip setting for circuit-breaker frame sizes 250 A and larger. C. Ground-Fault, Circuit-Interrupter (GFCI) Circuit Breakers: Single- and two-pole configurations with Class A ground-fault protection (6-mA trip). D. Ground-Fault, Equipment-Protection (GFEP) Circuit Breakers: With Class B ground-fault protection (30-mA trip). E. Features and Accessories: 1. Standard frame sizes, trip ratings, and number of poles. 2. Lugs: Mechanical type, suitable for number, size, trip ratings, and conductor material. 3. Application Listing: Appropriate for application; Type SWD for switching fluorescent lighting loads; Type HID for feeding fluorescent and high-intensity discharge lighting circuits. 4. Ground-Fault Protection: Comply with UL 1053; integrally mounted, self-powered type with mechanical ground-fault indicator; relay with adjustable pickup and time-delay settings, push-to-test feature, internal memory, and shunt trip unit; and three-phase, zero-sequence current transformer/sensor. 5. Shunt Trip: Trip coil energized from separate circuit, with coil-clearing contact. 6. Alarm Switch: One NO contact that operates only when circuit breaker has tripped. 2.03 ENCLOSURES A. Enclosed Switches and Circuit Breakers: NEMA AB 1, NEMA KS 1, NEMA 250, and UL 50, to comply with environmental conditions at installed location. 1. Indoor, Dry and Clean Locations: NEMA 250, Type 1. 2. Outdoor Locations: NEMA 250, Type 3R. 3. Wet or Damp, Indoor Locations: NEMA 250, Type 4. 4. Indoor Locations Subject to Dust, Falling Dirt, and Dripping Noncorrosive Liquids: NEMA 250, Type 12. PART 3 EXECUTION 3.01 EXAMINATION A. Examine elements and surfaces to receive enclosed switches and circuit breakers for compliance with installation tolerances and other conditions affecting performance of the Work. B. Proceed with installation only after unsatisfactory conditions have been corrected. 3.02 INSTALLATION A. Install individual wall-mounted switches and circuit breakers with tops at uniform height unless otherwise indicated. B. Temporary Lifting Provisions: Remove temporary lifting eyes, channels, and brackets and temporary blocking of moving parts from enclosures and components. C. Install fuses in fusible devices. D. Comply with NECA 1. 3.03 IDENTIFICATION A. Comply with requirements in Section 26 0553 "Identification for Electrical Systems." 1. Identify field-installed conductors, interconnecting wiring, and components; provide warning signs. 2. Label each enclosure with engraved metal or laminated-plastic nameplate. Mountain Haus Boiler Replacement 03/18/2014 100% CD's/Permit ENCLOSED SWITCHES AND CIRCUIT BREAKERS 26 2816 - 4 3.04 ADJUSTING A. Adjust moving parts and operable components to function smoothly, and lubricate as recommended by manufacturer. B. Set field-adjustable circuit-breaker trip ranges. 26 0573 END OF SECTION 26 2816